JP2013192909A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of urging a player to continue a game by executing a performance for raising a sense of expectation toward occurrence of a jackpot when the player is trying to complete the game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: noncontact sensors 2531 to 2534 for externally detecting a player's motion; a motion detection means 4590 for externally detecting the player's motion based on detection signals of the noncontact sensors 2531 to 2534, and of outputting a motion detection signal corresponding to the detected result; a game completion determination means 4570 for determining whether a player is trying to complete a game, based on the motion detection signal; and a performance control means 5000 for controlling a performance according to a result determined by the game completion determination means 4570. When it is determined that the player is trying to complete the game, the performance control means 5000 utilizes symbol variation processing time when a lottery normally results in a losing, and executes a false performance having seemingly the same content as that of a sudden probability variable performance.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

  Some conventional gaming machines are provided with a non-contact sensor facing a player so that the movement of the player can be detected based on a signal from the non-contact sensor (Patent Document 1, Patent Document 2, Patent Document 3). This type of gaming machine realizes functions such as sending a message to the player based on the player's movement, finding an illegal act, and performing a player participation type effect.

JP 2008-237455 A JP 2009-112862 A JP 2009-207703 A

  Among the conventional gaming machines described above, those that perform a player participation type effect exclusively urge the player to perform a predetermined operation such as moving the hand to the left and right by moving the hand close to the gaming area and responding to it. Then, it is determined whether or not the player has performed a predetermined action, and an effect corresponding to the result is executed.

  However, even if the player performs a predetermined action in accordance with an instruction from the gaming machine, the effect executed by the player does not necessarily lead to an advantageous result for the player such as a big hit. As a result of being repeated from the gaming machine to the player, the interest in this type of player participation type effect is reduced.

  In addition, since the effect in the conventional gaming machine is made without taking into consideration the situation of the player, it can be a result that the player's willingness to continue playing is reduced due to the effect. Even if a large amount of money is invested in the game, there will be no big hits, or the player is tired of playing for a long time. If there is an effect that does not have the expectation of a big hit, the player may stop playing the game.

  The problem to be solved by the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decline in the player's willingness to continue the game by judging the situation of the player and executing an effect according to the judgment result There is to do.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and can be realized as the following configuration example.

[Configuration example 1]
Lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information every time the start condition is satisfied;
Lottery means for performing lottery based on the lottery information;
A symbol variation means for executing a symbol variation process for changing a plurality of symbols each time a lottery is performed by the lottery means and displaying a combination of symbols for which the result of the lottery is stopped;
Gaming state transition means for shifting the gaming state to various gaming states according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means;
A non-contact sensor for externally detecting a player's movement;
Motion detection means for externally detecting a player's motion based on the detection signal of the non-contact sensor and outputting a motion detection signal corresponding to the detection result;
Based on the motion detection signal, a game end determination means for determining whether or not the player's situation is a situation where a game is about to be ended,
Production control means for controlling the production according to the judgment result of the game end judgment means,
The gaming state transition means includes
It is possible to shift the gaming state from the low probability state to the sudden probability change state (high probability state) via the big hit gaming state where almost no ball is obtained,
The production control means includes
When the game state suddenly shifts to a probable change state, the effect control of the impromptu effect (true effect) is the same as the time required for the symbol variation process when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is normally off A stunning directing means that executes in the required time,
When it is determined by the game end determination means that the player's situation is a situation where the game is about to be ended, the time of the symbol variation processing when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is normally off is used. And a pseudo-accuracy production means for executing a pseudo-production (fake production) having the same contents as the sudden production.

  The gaming machine configured as described above can detect the player's movement using a non-contact sensor, and can control the player's movement in an external manner regardless of the presence or absence of an operation signal resulting from the operation of the gaming machine. Based on the motion detection signal corresponding to the detection result, it is determined whether or not the player's situation is a situation where the game is about to be ended. And if it is determined that the player's situation is a situation where the game is about to be ended, whether or not the gaming state suddenly shifts to the probability change state even though the game state does not actually suddenly shift to the probability change state? In order to make it look like this, it is possible to execute a pseudo production having the same content as the sudden production. Both the required time for the stunning effect and the required time for the pseudo effect are the same as the required time for the symbol variation process when the lottery result is normally out of sync. The time required for the symbol variation process when the lottery result is normally out of order is shorter than the time required for the symbol variation process when the lottery result is lost or a big hit due to other variations. By making the sudden performance effect in a short time, it is possible to give the player a feeling (sudden sensation) that “the player suddenly entered the high probability state from the low probability state”. And, it seems that suddenly it became a high probability state even though the gaming state actually remained in a low probability state by making a pseudo effect of apparently the same content as the surprise effect in the same time as the sudden effect production Can be recognized by the player. By effectively using such a pseudo effect, it is possible to expect an effect of encouraging a player who has decreased willingness to continue the game to continue the game.

[Configuration example 2]
In Configuration Example 1,
The game end judging means is
Storing means for storing action determination information in which a player's action associated with a game ending operation is associated with the action detection signal;
A gaming machine that determines, based on the motion detection signal and the motion determination information, whether or not a player's situation is a situation in which a game is about to be ended.

  According to the gaming machine configured as described above, it is possible to store in the storage means what operation the player performs when determining that the player's situation is a situation where the player is about to finish the game. It can be defined by the operation determination information to be kept.

[Configuration example 3]
In Configuration 1 or Configuration 2,
In the operation of the player accompanying the game end operation,
The player's operation (hereinafter referred to as “card return instruction operation”) in response to the operation of the return button operated when the card (prepaid card, IC card) inserted into the CR unit device installed adjacent to the gaming machine is discharged. ),
An action of a player when removing a card from the CR unit device (hereinafter referred to as “card removing action”);
A player's action (hereinafter referred to as “ball-drawing action”) associated with the operation of a ball-drawing operation unit (button, lever) operated when discharging the game ball from the upper plate; and
The player's action (hereinafter referred to as “medal payout operation”) associated with the operation of the medal payout operation unit (button, lever) operated when paying back the inserted medal that is not used in the game. A game machine including any one of the operations.

  The gaming machine configured as described above externally detects one of a card return instruction operation, a ball removal operation, and a medal payout operation, and based on an operation detection signal corresponding to the detection result, It is determined whether or not the player's situation is a situation where the player is about to finish the game. And the production according to the judgment result is executed.

[Configuration Example 4]
In Configuration Example 2 or Configuration Example 3,
In the operation of the player accompanying the game end operation,
The card return instruction operation and the card removal operation are included,
The game end judging means is
A gaming machine that determines that a player's situation is an attempt to end a game when the card removal operation is detected following the card return instruction operation.

  The gaming machine configured as described above externally detects a card return instruction operation and a card removal operation, and when a card removal operation is detected following the card return instruction operation, It is determined that the situation is about to end. And the production according to the judgment result is executed.

[Configuration Example 5]
In any of Configuration Example 1 to Configuration Example 4,
The above-mentioned operation is based on the command from the control unit (main control board) that controls the generation of various commands of the gaming machine, except for the signal accompanying the operation (excluding the signal accompanying the external detection of the operation). A gaming machine that is an operation that is not input to a control unit (peripheral control board) that performs control based on the control.

[Configuration Example 6]
In any of Configuration Example 1 to Configuration Example 5,
The pseudo-accuracy production means is
When the game end determination means determines that the player's situation is a situation where the game is about to be ended and the game state is a normal state (low probability non-short state state), the effect control of the pseudo effect is performed. , Gaming machines.

[Configuration Example 7]
In any of Configuration Example 1 to Configuration Example 6,
Having a holding means for holding a lot of lottery information that has not yet been drawn by the lottery means;
The pseudo-accuracy production function is
A gaming machine that executes the pseudo effect while the lottery information is held in the holding means.

  According to the gaming machine configured as described above, a game in which the willingness to continue the game has been reduced by executing a pseudo-production having the same content as the sudden production in the case of symbol variation based on the lottery information that is on hold. The player can be encouraged to continue the game. For example, a player who is trying to decide whether or not to continue the game after seeing the result of the symbol variation based on the pending lottery information because the possession is lost, By showing a pseudo-produce that appears to be the same as the promising effect, it is possible to encourage the continuation of the game with a sense of expectation that a big hit may come if the game is continued a little more.

[Configuration Example 8]
In any of Configuration Example 1 to Configuration Example 6,
Having a holding means for holding a lot of lottery information that has not yet been drawn by the lottery means;
The pseudo-accuracy production function is
A gaming machine that executes the pseudo effect in a symbol variation process based on the last lottery information held in the holding means.

  According to the gaming machine configured as described above, it appears to the player who is about to end the game after seeing the result of the symbol variation based on the last lottery information that is on hold, the same contents as apparently stunning effects. By showing the pseudo-production, it is possible to encourage the continuation of the game with a sense of expectation that if the game is continued a little more, a big hit may come.

[Configuration Example 9]
In Configuration Example 7 or 8,
Lottery result prefetching means for determining the lottery result based on the lottery information held in the holding means;
The pseudo-accuracy production function is
A gaming machine that executes the pseudo effect when the lottery result by the lottery result prefetching means is not normal.

  The gaming machine configured as described above uses only the lottery information with the result of the prefetch determination by the lottery result prefetching means being out of the normal lottery information among the lottery information on hold, using the time of symbol variation processing based on the lottery information. Then, the pseudo production having the same contents as the sudden production is executed. If the result of the lottery based on the lottery information that is put on hold is not normal, for example, if it is a big win, or if it is an offense with a relatively high expectation such as a reach production or a pseudo-continuous production, a pseudo production will be given. It is because it is not necessary to execute.

  Note that the present invention can be realized in various modes, and can also be realized as a mode invention such as a game machine control method and an image display method in a display device of a game machine. Further, the present invention can be realized in the form of a computer program for constructing such an apparatus or method, a recording medium storing the computer program, or the like.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, when the player is about to finish the game, it is possible to perform an effect that increases the expectation for the occurrence of the big hit, so the player's willingness to continue playing is reduced. It can be suppressed and the player can be encouraged to continue the game.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a back perspective view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is a perspective view for demonstrating the attachment or detachment structure of the upper-axis support metal fitting of a main body frame, and the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which shows the attachment state of the lock member provided in the back surface of the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the figure of (A) from the downward direction. It is a reverse view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the relationship between a pivot pin and a locking member. It is a reverse view of the upper metal fitting part for demonstrating the effect | action of a locking member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view seen from the right rear of a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the side speaker and the side speaker cover from the door frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the side speaker and the side speaker cover from the door frame, and was seen from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base board cover and wiring holding member in a door frame base unit from back. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the mode of the wiring which electrically connects a door frame and a main body frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in a door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a back perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper decoration unit and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the dish unit in a door frame. It is a back perspective view of the dish unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the dish unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the dish unit and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit in a door frame. It is a back perspective view of the operation unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the operation unit and was seen from the upper right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the operation unit and was seen from the lower right front. It is sectional drawing of an operation unit. It is sectional drawing shown in the state which pressed the press operation part in the operation unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the handle apparatus in a door frame and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the foul cover unit in a door frame and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the foul cover unit in a door frame, and was seen afterwards. It is a front view shown in the state where a front cover of a foul cover unit was removed. It is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame. It is a back perspective view of the ball feeding unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the ball | bowl feeding unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which removed the rear case of the ball | bowl feeding unit and was seen from the back. It is a front view which shows arrangement | positioning of LED for the light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view which shows the system | strain of the LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view of a main body frame. It is a rear view of a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a main body frame. It is a back perspective view of a body frame. It is a left view of a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame and was seen from the front. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame and was seen after. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a back perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launcher in the main body frame. It is a back perspective view of the hitting ball launcher in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a prize ball unit in a body frame. It is a back perspective view of a prize ball unit in a main part frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen afterwards. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the relationship between the prize ball tank and tank rail unit in a prize ball unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball apparatus in a prize ball unit, and was seen afterwards. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the payout path, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. It is sectional drawing which shows the distribution | circulation passage of the ball | bowl in a prize ball unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball exit opening and closing unit in the main body frame. It is a back perspective view of the ball exit opening and closing unit in the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the ball | bowl exit opening / closing unit in a main body frame, and the foul cover unit in a door frame. It is a front perspective view of the board | substrate unit in a main body frame. It is a back surface perspective view of the board | substrate unit in a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit and was seen from the back. It is a perspective view explaining the effect | action of the standing wall part of the power supply board box in a board | substrate unit. (A) is sectional drawing of the terminal board box in a board | substrate unit, (B) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the terminal board box in a board unit, and was seen from the front. (A) is a front view of a launching power supply board box, (B) is a sectional view of an AA line shown in (A). (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in a main body frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in a main body frame. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of the fastening mechanism in a back cover. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the fastening mechanism in a back cover and was seen from the rear side. (A) is the left view of the locking device in a main body frame, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the locking device in a main body frame from the front. (A) is a rear perspective view of the locking device, and (B) is a rear perspective view showing a sliding door for a glass door and a sliding rod for a main body frame that are slidably provided inside a U-shaped base of the locking device. It is a figure and (C) is a front perspective view of (B). It is the disassembled perspective view which looked after disassembling the locking device. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the sliding rod for glass doors, and the sliding rod for main body frames in a locking device. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the fraud prevention member in a locking device. It is a front view which shows the game board attached to the main body frame in the state which removed the door frame of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board and was seen from the back. (A) is the front view which expands and shows the function display unit in a game board in the state attached to the pachinko machine, (B) is a front view which shows the other form of a function display unit. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of a gaming board using a gaming panel of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view of the game board which looked at FIG. 103 from back. FIG. 110 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming panel in the gaming board in FIG. 103 cut in the vertical direction. It is a fragmentary sectional view which shows the crime prevention structure in the shaft support side of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view seen from the back side in the state which accommodated the game board in the main body frame. It is a front view of a game board. It is a front view of the game board which makes a 2nd attacker unit easy to see. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally behind. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonally behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in a game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in a game board from back. It is a perspective view of an attacker unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from back lower. (A) It is a front view of an attacker unit, (b) is a BB sectional view in (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows the projection area | region by the projector unit of an attacker unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the front left movable production unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the front left movable production unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the front left movable production | presentation unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the front left movable production | generation unit and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of a front left movable production | presentation unit. It is a front view of a center character. It is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the center accessory for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the center accessory for every main structure and was seen afterwards. It is a front view which expands and shows the 2nd attacker unit in a center accessory. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of a 2nd attacker unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the front right movable production | presentation unit in a center accessory, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the front right movable production | presentation unit in a center accessory, and was seen afterwards. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of the front right movable production | presentation unit in a center accessory. It is a front view of the back unit in a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in a game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in a game board from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structural member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structural member and was seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit in the back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit from the back. It is a front view of the back middle movable production | presentation unit in a back unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the back middle movable production unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back middle movable production unit from the back. It is the exploded oblique view which decomposed | disassembled the back middle movable production | generation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the back middle movable production unit disassembled for each main member and viewed later. It is the perspective view which looked at the back inside drive mechanism in the back inside movable production | presentation unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back inside drive mechanism in the back inside movable production unit from the back. It is the exploded oblique view which decomposed | disassembled the back middle drive mechanism for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of the back middle drive mechanism as seen from the rear after disassembling each main member. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of a back middle movable production | presentation unit. It is a front view of the back rear movable movable effect unit in the back unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the movable production | generation unit after back on from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back rear movable movable production unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back rear upper movable production | presentation unit into the arm slide unit and the arm unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back rear movable production | generation effect unit into the arm slide unit and the arm unit, and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the arm slide unit of the back rear movable production | generation effect unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the arm slide unit of the back rear movable production | generation effect unit, and was seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the arm unit of the back rear movable movable production unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the arm unit of a back upper rear movable production | presentation unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the arm unit of the back rear movable movable effect unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the arm unit of the back rear upper movable production | presentation unit, and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper arm unit of the arm unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper arm unit of the arm unit and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the forearm unit of the arm unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the forearm unit of the arm unit and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the motion by the arm slide unit in a back top movable production | presentation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the motion by the arm unit in a back top movable production | presentation unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the back front front movable production | presentation unit in a back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back front front movable production unit from the back. FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the front front movable production unit disassembled and viewed from the front. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the rear front front movable effect unit as seen from the rear. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of a back front front movable production | presentation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the back-up front movable production | presentation unit in a back unit, and a back-up rear movable production | generation unit. 175 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a relationship between the back-up front movable effect unit and the back-up / down movable effect unit subsequent to FIG. 174; FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the back bottom movable movable production unit in a back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back bottom movable movable production unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back lower back movable production | generation unit into the back lower back decoration body unit, the raising / lowering unit, etc., and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back lower back movement effect unit into the back lower back decoration body unit, the raising / lowering unit, etc., and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back lower back decoration body unit of the back lower back movable production | presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back lower back decoration body unit and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of a back lower back decorative body unit. It is a perspective view which shows schematic structure of the raising / lowering unit in a back lower back movable production | presentation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of a back lower back movable production | presentation unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the back lower front movable production | presentation unit in a back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back bottom front movable production unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back lower front movable production | presentation unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back lower front movable production | presentation unit and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of a back lower front movable production | presentation unit. It is a perspective view which shows the back left movable production | presentation unit 3700 in a back unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back left movable production | presentation unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back left movable production | presentation unit and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the motion of one movable unit in a back left movable production | presentation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of a back left movable production | presentation unit. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure in a main control board. (A) is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the main process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment, (b) is the interrupt process periodically performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment It is a flowchart which shows the procedure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol process process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st start port passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting port passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the production prior determination process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a pre-determination table used for the production pre-determination process, and (B) is a table for prefetch type details determined by the pre-determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit determination process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a jackpot determination table used for lottery processing for jackpots, (B) is a reach determination table used for lottery processing for reach, and (C) is a lottery processing for types of jackpots. It is a symbol determination table used for. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the sub main process performed by the periphery control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 16ms regular process performed by the periphery control MPU of the embodiment. It is a time chart which shows an example of a melody reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of a melody reach. It is a time chart which shows the modification of a melody reach. It is a block diagram which illustrates the functional composition of the pachinko machine for realizing the production function according to the situation of a player. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control process which implement | achieves the effect according to a player's condition. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an operation | movement discrimination | determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect determination process. It is explanatory drawing about the detection area | region of a sensor. It is explanatory drawing about the 1st detection area and 2nd detection area of an upper object detection sensor. (A) is a figure which illustrates the 1st operation judging table, (b) is a figure which illustrates the 2nd operation judging table. It is a timing chart which illustrates the stop timing of the symbol in the case of a shift | offset | difference normally and the case of a detachment | attachment with reach. It is a timing chart which illustrates the stop timing of the symbol in a stunning effect. It is explanatory drawing about a high expectation degree effect (pseudo sudden effect effect) forced execution process.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7.
FIG. 1 is a perspective view illustrating a state in which a main body frame is opened with respect to an outer frame of the pachinko machine according to the embodiment and a door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 3 is a right side view of the pachinko machine. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame constituting the pachinko machine, and FIG. 7 is an outer frame, main body frame, game board constituting the pachinko machine. ,
It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the door frame.

1 to 7, a pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, and is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. A game board 4 having a box-shaped main body frame 3, a game area 1100 in which a game ball as a game medium is inserted and fixed to the main body frame 3 from the front side, and a front face of the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 And a door frame 5 pivotally supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to be closed from the side. The door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1 stores a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be viewed from the player side, and a game ball placed below the game window 101 and storing game balls. Plate-shaped upper plate 3
01 and a lower plate 302, and a handle device 500 operated by a player to drive a game ball stored in the upper plate 301 into a game area 1100 of the game board 5.

As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 1 of the present example is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in which the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 extend in the vertical direction when viewed from the front. The horizontal width of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are slightly shorter than the outer frame 2 in the vertical width dimension. A decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2 at a position below the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23 are attached.
Thus, the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed. Also, the outer frame 2, the body frame 3,
And the door frame 5 are arranged so that their upper ends are substantially aligned, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are rotatably supported at the position on the left end front side of the outer frame 2. Thus, the right ends of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are moved to the front side to be in an open state.

The pachinko machine 1 is desired to have a game area 1100 into which a game ball is driven through a substantially circular game window 101 in a front view, and protrudes forward to the lower side of the game window 101. Two upper plates 301 and lower plates 302 are arranged one above the other. In addition, a handle device 500 for the player to operate is disposed at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5, and the player holds the handle device 500 in a state where game balls are stored in the upper plate 301. When the rotation operation is performed, the game ball in the upper plate 301 is changed to the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with the hitting strength according to the rotation angle.
You can play games by being driven in.

Although the details will be described later, the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by a transparent glass unit 590, and the player can visually recognize the inside of the game area 1100. However, the player can recognize the inside of the game area 1100. By inserting a hand or the like, it is impossible to touch game balls, obstacle nails, various winning holes, and bonus items in the game area 1100. In addition, various control boards are provided on the rear side of the main body frame 3 and the cover body 1 is closed so as to cover the back of the game board 4.
250 are provided.

[1-1. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame.
FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Furthermore, FIG.
These are the perspective views for demonstrating the attachment or detachment structure of the upper-axis support metal fitting of a main body frame, and the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame. 14A is an exploded perspective view showing a mounting state of the lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting of the outer frame, and FIG. 14B is a perspective view of the view of FIG. . FIG. 15 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the relationship between the pivot pin and the lock member. In addition, FIG.
6 is a back view of the upper support metal part for explaining the action of the lock member.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes upper and lower upper and lower frame plates 10 and 11 that extend in the horizontal direction, and left and right sides that extend in the vertical (vertical) direction. Frame plate 12, 1
3 and four connecting members 14 for connecting the end portions of the respective frame plates 10, 11, 12, 13 to each other. The connecting members 14 connect the frame plates 10, 11, 12, 13 to each other. In this way, it is assembled into a vertically long rectangular shape (square shape). The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 of the present example are formed of a solid material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness, And an engagement notch 15 that is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. A mounting step 10a that is recessed from the other general surface is formed on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10, and an upper support fitting 20 to be described later is attached to the mounting step 10a. It is like that.

On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal mold (for example, aluminum alloy) having a constant cross-sectional shape, the outer side surface is a substantially flat surface, and the inner side surface protrudes inward at the rear end. The protrusion 16 having a cavity penetrating in the vertical direction (extrusion direction) is provided, and the strength rigidity is enhanced (see FIGS. 9 and 106). In addition, a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and when installing the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall, etc. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily held as a finger hook, and the design of the appearance can be enhanced. For convenience, there is also a drawing in which a plurality of grooves formed on the side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are omitted.

The connecting member 14 in the outer frame 2 of this example is formed by bending and plastically deforming a metal plate having a predetermined thickness by press molding or the like, and is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 in the horizontal direction. The plate-like horizontal piece 17 extending to the side, the plate-like vertical piece 18 extending from the outer end of the horizontal piece 17 to one side in the vertical direction and fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13, and the vertical piece 18 are opposite to each other A plate-like engagement piece 19 that extends in the direction and can be inserted and engaged in the engagement notch 15 of the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11. In this example, the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the right side frame plate 13 are asymmetrical to each other. The vertical piece 18 is divided into front and rear parts. On the other hand, the connecting member 14 for connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 for connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the right side frame plate 13 are formed in symmetrical shapes, respectively. Has been.

In the connecting member 14, the upper surface and the lower surface of the horizontal piece 17 are in contact with the lower surface and the upper surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and the engagement piece 19 is an engagement notch between the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. In a state of being inserted and engaged in the portion 15, a predetermined screw passes through the horizontal piece 17 and the engagement piece 19 and is screwed into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, so that the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame It is fixed to the plate 11. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 has a vertical piece 18 of the side frame 12,
The upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by a predetermined screw being screwed into the vertical piece 18 through the side frame bodies 12 and 13 in a state of being in contact with the upper inner side surface of 13. Be able to. The rear vertical piece 18 of the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is used.
Is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13 while being inserted into the protruding portions 16 of the side frame plates 12 and 13. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the lower frame plate 11 penetrates the side frame bodies 12 and 13 with a predetermined screw in a state in which the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the lower side inner side surfaces of the side frame bodies 12 and 13. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18 so that the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected to each other, and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are connected by the four connecting members 14. The side frame plates 12 and 13 can be assembled into a frame shape.

The outer frame 2 of this example includes an upper support bracket 20 fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10, and the upper support bracket 2.
A lower support bracket 21 disposed so as to face 0 and fixed at a predetermined position inside the lower portion of the left side frame plate 12, and left and right side frame plates 12 disposed to support the lower surface of the lower support bracket 21,
13 and a decorative cover 23 fixed to the front surface of the reinforcing metal fitting 22. The upper support bracket 20 and the lower support bracket 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so that they can be opened and closed.

First, the upper support fitting 20 includes a plate-like fixing piece 20 a fixed to the upper frame plate 10 and a fixing piece 20.
a support protruding piece 20b protruding forward from the front end of the upper frame plate 10 from the front end of a;
A support side hole 20c formed by being cut out so as to bend toward the center of the tip from the right end near the front end at 0b, and the left side frame plate depending on the left end of the fixed piece 20 and the support protruding piece 20b. 12 is a plate-like hanging fixing piece 20d that contacts the outer side surface (see FIG. 14A), and a hanging wall 20 that is continuous with the hanging fixing piece 20d and hangs down along the outer edge of the support protruding piece 20b.
e (see FIG. 14) and a stop drooping portion 20f (see FIG. 15) which is continuous with the drooping wall 20e and is inclined inward at the entrance end of the support hole 20c. A support pin 633 of the upper shaft support 630 in the main body frame 3 described later is provided in the support hole 20c in the upper support metal 20.
(Refer to FIG. 63) is detachably engaged. The upper support bracket 20 is
The upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 can be connected by the fixing piece 20a and the hanging fixing piece 20d.

The strength of the support protrusion 20b is enhanced by a hanging wall 20e depending from the outer edge of the support protrusion 20b. The details of the upper support metal 20 will be described later. The lock member 27 arranged on the back surface of the player can be concealed so that it cannot be seen from the player side, and the appearance can be improved. Also,
The support hole 20c formed in the support protruding piece 20b is on the opposite side where the hanging wall 20e is not formed (
The width of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20c is such that the width of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20c is such that it is inclined from the side of the right side toward the center of the tip. The dimensions are slightly larger than the diameter.

On the other hand, the lower support bracket 21 includes a horizontal fixing piece 21a that is placed and fixed on the reinforcing metal fitting 22, and a vertical fixing piece that rises upward from the left end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a and is fixed to the inner side surface of the left side frame plate 12. 21b, a plate-like support projecting piece 21c projecting forward from the front end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and a pin shape projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the support projecting piece 21c Support projections 21d. A main body frame pivot formed on a main body frame pivot bracket 644 (see FIG. 66, etc.) of the main body frame 3 to be described later is inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support bracket 21. After the support protrusion 21d of the support bracket 21 is inserted into the support hole of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 in the main body frame 3, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 of the main body frame 3 is locked to the support stud hole 20c. Thus, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported so as to be freely opened and closed.

In addition, as shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 of this example has two closing plates 24 and 25 that are disposed at a predetermined distance apart in the vertical direction inside the right side frame plate 13. These closing plates 2
4 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in plan view, and the closing plate 25 disposed on the lower side has a rectangular opening 25a penetrating in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 9). ). This closing plate 24,2
5 is engaged with the hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 93) of the locking device 1000 attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. Yes,
As will be described in detail later, by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 and rotating it to one side, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are disengaged from the closing plates 24 and 25 to disengage the main body frame 3 from the outer frame. 2 can be opened.

Furthermore, the outer frame 2 of this example further includes a guide plate 26 fixed to the upper surface of the right end of the reinforcing metal fitting 22. This guide plate 26 is used to smoothly guide the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and is mounted and fixed in a replaceable manner.

Further, the outer frame 2 of the present example includes a support protruding piece 2 in the upper support fitting 20 as shown in FIG.
A lock member 27 supported on the back surface of 0b is further provided, and is pivotally supported by a rivet 28 so as to be rotatable with respect to the support protruding piece 20b. The lock member 27 is formed of synthetic resin, and a stopper portion 27 that protrudes forward from a position pivotally supported by the rivet 28.
a, an operating portion 27b that protrudes from the position pivotally supported by the rivet 28 to the right and shorter than the stopper portion 27a, and an elasticity that projects from the opposite side of the operating portion 27b from the position pivotally supported by the rivet 28 A piece 27c and an arcuate tip surface 27d formed to bulge forward at the tip of the stopper portion 27a are provided. As shown in the figure, the lock member 27 is formed in a substantially L shape by a stopper portion 27a and an operation portion 27b. Further, the elastic portion 27c of the lock member 27 is formed to have a narrower width than the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b, and is formed to extend forward as the distance from the stopper portion 27a increases.

As shown in FIGS. 14B and 15, the lock member 27 is configured such that the tip contact portion of the elastic piece 27 c is the hanging wall when supported by the support protrusion piece 20 b of the upper support fitting 20 (normal state). 20
The stopper part 27a closes the inclined hole part of the supporting hole 20c, and the tip part of the stopper part 27a is inclined to the inclined hole part of the supporting hole 20c. The head space portion is not closed, and a space in which the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 can be inserted is formed in the head space portion of the support hole 20c. .

In the support mechanism of the pivot pin 633 using the upper support fitting 20 and the lock member 27 in this example, the pivot pin 633 is inserted into the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support collar hole 20c, and the stopper portion 27a.
The front end side of the stopper faces the stop drooping portion 20f at the inlet end (in this state, there is a slight gap between the front end side of the stopper portion 27a and the stop drooping portion 20f so as to be in contact). In a normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 633 located in the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support rod hole 20c formed by bending and the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a are respectively provided. The center of each is shifted in an oblique direction to face each other. In this normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 633 supporting the heavy body frame 3 is in contact with the tip end portion of the support saddle hole 20c. To the end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a
The load on the elastic member 27c of the lock member 27 is not applied. An arcuate tip surface 27d is formed at the tip of the stopper portion 27a.
Therefore, when the operation portion 27b is rotated to rotate the lock member 27, the lock member 27 is smoothly rotated. In the drawing, the tip surface 27
The arc center of d is the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27).

Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the shaft supporting pin 633 is pulled out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20c and abuts against the arcuate tip end surface 27d, the acting force F is Pin 63
3 and the component force F1 acting on the contact portion between the arcuate tip surface 27d (the normal direction of the arc of the tip surface 27d) and the inner surface of the inclined hole portion of the shaft support pin 633 and the support hole 20c. And the component force F2 acting on the abutting portion of the rivet 28, the direction of the component force F1 is the center of the rivet 28 (the lock member 2).
7), the tip of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 is supported by the support protruding piece 2
The moment to rotate in the direction deviating from 0b (clockwise in the figure) does not work, and the pivot pin 63
3 holds the state of being sandwiched between the front end portion of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 and the one side inner surface of the inclined hole portion of the support flange 20c. Therefore, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not always loaded even in a normal shaft support state or in a state where the acting force of the shaft support pin 633 is applied to the lock member 27, and is an elastic formed integrally with synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the piece 27c and to prevent the pivot pin 633 from coming off from the support hole 20c over a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the tip of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 is rotated in a direction away from the support protruding piece 20b (clockwise in the figure), the stopper portion 27
Since one side of the front end of a abuts against the stop drooping portion 20f and does not rotate further away, the lock member 27 is prevented from protruding outside the support protruding piece 20b.

Even if the tip end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is not arcuate, the above-described component force F1 is used.
The center of rotation of the lock member 27 (the axis fixed by the rivet 28) is a position where no rotation moment is generated by the action of or a position where a rotation moment is generated that rotates the lock member 27 toward the outside of the support protrusion 20b. By always positioning the lock member 27,
No load is applied to the elastic piece 27c, and even if the lock member 27 rotates, only one side of the tip of the stopper portion 27a abuts against the stop drooping portion 20f.
The present applicant has confirmed that 7 does not protrude outside the support protruding piece 20b.

The action of the lock member 27 of this example will be specifically described with reference to FIG. As a premise that the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be freely opened and closed, a lower support bracket is mounted on a main body frame pivot support hole (not shown) formed in a main body frame pivot support bracket 644 (see FIG. 63). 21 support protrusions 21d need to be inserted. Under such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16A, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 is pressed against the side surface of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27, thereby pushing As shown in FIG. 16B, the lock member 27 rotates counterclockwise while deforming the elastic piece 27c.
Can be inserted into. Then, when the pivot pin 633 reaches the head space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16C, the pivot pin 633 and the stopper portion 27a.
The lock member 27 is urged by the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c and rotates clockwise, so that the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 returns to the normal state again, and the support hole 20c. At the same time as closing the inlet portion of the stopper portion 27a, the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a
The shaft support pin 633 is prevented from falling out of the support hole 20c.

This state is maintained even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. Next, in order to remove the pivot pin 633 from the support saddle hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16E, the finger is inserted into the back surface of the support protrusion piece 20b, and the operation portion 27b of the lock member 27 is turned counterclockwise. By rotating, the lock member 27 rotates against the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a is retracted from the support rod hole 20c, so that the shaft support pin 633 is supported. It can be taken out from the hole 20c. Thereafter, the main body frame 3 is lifted, and the main body frame 3 is detached from the outer frame 2 by releasing the engagement between the main body frame shaft support hole formed in the main body frame shaft support metal 644 and the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal 21. It can be removed from.

As described above, in the outer frame 2 of this example, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 constituting the outline of the outer frame 2 are made of wood, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal ( For example, aluminum alloy)
Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility lined up in a game hall, it is necessary to perform an operation of fixing it at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical plane of the island. Is performed by nailing nails to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, so that nails can be easily laid and the pachinko machine 1 can be installed on existing island facilities without problems. It is like that. In addition, since the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of lightweight metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extrusion mold material, it becomes possible to form a thin wall while maintaining strength as compared with a conventional wooden outer frame. The left and right widths when viewed from the front of the peripheral wall portion 605 (see FIG. 63, etc.) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the inside of the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be widened, and the game board 4 has a large horizontal dimension. Can be mounted on the main body frame 3, and at the same time, the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be formed large.

Further, the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12, 13 constituting the outline of the outer frame 2 are connected by a connecting member 14, and the connecting member 14 is connected to the side frame plates 12, 13. Since it is fixed in close contact with the inner surface and the connecting member 14 is engaged with the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, the assembly strength of the outer frame 2 can be increased, and it is sturdy. It can be made into a rectangular frame. Further, after the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 14, when the upper support fitting 20 is attached at a predetermined position, as shown in FIG. Since there is no member projecting outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility of a game hall (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, It can be attached in close contact with the adjacent ball lending machine.

[1-2. Overall structure of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 that can be freely opened and closed on the front side of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 25. 17 is a front view of the door frame, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame, and FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front. FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right rear. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the back. Also, FIG.
FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the side speaker and the side speaker cover as viewed from the front after disassembling the door frame, and FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the side speaker and the side speaker cover as viewed from the rear after being disassembled from the door frame. is there.

The door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a gaming frame 101 having a gaming window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner peripheral shape is a slightly vertically long circular shape (elliptical shape) as shown in the figure. The base unit 100, the right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the left side of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 facing the right side decoration unit 200. Left side decoration unit 2 attached to the outer periphery
40, the upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the lower right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240. And a pair of side speaker covers 290 attached to the front surface.

The door frame 5 includes a tray unit 300 attached to the lower part of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and an operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the dish unit 300.
And a handle device 500 that is attached to the lower right corner of the door frame base unit 100 through the tray unit 300 and performs a game ball driving operation, and the rear side of the dish unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 interposed therebetween. A foul cover unit 540 that is disposed on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, a ball feed unit 580 that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 540, and a rear side of the door frame base unit 100. And a glass unit 590 attached so as to close the game window 101.

[1-2A. Door frame base unit]
Next, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 26 to 30. FIG. 26A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and FIG. 26B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 29 is a perspective view of the door frame base substrate cover and the wiring holding member in the door frame base unit as seen from the rear, and FIG. 30 shows the wiring state for electrically connecting the door frame and the main body frame. It is a perspective view which expands and shows.

As shown in the figure, the door frame base unit 100 of the present example is a door having a gaming window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and penetrated in the front-rear direction and whose inner periphery is formed in a substantially elliptical shape having a vertically long shape. A frame base body 110; an upper bracket 120 for fixing the upper decorative unit attached to the upper center of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base body 110; and the door frame base body 11
A pair of side speakers 130 disposed on the left and right sides of the lower end of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of 0,
Speaker bracket 13 for fixing the side speaker 130 to the door frame base body 110
2, and a handle bracket 140 that is attached to the lower right corner of the front view of the door frame base main body 110 and supports the handle device 500.

Note that the door frame base unit 100 has a wiring 13 connected to the side surface of the side speaker 130, the right side decoration unit 200, and the like outside the right side speaker 130 in front view.
6 (see FIG. 24) is further provided with a cover member 134 that covers the front side of the door frame base body 110 (see FIGS. 22 and 24, etc.). The cover member 134 can guide the wiring 136 along the outer periphery of the speaker mounting portion 111 and also prevents the wiring 136 from interfering when the side speaker 130 is attached or removed.
6 can be held.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 is configured so that the metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 and the lower surface of the gaming window 101 are covered with the rear surface of the door frame base body 110. Game window 1 on the rear surface of the security cover 180 to be attached and the door frame base body 110
A glass unit locking member 190 rotatably attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of 01, and a door frame base main body 110 along the lower end of the gaming window 101 which is disposed on the left side (open side) from the center in the left-right direction in the rear view. A launch cover 191 attached to the rear surface of the handle frame, and a handle device relay that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 below the launch cover 191 and relays the connection between the rotational position detection sensor 512 of the handle device 500 and the main control board 4100. The board 192, the handle apparatus relay board cover 193 covering the rear side of the handle apparatus relay board 192, and the opposite side of the launch cover 191, the handle apparatus relay board 192, etc. across the center in the left-right direction (left-right direction in rear view) A door frame base substrate 194 that is arranged on the right side (axial support side) of the center and attached to the rear surface of the door frame base main body, and the door frame base base A door frame base substrate cover 195 covering the rear side of the 194,
And a wiring holding member 197 that is pivotally supported on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195 and holds a part of the wiring cord 196 that connects the door frame 5 side and the main body frame 3 side.

The door frame base unit 100 of this example is a rectangular door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin.
The reinforcement unit 150 in which the metal sheet metal is assembled with rivets or the like is fixed on the rear side, so that the overall rigidity is enhanced and the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, etc. are sufficiently supported. It has the strength that can be done.

The door frame base substrate 194 in the door frame base unit 100 is a side speaker 13.
0 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140 provided in the game board 4 described later, and the sound sent from the peripheral control unit 4140 An amplifier circuit that amplifies the signal and outputs the amplified signal to each speaker 130 is provided. In this example, the decorative units 200, 240, 280 and the dish unit 30 are used.
0 and the decorative boards 430 and 432 provided in the operation unit 400, the dial drive motor 414 and sensors 432a, 432b and 432c provided in the operation unit 400, the handle device relay board 192, the ball rental unit 360 of the dish unit 300, etc. And the payout control board 411
The wiring cord 196 connecting the 0 and the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like is gathered and bundled at the right side (axial support side) position in the rear view of the door frame base substrate 194, and the details will be described later. It is held by the holding member 197 and extends rearward and is connected to the main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 of the main body frame 3 (see FIGS. 1 and 30).

The door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of this example is shown in FIGS.
As shown in the figure, it is formed in the shape of a vertically long frame made of synthetic resin, and is formed in such a form that the gaming window 101 having a vertically long inner shape and a substantially elliptical shape penetrating in the front-rear direction is offset upward as a whole. ing. As shown in the figure, the gaming window 101 is formed in a smooth curved shape in which the left and right side and upper inner peripheral edges are continuous, whereas the lower inner peripheral edge is formed in a straight line extending to the left and right. ing. Further, on the inner peripheral edge of the lower side of the game window 101 in the door frame base body 110, a cutout portion of a rectangular shape 101a into which the first ball outlet 544a of the foul cover unit 540 can be inserted on the shaft support side (left side in front view). Is formed. The door frame base body 110 is provided with a gaming window 10.
The widths of the upper side formed by 1 and the left and right side sides are substantially the same as the widths of the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 151, the shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 described later. The gaming window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body in front view. Accordingly, a wider range of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be viewed from the player side, and a game area 1100 wider than the conventional pachinko machine can be easily formed. It is like that.

In addition to the gaming window 101, the door frame base body 110 is disposed on both the left and right outer sides of the lower side of the gaming window 101, and attaches and fixes the ball feeding unit 580 and the speaker mounting portion 111 for mounting and fixing the side speaker 130. The ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 (see FIG. 28) and the game ball penetrating in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 and stored in the upper plate 301 of the tray unit 300 are transferred to the ball feeding unit 580. A ball feed opening 113 for supply and a handle attachment for attaching the handle bracket 140 inclined obliquely so that the right side (open side) end of the front surface which is arranged in the lower right corner portion and bulges forward in the front view is retracted Part 114, a wiring passage port 115 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the handle attachment part 114 and allows the wiring from the handle device 500 to pass through, Cylinder lock 1010 to be described later is formed in a cylindrical shape extending short toward the front in the upper Le mounting portion 114 is provided with a Joana 116, which can be inserted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 28, the door frame base main body 110 has a ball feed unit mounting recess 112.
A relay board mounting portion 117 for mounting the handle device relay board 192 on the lower side, and a board mounting section for mounting the door frame base board 194 disposed on the lower right side (axial support side) of the door frame base body in the rear view. 118 and the speaker mounting portion 1 on the left side (open side) in the rear view of the lower end of the gaming window 101
The security cover mounting portion 119 for mounting the elastic cover 185 for mounting the security cover 180 and the door frame base body 110 projecting rearward from the arrangement closer to the center than 11, the gaming window 1 on the rear side.
A glass unit support step 110a that is recessed forward substantially along the inner periphery of 01 and can contact the outer peripheral edge of the front surface of the glass unit 590, and protrudes rearward from a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the gaming window 101, and includes a glass unit locking member 190. And four locking member mounting portions 110b for pivotally supporting.

Further, the rear side of the door frame base body 110 is provided with a door frame protruding piece 110c protruding a predetermined amount rearward from the lower side thereof, and the door frame protruding piece 110c is an engagement groove 603 of the main body frame 3 described later. It is designed to be inserted inside. As a result, the door frame 5 can be positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3, and an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is inserted into the pachinko machine 1 from the gap between the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. Even so, the door frame protrusion 110c engaged with the engagement groove 603 can prevent the tool from entering, and the security function of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced. The rear side of the door frame base body 110 is provided with a positioning projection 110d that protrudes rearward from a position slightly lower right than the lock hole 116 in rear view and engages with the fitting groove 612 of the body frame 3. The positioning projection 110d is fitted into the fitting groove 612 so that the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are positioned at correct positions.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 27, the door frame base body 110 has a decorative unit 20 on the front surface thereof.
A plurality of mounting bosses 110e projecting forward for fixing 0, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, etc. are provided, and an upper bracket 120 and a handle bracket 140 are provided.
A large number of mounting holes for mounting etc. are formed at appropriate positions. The door frame base body 11
Reference numeral 0 denotes an attachment portion 110g (see FIG. 24) for attaching the speaker bracket 132 for attaching the side speaker 130, and an attachment hole 1 for attaching the side speaker cover 290.
10h (see FIGS. 18, 24, 25, etc.) are formed at appropriate positions.

In the side speaker cover 290, as shown in FIG. 25, the left and right ones are arranged so as to pass through the glass unit support stepped portions 110a into which the glass units 590 are fitted from the rear side. In a state where the glass unit 590 is removed from the 110 (door frame 5), the glass unit 590 can be detached with a predetermined screw through the mounting hole 110h. Further, the mounting hole 110h for mounting the side speaker cover 290 is formed as shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 8, the rear side is covered by fixing a security cover 180 to the door frame base body 110. Therefore, in order to remove the side speaker cover 290, first, the security cover 180 and the glass unit 590 must be removed from the door frame base body 110. Accordingly, it is possible to take time for removing the side speaker cover 290 to allow a person who performs an illegal act to remove the relatively large glass unit 590. The removal work can be made conspicuous, and the theft of the side speaker 130 and the game area 110
It is possible to increase the deterrence (safety) against fraudulent acts, etc., by cheating fraudulent acts, etc. within 0.

Further, the door frame base main body 110 includes a ball feed unit mounting recess 112 and a board mounting portion 118.
The lower dish ball supply port 3 in the dish unit base 310 of the dish unit 300 to be described later
A rectangular ball passage port 110f penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided at a position corresponding to 10 g and the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540.

Next, the upper bracket 120 in the door frame base unit 100 is the door frame base main body 1.
10 is fixed to the upper center of the front surface, and detailed illustration is omitted, but the upper gap formed between the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240 attached to the door frame base unit 100 is concealed. At the same time, the left and right ends are supported by the side decoration units 200 and 240, respectively. The upper bracket 120 is partially inserted into the upper decorative unit 280 so that the upper decorative unit 280 can be supported from above when the door frame 5 is assembled. It is like that.

The pair of side speakers 130 in the door frame base unit 100 is not shown in detail, but the intersection of the central axes is a predetermined distance from the center of the game area 1100 to the front in front view (for example, 0.2 m to 1). .5 m), the sound is delivered most efficiently to the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, the side speaker 130 mainly outputs middle and high range sounds, and is disposed at a position as far away from the pachinko machine 1 as possible in the left-right direction. By outputting different related sounds from the side speaker 130, it is possible to output a sound with a high stereo feeling.

The outer periphery of these side speakers 130 is sandwiched between a substantially annular speaker bracket 132 disposed on the front side and a speaker mounting portion 111 of the door frame base body 110 disposed on the rear side, so that the door frame It can be attached to the base body 110. The speaker bracket 132 is attached to the attachment portion 110g of the door frame base body 110 from the front side with a predetermined screw.

In addition, the door frame base substrate cover 195 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a thin box shape with the front side open as shown in FIGS. A step portion 195a that is recessed forward is provided at a position slightly below the center.
A wiring holding member 197 is rotatably attached to the step portion 195a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

On the other hand, the wiring holding member 197 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a plate shape extending in the lateral direction as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, and the cross section is formed in an I-shape. It is formed of a relatively hard synthetic resin. Further, the wiring holding member 197
As shown in the drawing, a plurality of holding holes 197a (three in the upper and lower portions in this example) are provided at predetermined intervals along the longitudinal direction at both upper and lower ends. The wiring holding member 197 has an end portion on the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 in the assembled state of the door frame 5 and a step 195a on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195 in the vertical direction. Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 rotates to the door frame base substrate cover 195 side, so that the wiring holding member 197 is rotated. The door frame base substrate cover 195 can be accommodated in the stepped portion 195a.

This wiring holding member 197 has a predetermined bundling in a holding hole 197a which is paired up and down with the wiring cord 196 for electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 along the rear surface side. The wiring cord 196 can be held by inserting the band 198 and tightening the wiring cord 196 together with the wiring holding member 197 by the binding band 198 (see FIGS. 1 and 30).

When the wiring holding member 197 of this example is rotated in the direction in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3,
The free end side of the wiring holding member 197 is pushed forward by a portion extending from the free end side of the wiring cord 196 to the main body frame 3 and rotates in a direction approaching the door frame base substrate cover 195 side. Thereby, as the door frame 5 is closed, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 approaches the door frame base substrate cover 195, and the wiring cord 196 extending from the free end of the wiring holding member 197 to the main body frame 3 side is free. The bend becomes large (sharp) near the edge. And
When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring cord 196 is connected to the wiring holding member 1.
It will be in the state folded in the horizontal direction in 97 at the free end side.

On the other hand, when the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3 is opened, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are relatively distant from each other, so that wiring is performed by the wiring cord 196 connected to the main body frame 3 side. The free end side of the holding member 197 is pulled rearward, and the wiring end holding member 197 moves so that the free end side moves away from the door frame base board cover 195 (direction of the main body frame 3).
Rotates smoothly. Thus, the wiring cord 196 folded on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 is unfolded so as to extend straight, and the door frame 5 can be opened without being obstructed by the wiring cord 196.

As described above, according to this example, the end of the wiring frame holding member 197 on the same side as the side on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported, the door frame base substrate cover 195 is moved so that the free end side moves to the main body frame 3 side. A wiring cord 19 for pivotally supporting the rear surface and electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3.
Since a part of 6 is held so as not to move in the vertical direction, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring cord 196 is laterally moved on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197. Can be folded or unfolded, and prevents the wiring cord 196 from being caught or pinched when the door frame 5 is opened or closed (breaking of the wiring cord 196, disconnection of the connecting connector, etc.). Can be done.

Further, according to this example, since the wiring holding member 197 is formed of a relatively hard and highly rigid synthetic resin, even if a force acts through the wiring cord 196 when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, It is possible to prevent blurring in the vertical direction, and the wiring cord 196 can be reliably folded in the horizontal direction to prevent occurrence of problems.

Further, as described above, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring holding member 197.
As a result, a bridge is formed between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and a part of the wiring 196 is bridged by the wiring holding member 197. 1
96 can be prevented from drooping, and it can be prevented that the wiring 196 is hung by other members due to the drooping and disconnection or the door frame 5 cannot be closed. Main control board 4100 as a main body side electrical device, peripheral control unit 4
140, the payout control board 4110 and the like, and the decorative boards 214, 216 as door-side electric devices.
254, 256, 286, 320, 430, 432, speakers 130, 222, 262,
It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of reducing as much as possible the occurrence of problems in the wiring 196 connecting the ball rental unit 360, the handle device 500, and the like.

Further, a part of the wiring 196 is held by a rotatable wiring holding member 197,
Even if the wiring 196 is forcibly pulled when the door frame 5 is opened, the wiring holding member 197 can be rotated to release the force, so that the wiring 196 can be prevented from being pulled. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems such as disconnection or disconnection of the connection connector due to the 196 being pulled. Further, a part of the wiring 196 is held by the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring 196 is simply bent partially as the wiring holding member 197 is rotated. ) As shown in FIG.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being rubbed and causing problems such as leakage and disconnection.

Further, in the wiring holding member 197, the binding band 198 is inserted into the holding holes 197 a that are arranged at a predetermined interval in the longitudinal direction, and the wiring 196 is held by the binding band 198. It is possible to prevent the held binding band 198 from moving (sliding) in the longitudinal direction of the wiring holding member 197 through the holding hole 197a, and to reliably prevent the wiring 196 from dropping together with the binding band 198 from the wiring holding member 197. can do.

Even if the position where the wiring 196 extends from the main body frame 3 or the door frame 5 is arranged at a position away from the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported, the wiring 196 is connected by the wiring holding member 197 as described above. Since it is possible to satisfactorily prevent the wiring 196 from drooping when the door frame 5 is opened and closed by guiding, the main body frame 3 having enhanced strength and rigidity on the side of the door frame 5 that is pivotally supported. And the door frame 5, and the pachinko machine 1 with high security against fraudulent acts can be obtained.

Further, the wiring holding member 197 has at least the wiring 19 from both ends in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction.
6 is provided with a protrusion protruding toward the side along which the line 6 extends.
7 can surround three sides of the wiring 196, and the wiring 196 can be easily held along the wiring holding member 197. Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with a protrusion, the bending rigidity of the plate-like wiring holding member 197 can be increased, and the wiring holding member 197 is prevented from being bent when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. Thus, the door frame 5 can be opened and closed in a good state.

In addition, the length from the base end to the tip end of the wiring holding member 197 is substantially the same as the distance from the axis of the door frame 5 to the base of the base end, and the main body frame 3 extends in the wiring 196. The predetermined position is a position closer to the axial center side of the door frame 5 than the tip of the wiring holding member 197 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, and the axial center of the door frame 5 and the wiring holding member Since a pantograph-like link is formed by the axis of 197, the tip of the wiring holding member 197, and the position where the wiring 196 extends in the main body frame 3, wiring when opening and closing the door frame 5 Holding member 197 and wiring 19
6 etc. can move smoothly, making opening and closing work easier,
It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the wiring 196 and the like, and to prevent problems such as disconnection. Further, a pantograph-like link is formed, and when the door frame 5 is closed, a portion of the wiring 196 that extends from the front end of the wiring holding member 197 is folded back on the front end side along the wiring holding member 197. Therefore, when the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring 196 can be folded and gathered compactly, and the space related to the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be reduced.

In addition, the door frame base substrate cover 195 of the door frame 5 that pivotally supports the wiring holding member 197 is recessed so as to open toward the main body frame 3 with the door frame 5 being closed with respect to the main body frame 3. A step portion 195a capable of accommodating the wiring holding member 197 is provided, and the door frame 5 is provided with respect to the main body frame 3.
Since the wiring holding member 197 is housed in the step portion 195a provided on the door frame base substrate cover 195, the wiring holding member 197 protrudes from the door frame 5 side to the main body frame 3 side. It can be almost eliminated, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the wiring holding member 1
97 and the wiring 196 can be collected in a compact manner, and the wiring 196 can be prevented from being caught by other members, thereby preventing the occurrence of problems.

Further, the wiring 196 is held along the surface of the wiring holding member 197 facing the main body frame 3 side with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring holding member 197 is moved to the door frame 5 side (the door frame base substrate cover 19
5 side) as close as possible, so that the protrusion of the wiring holding member 197 from the door frame 5 can be reduced, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the wiring is held. The space related to the member 197 and the wiring 196 can be made as small as possible.

In addition, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the side of the door frame 5 that moves (opens and closes), the wiring holding member 197 can be easily rotated by inertial force or impact force that opens and closes the door frame 5,
The above-described effects can be reliably achieved. Moreover, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided in the door frame 5 and it is not necessary to secure a space for providing the wiring holding member 197 in the main body frame 3, a space for relatively holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3. The pachinko machine 1 which can hold the game board 4 having a larger game area 1100 by enlarging the game area 1 and can attract the player's interest strongly by having the large game board 4 is provided. it can.

Further, the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100 includes a cylindrical tube portion 141 extending in the front-rear direction and a shaft of the tube portion 141 from the rear end of the tube portion 141 as shown in FIGS. An annular flange portion 142 extending outward in a right angle direction, and a plurality of (three in this example) ridges protruding into the cylindrical portion 141 and arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141. 143, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 144 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 141 and the front surface of the flange portion 142 with respect to the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141. This handle bracket 140
Is attached to the handle mounting portion 114 with a predetermined screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 142 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting portion 114 in the door frame base body 110, and is not shown in the figure. Is attached to the handle attachment portion 114, and the cylinder portion 141 is
This axis is substantially coincident with the wiring passage opening 115.

The handle bracket 140 has one protrusion 14 on the upper side and two protrusions 14 on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 141.
3, and these protrusions 143 are provided on the handle base 5 in the handle device 500.
02 is arranged and formed at a position corresponding to the three groove portions 502a formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion. The cylindrical portion of the handle device 500 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 141 only when the three protrusions 143 of the handle bracket 140 and the three groove portions 502a of the handle device 500 coincide with each other. Yes. Therefore, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 inserted and supported by the handle bracket 140 is supported in a state in which it cannot rotate relative to the handle bracket 140.

The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attaching portion 114 inclined obliquely so that the shaft of the cylinder portion 141 extends toward the right side (open side) as it goes forward in front view. Similarly, the shaft of the handle device 500 supported by the handle bracket 140 is also inclined obliquely.

Subsequently, the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 attached along the rear side of the upper side of the door frame base main body 110, and a door frame base main body, as mainly shown in FIGS. 110, a pivot-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 attached along the pivot-side side part back surface, an open-side reinforcing sheet metal 153 attached along the open-side side part back surface of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base body 110. And a lower reinforcing metal plate 154 attached along the lower back surface of the gaming window 101, which are fastened to each other with screws, rivets or the like to form a square shape.

As shown in FIG. 27, the reinforcing unit 150 includes an upper shaft support portion 156 having shaft pins 155 provided on the upper surface and the lower end portion of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.
A lower shaft support portion 158 having a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 18) is integrally provided on the lower surface thereof. The upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 formed on the upper and lower sides of the body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is attached to the body frame 3. So that it can be freely opened and closed.

The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 has a predetermined width and has a door frame base body 1.
A lower bent protrusion piece 159 which is formed to have substantially the same length as the lateral width dimension of 10 and is bent forward at the lower long side edge among the both end edges of the long side (see FIG. 27), The upper bent protrusion 160 is bent forward toward the right side (open side) when viewed from the front side of the side edge, and is bent in the vertical direction after being bent backward at the center part of the upper long side edge. And a vertical bent protruding piece 161. The strength of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is increased by the lower bent protrusion piece 159, the upper bent protrusion piece 160, and the like. Further, the vertical bent projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed so as to be engaged and locked with a locking piece 592b formed at the lower end of a unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 described later. When the unit 590 is fixed to the back side of the door frame 5, the vertical bent protruding piece 161 is locked to the locking piece 592 b of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590, so that the lower end of the glass unit 590 is moved in the horizontal direction and It is possible to restrict movement to the rear. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 has a notch 162 substantially corresponding to the notch 101a of the door frame base body 110.

Further, the open-side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 includes open-side outward bent projecting pieces 163 bent toward the rear on both sides of the long side between the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 and the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154. As shown in the figure, the open side inner bent projecting piece 164 is formed so as to extend rearward longer than the open side outer bent projecting piece 163. ing. Also,
On the lower rear side of the opening-side reinforcing sheet metal 153, a door frame hook portion 104 of the locking device 1000, which will be described later, is provided.
1 is provided. Further, the pivot support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 includes:
A U-shaped shaft-supporting side U-shaped projecting piece 166 that extends rearward at the outer end of the long side and opens to the outer side of the shaft-supporting side is provided (see FIG. 106). Further, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 is provided with bent protrusions 167 bent rearward on both sides of the long side.

The shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 is connected to the upper shaft supporting portion 156 with respect to the main body frame 3.
And the lower shaft support portion 158 are mounted and supported only at two points above and below, so that an unauthorized tool such as a screwdriver or a bar is inserted between the door frame 5 on the shaft support side and the main body frame 3. However, there is a risk that the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 will be deformed and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 will become large, and it will be easy to perform fraudulent acts. Since the side U-shaped projecting piece 166 is provided, the strength of the pivot support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further increased, and the pivot support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is difficult to bend. Further, the shaft-supporting side U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the shaft-supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is configured such that a front end piece 952b of a side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 to be described later is inserted into the U-shape (see FIG. 106), the insertion of the tool can be prevented, and only the pivot-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 can be prevented from bending, so that the crime prevention function of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

Next, the security cover 180 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. This crime prevention cover 180 is provided with a crime prevention function that covers the lower back surface of the glass unit 590 and prevents the intrusion of unauthorized tools into the game board 4. Are formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 590 disposed between the reinforcing metal plates 152 and 153, and the upper side thereof is formed in an arc shape substantially along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 1112 of the game board 4 A formed contact recess 181 and a post-crime prevention protrusion 182 protruding rearward along the upper end of the contact recess 181 are provided. In addition, the left and right ends of the crime prevention cover 180 are respectively provided with crime prevention rear end protrusions 183 that protrude rearward along the shape of the ends. In addition, the rear side crime prevention end protrusion 183 on the right side (axial support side) in the rear view is configured to extend rearward longer than the opposite (open side) crime prevention rear end protrusion 183. On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 180, the crime prevention projection piece 184 that protrudes along the lower shape of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590 with the crime prevention cover 180 attached, and the left and right sides outside the projection piece 184 before the crime prevention And a U-shaped mounting elastic piece 185 projecting forward at the lower end.

The security cover 180 has a mounting elastic piece 185 on the right side (open side) attached to the security cover mounting portion 119 of the door frame base unit 100 in front view and a mounting elastic piece 185 on the opposite side (shaft support side). By attaching to the security cover attaching part 364 of the unit 300, it can be detachably attached to the back side of the door frame 5. In a state where the security cover 180 is attached to the door frame 5, detailed illustration is omitted, but the pre-crime projection piece 184 is fitted to the lower outer periphery of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, The rear surface of the lower end portion of the unit frame 592 is in contact with the vertical bent protruding piece 161. Further, the post-crime projecting piece 182 protruding rearward is an inner rail 11 in which a half on the pivotal support side is fixed to the game board 4 when the door frame 5 is closed.
12 is inserted into the lower side surface of the inner rail 1112 in the front component member 1110.
The rail security groove 1118 is inserted into the rail. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool enters the game area 1100 of the game board 4, the intrusion can be prevented by the post-crime projecting piece 182 inserted below the inner rail 1112. .

The crime prevention cover 180 has the rear rail 111 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed by the back surface thereof.
Since the front lower portion of the guide path of the hit ball formed by the inner rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 can be covered, collision of the hit ball flying or reversely feeding the guide path portion with the glass plate 594 is prevented. Can be done.

Thereby, in this example, the crime prevention cover 180 covers the rear lower outer periphery of the glass unit 590 (the gaming window 101) in the door frame 5, so that the gaming window 101 is opened from the front side of the door frame 5.
Even if a highly flexible tool is inserted between the door and the glass unit 590 and a fraudulent act is attempted in the pachinko machine 1 (in the game area 1100), the crime prevention cover 180 prevents the tool from entering. The pachinko machine 1 can be made safer against fraud and the like.

Subsequently, the four glass unit locking members 190 in the door frame base unit 100 are:
A fitting portion 190a that fits rotatably on a locking member mounting portion 110b that protrudes rearward from the door frame base body 110, and a glass unit 590 that extends in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a. And a locking piece 190b for locking the locking projection piece 451f. The glass unit locking member 190 has a retaining screw fixed to the tip of the locking member mounting portion 110b in a state where the locking member mounting portion 110b of the door frame base body 110 penetrates the fitting portion 190a. By doing so, it is pivotally supported with respect to the locking member attaching part 110b.

The locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 has a protrusion protruding rearward on the rear side, although the detailed illustration is omitted, and this protrusion rotates when the glass unit 590 is attached or detached. It is a finger hook when operating. The four glass unit locking members 190
Among them, no protrusion is formed on the locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 attached to the lower right in the rear view, and the rear surface is a flat surface.

Further, the launch cover 191 in the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the rear side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150. Further, the handle device relay board cover 193 and the door frame base board cover 195 are fixed at predetermined positions on the rear side of the door frame base 110, respectively. In addition, when the launch cover 191, the handle device relay board cover 193, and the ball feed unit 580 are attached to the door frame unit base 100, the rear surfaces thereof are substantially the same surface. The front surface of the ball striking device 650 attached to the main body frame 3 can be covered.

[1-2B. Right side decoration unit]
Subsequently, the right side decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 is mainly shown in FIGS.
Will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31A is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 31B is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as seen from the front side. Further, FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as seen from the exploded side.

The right side decoration unit 200 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the right half of the front outer periphery of the gaming window 101 excluding the lower part in front view, as shown in the figure, and the inside is the gaming window 101. The outer side of the door frame base unit 100 is linearly formed along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100. The right side decoration unit 200 includes a side decoration frame 202 that forms a skeleton of the right side decoration unit 200, and a side decoration frame 2.
02, a side upper decorative member 204 disposed along the upper side of 02, and a side upper decorative member 204
The upper side of the side upper decorative lens 206 and the upper side of the side decorative frame 202 and the side upper decorative member 204, and the side upper decorative member 204 is placed on the front side so as to sandwich the side upper decorative lens 206. A side upper cover 208 to be attached, a side lens 210 that supports the lower portion of the side upper cover 208 and is fitted and fixed to the side frame 202 from the rear side, and a side inner lens that is fitted to the back side of the side lens 210 212.

Further, the right side decoration unit 200 is disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 212 from the substantially vertical center to the upper side, and has a plurality of LEDs 214a (full color LEDs), 214 on the surface.
b (white LED) mounted on the right side upper decorative substrate 214, and the lower side inner lens 212 is arranged from the substantially vertical center to the lower side, and a plurality of LEDs 216a (full color LEDs) and 216b (white LEDs) are provided on the surface. ) Mounted, a right side upper decorative board cover 218 that covers the rear side of the right side upper decorative board 214 and is attached to the side inner lens 212 so as to sandwich the right side upper decorative board 214, Right side lower decorative board 2
16 and a side lens 210 and a right side lower decorative substrate cover 220 attached to the side decorative frame 202 so as to sandwich the right side lower decorative substrate 216 therebetween.

Further, the right side decoration unit 200 includes an upper right speaker 222 disposed at the upper left portion in the front view of the side decoration frame 202, and an upper portion that supports the upper right speaker 222 and is fitted to the upper rear portion of the side decoration frame 202. Speaker bracket 224, upper speaker cover 226 sandwiched between upper speaker bracket 224 and side decoration frame 202,
A side sub-lens 228 attached from the inside to a predetermined position on a side surface of the side upper cover 208. On the rear side of the side sub-lens 228, there is a right side upper decorative substrate 2.
14 LEDs 214c are arranged, and are decorated with light emission by the LEDs 214c.

In the right side decoration unit 200, a side decoration frame 202, a side upper decoration member 204, a right side upper decoration board cover 218, and a right side lower decoration board cover 220 are formed of a light-impermeable member. A plating layer of a predetermined color is formed on the surface of the frame 202 and the side upper decorative member 204. Also, the right side decoration unit 20
0 side upper decorative lens 206, side upper cover 208, side lens 210, side inner lens 212, upper speaker cover 226, upper speaker bracket 224,
The side sub lens 228 is formed of a translucent member, and the substantially entire side upper cover 208 is milky white, the side upper decorative lens 206, the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, the upper speaker bracket 224, the upper portion Speaker cover 226,
The side sub lens 228 is substantially transparent.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the side surfaces of the side lens 210 and the upper speaker cover 226 that are formed to be substantially transparent and the surface side of the side inner lens 212 and the upper speaker bracket 224 are formed in a polyhedral shape. The light can be irregularly refracted. Therefore, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b and the like mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the right side upper decorative board 214 and the right side lower decorative board 216 arranged on the rear side of the side lens 210 and the side inner lens 212 It cannot be clearly seen from the person side. The front surfaces of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 are white, and the mounted LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a,
The right side decoration unit 200 can be efficiently decorated with light such as 216b, and the decoration boards 214 and 216 are not conspicuous when the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, and 216b are not lit. Yes. The right side upper decorative board 214 and the right side lower decorative board 216 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, respectively.
Each LED 214a, 214b is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control unit 4140.
, 214c, 216a, and 216b can appropriately emit light to decorate the right side decoration unit 200.

The side decoration frame 202 in the right side decoration unit 200 of the present example is formed in an arc shape substantially along the gaming window 101 as shown in the figure.
An arc-shaped inner frame 202a along the outer periphery of 1 and a linear shape along the outer periphery of the side surface of the door frame 5 (door frame base unit 100) arranged at a position away from the inner frame 202a outward from the lower end to the upper part. And an outer frame 202b formed in an arc shape so that the upper part that continues and curves toward the upper end edge of the inner frame 202a, an upper end frame 202c that connects the upper end edges of the outer frame 202b and the inner frame 202a, A lower end frame 202d for connecting lower end edges of the outer frame 202b and the inner frame 202a, and an inner frame 202a and an outer frame arranged at a plurality of locations (four locations in this example) along the circumferential direction of the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b. 202b, and a partition wall frame 202f having a slit 202e with a predetermined width.

The inner frame 202a of the side decoration frame 202 extends with substantially the same width in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101 at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the outer frame 202b is formed in a straight line at the substantially same position as the rear end of the inner frame 202a, while the rear end of the linear portion extending along the side surface of the door frame 5 is the upper and lower sides. Are formed in an arc shape such that both ends of the projection protrude forward. Further, the curved arc-shaped portion on the upper side of the linearly extending portion of the outer frame 202b is formed in an arc shape curved in the front-rear direction so that the upper end edge side protrudes forward. Further, the partition frame 202f of the side decoration frame 202 includes an inner frame 202a and an outer frame 20.
It is made into the shape curved in the front-back direction so that the site | part between 2b may protrude most forward. The partition frame 202f is disposed on radiation extending radially from the vicinity of the lower center of the gaming window 101 in a state where the door frame 5 is assembled (see FIG. 17 and the like).

As shown in the figure, the side decoration frame 202 is divided into a plurality of portions in the circumferential direction (longitudinal direction) between the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b by a plurality of partition frames 202f, and each of the divided frames is divided. Of the side lens 2 to be described later.
Ten peripheral lens portions 210a are fitted from the rear side. The partition wall frame 20
The radiating lens portion 210b of the side lens 210 is fitted into the 2f slit 202e from the rear side. Further, the slit 202e and the light emitting decoration opening 202g can be partitioned by the partition wall frame 202f, and the respective light emission modes can be made different.

As shown in the drawing, the side upper decoration member 204 of the right side decoration unit 200 extends in the left-right direction at a constant height substantially along the arc-shaped upper portion of the outer frame 202b of the side decoration frame 202, and the rear surface. Are formed in a depressed state, and a plurality of openings 204a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed on the front surface. The side upper decorative member 204 has a Jomon-shaped relief on the upper side along the openings 204a arranged in a line.

On the other hand, the side upper decorative lens 206 has a shape that can be fitted into the recessed rear surface of the side upper decorative member 204 and has an opening 204a from the rear side of the side upper decorative member 204.
There are provided a plurality of light guides 206a that can pass through to the vicinity of the front end thereof. The light guide portion 206a has a polyhedral shape at the tip, and can be inserted and fitted into the opening 204a of the side upper decorative member 204 so that it appears as if a jewel has been fitted into the opening 204a. It can be done. Further, the light from the right side upper decorative substrate 214 disposed on the rear side by the light guide portion 206a of the side upper decorative lens 204 can be emitted forward (player side) from the opening 204a of the side upper decorative member 204. In addition, the tip of the light guide unit 206a can be shined as a gemstone.

The side upper cover 208 of the right side decoration unit 200 has an upper surface and a right side surface (in front view) substantially aligned with the outer periphery of the door frame 5 (door frame unit base 100), and a lower surface (lower end). Has a shape substantially along the side upper decorative member 204. The side upper cover 208 is formed with an attachment step 208a that is open at the bottom and recessed rearward so that the side upper decorative member 204 can be accommodated in the lower front portion.
A mounting boss, a mounting hole, and the like for mounting the side upper decorative member 204 and the like are formed on the rear end surface of a. Also, two cutouts 208b arranged on the upper and lower sides are formed on the right side surface of the side upper cover 208, so that the side sub-lens 228 attached to the inside through the cutouts 208b is desired to the front side. It has become. Notch 208 in side upper cover 208
By fitting the side sub lens 228 into b, only this part can be made to emit light in a different manner.

The side lens 210 of the right side decoration unit 200 has a shape substantially along the side decoration frame 202 and a shape with a recessed rear surface.
The peripheral lens portion 210a inserted later into the light emitting decorative opening 202g and the radiating lens portion 210b inserted later into the slit 202e of the side decorative frame 202 are provided.
As shown in the figure, the side lens 210 does not include the peripheral lens portion 210a corresponding to the light emitting decoration opening 202g that is in contact with the upper end frame 202c of the side decoration frame 202.
The corresponding part is the accommodation step part 210c opened forward and downward. The accommodation step 210c accommodates an upper right speaker 222, an upper speaker bracket 224, and the like which will be described later. The side lens 210 forms the upper surface of the accommodation step portion 210 c and is fixed to the rear side of the attachment step portion 208 a in the side upper cover 208.
0d is provided.

In the side lens 210, the front surfaces of the peripheral lens portion 210a and the radiating lens portion 210b are
The side decorative frame 202 has a curved surface shape that bulges to the front side so as to be substantially along the front end of the partition wall frame 202f. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the back surface (inner surface) side of the peripheral lens portion 210a is formed in a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, and the plate thickness of the peripheral lens portion 210a is not uniform. Thus, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 210a is irregularly refracted. In addition, the inner surface formed in the shape of a polyhedron allows the peripheral lens portion 210a.
Is able to exhibit a sparkling characteristic appearance.

The side inner lens 212 is inserted and fitted into the side lens 210 from the rear side, and corresponds to a portion where the peripheral lens portion 210a and the radiating lens portion 210b are formed in the side lens 210 as shown in the figure. It corresponds to the main body part 212a having a recessed rear surface and the radiation lens part 210b (slit 202e of the side decoration frame 202) that is continuous from the rear end of the main body part 212a and projects forward from the main body part 212a. And a plate-like light guide part 212b arranged at the above position. This side inner lens 2
The twelve main body portions 212 a are formed such that the front surface of the twelve main body portions 212 a is a predetermined distance away from the inner surface of the side lens 210. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, one surface of the main body 212a of the side inner lens 212 is formed into a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, like the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. The main body 21 is formed.
Since the plate thickness of 2a is not uniform, the light transmitted through the main body 212a is irregularly refracted.

By combining the side inner lens 212 with the side lens 210, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 210a and the main body portion 212a can be birefringently refracted, and the shape of the object disposed on the opposite side can be changed. It is almost unrecognizable. Further, the irregular reflection due to the polyhedral shape along with the irregular refraction allows the side lens 210 (circumferential lens portion 210a) to have a brilliant appearance and make the sense of perspective unclear.

Right side upper decorative substrate 214 and right side lower decorative substrate 21 of the right side decorative unit 200
6, a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs are mounted on the surface, and the LEDs 214 a and 216 a arranged at positions corresponding to the light-emitting decorative openings 202 g (the peripheral lens portions 210 a of the side lenses 210) of the side decorative frame 202 are relatively Wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 18 °
0 °), and LEDs 214b and 216b arranged at positions corresponding to the slits 202e of the side decoration frame 202 (the radiating lens portion 210b of the side lens 210).
The one having a relatively narrow irradiation angle (for example, 15 ° to 60 °) is used. Note that the LED 214c of the upper decorative substrate 214 on the right side that decorates the side sub lens 228 with light emission is a red LED in this example.

Like the side speaker 130, the upper right speaker 222 of the right side decoration unit 200 outputs a mid-high range sound, and is attached to a predetermined position and in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 224. Yes. The upper speaker bracket 224 that supports the upper right speaker 222 includes a cylindrical horn portion 224a that protrudes obliquely forward and downward at the center of the left and right of the pachinko machine 1 in a front view. The upper right speaker 222 is fixed to the upper speaker back side of the upper end of the horn portion 224a in the upper speaker bracket 224 so that the upper right speaker 222 cannot be seen from the player side by the horn portion 224a in front view. It has become.

The upper right speaker 222 in this example is emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the player below by the horn part 224a of the upper speaker bracket 224.
It is less likely to cause noise than other pachinko machines. Although not shown in detail, the front speaker bracket 224 also has a plurality of front surfaces facing different directions, like the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 and the main body portion 212a of the side inner lens 212. In this case, the light transmitted through the upper speaker bracket 224 is irregularly refracted due to the uneven thickness.

The upper speaker cover 226 that covers the front side of the upper speaker bracket 224 is fitted from the rear side of the side decorative frame 202 so as to close the light emitting decorative opening 202g that is in contact with the upper end frame 202c of the side decorative frame 202. The surface is formed in a curved surface shape that is continuous with the surface of the side lens 210. Further, a plurality of through holes 226a are formed on the surface of the upper speaker cover 226 so that sound from the upper right speaker 222 can be sufficiently transmitted to the player side.

Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker cover 226 also has an inner surface side of the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 and the main body portion 21 of the side inner lens 212.
Like 2a, it is formed into a polyhedron shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions,
Due to the uneven thickness, the light transmitted through the upper speaker cover 226 is irregularly refracted. Therefore, the upper speaker cover 226 and the upper speaker bracket 224
In this case, the light is irregularly refracted, so that it is difficult to visually recognize the through hole 226a formed in the upper right speaker 222 and the upper speaker cover 226 from the player side, and is similar to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. It can be made to look good.

[1-2C. Left side decoration unit]
Subsequently, the left side decoration unit 240 in the door frame 5 is mainly shown in FIGS.
Will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34A is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 34B is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit as seen from the front side. Further, FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit as seen from the exploded side.

The left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the left half of the front outer periphery of the gaming window 101 excluding the lower part in front view, as shown in the drawing, and the inside is the gaming window 101. The outer side of the door frame base unit 100 is linearly formed along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100, and is formed substantially symmetrically with the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 includes a side decoration frame 242 that forms a skeleton of the left side decoration unit 240, a side upper decoration member 244 disposed along the upper side of the side decoration frame 242, and a side upper decoration member 244. The side upper decorative lens 246 fitted from the rear side, the upper side of the side decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative member 244 are covered, and the side upper decorative member 2 is sandwiched between the side upper decorative lens 246.
A side upper cover 248 attached to the front side 44 and a side lens 25 that supports the lower part of the side upper cover 248 and is fitted and fixed to the side frame 242 from the rear side.
0 and a side inner lens 252 fitted to the back side of the side lens 250.

Further, the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 from the substantially vertical center to the upper side, and has a plurality of LEDs 254a (full color LEDs) and 254 on the surface.
b (white LED) mounted on the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the lower side inner inner lens 252 is arranged from the substantially vertical center to the lower side, and a plurality of LEDs 256a (full color LEDs), 256b (white LEDs) are arranged on the surface. ) Mounted on the left side upper decorative substrate 256, and the left side upper decorative substrate cover 258 that covers the rear side of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and is attached to the side inner lens 252 so as to sandwich the left side upper decorative substrate 254, Left side lower decorative board 2
56, and a left side lower decorative substrate cover 260 attached to the side lens 250 and the side decorative frame 242 so as to cover the rear side of the 56 and sandwich the left side lower decorative substrate 256 therebetween.

Furthermore, the left side decoration unit 240 includes an upper left speaker 262 disposed in the upper right part in the front view of the side decoration frame 242, and an upper part that supports the upper left speaker 262 and is fitted to the upper rear side of the side decoration frame 242. Speaker bracket 264, upper speaker cover 266 sandwiched between upper speaker bracket 264 and side decoration frame 242,
It has.

In the left side decoration unit 240, a side decoration frame 242, a side upper decoration member 244, a left side upper decoration substrate cover 258, and a left side lower decoration substrate cover 260 are formed of an opaque member. A plating layer of a predetermined color is formed on the surfaces of the frame 242 and the side upper decorative member 244. Also, the left side decoration unit 24
0 side upper decorative lens 246, side upper cover 248, side lens 250, side inner lens 252, upper speaker cover 266, and upper speaker bracket 26
4 is formed of a translucent member, and the substantially entire side upper cover 248 is milky white, the side upper decorative lens 246, the side lens 250, the side inner lens 252,
The upper speaker bracket 264 and the upper speaker cover 266 are substantially transparent.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the side surfaces of the side lens 250 and the upper speaker cover 266 that are formed to be substantially transparent and the surface side of the side inner lens 252 and the upper speaker bracket 264 are formed in a polyhedron shape. The light can be irregularly refracted. Therefore, the LED 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, etc. mounted on the surface (front surface) of the left side upper decorative board 254 and the left side lower decorative board 256 arranged on the rear side of the side lens 250 and the side inner lens 252 It cannot be clearly seen from the person side. The front surfaces of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 are white, and the mounted LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a,
The left side decoration unit 240 can be efficiently illuminated with light such as 256b, and the decoration boards 254 and 256 are not noticeable when the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, and 256b are not lit. Yes. The left side upper decorative board 254 and the left side lower decorative board 256 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, respectively.
Each LED 254a, 254b is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control unit 4140.
, 256a, 256b can be appropriately illuminated to allow the left side decoration unit 240 to be illuminated.

The side decoration frame 242 in the left side decoration unit 240 of the present example is formed in an arc shape substantially along the gaming window 101 as shown in the figure.
An arc-shaped inner frame 242a along the outer periphery of 1 and a linear shape along the outer periphery of the side surface of the door frame 5 (door frame base unit 100) arranged at a position away from the inner frame 242a outward from the lower end to the upper part And an outer frame 242b formed in an arc shape so that the upper part that continues and curves toward the upper edge of the inner frame 242a, an upper frame 242c that connects the upper edges of the outer frame 242b and the inner frame 242a, A lower end frame 242d that connects lower end edges of the outer frame 242b and the inner frame 242a, and an inner frame 242a and the outer frame that are arranged at a plurality of locations (four locations in this example) along the circumferential direction of the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b. 242b and a partition wall frame 242f having a slit 242e with a predetermined width.

The inner frame 242a of the side decoration frame 242 extends with substantially the same width in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101 at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the outer frame 242b has a rear end at a linear portion extending along the side surface of the door frame 5 that is formed in a straight line at substantially the same position as the rear end of the inner frame 242a, whereas the front end is vertically Are formed in an arc shape such that both ends of the projection protrude forward. Further, the curved arc-shaped portion on the upper side of the linearly extending portion of the outer frame 242b is formed in an arc shape curved in the front-rear direction so that the upper end edge side protrudes forward. Further, the partition frame 242f of the side decoration frame 242 includes an inner frame 242a and an outer frame 24.
It is made into the shape curved in the front-back direction so that the site | part between 2b may protrude most forward. The partition frame 242f is arranged on the radiation that extends radially from the vicinity of the lower center of the gaming window 101 in a state where the door frame 5 is assembled (see FIG. 17 and the like).

As shown in the figure, the side decoration frame 242 is divided into a plurality of portions in the circumferential direction (longitudinal direction) between the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b by a plurality of partition walls 242f. Of the side lens 2 described later.
50 peripheral lens portions 250a are fitted from the rear side. The partition wall frame 24
The radiation lens portion 250b of the side lens 250 is fitted into the 2f slit 242e from the rear side. Further, the slit 242e and the light emitting decoration opening 242g can be partitioned by the partition wall frame 242f, and the respective light emitting modes can be made different.

As shown in the drawing, the side upper decoration member 244 of the left side decoration unit 240 extends in the left-right direction at a constant height substantially along the arc-shaped upper portion of the outer frame 242b of the side decoration frame 242 and is also rear-face Is formed in a depressed state, and a plurality of openings 244a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed on the front surface. The side upper decorative member 244 has a Jomon-like relief on the upper side along the openings 244a arranged in a row.

On the other hand, the side upper decorative lens 246 has a shape that can be fitted into the recessed rear surface of the side upper decorative member 244, and the opening 244a from the rear side of the side upper decorative member 244.
A plurality of light guides 246a are provided that can pass through to the vicinity of the front end thereof. The light guide 246a has a polyhedral shape at the tip, and by inserting and fitting into the opening 244a of the side upper decorative member 244, it can appear as if gems are also fitted in the opening 244a. It can be done. Further, the light from the left side upper decorative substrate 254 disposed on the rear side by the light guide portion 246a of the side upper decorative lens 244 may be emitted forward (player side) from the opening 244a of the side upper decorative member 244. In addition, the tip of the light guide 246a can be shined as a jewel.

The upper side cover 248 of the left side decoration unit 240 has a top surface and a left side surface (in front view) substantially aligned with the outer periphery of the door frame 5 (door frame unit base 100), and a lower surface (lower end). The shape is substantially in line with the side upper decorative member 244. The side upper cover 248 has a mounting step 248a that is open at the bottom and recessed rearward so that the side upper decorative member 244 can be accommodated in the lower front portion.
A mounting boss, a mounting hole, and the like for mounting the side upper decorative member 244 and the like are formed on the rear end surface of a. Further, the side upper cover 248 includes a covering portion 248b that covers the upper shaft support portion 156 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 from the front side on the outer side surface (the left side surface in a front view).

The side lens 250 of the left side decoration unit 240 has a shape substantially along the side decoration frame 242 and a shape in which the rear surface is recessed.
A peripheral lens portion 250a inserted later into the light emitting decorative opening 242g, and a radiation lens portion 250b inserted later into the slit 242e of the side decorative frame 242.
As shown in the figure, the side lens 250 does not include the peripheral lens portion 250a corresponding to the light emitting decoration opening 242g that contacts the upper end frame 242c of the side decoration frame 242.
The corresponding part is an accommodation step 250c that is open forward and downward. The housing step 250c accommodates an upper left speaker 262, an upper speaker bracket 264, and the like, which will be described later. Further, the side lens 250 forms an upper surface of the accommodation step portion 250 c and is attached to the rear side of the attachment step portion 248 a in the side upper cover 248.
0d is provided.

In the side lens 250, the front surfaces of the peripheral lens portion 250a and the radiating lens portion 250b are
The side decorative frame 242 has a curved surface shape that bulges to the front side so as to be substantially along the front end of the partition wall frame 242f. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the back surface (inner surface) side of the peripheral lens portion 250a is formed in a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, and the plate thickness of the peripheral lens portion 250a is not uniform. As a result, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 250a is irregularly refracted. Further, the inner surface formed in the shape of a polyhedron makes the peripheral lens portion 250a.
Is able to exhibit a sparkling characteristic appearance.

The side inner lens 252 is inserted and fitted into the side lens 250 from the rear side, and corresponds to a portion where the peripheral lens portion 250a and the radiating lens portion 250b are formed in the side lens 250 as shown in the figure. It corresponds to the main body 252a having a recessed rear surface and the radiation lens portion 250b (slit 242e of the side decorative frame 242) that is continuous from the rear end of the main body 252a and projects forward from the main body 252a. A plate-shaped light guide portion 252b disposed at the position. This side inner lens 2
The main body portion 252 a of 52 is formed in a state where the front surface thereof is kept a predetermined distance from the inner surface of the side lens 250. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, one surface of the main body portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 is formed into a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, like the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250. The main body 25 is formed.
The light transmitted through the main body 252a is irregularly refracted by the non-uniform thickness of 2a.

By combining the side inner lens 252 with the side lens 250, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 250a and the main body portion 252a can be doubled and refracted, and the shape of the object disposed on the opposite side can be changed. It is almost unrecognizable. Further, the irregular reflection due to the polyhedral shape along with the irregular refraction allows the side lens 250 (circumferential lens portion 250a) to have a sparkling appearance and make the perspective feel unclear.

Left side upper decorative substrate 254 and left side lower decorative substrate 25 of the left side decorative unit 240
6, a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs are mounted on the surface, and the LEDs 254 a and 256 a arranged at positions corresponding to the light-emitting decorative openings 242 g (the peripheral lens portions 250 a of the side lenses 250) of the side decorative frame 242 are relatively Wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 18 °
0 °), and LEDs 254b and 256b arranged at positions corresponding to the slits 242e of the side decoration frame 242 (the radiation lens portion 250b of the side lens 250).
The one having a relatively narrow irradiation angle (for example, 15 ° to 60 °) is used.

Similar to the side speaker 130, the upper left speaker 262 of the left side decoration unit 240 outputs a mid-high range sound and is attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 264. Yes. The upper speaker bracket 264 that supports the upper left speaker 262 includes a cylindrical horn portion 264a that protrudes obliquely forward and downward at the center of the left and right of the pachinko machine 1 in a front view. The upper left speaker 262 is fixed to the upper speaker back side of the upper end of the horn portion 264a in the upper speaker bracket 264, so that the upper left speaker 262 cannot be seen from the player side by the horn portion 264a in front view. It has become.

The upper left speaker 262 of this example is adapted to be emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the player below by the horn part 264a of the upper speaker bracket 264.
It is less likely to cause noise than other pachinko machines. Although not shown in detail, the front speaker bracket 264 also has a plurality of front surfaces facing different directions, like the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the main body portion 252a of the side inner lens 252. In this case, the light transmitted through the upper speaker bracket 264 is irregularly refracted due to the non-uniform plate thickness.

The upper speaker cover 266 covering the front side of the upper speaker bracket 264 is fitted from the rear side of the side decorative frame 242 so as to close the light emitting decorative opening 242g in contact with the upper end frame 242c of the side decorative frame 242. The surface is formed in a curved surface shape that is continuous with the surface of the side lens 250. Further, a plurality of through holes 266a are formed on the surface of the upper speaker cover 266 so that sound from the upper left speaker 262 can be sufficiently transmitted to the player side.

Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker cover 266 also has an inner surface side of the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the main body portion 25 of the side inner lens 252.
Like 2a, it is formed into a polyhedron shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions,
Due to the uneven thickness, the light transmitted through the upper speaker cover 266 is irregularly refracted. Thus, the upper speaker cover 266 and the upper speaker bracket 264
In FIG. 4, the light is irregularly refracted, so that it is difficult to visually recognize the through hole 266a formed in the upper left speaker 262 and the upper speaker cover 266 from the player side, and is similar to the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250. It can be made to look good.

[1-2D. Upper decoration unit]
Next, the upper decoration unit 280 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 37 is a front perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame.
These are the back perspective views of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit as seen from the rear.

The upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is, as shown in FIG. 17 and the like, at the upper center of the front surface of the door frame 5 and between the upper edge on the center side in the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. It is installed between and decorates between them. As shown in the figure, the upper decorative unit 280 has a substantially inverted isosceles triangular shape as viewed from the front, and penetrates the central opening 281a that penetrates largely to the center and both the left and right sides of the central opening 281a. A front decorative member 281 that has a pair of side openings 281b and into which the tip of the upper bracket 120 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted above the central opening 281a, and a rear side in the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281 A central lens 282 fitted from the rear side, an inner lens 283 arranged at the rear end of the central lens 282, a pair of side lenses 284 fitted from the rear side into the side opening 281b of the front decorative member 281, and an outer shape in front view The shape is similar to that of the front decorative member 281 and the center lens 282, the inner lens 283, and the pair of side lenses 284 are placed in front. A body member 285 attached to the rear side of the front decoration member 281 so as to sandwich between the decorative member 281, a plurality of color LE to the front is disposed on the rear side of the body member 285
An upper decorative board 286 on which D286a and 286b are mounted, and a board cover 287 attached to the rear surface of the main body member 285 so as to cover the upper decorative board 286 from the rear side with the outer shape of the front view being substantially the same as the main body. It has.

The upper decorative unit 280 extends rearward while being bent continuously from the lower end of the front decorative member 281, and the upper front end is supported by the front decorative member 281, and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100 and is downward A lower surface decorative member 288 having a pair of lower openings 288a penetrating toward the lower surface, and a lower lens 289 fitted into the lower opening 288a of the lower surface decorative member 288 from the upper side and fixed to the lower surface decorative member 288 and the substrate cover 287, It is equipped with.
In this example, a plating layer having metallic luster is formed on the surfaces of the front decorative member 281 and the lower decorative member 288. The LED 286a of the upper decorative board 286 is disposed at a position corresponding to the central lens 282, and the LED 286b is a side lens 284.
And the lower lens 289 are arranged at positions corresponding to the central lens 282 and the side lens 2.
84 and the lower lens 289 can be individually decorated with light emission.
In this example, the LED 286a is a full-color LED, and the LED 286
b is a high-intensity white LED.

The front decorative member 281 in the upper decorative unit 280 of this example has a central opening 281.
The inner peripheral shape of a is formed in a pentagonal shape in which the central upper end extends to the left and right in front view, the central lower end is the apex, and each side extends in a loose arc shape. It has three protrusions extending from the substantially center and the lower end vertex into the central opening 281a. Further, the front decorative member 281 has a plurality of streaks extending obliquely outward and upward on the outer side of the upper side of the central opening 281a, and the front decorative member 281 has the central opening 281a formed by the streaks.
A side opening 281b is formed so as to follow the line carving.

The central lens 282 fitted into the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281 is:
The outer shape is substantially the same as that of the central opening 281a. The outer shape of the central opening 281a bulges forward, and the front surface is formed in a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions. The central lens 282 of this example is formed of a transparent (colorless transparent, colored transparent) resin. By fitting the central lens 282 into the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281, the central lens 282 looks like a jewel that is trillant cut, and the front decorative member 281 looks like a jewel base. .

Further, the inner lens 283 disposed on the rear side of the central lens 282 is a central lens 28.
2 is formed of a transparent resin so as to close the rear opening, and a plurality of fine lenses (or prisms) are formed on the surface, and light from the upper decorative substrate 286 is transmitted to the central lens 2.
It can be diffused widely to the 82 side. On the other hand, the side lens 284 fitted into the side opening 281b of the front decoration member 281 is formed of a transparent resin so that the front surface thereof is substantially continuous with the front surface of the front decoration member 281 when fitted into the side opening 281b. Has been. Note that a plurality of fine lenses (or prisms) are formed on the back surface side of the side lens 284, as with the inner lens 282, and the entire side lens 284 is substantially uniform by the light emitted from the upper decorative substrate 286. Can emit light.

Note that the inner lens 283 and the side lens 284 have a feeling of being clouded by a plurality of minute lenses formed on the surface, and the rear side is not clearly seen through the inner lens 283 and the side lens 284. It has become.

The main body member 285 of the upper decoration unit 280 has a central opening 281 of the front decoration member 281.
a central portion 285a that extends in a cylindrical shape in the front-rear direction with an outer shape substantially conforming to the shape of a, and the front end opening is inclined obliquely downward and the closed rear end is inclined obliquely upward, and the central portion 285a
The rear end disposed and closed on both sides of the central portion 285a is substantially the same position as the rear end of the central portion 285a, and the concave side portion 285b whose front end extends shorter than the central portion 285a, and the central portion 285a and the side portion 285b. And a plurality of openings 285c formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs 286a and 286b mounted on the upper decorative substrate 286. This body member 285
When the upper decorative board 286 is arranged on the rear side, the LED 286a of the upper decorative board 286 is inserted and arranged in the opening 285c, so that light from the LED 286a does not leak to the rear side. . Further, the central part 285a and the side part 285b of the main body member 285 are recessed from the front side to the rear side, so that light from the corresponding LEDs 285a and 286b does not affect the side.

The lower decorative member 288 of the upper decorative unit 280 is formed so as to become thinner toward the rear, and the left and right side surface shapes thereof are the upper speaker covers 226 in the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. 266 upper end frame 202c,
The shape of the upper speaker cover 2 is substantially the same as the shape of the end portion closer to 242c.
The ends of the 26 and 266 closer to the upper end frames 202c and 242c are placed and fixed. The lower lens 289 includes a lower surface decoration member 288 and an upper speaker cover 226,266.
It is to be sandwiched between. In addition, light from the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the left side upper decorative substrate 254 is supplied to the lower lens 289 via the upper speaker brackets 224 and 264 of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. It emits light.

[1-2E. Side speaker cover]
Next, the pair of side speaker covers 290 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The side speaker cover 290 is provided with the door frame base unit 10.
The front surface of the side speaker 130 attached to 0 is covered and decorated, and is arranged between the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 and the dish unit 300.

The side speaker cover 290 supports a cover body 291 having a disk shape and a plurality of holes curved so as to cover the front surface of the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and an outer periphery of the cover body 291 from the front side. A main body member 29 having an annular opening that is continuous with the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240.
2 and a lower member 293 that is arranged on the lower side of the main body member 292 and is formed so as to be continuous with the left and right rear ends of the lower plate cover 328 of the plate unit 300. In this example,
Since the cover body 291 is formed of a predetermined punching metal, it is difficult to be deformed even if it is pushed or hit from the front side, and the side speaker 130 can be protected as much as possible. It is like that.

In the side speaker cover 290, a plating layer having metallic luster is formed on the surface of the main body member 292. The lower member 293 is formed of a translucent member having a milky white color similar to that of the lower plate cover 328 in the plate unit 300 described later.

The side speaker cover 290 of this example is attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 independently of the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, and the dish unit 300. Mounting holes 11 formed at predetermined positions 110
Through 0h (see FIG. 18), the door frame base main body 100 is fixed to the door frame base main body 100 by a predetermined screw inserted from the rear side of the door frame base main body 110.

Thereby, after removing the security cover 180 on the door frame 5, the side speaker cover 290 can be removed to the front side by removing the screws attaching the side speaker cover 290 from the rear side of the door frame 5. The side speaker 130 can be removed by removing the speaker bracket 132 from the front side of the door frame 5. Therefore, even if the side speaker 130 needs to be replaced for some reason, the front side of the side speaker 130 can be removed without removing the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the dish unit 300, and the like from the door frame 5. Only the side speaker cover 290 that covers the speaker can be easily removed, and the side speaker 130 can be easily replaced.

Thus, in this example, in order to replace the side speaker 130 attached between the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 and the dish unit 300 on the front surface of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame 5. First, since the main body member 292 disposed on the front side of the speaker in the side speaker cover 290 is detachably attached to the door frame base main body 110 from the rear side, the door that closes the front surface of the main body frame 3 After opening the frame 5 to the front side and removing the body member 292 from the rear side of the door frame 5 to the door frame base body 110, the body member 292 and the cover body 291 are attached to the door frame base body 110 (door frame 5). Move to the front door frame 5
When removed from the side speaker 130, the side speaker 130 faces from the front side of the door frame 5. Since the side speaker 130 is sandwiched by the speaker bracket 132 attached to the door frame base main body 110 from the front side, the speaker for the door frame base main body 110 from the front side of the door frame 5 after the main body member 292 is removed. By removing the bracket 132 and releasing the holding of the side speaker 130, and further moving the side speaker 130 to the front side, the left and right side decoration units 200, 240 and the dish unit 300 are moved to the door frame 5 (the door frame base body 11).
0), the side speaker 130 can be removed from the door frame 5 without being removed.
Pachinko machine 1 capable of easily exchanging side speaker 130 attached to door frame 5
It can be.

Further, even when a player or the like hits the door frame 5 (side speaker cover 290) during the game and the side speaker 130 is damaged, as described above, the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame 5 can be easily removed. Since it can be exchanged, the interruption time of the game due to the exchange of the side speakers 130 can be shortened as much as possible, and the interruption is prolonged, so that the player becomes irritated and less interested and the interest is lowered. Can be suppressed.

Further, the side speaker 130 is sandwiched between the speaker bracket 132 and the door frame base main body 110, and the side speaker 130 can be attached to the door frame 5 ( Since it can be attached to the door frame base body 110), the side speaker 130 does not need to be provided with a mounting piece, a mounting hole or the like, the cost for the side speaker 130 can be reduced, and the cost for the pachinko machine 1 is increased. Can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the cover body 291 that covers the front surface of the side speaker 130 is formed of a metal plate (punching metal) having a plurality of through holes, the cover body 291 is not affected even if a player or the like hits the cover body 291. Deformation and breakage can be reduced as much as possible, the side speakers 130 can be sufficiently protected to prevent the occurrence of defects, and the durability of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced. .

Moreover, since the side speaker cover 290 which covers the side speaker 130 is provided between the left and right side decoration units 200, 240 and the dish unit 300, the side speaker 130 is positioned relatively close to the player. However, as described above, the side speaker 130 may be damaged by being hit by a player or the like.
Can be easily exchanged, and the interruption time of the game can be shortened as much as possible to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating. In addition, since the side speaker 130 is arranged as close as possible to the player, the sound output from the side speaker 130 can be heard by the player more efficiently, and a powerful sound is provided. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from deteriorating by making the sound production enjoyable.

Further, since the side speaker 130 is disposed between the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240 and the dish unit 300, the continuity of decoration by the side decoration units 200 and 240 can be maintained, and the side decoration unit can be maintained. 200, 240 and dish unit 30
The pachinko machine 1 can be connected to 0 without a sense of incongruity, the appearance of the side speaker cover 290 is prevented from being deteriorated, and the player's attention is strongly attracted.
Further, since the surface shape of the main body member 292 in the side speaker cover 290 is formed so as to be continuous with the surface shapes of the side decoration units 200 and 240 and the dish unit 300, the side speaker cover 290 is formed on the side decoration units 200 and 240. And dish unit 300
It is possible to make the player feel uncomfortable even if the side speaker 130 is provided on the front side separately from the side decoration units 200, 240, etc., and the door frame 5 ( The design of the front surface of the pachinko machine 1) can be improved.

Furthermore, when removing the main body member 292 of the side speaker cover 290 from the door frame 5, it is necessary to first remove the security cover 180 and the glass unit 590 attached to the rear side of the door frame 5. It may take a little time to remove the glass, and it is possible to make the removal work troublesome for a person who intends to perform an illegal act, etc., and to make the removal work conspicuous by removing a relatively large glass unit 590. The pachinko machine 1 having high deterrence power (safety) against fraudulent acts etc. can be made by deceiving theft or fraudulent acts.

[1-2F. Dish unit]
Next, the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44. 41 is a front perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame, and FIG. 42 is a rear perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit as seen from the rear.

The tray unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls paid out from a prize ball device 740 to be described later.
The game balls stored in the ball can be supplied to the hit ball launching device 650 described later via the ball feeding unit 580. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the dish unit 300 of the present example includes a substantially plate-shaped dish unit base 310 that is fixed to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and that extends in the left-right direction. A dish-shaped upper dish body 312 which is fixed at substantially the center of the front face, the upper and rear sides are opened, and the left side (shaft support side) of the front view bulges forward, and the upper dish body 3
12 is attached to the upper front edge of the upper plate upper panel 314 and the upper front edge of the upper plate upper panel 314 in the vertical direction. An upper dish front decoration member 316 having a plurality of openings 316a penetrating through the upper dish front decoration member 316 and the upper dish upper panel 314; Left and right upper plate upper lens 31 having a plurality of light guides 318a fitted in
8 and the upper plate upper lens 318 are arranged on the opposite side across the upper plate upper panel 314 and are attached to the lower surface of the upper plate upper panel 314 and have a plurality of color LEDs 320a and 322 on the upper surface.
The upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 on which a is mounted, and the upper plate upper lens 31
8 and the upper dish upper decorative panel 320 and the upper dish right decorative board 320 and the upper dish left decorative board 3.
And an upper plate upper inner lens 319 having a plurality of fine prisms that diffuse light from the upper plate upper lens 318 side.

The dish unit 300 is fixed to the front surface of the dish unit base 310 at the lower side of the upper dish body 312 and opened upward and rearward. A dish-shaped lower dish body 324 formed to become lower toward the front, and fixed to the upper part of the lower dish body 324, and in the front view, the center in the left-right direction bulges forward in the same manner as the lower dish body 324. A plate-shaped bottom plate top plate 326 curved so as to become higher toward the center
A lower plate cover 328 having an opening 328a along the front end of the lower plate top plate 326 and the lower plate main body 324 and covering the outer periphery of the opening 328a, and disposed on the left and right sides of the lower plate cover 328 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. The dish side middle cover 330 having the opened portion 330a, the dish side middle cover lens 332 fitted into the opening 330a of the dish side middle cover 330 from the rear side, and the left and right outer sides of the dish side middle cover 330 are door frames. And a dish-side outer cover 334 extending in the left-right direction to positions corresponding to the left and right ends of the base unit 100. In addition, the dish side middle cover 330 disposed on the right side in front view has a locking device 100 described later at the right end thereof.
A lock hole 330b through which the zero cylinder lock 1010 faces is formed. Further, the handle insertion hole 3 into which the handle device 500 is inserted from the front is inserted into the right dish-side outer cover 334 in front view.
34a is formed.

Further, the dish unit 300 includes an upper dish ball removing mechanism 340 for removing game balls attached to the dish unit base 310 and the upper dish body 312 and stored in the upper dish 301 to the lower dish 302, and a lower dish body 324. A lower tray ball removing mechanism 350 for pulling downward the game balls attached to the lower surface and stored in the lower tray 302, and installed on the upper left side in front view of the tray unit base 310 and installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. A ball rental unit 360 that operates a ball rental machine (also referred to as CR unit 6; see FIG. 171).

The dish unit 300 of this example constitutes an upper dish 301 that can store game balls by a part of the dish unit base 310, the upper dish body 312, the upper dish upper panel 314, and the like. The dish unit 300 includes a part of the dish unit base 310, a lower dish body 324, a lower dish top plate 326,
A lower plate 302 capable of storing game balls is constituted by the lower plate cover 328 and the like.

As shown in FIG. 43, the dish unit base 310 in the dish unit 300 is formed in a substantially plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and a decorative portion 310a having a predetermined shape is formed on the upper end edge extending in the left-right direction. Is provided. A ball rental unit attachment portion 310b for penetrating in the front-rear direction and attaching the ball rental unit 360 is formed at the left end of the decorative portion 310a. The dish unit base 310 is disposed on the lower side (near the upper left corner when viewed from the front) of the ball lending unit mounting part 310b, and has a horizontally long rectangular shape that passes through in the front-rear direction. Mouth 310
an upper dish ball outlet 310d extending in the front-rear direction and extending in the front-rear direction below the right end of the decorative portion 310a on the lower side than c (substantially in the middle of the height direction of the dish unit base 310); Outlet 3
10d and the upper tray ball supply port 310c, a pair of lower tray support portions 310e that protrude forward and have the same upper surface. The upper bowl discharge port 310d is
It is continuously formed up to the middle position in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the lower plate support part 310e arranged immediately below.

Further, the dish unit 300 is disposed between the pair of lower dish support portions 310e, and the lower dish body 324 is disposed.
The lower plate support groove 31 is fitted to the rear end of the lower plate top plate 326 and formed in a horizontally long rectangular ring shape in front view.
0f and a rectangular lower dish ball supply port 310g that is disposed in the lower right part of the center of the part surrounded by the lower dish support groove 310f and penetrates in the front-rear direction. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 44, the dish unit base 310 includes a lower dish ball supply bowl 310h that extends rearward in a cylindrical shape so as to be continuous with the lower dish bowl supply port 310g, and an open side of the lower dish bowl supply bowl 310h A notch 310i formed on a side surface and having a size through which a game ball can pass.

The upper tray ball supply port 310 c of the dish unit base 310 is a foul cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit via the door frame base main body 110 and the cutout portions 101 a and 162 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100. First sphere outlet 5 of unit 540
It communicates with 44a. At the front end of the upper bowl supply port 310c, there is provided a guide recess 310j that extends in the right direction in the front view and is recessed backward. The guide recess 310j is inclined so that the right end side when viewed from the front is slightly lower with respect to the left-right direction, and is inclined so that the front end side is lower with respect to the front-rear direction. As a result, the difference in height between the front end of the guide recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper plate body 312 increases toward the right end of the guide recess 310j. The height difference is slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball.

Therefore, in this example, when the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c is closed by the game balls stored in the upper plate 301, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 via the foul cover unit 540 are: Since it becomes impossible to go straight into the front upper plate 301 from the upper plate ball supply port 310c, the paid-out game ball comes into contact with the game ball whose front side is closed and rolls. The direction is changed, and is guided to roll rightward in the guide recess 310j, and is released from the vicinity of the right end of the guide recess 310j to the upper side of the game ball stored in the upper plate 301. Become. As a result, the game balls can be automatically stored in the upper and lower stages in the upper plate 301, so that when the game ball blocks the front of the upper plate ball supply port 310c, the player does not bring the game ball by hand. However, it is possible to continue to supply (release) the game balls that have been paid out into the upper plate 301, and to prevent the player from feeling troublesome about the storage of the game balls in the upper plate 301. , By dedicating the player to the game ball driving operation and the game using the game ball that has been driven in, it is possible to suppress the interest in the game from being reduced, and to increase the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301 Can be done.

The upper dish ball outlet 310d of the dish unit base 310 includes an opening 344a of the upper dish ball removal base 344 in the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 and a ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. Via the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100. Further, in the lower dish ball supply port 310g, a lower dish ball supply rod 310h extending rearward from the rear side extends rearward through the ball passage opening 110f of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. Above, the foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100
Is connected to the second ball outlet 544b and the notch 310i of the lower tray ball supply basket 310h.
Is connected to the ball removal flow path 344c of the upper plate ball removal base 344 in the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340.

In this example, as shown in the drawing, the front end of the lower dish ball supply port 310g is provided with an enlarged portion 310k that spreads leftward in a front view, and the lower dish ball supply port is provided by this enlarged portion 310k. 31
The front end of 0 g is in a state of spreading in the left-right direction. As a result, the lower tray ball supply port 310 g
It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging at the lower tray ball supply port 310g at an early stage due to the game balls in the lower tray 301 accumulated on the front side of the lower tray 301, and supply more gaming balls into the lower tray 301. Be able to.

The upper plate body 312 of the plate unit 300 is formed so that the left side (the shaft support side) bulges forward from the center in the front view, and the bottom surface is entirely lowered at the left end side (open side) and the rear end side. Yes. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 312 has a rear end on the pivot support side near the bottom of the upper plate ball supply port 310 c in the plate unit base 310, and a rear end on the open side of the upper plate ball discharge port 310 d in the plate unit base 310. The game balls are formed so as to be located in the vicinity of the middle position in the vertical direction, and the game balls supplied from the upper plate ball supply port 310 c to the upper plate body 312 (upper plate 301) are placed in the upper plate ball discharge port 310.
It is guided to d.

The upper plate body 312 is provided with a metal upper plate rail 312a that can come into contact with the game ball from the center in the left-right direction to the open side at the rear end of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the upper plate rail 312a is electrically grounded (grounded) so that static electricity charged on the game ball can be removed.

The upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 extends in a curved shape from the upper end of the upper dish body 312 so that the center in the left-right direction of the door frame 5 protrudes forward, and is outside the open side of the upper dish body 312. A mounting hole 314a is formed which penetrates in the vertical direction to which an upper dish ball removal mechanism 340, which will be described later, is attached. The upper plate upper panel 314 is formed in a step shape that is one step lower than the upper front end of the upper plate main body 312 at the front end, and a decoration attachment portion 314b for attaching the upper plate front decoration member 316, and an upper portion at the center in the left-right direction. And an operation unit mounting portion 314c for mounting an operation unit 400, which will be described later, formed in a step shape lower than the decoration mounting portion 314b at a position in front of the plate body 312.

Although not described in detail, the decoration attachment step 314b of the upper plate upper panel 314 includes LEDs 320a and 3 on the upper plate right decoration substrate 320 and the upper plate left decoration substrate 322 that are attached to the lower surface.
An opening or notch that penetrates in the vertical direction is formed at a position corresponding to 22a, and an opening through which the wiring cord connecting the operation unit 400 and the peripheral control unit 4140 can pass through the operation unit mounting portion 314c. A part or the like is formed.

The upper front decorative member 316 has a shape extending in a left-right direction along the front end of the upper dish upper panel 314, and the light guide part 318a of the upper dish upper lens 318 from the lower side to the plurality of openings 316a. And the decorative attachment portion 3 of the upper plate upper panel 314
By attaching to the upper plate 14b, the upper plate upper lens 318 can be held between the upper plate upper panel 314. Further, an upper dish upper inner lens 319 having a plurality of fine lenses (prisms) on its surface is disposed below the upper dish upper lens 318, and an upper dish right decorative board 320 and an upper dish left decorative board 322 are disposed. Fully diffuse the light from the upper plate upper lens 31
The entire 8 can be illuminated and decorated substantially uniformly. As shown in the figure, the inner peripheral shape of the opening 316a in the upper dish front decorative member 316 is formed in a pear shape, and the light guide 318a of the upper dish upper lens 318 fitted into the opening 316a is the same. The opening 316a of the upper dish front decorative member 316 is formed by fitting the light guide 318a.
In addition, it looks like a pair-shaped cut jewel.

The bottom plate main body 324 of the tray unit 300 has a bottom plate 324a formed so that the rear end is formed in a straight line shape in the left-right direction and the substantially center of the upper surface is the lowest.
The bottom plate ball removal hole 324b formed so as to penetrate the center of 24a in the vertical direction, and the bottom plate 32
4a, and a side plate 324c rising upward from the front end and the side end except the rear end. The side plate 324c of the lower plate main body 324 is formed in a curved shape so that the upper end rising upward from the side end of the bottom plate 324a is the lowest on the front side and becomes higher toward the rear side, and the side of the bottom plate 324a The upper end rising upward from the end is formed in a straight line, and the left and right ends of the lower dish top plate 326 are placed and connected to the linear part of the upper end.

The lower plate body 324 has a plate unit base 3 at the rear ends of the bottom plate 324a and the side plate 324c.
10 is inserted and supported in a lower plate support groove 310f formed on the front surface of the plate. Further, the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324 is closed by an opening / closing shutter 352 of a lower dish ball removal mechanism 350 disposed on the back side of the bottom plate 324a.

The lower plate cover 328 is formed in an inverted triangle shape with the outer shape in front view bulging downward and arcs on each side, and includes an opening 328a penetrating in the front-rear direction at the center. The inner shape of the opening 328 a is a shape that matches the shape formed by the front ends of the lower plate main body 324 and the lower plate top plate 326, and forms the opening of the lower plate 302. The lower plate cover 328 is made of translucent milky white resin, and although not shown, color LEDs are arranged on the back side at predetermined intervals, and the entire lower plate cover 328 emits light. It can be decorated.

The dish side middle cover 330 is disposed on the left and right outer sides of the lower dish cover 328 in a front view, and is predetermined along a lower side of the lower dish cover 328 from a substantially center in the left and right direction to a side surface of the door frame 5 in a front view. The upper rear end extending to the side surface of the door frame 5 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. This dish side inner cover 33
0 has an opening 330a penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the dish side middle cover lens 332 is fitted into the opening 330a from the rear side. Further, the right side (open side) dish side middle cover 330 in front view has a lock device 1000 near its outer end (right end).
A lock hole 330b penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed at a position corresponding to the cylinder lock 1010. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the cylinder lock 1
The 010 lock hole faces.

The dish side middle cover 330 further includes a bottom plate portion 330 c extending rearward from the lower front end thereof, and the rear end of the bottom plate portion 330 c is attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. It is like that. In addition, a part of the lower side of the lower plate body 324 is covered by the bottom plate portion 330 c of the plate side middle cover 330.

The dish-side outer cover 334 is disposed on the left and right outer sides of the dish-side middle cover 330 when viewed from the front. It is formed in a box shape. In this example, on the right (open side) dish side outer cover 334,
A handle insertion hole 334 a penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed at a position corresponding to the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100. The dish side outer cover 334 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 and a part thereof is attached to the dish unit base 310. Further, the lower side excluding the central portion of the lower plate body 324 is covered with the plate side outer cover 334 and the plate side middle cover 330.

The upper dish ball removing mechanism 340 in the dish unit 300 is provided with the mounting hole 3 of the upper dish upper panel 314.
14a, which is attached so as to be movable back and forth in the up and down direction. The operation of the upper dish ball removal button 341 moves up and down more greatly than the up and down movement of the upper dish ball removal button 341. A tray unit comprising: an operating piece 342 supported on the front surface side of the plate, and an abutting piece 343a that slides in the vertical direction by the vertical movement of the operating piece 342 and abuts an operating rod 583c of a ball removing member 583 in a ball feeding unit 580 described later An upper dish ball removal slider 343 disposed on the rear side of the base 310; an upper dish ball removal base 344 which supports the upper dish ball removal slider 343 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction and is attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 310; It has.

Although the detailed illustration of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 is omitted, an operating piece 342 that moves up and down together with the upper dish ball removal button 341 is arranged so that the upper dish ball removal button 341 is positioned at the upper moving end. The coil spring is urged upward. The upper dish ball removal slider 343 is biased upward by a coil spring provided between the upper dish ball removal base 344.

The upper dish ball removal base 344 of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 closes the upper dish ball discharge port 310d of the dish unit base 310 and simultaneously communicates with the upper plate ball discharge port 310d to open forward 344a (see FIG. 43) and an opening 344 on the back side of the top dish ball removal base 344.
a ball guiding channel 344b (see FIG. 42 and FIG. 44) for guiding the game ball passing through the opening 344a in a downward direction and then guiding it backward, and extending downward from the lower side of the ball guiding channel 344b. And a ball passage 344c that extends toward the right (axial support side) end portion of the upper plate ball removal base 344 substantially along the lower side of the upper plate ball removal base 344 and allows the game ball to flow. Yes.

The upper dish ball removal base 344 has an opening 344 a communicating with the upper dish ball discharge port 310 d, and a lower end of a ball guiding channel 344 b communicating with the opening 344 a is a ball of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. Via the feed opening 113, it communicates with the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base body 110, and the upper plate 3
The game balls stored in 01 can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 580.

Further, the upper end adjacent to the ball guiding channel 344b of the upper plate ball removing base 344 communicates with the ball outlet 581b of the ball feeding unit 580 through the ball feeding opening 113 of the door frame base body 110. In addition, the lower end extending to the shaft support side communicates with the notch 310i of the lower dish ball supply rod 310h in the dish unit base 310, and the game balls discharged from the ball outlet 581b of the ball feed unit 580 are It can be guided to the lower plate 302. The rear end lower portion of the bulb passage 344c is closed by an upper dish bulb passage cover 345.

When the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 presses the upper dish ball removal button 341 downward against the biasing force of the coil spring, the upper dish ball removal slider 343 slides downward and the contact piece 343a protruding rearward is also provided. Move down. Then, the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 that contacts the upper surface of the contact piece 343a moves the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removal member 583 in a predetermined direction by moving the contact piece 343a downward. The partition between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b partitioned by the partition portion 583a is released and the entrance 581 is released.
a and the ball outlet 581b communicate with each other. Thereby, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 enter the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 from the upper plate ball discharge port 310d through the opening 344a of the upper plate ball removal base 344 and the ball guide path 344b. And then the ball outlet 581
b is discharged to the ball discharge passage 344c of the upper dish ball removal base 344, and the dish unit base 3
10 can be discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 310g to the lower plate 302 through the lower plate ball supply basket 310h.

Note that the ball removal member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 is in contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 whose operating rod 583c is biased upward by the coil spring. Even if the game ball is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 581a, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that urges the upper plate ball removal slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, and the ball removal member 583 and the like can be absorbed. It is possible to prevent breakage and to prevent the game ball from bouncing off at the partition portion 583a.

The lower dish ball removal mechanism 350 in the dish unit 300 includes a lower dish ball removal base 351 disposed between the bottom plate portions 330 of the dish side middle cover 330 disposed on the lower side of the lower dish body 324 in front view and left and right. A plate-like opening / closing shutter 352 that is pivotally supported on the upper surface of the lower plate ball removal base 351 and can open and close the lower plate ball removal hole 324b of the lower plate body 324;
2 and a lower dish ball removal slider 353 supported on the upper surface of the lower dish ball removal base 351 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and a lower dish ball removal button 354 attached to the front end of the lower dish ball removal slider 353, It is equipped with.

The lower dish ball removal base 351 includes a base ball removal hole 351a penetrating in the vertical direction at a position facing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324. Opening / closing shutter 3
52 is a closing part 352a capable of closing the lower dish ball extraction hole 324b, and a shutter ball extraction hole 3 which is disposed on the front side of the closing part 352a and penetrates in the vertical direction and can substantially coincide with the lower dish ball extraction hole 324b.
52b, and a closing part 3 by a coil spring between the lower dish ball removal base 351
52a is urged to be in a position to close the lower dish ball hole 324b and the base ball hole 351a.

Although not shown in detail, the open / close shutter 352 is a lower dish ball slide slider 353.
The abutment pin abuts against the lower dish ball removal slider 353 so that the lower dish ball removal slider 353 causes the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball removal hole 3 to come into contact with each other.
52b can be rotated so as to move backward, or the lower dish ball removal slider 353 can be slid forward by the biasing force of the coil spring.

Further, as shown in the drawing, the lower dish ball removal button 354 is disposed at a position sandwiched between the left and right dish side middle covers 330 on the lower side in the horizontal direction of the lower dish cover 328 in the dish unit 300. The surface shape is such that the surface shape of the lower plate cover 328 and the plate side middle cover 330 is smoothly continuous.

Further, the lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 includes a shutter ball removing hole 352b of the opening / closing shutter 352.
Hold the lower dish ball removal slider 353 at a predetermined position in order to keep the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324 and the base ball removal hole 351a of the lower dish ball removal base 351 substantially in a rotational position. A holding mechanism 355 is further provided.

In the lower dish ball removing mechanism 350, the surface shape of the lower dish ball removing button 354 has a lower dish cover 328.
In such a state that the lower plate ball removal button 354 is moved to the front end, the lower plate ball removal hole 324b of the lower plate body 324 is closed by the closing portion 352a of the opening / closing shutter 352. It has become a state. In this state, the lower plate body 324 (lower plate 302
) Game balls can be stored inside. Closed bottom dish ball removal button 35
4 is pushed rearward, the lower dish ball removal button 354 and the lower dish ball removal slider 353 slide rearward, and the opening / closing shutter 352 is biased by the coil spring by the rear slide of the lower dish ball removal slider 353. Therefore, the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball extraction hole 352b are rotated so as to move backward.

Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates rearward, the shutter ball hole 352b overlaps with the lower plate ball hole 324b and the base ball hole 351a, and eventually the shutter ball hole 352b and the lower plate ball hole are formed. 324b matches, and the game balls stored in the lower dish 302 can be discharged to the lower side of the dish unit 300 through the lower dish ball removal hole 324b. When the lower dish ball removal slider 353 moves rearward to a position where the shutter ball removal hole 352b and the lower dish ball removal hole 324b substantially coincide with each other, the lower dish ball removal slider 353 is held by the holding mechanism 355. When the slide of the lower dish ball removal slider 353 is locked (held), the lower dish ball removal button 354 is left in the opened state, and the shutter ball removal hole 352b is provided in the lower dish ball. The game balls stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged downward even if the lower plate ball removal button 354 is not kept depressed, while being held in a state where it matches the hole 3324b.

On the other hand, when closing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b, the lower dish ball removal button 35 in the opened state retracted.
4 is further pushed rearward, the holding mechanism 355 releases the holding of the lower dish ball slide 353 so that the lower dish ball slide 353 can be slid, and the closing portion 352a is lowered by the coil spring. The opening / closing shutter 352 urged in the direction of closing the extraction hole 324b is rotated in a direction in which the closing portion 352a moves in the direction (forward) of the lower dish ball extraction hole 324b by the urging force. Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates forward, the lower dish ball removal slide 353 slides forward, the lower dish ball removal hole 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a, and the lower dish ball removal button 354 is lowered. It returns to the position of the closed state substantially coincident with the front surface of the dish cover 328 and the like, and the game ball can be stored in the lower dish 302.

Note that the holding mechanism 355 of the lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 uses a known technique having the above-described function, and a detailed description of the detailed mechanism is omitted.

The ball rental unit 360 in the dish unit 300 has a ball rental button 361 that can be pressed backward.
And a return button 362, and a rental remaining display portion 363 is provided between the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362. The ball lending unit 360 is configured to insert a cash or prepaid card into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, and then click a lending button 361.
By pressing, a predetermined number of game balls can be lent out (paid out) into the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300, and cash that has been thrown in after deducting the remainder of the rented loan when the return button 362 is pressed. The remaining balance and prepaid card will be returned. Further, the remaining lending display section 363 displays the number of cash and prepaid cards remaining in the ball lending machine.

The ball rental unit 360 is attached from the rear side to a ball rental unit mounting portion 310b formed on the decorative portion 310a at the upper end of the dish unit base 310. The ball lending unit 360 includes a security cover mounting portion 364 that protrudes rearward from the rear surface and mounts and locks the mounting elastic piece 185 on the shaft support side (left side in front view) of the security cover 180.

The dish unit 300 of the present example includes an upper dish 301 and a lower dish 302, and can be a pachinko machine 1 having the same feeling as a conventional pachinko machine having two storage dishes. Pachinko machine 1 that can be reminiscent of the machine, and can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to play with reduced feeling of anxiety given to the player even with the new pachinko machine 1 (new pachinko machine)
And can be.

[1-2G. Operation unit]
Next, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 to 50. 45 is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 46 is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit as seen from the upper right front, and FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit as seen from the lower right front. Further, FIG. 49 is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit, and FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the pressing operation unit is pressed in the operation unit.

The operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment has an upper plate 3 at the approximate center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front.
01 is provided with a dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 405 that can be pressed by the player, and accepts the player's operation according to the gaming state, The dial operation unit 401 can be moved, so that the player can participate not only in the game ball driving operation but also in the effects during the game.

The operation unit 400 includes an annular dial operation unit 401 and a dial operation unit 401.
A cylindrical pressing operation unit 405 inserted into the ring, an annular driven gear 410 connected to the lower end of the dial operation unit 405, a disk-shaped drive gear 412 meshing with the driven gear 410, and a drive A dial drive motor 414 in which the gear 412 is fixed to the rotation shaft, an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and a cylindrical button support that slidably supports the pressing operation unit 405 in the vertical direction. An operation portion holding member 416 having a tube 416b, a spring 418 disposed in the button support tube 416b of the operation portion holding member 416 and biasing the pressing operation portion 405 upward, a gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 and a button Support cylinder 416b
A base member 420 having an opening 420a through which the operation unit holding member 416 and the dial drive motor 414 are fixed to the lower surface, and covering the upper surface of the base member 420 and the dial operation unit 4
The upper cover 422 having an opening 422a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of 01 can pass, and the upper cover 4
22 is mainly provided with a lower cover 424 that is attached so as to sandwich the base member 420 therebetween and covers the lower surface of the base member 420 and the dial drive motor 414.

Further, the operation unit 400 is fixed to the base member 420 so as to cover the upper side of the upper cover 422, and the opening 426a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass, and the opening 4
The operation unit mounting portion 314 of the pan unit 300 is extended outward from the left and right sides of 26a.
a cover main body 426 having a fixing portion 426b for fixing to c, a surface cover 428 covering the upper surface of the cover main body 426, and an operation portion holding member 41 attached to the upper surface of the base member 420.
6 is a dial decoration board having an opening 430a through which the button support cylinder 416b and the inner cylinder part 401a of the dial operation part 401 can pass, and a plurality of color LEDs 430b mounted at positions corresponding to the ring of the dial operation part 401 on the upper surface. 430 and a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that are fixed to the lower side of the base member 420 and detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401.
A press detection sensor 432c for detecting an operation of the pressing operation unit 405, and a button decoration substrate 432 having a color LED 432d mounted on an upper surface immediately below the pressing operation unit 405.

The dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 of this example is formed of a material having translucency, and has a cylindrical inner cylinder part 401a extending in the vertical direction and outward from the upper end of the inner cylinder part 401a. An annular top plate portion 401b having a predetermined decoration on the extended surface, and a top plate portion 401b
The outer cylinder part 401c which extends in a cylindrical shape downward from the outer peripheral end of the inner cylinder part 401a is shorter than the inner cylinder part 401a, and the outer cylinder part 4
And a flange portion 401d that extends annularly outward from the lower end of 01c. The outer diameter of the flange 401 d in the dial operation unit 401 is larger than the inner diameter of the opening 422 a in the upper cover 422. Moreover, the dial operation part 401 is provided with the connection latching | locking part (refer FIG. 48) at the lower end of the inner cylinder part 401a, and when the connection latching claw 410b of the driven gear 410 is latched, dial operation part 401 and the driven gear 410 can be connected.

Furthermore, the dial operation unit 401 further includes a protruding portion 401f that protrudes in the center direction from the inner wall of the inner cylinder portion 401a at a position that is a predetermined distance below the upper end. The protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 is formed in an annular shape along the inner periphery of the inner cylinder portion 401a. This protrusion 40
Although 1f will be described in detail later, the step portion 40 of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405 is provided.
7a, and the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 contacts the protruding portion 401f of the dial operating portion 401, so that the button cap 407 (pressing operating portion 405) is further in the inner cylinder portion. It is possible to prevent immersion in 401e (see FIG. 50).

As shown in the figure, the protrusion 401f of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405
The stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 has a contact surface with the dial operating portion 40.
Inclined surfaces that become lower toward the center of 1 are designed to increase the contact area when they come into contact with each other. As a result, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be more dispersed (released) to the dial operation unit 401 side, and vibration from the dial operation unit 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side. It has become.

Further, the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 is formed in a cylindrical shape whose upper end is closed, a bottomed cylindrical button body 406, a button cap 407 for closing the upper end of the button body 406, and a button cap. A cap inner 408 disposed inside the button body 407 and sandwiched between the upper end of the button main body 406 and the button cap 407. The button main body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 has a truncated cone shape whose bottom surface is narrowed downward. The upper end of the coiled spring 418 is inserted into the truncated cone-shaped bottom surface. In addition, a through-hole 406a penetrating in the vertical direction is provided at the center of the lower end surface of the truncated cone shape. It is like that.

Further, the button body 406 has a pair of locking claws 406b extending downward from the lower outer periphery and projecting outward at the lower end in the direction perpendicular to the axis.
The button main body 406 is moved upward so that the button main body 406 does not come off from the button support portion 416b by being locked with a lock protrusion 416f (see FIGS. 49 and 50) formed in the 16 button support cylinders 416b. The edge can be regulated. Although not shown in detail, the button support tube 416b of the operation portion holding member 416 includes a contact portion that prevents the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 from moving in the circumferential direction. The button main body 406 (the pressing operation unit 405) is prevented from rotating within the button support cylinder 416b. A predetermined amount of gap is formed in the circumferential direction between the locking claw 406b of the button main body 406 and the contact portion in the button support cylinder 416b, and the button main body 406 has a predetermined angle by the gap. It can be rotated within the range.

Further, the button main body 406 extends downward from a position different from the lower part of the outer periphery of the locking claw 406b and can be detected by the press detection sensor 432c of the button decorative substrate 432.
c. The pressing detection piece 406c resists the urging force of the spring 418 and the button body 4
When 06 (press operation unit 405) moves downward, it is detected by the press detection sensor 432c.

Further, as shown in the figure, the button cap 407 of the pressing operation unit 405 has an outer diameter lower than a substantially center in the vertical direction smaller than the upper side, and a stepped portion 407a between the upper side and the lower side. Is formed. The button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) has a lower diameter than the step portion 407a smaller than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401, and an upper side than the step portion 407a is a dial operation portion. The inner cylindrical portion 401a 401 has a smaller diameter than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f. As a result, the button cap 4
When 07 (press operation part 405) is inserted into the inner cylinder part 401a from the upper side of the dial operation part 401, the stepped part 407a of the button cap 407 is protruded 401f of the dial operation part 401.
The button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) cannot be further immersed into the inner cylinder portion 401e (see FIG. 50).

Further, the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 of the pressing operation unit 405 are formed of a material having a translucent ring. A character “Push” is displayed on the upper surface of the cap inner 408, and the character can be visually recognized from the outside through the button cap 407.

The driven gear 410 in the operation unit 400 includes a plurality of gear teeth that mesh with the drive gear 412 on an annular outer periphery. The driven gear 410 has an inner diameter that is the operating portion holding member 41.
6 has a slightly larger diameter than the outer diameter of the button support cylinder 416b, and an annular sliding surface 410a that contacts the gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 on the lower surface. By inserting the sliding gear 410 into the button support cylinder 416b and bringing the sliding surface 410a into contact with the gear rail 416a, the sliding gear 410 can slide and rotate substantially concentrically with the button support cylinder 416b. It can be done.

Further, the driven gear 410 includes a pair of connection locking claws 410 b that extend upward from a position at which the upper ends are opposed to each other and project inward. The driven gear 4 is engaged with the connection locking portion 401e of the inner cylinder portion 401a.
10 and the dial operation unit 401 are coupled so as to be integrally rotatable.

The driven gear 410 includes a plurality of rotation detection pieces 410c that protrude downward from the lower end and are arranged at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. These rotation detection pieces 410c are arranged on the button decoration board 432.
The rotation is detected by a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the rotation detector. The details will be described later, but the rotation is detected by the rotation detection piece 410c and the slit 410d formed between the rotation detection pieces 410c. Each rotation detection sensor 432a with respect to the detection piece 410c
, 432b, the rotation direction of the driven gear 410, that is, the dial operation unit 401 can be detected. In this example, the circumferential lengths of the rotation detection piece 410c and the slit 410d are substantially the same.

The drive gear 412 in the operation unit 400 is a driven gear 41 as shown in the figure.
The spur gear meshes with 0 and is fixed so as to be rotatable integrally with the rotary shaft of the dial drive motor 414. The dial drive motor 414 is a known stepping motor that can arbitrarily control the rotation direction, the rotation speed, and the rotation angle.
The dial operation unit 401 can be rotated via the driven gear 410 by rotating the drive gear 412 via the rotation shaft by 4. In addition, the dial operation unit 401 can be vibrated by repeating forward and reverse rotations of the drive gear 412 (rotary shaft) in small increments by the dial drive motor 414. In addition, the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 is stopped for a predetermined rotation angle for a short period of time based on detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 342b, so that the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is clicked. A feeling can be given.

Further, the operation unit holding member 416 in the operation unit 400 includes an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and a button body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape upward from the inside of the gear rail 416a. Button support cylinder 416b that slidably moves in the vertical direction, and a locking projection 416f that is formed on the inner peripheral surface near the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and can be locked with the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 ( 49 and 50) and LED mounted on the button decoration board 432 through the center of the bottom of the button support tube 416b.
Through-hole 416c for sending light from 432d into the button support cylinder 416b (pressing operation unit 405)
And an opening 416d that passes through the bottom portion outside the button support cylinder 416b in the vertical direction and passes through the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration board 432, and the bottom portion in the button support cylinder 416b in the vertical direction. And a pressing detection sensor 432c attached to the button decoration board 432 has a desired opening 416e extending from the upper side and a pair of board holding claws 416f extending downward from the lower surface for locking and holding the button decoration board 432. I have.

Although not shown in detail, the operation portion holding member 416 is disposed in the button support tube 416b, and forms a predetermined amount of clearance in the circumferential direction with respect to the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and is locked. A plurality of abutting portions that can abut against the claw 406b are further provided. By this contact portion, the button main body 406 (the pressing operation portion 405) can be rotated within a predetermined angle range, and is not rotated in the button support cylinder 416b. Furthermore,
Although detailed description is omitted, the operation unit holding member 416 includes screw holes for fixing to the base member 420, positioning bosses for positioning with the base member 420 and the button decoration board 432, and the like at appropriate positions. It has been.

The operation portion holding member 416 is inserted on the outer periphery of the button support cylinder 416b through the driven gear 410 and placed on the gear rail 416a, whereby the driven gear 410 (dial operation portion 401).
Can be slidably supported around a predetermined rotation axis. Further, by inserting the button body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 into the button support cylinder 416b,
The pressing operation unit 405 can be supported so as to be slidable in the vertical direction via the button body 406. A coiled spring 418 is arranged between the bottom of the button support tube 416b and the truncated cone-shaped lower surface of the button main body 406, and this spring 418 is arranged.
Thus, the button main body 406 (the pressing operation unit 405) is biased upward.

The base member 420 in the operation unit 400 is formed of a metal such as an aluminum alloy, and the operation unit 400 is not easily damaged even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is hit strongly. The base member 420 has a lower concave portion 420b that can be fitted to the outer periphery of the operation holding member 416 and is recessed upward, and a bottom portion (ceiling portion) of the lower concave portion 420b that vertically penetrates the operation holding member 416. An opening 420a having an inner shape through which the gear rail 416a can pass, and an upper recess 420c that is disposed on the opposite side of the lower recess 420b across the opening 420a and that is recessed downwardly so as to accommodate at least the driven gear 410. I have. Further, as shown in FIG. 48, the base member 420 is opened downward to the outside of the lower recessed portion 420b, and a motor mounting portion 420d for mounting the dial drive motor 414 is provided.
And a plurality of (four in this example) leg portions 420e that protrude downward by a predetermined amount from the outside of the lower recess 420b, and positioning holes 420f that open downward at the lower ends of the respective leg portions 420e. ing.

Further, the base member 420 is disposed on the outer side of the upper recessed portion 420c so as to be disposed upward.
A plurality of cover fixing portions 420g for fixing the dial 26, and the cover fixing portions 420g project upward from different positions outside the upper concave portion 420c to attach the dial decoration substrate 430. ing. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the base member 420 is formed with positioning bosses and mounting holes for positioning each member at appropriate positions on the upper and lower surfaces thereof.

The base member 420 has a button support cylinder 416 from the lower side with respect to the central opening 420a.
b and the gear rail 416a pass through the operating portion holding member 416 in the lower recess 420b.
After fitting and inserting, a predetermined screw is screwed into the operation portion holding member 416 from the upper side through the ceiling portion of the lower recessed portion 420b, so that the operation portion holding member 416 can be supported. Although detailed illustration of the base member 420 is omitted, in the state where the operation unit holding member 416 is supported, the upper end of the gear rail 416a is the upper surface of the ceiling portion of the lower recess 420b, that is,
The driven gear 410 placed on the gear rail 416a can be slidably rotated within the upper recessed portion 420c without any problem, so as to protrude slightly above the bottom surface of the upper recessed portion 420c. It has become.

Further, the leg portion 420e of the base member 420 has a positioning hole 420f formed at the lower end thereof.
Are fitted with positioning protrusions 424a formed on the upper surface of the bottom of the lower cover 424, which will be described later, so that the base member 420 and the lower cover 424 can be positioned at a predetermined position. It has become. Further, the board mounting boss 420h of the base member 420 protrudes to a position above the driven gear 410 accommodated in the upper recess 420c, and the dial decoration board 430 mounted on the board mounting boss 420h is driven. It does not come into contact with the gear 410.

Further, the base member 420 comes into contact with the upper surface of the dial drive motor 414 by attaching the dial drive motor 414 to the motor mounting portion 420d, and heat from the dial drive motor 414 is transferred to the base member 420 side. Thus, the heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be dissipated by the base member 420. Thereby, the overheating of the dial drive motor 414 can be suppressed, and it is possible to prevent the malfunction of the dial drive motor 414 and the like due to overheating.

The upper cover 422 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open bottom, and includes an opening 422a having an inner diameter through which the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass and the flange portion 401d cannot pass. ing. The upper cover 422 has a long direction (horizontal direction in the pachinko machine 1) connecting the axis of the pressing operation unit 405 (driven gear 410) and the axis of the dial drive motor 414 (drive gear 412) in plan view. The engaging claw 422b is formed so as to extend and protrudes downward at both ends in the long axis direction. The engaging claw 422b is provided on the lower cover 424.
By engaging with the engaging portion 424b, the upper cover 422 and the lower cover 424 can be assembled.

The upper cover 422 extends downward from the outer periphery of one side (front side in the pachinko machine 1) in the short axis direction (front and rear direction in the pachinko machine 1), and has a claw-like locking piece 4 whose lower end protrudes outward.
22c. The locking piece 422c can be locked to the upper dish front decoration member 316 in the dish unit 300, and by locking the locking piece 422c to the upper dish front decoration member 316, The operation unit 400 can be prevented from coming out upward from the operation unit mounting portion 314c.

The upper cover 422 includes a base member 420, an operation unit holding member 416, and a driven gear 410.
With the dial decoration substrate 430 and the dial member 401 attached, the opening 422a
On the other hand, by covering the upper part of the base member 420 so that the dial operation part 401 passes from the lower side, it is possible to prevent the dial operation part 401 from being pulled upward by the opening 422a.

On the other hand, the lower cover 424 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with the upper part opened, and has an outer peripheral shape substantially coincident with the outer periphery of the upper cover 422. Positioning protrusion 424 that can be fitted into the positioning hole 420f at the lower end of 420d.
a. The lower cover 424 is provided with engaging portions 424b that can be engaged with the engaging claws 422b of the upper cover 422 at both upper portions in the major axis direction (left and right direction in the pachinko machine 1). The upper cover 422 can be attached to the lower cover 424 by engaging the engaging claws 422b.

As shown in the figure, the cover main body 426 in the operation unit 400 has an opening 426a that passes through the center in the vertical direction and through which the dial operation unit 401 (excluding the flange 401d) can pass, and extends outward from both the left and right sides of the opening 426a. A fixing portion 426b fixed to the operation unit mounting portion 314c of the tray unit 300, and a base member 42 extending downward from the outer peripheral lower surface of the opening 426a.
And a fixed boss 426c fixed to the zero cover fixing portion 420g.

The operation unit 400 of this example is attached to the dish unit 300 via the fixing part 426b of the cover main body 426. Although not shown in detail, the operation unit 400 is attached to the operation unit attachment part 314c of the dish unit 300. In the state, the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424
) Is slightly lifted from the upper surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c (for example, 0.5 m)
m to 2.0 mm), and when the operation unit 400 is pressed or hit, the cover main body 426 is elastically deformed so that the impact can be reduced.

The operation unit 400 has the dish unit 30 with the front cover 428 removed.
The fixing unit 426b of the cover body 426 is attached to the zero operation unit attachment part 314c with a predetermined screw, and then the surface cover 428 is attached to the upper surface of the cover body 426.

The operation unit 400 of the present embodiment includes a driven gear 4 that rotates together with the dial operation unit 401.
In the ten rotation detection pieces 410c, the circumferential length of the slit between the adjacent rotation detection pieces 410c is the same as the circumferential length of the rotation detection piece 410c. The pair of rotation detection sensors 432 a and 432 b attached to the button decoration board 432 has a circumferential distance corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 of 2 in the circumferential direction of the rotation detection piece 410.
. The interval is 5 times. Thereby, although the details will be described later, the player operates the dial operation unit 4.
By rotating 01, a time lag occurs in the detection / non-detection of the rotation detection piece 410c by the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a, 432b, and the dial is determined from the detection pattern of the rotation detection piece 410c by each rotation detection sensor 432a, 432b. In which direction the operation unit 401 is rotating can be detected.

The operation unit 400 of the present example, as will be described in detail later, can rotate the dial operation unit 401 clockwise or counterclockwise by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414. . Further, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401 step by step by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using a stepping motor, or when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, Rotation can be assisted, it can be prevented from turning on purpose, or a click can be added to the rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by repeatedly rotating the dial drive motor 414 forward and backward in small increments.

Further, as shown in FIG. 50, in the operation unit 400 of this example, when the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed downward, the stepped portion 407 a of the button cap 407 is protruded from the protruding portion 40 of the dial operation portion 401.
The button cap 407 (pressing operation unit 405) is further in contact with the if 1f and the inner cylinder portion 401e.
The load applied to the pressing operation unit 405 can be dispersed to the dial operation unit 401 side via the stepped portion 407a and the protruding portion 401f. 405 (operation unit 400) is difficult to break.

Furthermore, the operation unit 400 of this example presses the pressing operation unit 405 to press the button cap 40.
7 407a and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation unit 401 are in contact with each other, and the dial drive motor 414 is rotated forward and reverse in small increments, so that the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 are also vibrated. The player can be surprised by the vibration of the pressing operation unit 405, and the game and production can be enjoyed.

According to the operation unit 400 of this example, the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player and the pressing operation unit 405 that can be pressed are supported by the metal base member 420. Since the strength can be increased, a player or the like can operate the operation unit 4.
It is possible to prevent the operation unit 400 from being damaged even by hitting 01,405 strongly.
The player can freely operate the operation units 401 and 405 and the operation unit 4
It is possible to improve the operability of 01 and 405 and to entertain the effects using the operation units 401 and 405 and to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is arranged at the center of the annular dial operation unit 401. If the pressing operation unit 405 is struck strongly, the dial operation unit 401 is also struck, The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 are used to strike the 401 and 405.
The operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300 can be prevented from being damaged by suppressing the hitting impact from being concentrated, so that the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 are hit hard. The operation units 401 and 405 can be freely operated by the player, and the operability of the operation units 401 and 405 can be improved. It is possible to entertain the performance using 405 and to suppress the interest in the game from decreasing.

Further, the base member 420 and the like of the operation unit 400 are accommodated in the recessed operation unit mounting portion 314 c of the dish unit 300, and the lower end of the base member 420 and the operation unit mounting portion 3.
The cover main body 426 attached to the base member 420 is fixed to the upper surface of the dish unit 300 so that a predetermined amount of gap is formed between the bottom surface of the operation unit 400 and the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400. Operation unit 4 when impact is applied or a load is applied.
Until the lower end of 00 comes into contact with the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c, the elastic deformation of the cover body 426 can absorb impact and load, and the lower end of the operation unit 400 comes into contact with the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. After that, since the shock and load can be received by the bottom portion (dish unit 300) of the operation unit mounting portion 314c, the operation portions 401 and 405
It is possible to avoid the concentration of impacts by dispersing the impacts from the operation unit 4.
The impact resistance and load resistance due to 00 and the dish unit 300 can be enhanced.

Further, the base member 420 is provided with a plurality of leg portions 420e protruding downward at positions away from the positions where the operation portions 401 and 405 are supported, and the leg portions 420 of the base member 420 are provided.
e abuts against the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c in the plate unit 300, and the operation portion 4
Even if the impact from 01, 405 is applied to the base member 420, the leg portion 420e is not disposed immediately below the impact, so the portion of the base member 420 that supports the operation portions 401, 405 is bent by the impact, When the base member 420 is bent (elastically deformed), the impact from the operation units 401 and 405 can be absorbed to some extent, and the impact applied from the base member 420 to the dish unit 300 is reduced, and the dish unit 300 is damaged. Can be prevented.

In addition, the dial operation unit 40 is configured such that a part of the dial operation unit 401 overlaps the base member 420 in plan view by the operation unit holding member 416 attached to the base member 420 from below.
1, even if the operation unit holding member 416 that holds the dial operation unit 401 moves away from the base member 420 when the dial operation unit 401 is struck from the upper side, the base member 420 is moved. The dial operation unit 401 comes into contact with the upper surface of the base member 42.
0 can restrict the downward movement of the dial operation unit 401, and the dial operation unit 4
It is possible to satisfactorily prevent the 01 from dropping.

Furthermore, since the dial operation unit 401 having the pressing operation unit 405 disposed at the center is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 according to the gaming state, the dial operation unit 401 rotates freely (rotation drive including vibration). By surprise the player, the operation unit 401, 40
5 can attract attention, can entertain the player, and the dial operation unit 401 is appropriately driven by the dial drive motor 414, thereby using the dial operation unit 401 (press operation unit 405). It is possible to make it difficult to get bored as more diverse ones, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

In addition, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 via the driven gear 410 and the drive gear 412.
Since the position of the rotation axis 4 can be made eccentric with respect to the position of the rotation axis of the dial operation unit 401 (driven gear 410), even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly hit. The impact is directly applied to the dial drive motor 4 via the rotary shaft of the dial operation unit 401.
14, the dial drive motor 414 (operation unit 40
0) can be prevented from being damaged.

Furthermore, since the opening 420a of the base member 420 has a smaller diameter than the dial operation unit 401, the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the gear rail 416a of the operation unit holding member 416 through the opening 420a. Even if the gear rail 416a (operation unit holding member 416) moves downward due to an impact or load from 401, the dial operation unit 401 can abut on the upper surface of the opening 420a of the base member 420, and the dial operation unit 401 becomes the base member. It is possible to reliably prevent a drop from 420. Further, since the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the annular gear rail 416a, the contact area between the dial operation unit 401 and the operation unit holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) can be increased. It is possible to prevent the operating portion holding member 416 from being damaged by dispersing the impact and load from the operation.

Further, since the dial drive motor 414 for rotating the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the metal base member 420, the dial operation unit 401 is frequently rotated by the dial drive motor 414, or the dial drive motor 414 is driven. Although the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped by the player despite being driven by the rotation, even if the amount of heat generated due to excessive load on the dial drive motor 414 increases, The heat generated from the dial drive motor 414 can be dissipated and radiated satisfactorily through the base member 420, and it is possible to prevent the dial drive means 414 from being defective due to overheating. That can withstand high loads. Can be sufficiently embody the effect of the dial operation unit 401 using a dial driving means 414 as described above, can be pachinko machine 1 to be entertained player.

Furthermore, rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation of the dial operation unit 401,
A pressure detection sensor 432c that detects the pressure of the pressure operation unit 405, and can detect a rotation operation or a pressure operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressure operation unit 405. It is possible to provide an effect according to the player's operation, and to provide a more integrated effect for the player who operates the operation units 401 and 405. It can suppress that interest falls. Further, a dial decoration board 430 and a button decoration board 4 for decorating the operation units 401 and 405 with light emission.
32, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be decorated with light emission. By causing the operation units 401 and 405 to emit light, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to make it easier for the player to operate the operation units 401 and 405.

When the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 is pressed, the pressing operation unit 40
5, and the protrusion 401 f of the dial operation unit 401 are in contact with each other, so that when the player presses the pressing operation unit 405, the dial operation unit 401 is moved by the dial drive motor 414 within a predetermined angle range. By repeating the normal rotation and reverse rotation in the vibration,
The pressing operation unit 40 is provided via a stepped portion 407a that is in contact with the protrusion 401f of the dial operation unit 401.
5 can also be vibrated. Therefore, since it is possible to give the player a feeling of operation with respect to the pressing operation 405 without separately providing a vibrator or the like for vibrating the pressing operation unit 405, an effect using the operation unit 400 can be enjoyed. It can suppress that the interest with respect to a game falls. Further, when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the pressing operation unit 405 is operated.
Oscillates so that the player can be greatly surprised by the movement of the pressing operation unit 405 that he thought would not move without permission. It is possible to prevent the interest from deteriorating by raising the sense of expectation. Therefore, unlike the conventional operation unit, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 move freely, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the operation unit 400, and the player can participate in the production using the operation unit 400. The operation unit 400 can be actively operated by the player, and the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 40 of the operation unit 400 can be operated.
It is possible to prevent the interest in the game from deteriorating by delighting the operation of No. 5.

Further, when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 40 are operated.
1 are in contact with each other, the force from the pressing operation unit 405 can be transmitted to the dial operation unit 401 side, and even when the pressing operation unit 405 is struck, it is applied to the pressing operation unit 405. Load and impact can be dispersed also on the dial operation unit 401 side, and load resistance and impact resistance to the pressing operation unit 405 can be improved. Therefore, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is struck, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from being damaged.
It is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to breakage of the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400), and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from being reduced due to the interruption of the game.

Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is supported so as to be rotatable only within a predetermined angle range with respect to the axial center extending in the vertical direction. When the player presses the pressing operation unit 405, the dial driving Even if the dial operation unit 401 is rotationally driven by the motor 414, the pressing operation unit 4
05 can be prevented from rotating together with the dial operation unit 401.
The role of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 can be surely recognized by the player, and the player can easily enjoy the performance using the operation unit 400. "P" guided to the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 405
The character “USH” does not rotate or tilt significantly, and it can be easily read from the player side, and the player can be surely recognized that the pressing operation unit 405 performs the pressing operation. .

In addition, the dial operation unit 401 includes a protruding portion 401f that protrudes from the inner periphery of the inner tube portion 401a toward the axial center, and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation portion 405 has a smaller diameter than a predetermined position in the vertical direction. Since the step portion 407a is formed by the operation unit 4
At the upper end of 00, the inner peripheral surface of the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 and the outer peripheral surface of the press operation portion 405 can be brought as close as possible, and a gap between the dial operation portion 401 and the press operation portion 405 is allowed. It can be made as small as possible to improve the appearance, and it can be made difficult for foreign matter such as dust and dirt to enter the operation unit 400 through the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405. The dial operation unit 401 becomes difficult to rotate due to the intrusion of foreign matter,
Generation | occurrence | production of the malfunction which becomes difficult to press the press operation part 405 can be prevented.

Further, the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is formed in an annular shape, and when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the dial operation unit 4 is operated.
01 can be touched at any position in the circumferential direction, so that even if the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed like a tilt (pressing a position biased to the outer periphery from the center of the pressing operation unit 405),
The dial operation unit 401 can be reliably brought into contact with, and the rotational drive from the dial drive motor 414 can be reliably transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 via the dial operation unit 401. In addition, since the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 are annularly contacted, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be widely distributed to the dial operation unit 401 side. Impact resistance can be further increased.

Further, since the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is inclined so as to become lower toward the direction of the rotation axis of the dial operation unit 401, In comparison, the contact area can be relatively increased, and the driving force from the dial drive motor 414 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side via the dial operation unit 401. In addition, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be distributed radially outward in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the rotation axis extends, and the load is prevented from being concentrated. The loadability and impact resistance can be reliably increased, the durability of the operation unit 400 can be increased, and the occurrence of problems during the game can be reduced as much as possible to reduce the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 is a stepping motor capable of forward / reverse rotation, the dial operation unit 401 is not simply rotated, but can be easily stopped at a predetermined position, or forward / reverse. The operation unit 400 (pachinko machine 1) that can be easily vibrated by repetition and has the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

In addition, since the operation unit 400 is supported by the dish unit 300 having the upper plate 301 for storing the game balls, the dish unit 3 may be used to store a large number of game balls.
Since the strength rigidity of 00 is high, it is possible to sufficiently cope with a smashing of the operation unit 400 (pressing operation unit 405), and it is possible to easily enjoy the production using the operation unit 400.

[1-2H. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.
FIG. 51 is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame as seen from behind. As shown in the figure, the handle device 500 of the present embodiment is attached to a handle bracket 140 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 through the handle insertion hole 334a of the plate side outer cover 334 of the plate unit 300. A fixed and cylindrical handle base 502 whose front end bulges out in a direction perpendicular to the axis, an annular rotary handle main body rear 504 disposed on the front side of the handle base 502 so as to be rotatable relative to the handle base 502, and a rotary handle A rotating handle body front 506 fixed to the front surface of the rear body 504 and integrally rotatable with the rotating handle body rear 504, and disposed on the front surface of the rotating handle body front 506 and fixed to the handle base 502. Rotating handle body front 506 and rotation in cooperation A front cover 508 for rotatably supporting the bundle body after 504, and a.

Further, the handle device 500 is mounted and fixed at the center of rotation in front of the rotary handle main body so as to protrude from the front side to the rear side, and has a shaft member 510 having a non-circular bearing portion 510a at the rear end, and the shaft member 5
A rotation position detection sensor 512 that has a detection shaft portion 512a that is fitted to the ten bearing portions 510a and is rotatable, and is fitted to the front surface of the handle base 502 so as not to rotate, and the rotation position detection sensor 512 is connected to the handle base 502. A sensor support member 514 having a through hole 514a that is fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 so that the detection shaft 512a of the rotational position detection sensor 512 can pass through, and a touch sensor 516 that is attached to the rear surface of the sensor support member 514. A firing stop switch 518 that is attached to the touch sensor 516 at a different position on the rear surface of the sensor support member 514; a single button 520 that is pivotally supported with respect to the sensor support member 514 and that activates the firing stop switch 518; It is arranged so as to cover the outer periphery of the shaft member 510, and the rotation handle body front 506 and the rotation A handle return spring 522 for biasing the handle body after 504 to return to the initial rotational position (rotation end of the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front), and a.

As shown in the drawing, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 of the present example has a hemispherical round shape that expands to the front side on the front end side, and a cylindrical shape with the rear end open on the rear end side. Three groove portions 502a extending in the axial direction are formed on a cylindrical outer periphery on the rear end side. The three grooves 502a of the handle base 502 are formed on the handle bracket 1
40 are arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction, one on the upper side and two on the lower side so as to correspond to the three ridges 143 in the cylinder part 141. The handle base 502 has a groove 50
2a is inserted into the cylindrical portion 141 of the handle bracket 140 so that it fits with the protrusion 143, and is supported in a non-rotatable state.

In the handle device 500, an arcuate slit 506a arranged concentrically with the rotary shaft is formed on the front surface 506 of the rotary handle, and three mounting bosses 508a projecting rearward are formed on the front end cover 508. These mounting bosses 508a are fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 through a slit 506a in the front 506 of the rotary handle. As a result, the circumferential end of the slit 506a in the front 506 of the rotating handle main body abuts on the mounting boss 508a of the front end cover 508 so that the rotation range of the rotating handle main bodies 504 and 506 is restricted.

In the handle device 500, a locking protrusion 506b protruding rearward is formed on the front 506 of the rotary handle body, and a coiled handle return spring 522 is formed on the locking protrusion 506b.
One end side (front end side) of the handle is locked, and the other end side (rear end side) of the handle return spring 522 is locked by the sensor support member 514, so that the handle return The rotary handle main bodies 504 and 506 are biased by the spring 522 so as to rotate counterclockwise in a front view.

The handle device 500 of this example is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 via the handle bracket 140. The handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base body 110 is inclined so that its mounting surface faces the outside (open side) in a plan view as viewed from above. The device 500 is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, the tip of the device 500 is inclined so as to be directed to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front vertical plane of the pachinko machine 1).
Thus, it is attached and fixed to the door frame 5. Thus, the player can handle the handle device 50.
It is easy to grasp 0, and the rotation operation is easy to perform without feeling uncomfortable.

In the handle device 500, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is a variable resistor.
When the rotary handle bodies 504 and 506 (handle device 500) are rotated, the shaft member 510 is rotated.
Thus, the detection shaft portion 512a of the rotational position detection sensor 512 is rotated. And
The internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512 changes in accordance with the rotation angle of the detection shaft portion 512a, and the driving force of the launch solenoid 654 in the ball hitting device 650 described later changes in accordance with the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512. The game ball is driven into the game area 1100 with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle device 500.

The outer peripheral surfaces of the rotary handle bodies 504 and 506 and the front end cover 508 are conductively plated, and the touch sensor 516 detects contact when the player touches the rotary handle bodies 504 and 506 and the like. It is like that. When the touch sensor 516 detects the player's contact, when the rotary handle bodies 504 and 506 are rotated, the rotation drive of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled with the strength according to the rotation, and the game ball Can be typed in. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball by rotating the handle device 500 in some way without touching the handle device 500, the firing solenoid 654 is not driven and the game ball cannot be driven, It is possible to reduce a load (burden) related to the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed by preventing the player from playing a game different from the original game.

Further, when the player presses the single button 520 while the handle device 500 is being rotated,
The firing stop switch 518 detects the operation of the single button 520, and the firing control unit 4120 stops the rotational drive of the firing solenoid 654. Thereby, even if it does not return rotation operation of the handle apparatus 500, while launching of a game ball can be stopped temporarily, by releasing the pressing operation of the single button 520, before operating the single button 520, A game ball can be launched with a driving strength.

In the handle device 500 of this example, the rotational operation of the rotary handle main bodies 504 and 506 is electrically detected by the rotational position detection sensor 512, and then the emission control is performed based on the detection of the rotational position from the rotational position detection sensor 512. Since the rotational driving strength of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled by the unit 4120, the handle device 500 provided in the door frame 5 and the hitting ball launching device 650 provided in the main body frame 3 as in a conventional pachinko machine, It is not necessary to provide a mechanical (for example, joint unit) mechanism so that the door frames 5 are linked to each other when the door frame 5 is closed and the linkage is released when the door frame 5 is opened, and the configuration relating to the pachinko machine 1 is simplified. It is possible to eliminate the occurrence of defects in the joint unit, and the player's interest is reduced due to a gaming ball driving defect. And it is capable to suppress.

[1-2I. Foul cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is mainly shown in FIGS.
Will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame as seen from the back. FIG. 54 is a front view showing the foul cover unit with the front cover removed.

A foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is attached to a rear surface below the game window 101 in the door frame base unit 100 and is fired by a game ball paid out from a prize ball unit 700 to be described later, or a ball hitting device 650. Nevertheless, the game balls (foul balls) that have not reached the game area 1100 are guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 of this example includes a cover base 542 having a front side opened and having a plurality of game ball passages therein, and a front cover 544 closing the front end of the cover base 542.

As shown in FIG. 53, the cover base 542 of the foul cover unit 540 includes a first sphere inlet 542a that is disposed in the upper right corner in the rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a front end of the cover base 542 that communicates with the first sphere inlet. A first ball passage 542b that expands to the right as viewed from the front,
The second sphere inlet 542c, which is arranged outside the first sphere inlet 542a (on the right side in the rear view) and is larger than the first sphere inlet 542a, communicates with the second sphere passage 542d, and inside the cover base 542, downward. A second sphere inlet 542c that extends and slopes downward toward the lower right corner when viewed from the front;
It has. The first ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c are the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Are formed at positions facing each other. As shown in the drawing, the second ball passage 542d in the cover base 542 has a height of a portion extending in the left-right direction along the lower end, which is about three times the outer diameter of the game ball. An accommodation space 546 that can accommodate a predetermined amount of game balls is formed.

Further, the cover base 542 can be guided to the upper part in the vicinity of the downstream of the foul ball inlet 542e and the foul ball inlet 542e, which is disposed at a substantially central upper part in the left-right direction and opens upward, and communicates with the foul ball inlet 542e. A foul ball passage 542f. The cover base 542 includes an opening / closing operation piece 542g for operating the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the lower rear surface of the second ball inlet 542c. This opening / closing operation piece 54
2g, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, it contacts the spherical contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 in the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790, thereby rotating the opening / closing crank 793 to open the opening / closing shutter 792. It can be in an open state.

The front cover 544 of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base 540, and is disposed in the upper left corner of the front view and communicates with the first ball passage 542b of the cover base 540 in the front-rear direction. The first sphere outlet 544a and the second sphere outlet 544b which is disposed in the lower right corner of the front view and communicates with the downstream end of the second sphere passage of the cover base 540 and penetrates in the front-rear direction.
And. The first ball outlet 544a of the front cover 544 is provided on the door frame base unit 100.
The dish unit 300 is connected to the upper dish ball supply port 310c through the notch 101a. Further, the rear end of the lower dish ball supply rod 310h in the dish unit 300 is connected to the second ball outlet 544b through the ball passage opening 110f of the door frame base body 110.

The foul cover unit 540 of the present example passes the game ball supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a through the first ball passage 542b. 544a can be supplied to the upper plate 101 through the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit 300. Further, the foul cover unit 540 has a full tank outlet 7 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700.
The game balls supplied from 76 to the second ball inlet 542c are lowered from the second ball outlet 544b through the second ball passage 542d through the lower plate ball supply rod 310h and the lower plate ball supply port 310g from the plate unit 300. It can be supplied to the dish 302.

Further, the foul cover unit 540 will be described in detail later, but when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e is positioned below the foul space 626 of the main body frame 3. The game ball fired by the hit ball launcher 650 is a game area 1
When the foul ball 626 falls into the foul sphere without reaching the inside 100, it is received by the foul ball inlet 542e. And foul cover unit 5
40 can discharge (supply) the game ball received at the foul ball inlet 542e from the second ball outlet 544b to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the foul ball passage 542f and the second ball passage 542d. It is like that.

Further, the foul cover unit 540 of the present example forms a side surface on the upstream side (left side in front view) of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and can swing by a game ball stored in the accommodation space 546. A swing member 548 pivotally supported by the shaft, a full tank detection sensor 550 that detects the swing of the swing member 548, and a spring that biases the swing member 548 in a non-detection state by the full tank detection sensor 550. 552. As shown in FIG. 54, the swinging member 548 is pivotally supported at the lower end with respect to the cover base 542, and the upper end is rotated to the left in the front view. In this state, the left side wall of the accommodation space 546 is formed. Further, the swinging member 548 is biased by the spring 552 to a position where the swinging member 548 is in a substantially vertical state. Further, the swinging member 548 is formed with a detection piece 548a protruding outward on the side surface opposite to the accommodation space 546 side, and this detection piece 548a is detected by a full tank detection sensor 550. .

Further, the foul cover unit 540 has an accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d.
Of the cover base 542 and a plate-shaped grounding metal 556 that covers the left end of the cover base 542 when viewed from the back, and is generated by rolling resistance caused by the circulation of the game ball. Static electricity can be removed.

In this example, the game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 700 are transferred from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 through the foul cover unit 540 and the upper plate 30 of the plate unit 300.
If the game ball is further paid out from the prize ball unit 700 even when the upper plate 301 is full, the ball stays in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and further, Normal passage 773 upstream of normal ball outlet 774 in full tank branching unit 770
When the inside is full, the full tank passage 77 is connected via the branch space 772 of the full tank branch unit 770.
The game ball circulates to the side 5 (see FIG. 79), and from the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 to the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540, the second ball passage 5
42d and the second ball outlet 544b are supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300.

When the inside of the lower plate 302 of the tray unit 300 is filled with game balls, the game balls can no longer come out from the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540, and are stuck in the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d. Game balls will be stored. Furthermore, the prize ball unit 700
As the game balls are dispensed from the storage space 546, the stored pressure of the game balls acts on the swing member 548, and the upper end of the swing member 548 is resisted against the biasing force of the spring 552. Will move to the left. When the detection piece 548 a of the swing member 548 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550, the prize ball unit 700 is displayed on the payout control board 4110.
The payout of the game ball is stopped and the player is notified to urge the player to discharge the game ball in the tray unit 300 to the outside.

When the game ball in the storage space 546 (the lower plate 302) is discharged and the swinging member 548 is returned to a substantially vertical state by the biasing force of the spring 552, the full detection sensor 550 detects the detection piece 548a. The non-detection is made, and the payout of game balls from the prize ball unit 700 is resumed.

[1-2J. Ball feed unit]
Subsequently, the ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 and 57. FIG. 55 is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame. FIG.
It is a back perspective view of the ball feeding unit in a door frame. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit viewed from the rear after removing the rear case. The ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 301 in the tray unit 300 one by one to the hitting ball launcher 650, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 301. The upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 can be pulled out to the lower dish 302 by operating the upper dish ball removal button 341.

The ball feeding unit 580 is a game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300.
The upper tray ball outlet 310d of the tray unit base 310 and the ball feed opening 1 of the door frame base body 110
13, a box-shaped front cover 581 having an entrance 581a that is supplied through 13 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 581b that opens to the lower side of the entrance 581a and is open at the rear, and a front cover 58
1 is a box-like shape in which the rear end of the front cover 1 is closed and the front is opened, and a hitting ball supply port 5 for supplying game balls that have penetrated in the front-rear direction and entered from the entrance 581a of the front cover 581 to the hitting ball launcher 650.
A rear cover 582 having 82a, and supported by a shaft extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 582 and the front cover 581 so as to be rotatable around the front cover 581;
1b and a ball punching member 583 having a partitioning portion 583a for partitioning between them and a game ball on the partitioning portion 583a of the ball punching member 583 one by one to the hitting ball supply port 582a of the rear cover.
And the rear cover 582, a ball feed member 5 supported so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the vertical direction.
84 and a ball feeding solenoid 585 for rotating the ball feeding member 584. In this example, as shown in the figure, the ball feeding member 584 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 581a in front view, and the ball removing member 583 is on the left side of the ball feeding member 584, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 is on the right side. Has been placed.

The front cover 581 of the ball feeding unit 580 includes an arc-shaped slit 581c formed concentrically with the rotation center of the ball removing member 583 on the left side of the ball outlet 581b when viewed from the front. An operating rod 583c of a ball punching member 583, which will be described later, extends from 581c to the front. Further, the front cover 581 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 581a. When the front cover 581 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the rear end opening of the ball guide channel 344b in the upper dish ball removal base 344 is assembled. Is formed to close.

Further, the ball removing member 583 has an inlet 581a and a ball outlet 58 below the inlet 581a.
A partition portion 583a that partitions the space 1b and the upper surface becomes lower toward the ball feed member 584;
The partition 583a extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feed member 584, bends from the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 581b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. A pivot rod 583b that is pivotally supported around the axis, a rod-shaped actuation rod 583c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the pivot rod 583b, and a pivot rod below the actuation rod 583c. Part 5
A weight portion 583d that protrudes from the side surface of 83b to the opposite side of the partition portion 583a.
An operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 581c formed in the front cover 581 (see FIG. 55), and a ball feed opening of the door frame base body 110 The upper tray ball removal mechanism 340 of the dish unit 300 is in contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343 a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 via the 113.

Further, the ball feeding member 584 has a fan-shaped blocking portion 584a and a blocking portion 584a in plan view with the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction facing the entrance 581a and the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removing member 583. A sphere holding portion 584b that is recessed in an arc shape from the rear end toward the rotation axis, and a sphere holding portion 58
4b, and a rod-shaped flange portion 584c extending downward from the rear end of 4b. This ball feed member 5
In FIG. 4, the blocking portion 584a and the ball holding portion 584b are each formed within an angle range of about 90 ° around the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 584 is sized to hold one game ball. This ball feed member 584 is provided with a ball feed solenoid 5
The collar 584c disposed at a position eccentric from the rotational axis by the drive of 85 is moved in the left-right direction so that it rotates around the rotational axis.

In the ball feeding member 584, the blocking portion 584a faces the partition portion 583a, and at the same time, the ball holding portion 584b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 582a, and the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a. It rotates between the holding position. This ball feed member 5
When 84 is in the supply position, the game ball held in the ball holding portion 584b is transferred to the hit ball supply port 582a.
The game ball that has been supplied to the ball hitting device 650 from the entrance 581a and has entered the partition 583a is blocked from moving toward the ball holding unit 584b (hit ball supply port 582a) by the blocking unit 584a. It stays on 583a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 584 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a, and the end of the ball holding portion 584b on the flange portion 584c side closes the hitting ball supply port 582a. Only one game ball on the partition portion 583a is held in the ball holding portion 584b.

Further, the ball feed unit 580 is moved back and forth by the ball feed operation rod 586 whose tip is swung vertically by driving (energizing) the ball feed solenoid 585 and the movement of the tip of the ball feed operation rod 586 which is swung vertically. And a ball feed crank 587 that rotates around an axis extending in the direction and rotates the ball feed member 584 around an axis extending in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 587 is engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed operation rod 586 and extends in the left-right direction, and the side of the engagement portion 587a that engages with the ball feed operation rod 586. Is disposed on the opposite side and is supported between a front cover 581 and a rear cover 582 so as to be pivotable about a shaft extending in the front-rear direction, and a ball feed member 584 extending upward from the shaft 587b. A rod-shaped flange portion 584c that protrudes downward from a position that is eccentric with respect to the center of rotation (see FIG. 57).
And a transmission portion 587c to be engaged. In this example, a flapper solenoid in which a ball feeding solenoid 585 and a ball feeding operating rod 586 are integrally formed is used.

The ball feed unit 580 of the present example has a ball feed actuation rod 586 that swings by driving a ball feed solenoid 585 that moves forward and backward in the vertical direction by a ball feed actuation rod 586 and a ball feed crank 587.
The ball feeding member 584 can be rotated by transmitting the movement of the above. When the ball feed solenoid 585 is not driven (normal time), the tip of the ball feed operating rod 586 swinging away from the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 585 is positioned downward.
In this state, the ball feeding member 584 is in the supply position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 586 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 585 and the tip of the swing is positioned upward, so that the ball feeding member 584 rotates to the holding position. It has become. That is, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feed member 58 is turned on.
4 receives one game ball, and when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the game ball received by the ball feeding member 584 is sent (supplied) to the ball hitting device 650 side. Yes. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 in the ball feeding unit 580 is controlled by the firing control unit 4120 in synchronization with the drive control of the firing solenoid 654.

Further, the ball removing member 583 that is pivotally supported in the ball feeding unit 580 of the present example is configured to apply a moment that rotates counterclockwise by the weight portion 583c. The operation rod 583c protruding forward comes into contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 in the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 of the dish unit 300, so that its rotation is restricted. In normal times, the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 is used.
Divides between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b, so that the game ball does not enter the ball outlet 581b side. Then, when the player presses the upper dish ball removal button 341 of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 in the dish unit 300 downward, the upper dish ball removal slider 343 slides downward together with the contact piece 343a and comes into contact. As the piece 343a moves downward, the operating rod 583c also moves relatively downward.

In this way, when the operating rod 583c moves downward together with the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340, the ball removal member 583 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the entrance by the partition portion 583a. The partition between the ball outlet 381a and the ball outlet 381b is released, and the game ball that has entered from the entrance 381a is discharged from the ball outlet 381b to the ball outlet passage 344c of the upper dish ball outlet base 344 of the dish unit 300. Then, it is discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 302.

Since the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 against which the operating rod 583c of the ball removal member 583 abuts is biased upward by a coil spring, the game ball is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 581a. However, the impact is transferred to the upper plate ball removal slider 3 via the operating rod 583c.
43 can be absorbed by a coil spring that urges the ball 43, so that the ball punching member 583 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball can be prevented from bouncing off at the partition portion 583a. .

As described above, according to this example, the game ball is stored in the upper plate 301 and the ball feeding unit 5 is stored.
When the player operates the handle device 500 provided on the front surface of the door frame 5 after supplying the game ball to 80, the game ball is sent to the ball hitting device 650 by driving the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580. When the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 by the hitting ball launching device 650, the game is performed in the game area 1100 that is made visible through the game window 101 of the door frame 5, and the player can enjoy the game. And a feed mechanism (ball feed member 584, ball feed solenoid 585, etc.) and a discharge mechanism (such as a ball feed solenoid 585) on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100.
A ball feed unit 580 provided with a ball removal member 583).
84 and the ball removing member 583 as well as the ball feeding member 584 and the hitting ball launching device 650 are as close as possible, and when the game ball in the upper plate 301 is discharged by operating the upper plate ball removing button 341, The number of game balls remaining on the ball feeding member 584 side can be reduced as much as possible, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost and to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 provided with the ball removing member 583 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, the capacity of the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 can be increased, and the game ball can be thrown in. The game ball in the upper plate 301 disappears early by operation,
It is possible to prevent the inside of the upper plate 301 from being filled with game balls at an early stage,
It is possible to reduce the player's feeling of annoyance with respect to the game balls in the upper plate 301 to suppress the interest, and to reduce the size of the plate unit 300 while maintaining the capacity of the upper plate 301. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's interest strongly by making the game area 1100 relatively large (wide) can be obtained.

Further, since the ball feed unit 580 is provided with the ball feed member 583, the ball feed member 580 is simply attached to the ball feed member 580 as compared with the ball feed member 584 and the ball feed member 583 separately. 584 and the ball punching member 583 can be attached, the labor involved in the assembly can be simplified, the feeding unit 580 can be easily replaced, and a defect occurs in the ball feeding member 584 and the ball punching member 583. Even then, ball feed unit 580
It is possible to easily solve the problem by exchanging.

Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5, the upper plate ball is compared with the ball feeding unit 580 provided on the main body frame 3 side. There is no need to configure the transmission mechanism (the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340) for transmitting the operation of the removal button 341 to the ball removal member 584 of the ball feed unit 580 so as to straddle the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 that can be opened and closed. The configuration related to the transmission mechanism can be simplified. Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the door frame 5 side, the transmission mechanism (when the door frame 5 is opened, as compared with the case where the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the main body frame 3 side). By shutting off the upper bowl removing mechanism 340), it is possible to avoid the possibility that the transmission mechanism will be consumed at an early stage, causing malfunction or damage, and reliability for the operation of the transmission mechanism, the ball feeding unit 580, etc. And durability can be increased.

Further, since the upper plate ball removal button 341 is pressed downward, the game ball can be discharged from the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302 or the upper plate 301 by simply pressing the upper plate ball removal button 341 downward. Can be stopped, and the player can easily perform the ball removal operation in the upper plate 301 by the upper plate ball removal button 341.

The partition 583a of the ball removal member 583 is moved by the movement of the upper plate ball removal slider 343 that slides in the vertical direction in accordance with the operation of the upper plate ball removal button 341, and the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is moved. At the same time, the partition portion 583a is also movable in the vertical direction, so that the horizontal movement range of the upper plate ball removal slider 343 and the partition portion 583a can be made as small as possible. The unit 580 can be reduced in size, and the pachinko machine 1 that can reliably achieve the above-described effects can be obtained.

Further, the upper dish ball removal slider 343 is urged upward and the upper dish ball removal slider 343 is urged.
When the ball is in the raised position, the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removal member 583 is connected to the entrance 581a and the hitting ball supply port 58.
Since 2a is made to communicate, the game ball from the upper plate 301 is vigorously divided.
Even if it abuts on a, the impact can be mitigated by the urging force acting on the upper dish ball removal slider 343, and the durability of the partition portion 583a (ball removal member 583) can be enhanced.
Further, since the impact applied to the partition portion 583a can be reduced by the urging force acting on the upper dish ball removal slider 343, it is possible to make it difficult to repel even when the game ball collides with the partition portion 583a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball feeding unit 580 and the like from being damaged and causing problems.

Moreover, since the partition part 583a is rotated, the partition part 5 when the load of the game ball is applied to the partition part 583a as compared with the case where the partition part 583a is slid.
The friction loss associated with the movement of 83a can be reduced, and the upper dish ball removal button 341 can be reduced.
The operation can be made lighter and the operability can be improved.
The moving range of 3a can be reduced, and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

Further, since the partition portion 583a is rotated by its own weight in a direction in which the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b communicate with each other, the partition portion Rotating due to its own weight, the entrance and the discharge port are in communication with each other, and the game medium in the storage tray is sent to the feed mechanism (input device) side even though the discharge operation unit is not operated. Since it will be discharged to the player side without being played, the player can be made aware that there is a problem with the pachinko machine 1 and moved to a pachinko machine 1 with no problems. It can suppress that it falls.

Further, since the ball removing member 583 is rotated via the rotating hook part 583b bent, the rotating hook part bent when the game ball collides with the divider 583a. It is possible to prevent the impact from being linearly transmitted to the rotating shaft by dispersing it by 583b or by absorbing it by bending of the rotating collar portion 583b. Can be increased.

Further, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged directly below the entrance 581a communicating with the upper plate 301 side, when the game ball in the upper plate 301 is discharged, the right and left of the game ball in the ball feeding unit 580 are Directional movement can be minimized, and the game ball can be discharged well by improving the passage of the game ball in the ball feeding unit 580. In addition, the ball outlet 5 immediately below the entrance 581a.
81b is arranged, the game ball discharge path in the ball feed unit 580 can be shortened as much as possible. Even if the ball feed unit 580 is provided with a ball removing member 583 as a discharge mechanism, the ball feed It is possible to prevent the unit 580 from becoming unnecessarily large.

[1-2K. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 590 in the door frame 5 is demonstrated mainly with reference to FIG.22 and FIG.23. This glass unit 590 has an opening of approximately the same size as the gaming window 101 and has an annular, vertically long octagonal unit frame 592 and two sheets for closing the front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 592. And a transparent glass plate 594 (see FIG. 106). The unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 has four pieces 592a which are arranged apart from each other in the vertical direction at the left and right ends and extend outward in a plate shape, and a plate which extends in the horizontal direction along the lower end and extends downward. Shaped locking piece 592b.

The glass unit 590 locks the locking piece 592b at the lower end to engage with the vertical bent protrusion 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 from the rear upper side. After that, the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 592 is fitted into the glass unit support step 110a of the door frame base main body 110, and the stop piece 592a of the unit frame 592 is locked by the glass unit locking member 190. It is detachably attached to the base unit 100 (see FIGS. 23, 28, etc.).

Thus, the door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a vertically long oval gaming window 10.
An upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls are arranged vertically on the lower side of 1, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 are placed on the right side of the lower plate 302 as viewed from the front. A handle device 500 for driving into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the transparent glass unit 590 that closes the screen is arranged. The door frame 5 includes a right side decoration unit 200, a left side decoration unit 2200, and an upper decoration unit 280 so as to surround the left and right sides and the upper side of the gaming window 101, and surrounds the lower side of the gaming window 101. Thus, the dish unit 300 is arranged so as to be continuous with the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 220 with the side speaker cover 290 interposed therebetween, and the units 200, 22 are arranged.
The appearances of 0, 280, and 300 are rounded and continuously integrated.

Further, the door frame 5 is a decorative board 2 provided in each unit 200, 220, 280, 300.
14, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 322, etc., by causing the LED to emit light, so that the game window 101 and the opening 328a of the lower plate cover 328 are surrounded by light emission decoration with an arbitrary emission color. Can be done. Also, the right side decoration unit 20
Decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 25 provided on the 0 and left side decoration units 220
Among the LEDs mounted on 6, the radiation lens portions 210 b and 2 of the side lenses 210 and 250 are provided.
By turning on and off the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256 arranged on the rear side of 50b, it is possible to change the mode of the light emitting decoration surrounding the game window 101.

Specifically, the light emission mode of the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a in the side lenses 210, 250, and the radiation lens portion 21
If the light emission modes of the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b corresponding to 0b and 250b are set to the same light emission mode (the light emission color and the light emission pattern are the same), the overall illumination can be made substantially uniform. If the light emission modes are changed so as to emphasize the portions 210a and 250a, it is possible to obtain a light emitting decoration that is discontinuous in the circumferential direction.
If the light emission modes are changed so as to emphasize 10b and 250b, it is possible to make the light emission decoration radiate around the center of the game window 101, and to attract the player's attention strongly. ing.

Further, the door frame 5 is provided with a dial operation unit 401 or a pressing operation unit 40 in the operation unit 400.
5 is made of an aluminum alloy by die casting,
The base body 420 is moved by the cover body 426 to the operation unit mounting portion 3 of the dish unit 300.
14c, the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 40 are suspended.
5, the cover body 426 is elastically deformed so as to bend, and the base member 420 comes into contact with the upper surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314 c via the lower cover 424, so that the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation are performed. The impact applied to the portion 405 and the like can be reduced, and the operation unit 400 can be prevented from being damaged.

Furthermore, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 is in a state in which the pressing operation unit 405 is inserted into the annular dial operation unit 401, and the dial operation unit 401 is included together even if a player or the like tries to strike the pressing operation unit 405 strongly. Therefore, the impact hit by the dial operation unit 401 can be dispersed, and the impact can be prevented from being concentrated to be hard to break. Further, the gear rail 416a of the operation unit holding member 416 that rotatably supports the dial operation unit 401 is provided with the opening 42 in the metal base member 420.
It is attached to 0a so as to slightly protrude from the upper surface from below, and the dial operation unit 40
The impact of hitting 1 is operated by the operation unit holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) via the driven gear 410.
When the operation portion holding member 416 is bent downward, the lower surface of the driven gear 410 comes into contact with the upper surface of the outer periphery of the metal opening 420a, and the impact can be received by the base member 420. The load on the member 416 can be reduced, and the gear rail 4
16a can be prevented from being crushed by an impact, and the durability of the operation unit 400 can be enhanced.

In addition, since the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 is attached to the plate unit 300 from the upper side, even if the operation unit 400 is damaged, the operation unit 400 can be easily replaced. It is possible to prevent the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 from being lowered by replacing the unit 400.

[1-2L. Luminous decoration on door frame]
Next, the light emission decoration in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. FIG. 59 is a front view showing the arrangement of the LEDs for light emission decoration in the door frame. In addition, FIG.
These are front views which show the type | system | group of LED for the light emission decoration in a door frame. The door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes a right side decoration unit 200, a left side decoration unit 240, and an upper decoration unit 280.
And the game window 101 substantially corresponding to the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by the dish unit 300.
Is formed so as to surround the outer periphery of the substantially annular shape. Each of these units 200, 240, 280
, 300 include decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 286 on which LEDs are mounted.
320 and 322 are provided, and the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 can be decorated with light emission by appropriately emitting light from each LED.

As described above, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 are formed so as to surround most of the outer periphery excluding the lower side of the game window 101, and a plurality of peripherals in the side lenses 210 and 250. The lens portions 210a and 250a are arranged along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101, and the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b extend along a radial axis centered around the lower portion of the gaming center 101 in the left-right direction center. Is disposed between the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a adjacent to each other. The peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250 are surrounded by side decorative frames 202 and 242 that are opaque (in this example, have a plating layer on the surface). Is surrounded.

On the rear side of these side lenses 210 and 250 are side inner lenses 212 and 252.
Are arranged, and the side inner lenses 212 and 252 are provided on the main body portions 212a and 252, respectively.
2a is formed at a predetermined distance from the rear surfaces of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a, and the plate-shaped light guide portions 212b and 252b are the radiation lens portions 210b and 25b.
It is formed to extend to a position as close as possible to the rear surface of 0b. Although not shown in detail in the main body portions 212a and 252a of the side inner lenses 212 and 252, a plurality of fine prisms are formed on the surface thereof, and the decorative substrate 21 disposed on the rear side.
The light from 4,216,254,256 can be diffused.

A right side upper decorative substrate 214 disposed on the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252;
On the right side lower decorative board 216, the left side upper decorative board 254, and the left side lower decorative board 256, LEDs 214a and 216a arranged at positions corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a.
, 254a, 256a and LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b. In this example, LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a are full-color LEDs, and LEDs 214b, corresponding to the radiating lens portions 210b, 250b,
216b, 254b, and 256b are white LEDs (normal brightness lower than the LED 286b of the upper decorative board 286 in the upper decorative unit 280). In addition, two LEDs 2 arranged vertically corresponding to the side sub-lens 228 in the upper decorative substrate 214 on the right side.
Reference numeral 14c denotes a red LED.

In this example, the surfaces of the right side upper decorative substrate 214, the right side lower decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 are white photoresist, white printing (for example, silk printing). ), White paint, etc. Thereby, since the reflectance in the decoration board | substrate 214,216,254,256 can be raised, each LED
When the lights 210a, 210b, etc. are not lit, the light from the player side is used for the decorative boards 214, 216, 254.
, 256 can prevent the side lenses 210, 250 from becoming too dark and deteriorating in appearance, and the light emitted from the LEDs 210a, 210b, etc. can be reflected to the player side by the substrate. Thus, the side lenses 210 and 250 can be brightly decorated.

Next, the upper decoration unit 280 of the door frame 5 is, as described above, the right side decoration unit 2.
00 and the upper part of the left side decoration unit 240 are formed so as to connect between the ends of the door frame 5 facing the center in the left-right direction, and decorate the upper center of the game window 101. The upper decorative unit 280 has a large central lens 28 formed like a jewel at the center.
2, a side lens 284 formed in a blade shape on the upper left and right sides of the central lens 282, and a lower lens 289 disposed on the lower left and right sides of the central lens 282. The central lens 282 of the upper decorative unit 280 is formed of a blue-tinged transparent member, and the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 are formed of a white (milky white) member having translucency. . Thereby, the inner lens 283 arranged on the rear side of the central lens 282 can be visually recognized from the player side.

The inner lens 283 of the upper decoration unit 280 has a plurality of fine lenses (
(Including a prism), and can diffusely reflect and diffuse light, so that when the inner lens 283 is viewed through the transparent central lens 282, the central lens 2
82 appears to be deep, and the center lens 282 itself appears to shine. Further, the upper decorative substrate 286 disposed on the rear side of the inner lens 283 is not visible from the player side.

On the upper decorative substrate 286 in the upper decorative unit 280, a plurality (six in this example) of LEDs 286a corresponding to the central lens 282 and disposed on the rear side of the inner lens 283,
A plurality of (in this example, the side lens 284) disposed on the rear side of the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289.
LED 286b, two for the lower lens 289 and one for the lower lens 289)
And. In this example, the LED 286a corresponding to the central lens 282 is a full color LED, and the LED 286 corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 is used.
b is a high-intensity white LED. In addition, the front surface of the upper decorative substrate 286 is also white, so that the same operational effects as described above can be achieved.

Subsequently, in the dish unit 300, a plurality of jewel-like light guides 318 a in the upper dish upper lens 318 are formed along the front end of the upper dish 301 so as to connect the lower ends of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240. The front decoration member 316 is lined up so as to be exposed through the opening 316a. When viewed from the front, the upper side front decoration member 316 and the upper dish upper lens 318 allow the outer side of the lower side of the gaming window 101 to be shown in the figure. (Lower) is designed to decorate. Below the upper dish upper lens 318, an upper dish upper inner lens 319 having a projection corresponding to each light guide 318a is disposed. The upper dish upper lens 318 of the dish unit 300 is formed of a bluish transparent member, and the upper dish upper inner lens 319 is formed of a transparent member.

The upper dish upper inner lens 319 of the dish unit 300 has a plurality of fine prisms formed on the surface (upper surface) corresponding to the light guide portion 318a of the upper dish upper lens 318, and diffuses and refracts light. The upper decoration unit 2
Similar to the central lens 282 of 80, the light guide 318a of the upper dish upper lens 318 is given a deep and sparkling shine so that the light guide 318a looks like a jewel. . In addition, the upper dish upper decorative substrate 320 and the upper dish left decorative substrate 322 are not seen from the player side through the light guide 318a by the upper dish upper inner lens 319.

On the upper surface of the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 in the plate unit 300, a plurality of (six in this example) are provided so as to correspond to the light guide portions 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318. LEDs 320a and 322a are provided. In this example, the upper plate right decorative board 320
The LEDs 320a and 322a of the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 are full-color LEDs. Moreover, the surface (upper surface) of the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 is also white, so that the same effects as described above can be achieved.

Next, the operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 300 includes a ring-shaped dial operation unit 401 having translucency and a columnar pressing operation unit having translucency disposed inside the dial operation unit 401. 405, and a dial decoration board 430 and a button decoration board 432 are disposed below the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, respectively. The dial decoration board 430 is provided with a plurality of (four in this example) LEDs 430 b arranged in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the dial operation unit 401. Further, the button decoration substrate 432 is provided with one LED 432d so as to correspond to the pressing operation unit 405. In this example, the LED 430b of the dial decoration substrate 430 is a white LED with high brightness, and the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is a full color LED. Further, the surfaces (upper surfaces) of the dial decoration substrate 430 and the button decoration substrate 432 are also white, so that the same effects as described above can be achieved.

By the way, in the door frame 5 of this example, the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 that cover the outer periphery above the lower side of the gaming window 101.
LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 2 corresponding to the respective peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a.
56a is a first annular group 102 (within the hatched area in FIGS. 59 and 60) close to the game window 101, and a second annular group 10 arranged outside the first annular group 102.
3 (within the range of the cross hatch in FIG. 59 and FIG. 60), and the LEDs of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are caused to emit light appropriately so that the gaming window 101
A plurality of (in this example, two) light emitting decorations can be provided so as to surround a circle. That is, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 25 of the first annular group 102
When all 6a are illuminated, the hatch area close to the gaming window 101 is illuminated in a ring shape, and when all the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the second annular group 103 are illuminated, The range is designed to be lit in a ring.

In the door frame 5, the LEDs 2 corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210 b and 250 b of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240.
14b, 216b, 254b, 256b is a radial group that extends radially around the lower center in the left-right direction of the gaming window 101 (game area 1100) so as to divide the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 in the circumferential direction. 104 (within the shaded range in FIGS. 59 and 60). LEDs 214b, 216b, 25 of this radial group 104
By appropriately emitting light from 4b and 256b, the outer side of the gaming window 101 can be illuminated in a radial manner, and the annular luminous decoration by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 is divided in the circumferential direction. Can be decorated with light emission. The LE corresponding to the side sub-lens 228 on the upper right side of the right side decoration unit 200
D214c is the upper right side group 105, and a portion of the upper right side surface (side sub lens 228) of the door frame 5 can be decorated with light emission by appropriately emitting light from the LED 214c. .

In the door frame 5, the LED 286 a corresponding to the central lens 282 in the upper decorative unit 280 that decorates the upper center of the gaming window 101 emits light at the upper center of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. Group 106 is designated. In addition to allowing the LED 286a of the upper center group 106 to emit light appropriately, the upper center of the gaming window 101 can be decorated with light emission, and the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 10
The light emitting decoration can be made to be a reference point of the annular light emitting decoration by 3. The LED 286 b corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 in the upper decoration unit 280 is an upper central side group 107 that decorates the left and right sides of the upper central group 106. LED286 of this upper center side group 107
By appropriately emitting b, the border between the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 and the upper central group 106 is illuminated and decorated in a V shape above the gaming window 101 (including the upper part). It is possible to make it.

Further, in the door frame 5, the light guide 3 of the upper dish upper lens 318 fitted in the plurality of openings 316 a of the upper dish front decoration member 316 in the dish unit 300 decorating the lower side of the gaming window 101.
The LEDs 320a and 322a corresponding to 18a constitute a lower group 108 that illuminates and decorates the outer periphery of the lower side of the gaming window 101 so as to connect the left and right lower ends of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. LEDs 320a and 322a of this lower group 108
By appropriately emitting light, the lower side of the gaming window 101 and the front edge of the upper plate 301 can be decorated with light emission, and the LEDs 214a, 2 of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 can be illuminated.
By interlocking with 16a, 254a, 256a, the entire outer periphery of the gaming window 101 can be illuminated and decorated in a ring shape.

In the door frame 5, the LED 4 corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 disposed in the upper center of the dish unit 300 at the lower center of the gaming window 101.
30b and 432d are the operation unit group 109 that causes the operation unit 400 to emit light. By appropriately emitting the LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation unit group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be decorated with light emission, and the operation timing and operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be changed. The player can be informed.

The light emitting decoration in the door frame 5 in the present embodiment will be further described in detail.
Each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 25 provided on the door frame 5
4a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 286a, 286b, 320a, 322a, 43
0b and 432d are groups 102, 103, 104, 106, 107, and 1 to which each belongs.
08 and 109 are further subdivided corresponding to the control system. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60, 20 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a belonging to the first annular group 102 are provided.
, 256a is 10 for each of the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250.
The 26 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a belonging to the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems of 2a to 102j, and each of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250 has 103a to 103j. It is divided into 10 systems.

In addition, 20 LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b belonging to the radial group 104,
256b is 104 for each of the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250.
It is divided into 8 systems a to 104h. 2 belonging to the upper right side group 105
The individual LEDs 214c are divided into two systems, an upper side 105a and a lower side 105b. Furthermore,
Six LEDs 286a belonging to the upper center group 106 are a lower portion 106a, an upper right portion 106
b and upper left 106c. The six LEDs 286b belonging to the upper central side group 107 are divided into two systems, a right side 107a and a left side 107b.

Further, the twelve LEDs 320a and 322a belonging to the lower group 108 are divided into four systems 108a to 108d, three by three from the right side when viewed from the front. In addition, the operation group 10
The five LEDs 430b and 432d belonging to No. 9 are composed of two LEDs 430b in which four LEDs 430b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 are arranged diagonally across the pressing operation unit 405, the left and right 109a and the front and rear 109b, One LED corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405
432c is divided into three systems, one system. Thus, in the door frame 5 of this example, each LE
D214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a
, 256b, 286a, 286b, 320a, 322a, 430b, 432d are divided into 42 systems.

By the way, in the door frame 5, as described above, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 25
6a, 286a, 320a, 322a, 432d are full-color LEDs, and these LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 286a, 320a, 322a, 4
28 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106 to which 32d belongs
c, 108a to 108d, 109c are further provided with three independent RGB systems in order to emit light in full color, and in actual light emission control, there are 84 systems that are three times as large. The LEDs 286b and 430b are high-intensity white LEDs, and the LEDs 286b
, 430b belongs to the four systems 107a, 107b, 109a, 109b, so that a large amount of current is required to emit light with high luminance, so two systems are connected to each other. There are 8 systems.

The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b are white LEDs having normal luminance, and belong to the eight systems 104a to 108h. LED 214c is red L
ED and belongs to two systems 105a and 105b. These LEDs 214b
, 216b, 254b, 256b, 214c, 10 systems 104a to 108h, 10
Since 5a and 105b can be sufficiently controlled by each system, the same number of 10 systems is obtained even in actual light emission control.

Therefore, the actual number of systems in the light emission control in the door frame 5 is 102 systems.
ED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256
For each system to which a, 256b, 286a, 286b, 320a, 322a, 430b, and 432d belong, lighting / flashing is controlled by dynamic lighting, and gradation (color and brightness) is controlled by PWM (pulse width) (Modulation control). As a result, a rich light-emitting effect can be achieved.

As the lighting effect in the door frame 5, for example, light is emitted sequentially from the first annular group 102 to the second annular group 103 (sequential light emission of the same color or similar color) to spread outwardly around the gaming window 101. A gaming window 10 by emitting light (in other words, sequentially emitting light of the same color or similar color) sequentially from the second annular group 103 to the first annular group 102.
A light emission effect that converges from the outside toward 1 or a light emission effect that causes the entire outer periphery of the gaming window 101 to emit light widely by simultaneously causing the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 to emit light. Be able to.

In addition, by coordinating with the LEDs (detailed illustration is omitted) provided on the front surface of the game board 4 and the front unit 2000, the first annular group 1 close to the LED of the game board 4 and the game window 101 is provided.
02 LED and the second annular group 10 arranged outside the first annular group 102
With the LED of 3, it becomes possible to perform a more expressive light-emitting effect, which can attract the player's interest strongly, and can prevent the entertainment from deteriorating by making the player entertained.

Moreover, in the 1st cyclic | annular group 102, the 2nd cyclic | annular group 103, and the lower group 108, light circulates the outer periphery of the game window 101 by light-emitting each system | strain 102a-102j, 103a-103j, 108a-108d suitably. Such as lighting effects such as gaming window 10
A light emission effect is performed such that light moves toward the central lens 282 of the upper decoration unit 280 along the outer periphery of the 1 or the light moves from the central lens 282 along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101. be able to. In this example, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j in the circumferential direction (1
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if it is divided into about 8 lines (about 8 divisions), a light-emitting effect that makes the light circulate around the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 is performed satisfactorily. be able to.

Further, by emitting light only from the radial group 104, a light emission effect is produced in which the light is emitted radially around the gaming window 101, or the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108 are emitted simultaneously with the radial group 104. To produce a light emission effect that causes the entire outer periphery of the gaming window 101 to emit light substantially uniformly, or to cause the radial group 104 to emit light (light on / flash) while the first annular group 102 or the second annular group 103 emits light. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect that gives an accent to the light emitting decoration. Further, the radiation lens unit 2 can be obtained by causing each of the systems 104a to 104h of the radial group 104 to emit light individually.
It is also possible to produce a light emission effect that 10b and 250b circulate.

Further, the central lens 282 as a whole emits light by simultaneously emitting light from the respective systems 106a to 106c of the upper central group 106, and light is rotated in the central lens 282 by sequentially emitting light from each of the systems 106a to 106c. Light emission effects can be performed.
Further, the upper center side group 105 is caused to emit light, whereby the side lens 284 and the lower lens 2 are illuminated.
The light-emitting effect that suggests the arrival of a chance or a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state, a probable gaming state, a short-time gaming state, a probable-changing short gaming state, etc.) by decorating the 89 with a high-luminance lighting. It can be carried out. The lower lens 289 is arranged so as to irradiate light from the player's head toward the player, so that the player can easily notice the light emission of the high-brightness LED 286b. .

Furthermore, the dial operation unit 401 can emit light by decorating the front edge of the upper plate 301 by appropriately emitting light from each of the systems 108a to 108d of the lower group 108 or by emitting light in association with the operation group 109. Or a light-emitting effect that prompts the user to operate the pressing operation unit 405. In addition, the system 109a, 109b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 in the operation group 109 is appropriately caused to emit light so as to prompt the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or guide the rotational operation direction of the dial operation unit 401. can do. Further, by causing the system 109c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation group 109 to emit light, it is possible to produce a light emitting effect that prompts the operation of the pressing operation unit 405.

The first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, the upper central group 106,
Since the system 109c of the lower group 108 and the operation group 109 is a full color LED, each system 102, 103, 106, 108, 109 or each system 102
a-102j, 103a-103j, 106a-106c, 108a-108d, 109
For each c, it is possible to perform a light emission effect in which gradations such as a light emission color and brightness are different, and it is possible to perform a colorful and expressive light emission effect.

Thus, in the door frame 5 of this example, in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 2 corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a.
54a and 256a are divided into the first annular group 102 close to the gaming window 101 and the second annular group 103 far from the gaming window 101 outside the first annular group 102 so that the light can be emitted. The outside of the gaming window 101 (the gaming area 1100) can be decorated with a plurality of substantially concentric circles, and light can surround the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 to produce a lighting effect not found in conventional pachinko machines. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's interest can be obtained.

In addition, one peripheral lens portion 210a, 250a is provided with two systems of LEDs arranged in a substantially concentric circle, and even if the appearance looks like one, each LED of the two systems can emit light. Since it is possible to decorate the light emission in a substantially concentric manner, it is possible to make it difficult to imagine the aspect of the light emission decoration from the appearance, and the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a (
The change of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240) can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the player's interest by increasing the impact of the light emitting decoration can be obtained. Yes.

Furthermore, LEDs 214b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 254b, 256b and LEDs 214b, 2
LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 25 of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 which are divided in the circumferential direction by 16b, 254b, 256b and arranged in a substantially concentric manner.
6a, so that the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 emit light according to the gaming state, so that the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 has a plurality of annular shapes. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 to be able to show the player the luminous decoration that has never been seen with a pachinko machine so far, and to attract the player's attention strongly. .

Further, the LEDs 214a of the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256 in the door frame 5 are provided.
Since the annular first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 composed of 216a, 254a, and 256a are arranged substantially concentrically (see FIG. 60), the second annular group 103 is formed from the outside toward the inside. By emitting light in the order of the first annular group 102, it is possible to perform a light emission effect such that the light converges toward the game window 101, that is, the game area 1100, and to direct the player's interest to the game area 1100. Along with the game area 110
It can be made to think that there is something good in 0, and it can raise the expectation with respect to a game, and can suppress that an interest falls. Furthermore, by emitting light in the order of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 from the inside to the outside, it is possible to perform a light-emitting effect that spreads outward from the game window 101, that is, the game area 1100. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that there is something good for the light-emitting effect spreading to the player, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

Furthermore, since the above-described light-emitting effects can be performed outside the game window 101 (game area 1100), not only a player who plays with the pachinko machine 1 but also the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The player in the game hall can also show the above-mentioned light-emitting effects, attract the interest of other players, and make it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play. Can do.

Further, the LEDs 21 of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 extending in a ring shape.
4 a, 216 a, 254 a, 256 a are provided with LEDs 214 b, 216 b, 254 b, 256 b of the radial group 104 arranged radially so as to divide in the circumferential direction. Further, since the annular light emitting decoration by the second annular group 103 can be divided in the circumferential direction, an accent can be given to the light emitting decoration, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted by the change of the light emitting decoration. Further, the first annular group 102 is formed by the radially arranged radial groups 104.
In addition, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the second annular group 103 are arranged in the circumferential direction 1 so as to correspond to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250.
Since it is divided into 02a-102j and 103a-103j, the respective peripheral lens portions 210a, 2
LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a corresponding to 50a are connected to the lines 102a to 102a, respectively.
By emitting light independently for each of 102j, 103a to 103j, it is possible to perform a light emission effect in which the light moves in the circumferential direction, and to provide a more versatile light emission effect to make the pachinko machine 1 less boring. it can.

Further, LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256 are connected to the side lenses 210, 250.
and peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a corresponding to a, LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b,
256b and corresponding radiation lens portions 210b and 250b, and the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b are included in the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a so as to be integrated. Since it is possible to change the appearance of the side lenses 210 and 250, the design of the appearance of the side lenses 210 and 250 can be enhanced even when the lighting decoration is not performed, and the player's attention is strongly attracted. A pachinko machine 1 can be obtained.
The side lenses 210 and 250 are connected to the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and the radiation lens portion 21.
Even if it is divided into 0b and 250b, LEDs 214a, 216a,
LEDs 254a, 256a and LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256 arranged radially
By causing b to emit light in the same light emission mode, it becomes possible to make an illusion that the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b are integrated with each other.
It is possible to integrally decorate the outer periphery of the light-emitting element in an annular shape, and the above-described operational effects can be sufficiently achieved.

In addition, in the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a in the side lenses 210 and 250,
The LEDs 214a, 216 of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 partitioned in the circumferential direction by LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b arranged radially.
a, 254a, and 256a are made to correspond to each other, and even though the appearance looks one, the LEDs 214a, 216a,
By making each of 254a and 256a emit light, it is possible to decorate the light in a substantially concentric manner, so that it is difficult to imagine the form of the light emitting decoration from the appearance, and the change of the side lenses 210 and 250 due to the light emitting decoration can be made. The pachinko machine 1 can be enlarged and the impact of the light emitting decoration can be increased to attract the player's attention.

Further, the light from the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 is diffused between the side lenses 210, 250 and the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 to thereby diffuse the side lenses 210,
Since the side inner lenses 212 and 252 that irradiate 250 are provided, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of unevenness in the light emission decoration of the side lenses 210 and 250, and to improve the appearance of the light emission decoration. LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 2 that emit light in the form of dots
Even if 56a is used, the side lenses 210 and 250 can be light-decorated in a planar shape, so that a light-emitting body that emits light linearly (for example, a cold cathode tube (fluorescent tube), a neon tube, an organic EL, etc.) is used. Compared with the case where the light emitting device is used, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a are individually made to emit light so that the light emission in the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 can be changed in the circumferential direction. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can present a light-emitting effect, can suppress the player's interest from being lowered, and can attract the player's interest strongly.

Further, since the light can be diffused by the side inner lenses 212 and 252, even if the transparency of the side lenses 210 and 250 is increased, the side inner lenses 212 and 2 are increased.
52, the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, and 256 arranged on the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 can be hard to see, and the decorative board 2 can be viewed from the player side.
14,216,254,256 etc. can be seen directly and it can prevent that it looks bad.

Further, the light guides 212b and 252b of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 are used for LED.
214b, 216b, 254b, 256b guides the light from the side lenses 210, 250.
Irradiating the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the LED 214b and 2b.
The light from 16b, 254b, and 256b can be reliably guided to the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b to be decorated with light emission, and the pachinko machine 1 that exhibits the above-described effects can be reliably realized. The light guide portions 212b and 252b of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 are also provided.
Side lenses 210, 250 and LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b.
Since the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250 can be surely decorated with light emission even if the distance between the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 10 is increased.
LED 214a having a sufficient space between the side lenses 210 and 250 in order to widely irradiate the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250.
LEDs 214b, 21 arranged radially on the same substrate as 216a, 254a, 256a
6b, 254b, and 256b can be mounted, and the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified.

Further, the side decorative frames 202 and 242 surround the outer periphery of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250, so that the light from the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a is emitted from the radiating lens. To sections 210b and 250b,
Alternatively, it is possible to reduce as much as possible the influence of the light from the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b on the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a, and to prevent the respective light emitting decorations from interfering with each other. A light emission effect can be performed.

[1-3. Overall structure of main frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 is a front view of the main body frame, and FIG. 62 is a rear view of the main body frame. FIG. 63 is a front perspective view of the main body frame, and FIG. 64 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame. Furthermore, FIG.
65 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the front, FIG. 65 is a left side view of the main body frame, and FIG. 67 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the rear. The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is pivotally supported on the left side when viewed from the front with respect to the outer frame 2 and is supported in a door shape so as to open and close the front surface of the outer frame 2 on the rear side of the door frame 5. The front side can be opened and closed by the door frame 5. Further, the main body frame 3 can hold the game board 4 detachably from the front side at a position corresponding to the game window 101 of the door frame 5.

The main body frame 3 of this example forms a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and penetrates in the front-rear direction to have a main body frame base 600 having a rectangular game board holding port 601 for holding the game board 4, and a main body frame base 6
00 is attached to the upper end and the lower end of the left end of the front view, respectively, and is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5.
An upper shaft support bracket 630 and a lower shaft support bracket 640 for supporting the game ball, and a hitting ball launching device 650 for mounting a game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 attached to the lower front surface of the main body frame base 600, A prize ball unit 700 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 for paying out game balls to the upper plate 301 of the tray unit 300, and a door frame 5 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 with respect to the main body frame 3. And a ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 that blocks the flow of game balls from the prize ball unit 700 to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5 when opened.

The main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600 and is a door frame 5 excluding the game board 4.
And a board unit 800 in which various control boards for controlling electrical components provided in the main body frame 3 and a power supply board 851 are grouped together, and the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame base 600 A back cover 900 that covers the opening, a side security plate 950 that covers the left end of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and an opening and closing lock of the main body frame 3 attached to the right end of the main body frame base when viewed from the front. And the locking device 100 which opens and closes the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3
0 is mainly provided.

[1-3A. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 68 is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. In addition, FIG.
FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of a main body frame base in the main body frame. The main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is integrally formed of synthetic resin, and the outer shape of the front view is a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5 and is approximately in the front-rear direction. It is formed to have a certain depth D (see FIG. 65). Accordingly, when the main body frame base 600 is faced down when attaching the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, the back cover 900, the lock device 1000, and the like to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. In addition, the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 is substantially flat at the depth D of the main body frame base 600, and the prize ball unit 700 and the like can be easily placed, and workability relating to the assembly of the main body frame 3 is improved. Can be improved.

As shown in the figure, the main body frame base 600 has a gaming board holding port through which the entire range of about 3/4 penetrates in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction from the upper part to the lower part so that the outer periphery of the gaming board 4 can be fitted and held. 601, a U-shaped front end frame portion 602 that forms the outer periphery of the front end excluding the left side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and a recess from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602 to the rear, and the door frame base body 110 in the door frame 5.
Door frame protruding piece 110c protruding rearward from the lower end of the frame, the upper bent protruding piece 167 protruding rearward of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and the open side outside protruding rearward of the opening side reinforcing sheet metal 153. And an engaging groove 603 into which the bent protrusion 163 is inserted and engaged.

Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding port 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600 and is recessed from the front end of the front end frame portion 602 to the rear side by a predetermined amount and spread in a plate shape in the left-right direction. 604 and a peripheral wall portion 605 that protrudes rearward inside the front end frame portion 601 and forms an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601. By this peripheral wall portion 605, the free ends (upper and lower left ends in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 are connected to each other, and the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It is like that.

In addition, the main body frame base 600 forms a lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall part 604, and a game board placement part 606 on which the game board 4 is placed, and the game board placement part 606. The out-ball discharge groove 11 of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 protrudes upward from the substantially horizontal center.
56, and a game board locking portion 608 that is formed at a predetermined position on the inner wall on the right side when viewed from the front in the peripheral wall portion 605 and to which the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4 is fixed.
1), and a plurality of upper end regulating ribs 609 arranged in a left-right direction in a plate shape that hangs downward from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 and whose lower ends can come into contact with the upper end of the game board 4. The positioning protrusion 607 of the main body frame base 600 can be fitted into the out ball discharge groove 1156 of the game board 4 to restrict the lower end of the game board 4 from moving in the left-right direction and the rear direction. ing. In addition, the game board locking portion 608 can restrict the right side of the game board 4 from moving in the front-rear direction by locking the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4. Yes. Although the details of the left side of the game board 4 when viewed from the front will be described later, the movement in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the side security plate 950.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is mounted with a bracket for mounting the upper shaft bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 on the rear surface of the free end portion (upper left and right end portions in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602. Part 6
10 (see FIG. 69). As shown in FIG. 68 and the like, the bracket mounting portion 610 is reinforced by a plurality of ribs whose front side extends vertically and horizontally, and attaches the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 with sufficient strength. Can be done. Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed in a substantially circular cylinder lock through-hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right end of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view, and is formed at the lower left of the cylinder lock through-hole 611 in front view. The U-shaped fitting groove 612 that fits the positioning protrusion 110d that protrudes rearward from the door frame base main body 110 and the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 that is formed in the lower left of the fitting groove 612 when viewed from the front are accommodated. A solenoid housing recess 613.

As described above, the main body frame base 600 of this example is formed at a position where the lower rear wall portion 604 is recessed one step further to the rear side than the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, The ball striking device 650 is attached to the front surface from the front side so that the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 is accommodated in the solenoid housing recess 613. In a state in which the ball hitting device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, as shown in FIG. 63, FIG. 98, and the like, A foul space 626 extending downward is formed. In this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542 e in the foul cover unit 540 is positioned below the foul space 626, and the foul space 626 is lowered. The game ball is a foul ball entrance 542e of the foul cover unit 540.
And is discharged to the lower plate 302 in the plate unit 300.

The main body frame base 600 is formed with a plurality of openings 614 penetrating in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction to the left of the left and right center of the lower rear wall 604 in front view, and on the upper side of the opening 614 and on the left and right sides of the front view. A through hole 615 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 614 of the main body frame base 600 is closed from the front side by a relay terminal plate cover 692 (see FIG. 66 and the like), and passes through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692, so that the lower rear wall 604
The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 8 of the board unit 800 attached to the rear surface
82 faces the front side. Further, the plurality of through holes 615 are formed on the substrate unit 800.
The sound from the speaker box 820 is transmitted to the front side of the main body frame base 600. The through holes 615 arranged on the left and right sides of the opening 614 are ventilation-type holes having a front wall on the front side.

In addition, the main body frame base 600 has a fixture support portion that rotatably supports a game board fixture 690 for detachably fixing the game board 4 near the upper front end of the lower rear wall 604 above the opening 614. 616 and a game board fixture 690 that projects forward from the lower right of the fixture support 616 when viewed from the front.
And a stopper 617 for restricting the rotational position of the motor.

Here, as shown in FIG. 61 and the like, the game board fixing tool 690 includes a fixing piece 690a and a fixing piece 690a that spread in a fan shape centering on an axis that is pivotally supported by the fixing tool support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600.
And an operation piece 690b extending outward from one end side in the circumferential direction (the side that becomes the rear end when rotated clockwise when viewed from the front). The game board fixing tool 690 is pivotally supported on the fixing tool support 616 of the main body frame base 600, and then the operation piece 690b is operated to rotate the game board fixing tool 690 in the clockwise direction in front view. And the fixed piece 690a is the game board mounting part 60.
6 protrudes upward from 6 and is inserted into the fixed recess 1121 of the game board 4 placed on the game board placement part 606, and it is possible to prevent the game board 4 from moving forward. It can be done. Further, the game board fixing tool 690 is configured such that the operation piece 690b comes into contact with the stopper 617, and the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front is regulated by contacting the stopper 617. It has become.

Furthermore, the main body frame base 600 is provided with a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 on the lower front surface of the cylinder lock through hole 611.
On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is opened (opened), the pressure is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. The main body frame base 600 includes a door frame opening switch 6.
A body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 is attached to the lower rear surface from the position where the 18 is attached (see FIG. 69). When the main body frame 3 is opened (opened), the pressure is released and the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

Further, the main body frame base 600 includes three pieces penetrating vertically in the front-rear direction on the inner side (axial support side) of the engagement groove 603 on the right side (open side) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 in front view. A door hook hole 620 and a lock locking hole 621 that penetrates in the front-rear direction under the door hook hole 620 at the lower end and is arranged in the left-right direction are provided. These three door hook holes 620 are respectively formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower ends in the vertical direction and in the approximate center in the vertical direction. The upper and center door hook holes 620 and the lock locking holes 621 have locking protrusions 1004 provided at the upper and lower ends of the locking device 1000.
The locking device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600 along the outer wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the rear side of the front side right side of the front end frame portion 602. When the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600, the lock device 100 is used.
The three door frame hook parts 1041 protrude forward from the three door hook holes 620, and the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 protrudes forward from the cylinder lock through hole 611. (See FIG. 63).

Furthermore, the main body frame base 600 descends slowly and obliquely downward from the upper right end toward the substantially center in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 in the rear view, and then the lower rear wall 604 at the substantially center in the left-right direction.
Is provided with a main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 that allows the game ball to circulate from the middle in the vertical direction to a position slightly above. The main body frame base ball passage 622 is configured such that the rear side is closed by the substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800,
As will be described in detail later, game balls that have circulated through the ball removal passage 741d in the prize ball device 740 are circulated.

A plurality of main body frame bases 600 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction at the rear end of the left side of the peripheral wall portion 605 when viewed from the back, and the back cover shaft support portion 623 rotatably supports the shaft support pins 906 of the back cover 900. A mounting portion 624 for mounting the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 diagonally to the upper left of the opening portion 614, and the right side (open side) of the peripheral wall portion 605 in front view.
And a lock mounting portion 625 for mounting and fixing the lock device 1000 on the side surface.

Although not described in detail, in addition to the above, the main body frame base 600 is appropriately provided with mounting bosses, mounting holes, and the like for mounting the hitting ball launcher 650, the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, and the like. Is formed.

[1-3B. Upper shaft support bracket and lower shaft support bracket]
Next, the upper shaft bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 are mainly shown in FIG.
And with reference to FIG. 67, it demonstrates. Upper shaft support bracket 630 and lower shaft support bracket 64 in the main body frame 3
0 can pivotally support the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 so that the door frame 5 can be opened and closed by attaching them to the metal fitting attaching portions 610 on the upper left and lower rear surfaces of the main body frame base 600 using the predetermined screws. At the same time, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be opened and closed.

First, the upper shaft support metal 630 is attached to the upper metal attachment part 610 of the main body frame base 600 and has a plate-like attachment part 631 extending in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-like extension extending forward from the upper end of the attachment part 631. A front extending portion 632, a shaft supporting pin 633 projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the front extending portion 632, and a shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 disposed on the left side in front of the shaft supporting pin 633.
The door frame shaft support hole 634 (see FIG. 63 and the like) penetrating in the up and down direction, and the front extension 6
A stopper 6 that hangs downward from the left end of the front view 32 and restricts the rotation end of the door frame 5 toward the open side.
35 (see FIGS. 65 and 107). In the upper shaft support 630, the mounting portion 631, the front extending portion 632, and the stopper 635 are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

On the other hand, the lower shaft support bracket 640 is disposed below the door frame shaft support bracket 642 for supporting the door frame 5 and supports the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. Body frame pivot bracket 6
44. The door frame shaft support bracket 642 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and extends in the vertical and horizontal directions.
a, a plate-like front extending portion 642b extending forward from the lower end of the mounting portion 642a, and a door into which the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted in the vicinity of the front end of the front extending portion 642b. A frame shaft support hole 642c and a stopper 642d that stands up from the left end of the front extension portion 642a in front view and restricts the rotation end of the door frame 5 toward the open side are provided. The door frame shaft support 642 is integrally formed with a mounting portion 642a, a front extension 642b, and a stopper 642d by bending a single metal plate.

Further, the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket attachment portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and extends from the bottom of the attachment portion 644a in a plate-like attachment portion 644a. A front extending portion 644b extending forward and a main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction in the vicinity of the front end of the front extending portion 644b are provided. The main body frame shaft support 644 is also integrally formed with an attachment portion 644a and a front extension portion 644b formed by bending a single metal plate.

The lower shaft support bracket 640 in this example includes the mounting portion 642a of the door frame shaft support bracket 642 and the main body frame shaft support bracket 6.
44, and the front extension 642b of the door frame shaft support bracket 642 and the front extension 644b of the body frame shaft support 644 are vertically moved. The main body frame base 600 is attached to the lower metal fitting attaching portion 610 with a predetermined distance in the direction.

The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the body frame shaft support hole (not shown) of the lower shaft support bracket 640 Are positioned on the same axis, and the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is provided.
So that the main body frame shaft support hole is fitted and inserted into the support protrusion 21 d of the lower support metal fitting 21 in the outer frame 2. Piece 21
c, the main body frame 3 is attached to the outer frame 2 by inserting the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft bracket 630 into the support hole 20c of the upper support bracket 20 in the outer frame 2. And can be pivoted so that it can be opened and closed.

Further, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the door frame shaft support of the lower shaft support bracket 640. Hardware 64
2c is positioned on the same axis, and the door frame shaft bracket 6 in the lower shaft bracket 640 is provided.
The lower shaft support portion 158 of the door frame 5 is placed on the front extension portion 642b of the door frame shaft support bracket 642 so that the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 642c of 42. The shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support 630 so that the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to be opened and closed. It has become. In this example, the shaft pin 155 on the upper side of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction. When the shaft pin 155 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630, the shaft pin 155 is inserted. Once the door shaft 5 is slid downward and the upper shaft support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension portion 632 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 are vertically overlapped, the shaft pin 155 is slid upward to open the door. It can be inserted into the frame shaft support hole 634.

[1-3C. Hitting ball launcher]
Next, the hitting ball launcher 650 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. FIG. 70 is a front perspective view of the ball striking device in the main body frame. In addition, FIG.
These are the back perspective views of the hitting ball launcher in a main part frame. This hitting ball launching device 650 can drive the game ball supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 of the door frame 5 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with strength according to the rotation operation of the handle device 500. is there.

In the ball hitting device 650 of the present embodiment, a metal plate launch base 652 attached to a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall 604 in the main body frame base 600, and a rotary drive shaft 654a projecting forward on the lower rear surface of the launch base 652 are projected. The launching solenoid 654, the hitting ball 656 fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654 so as to be integrally rotatable, the tip 658 fixed to the tip of the hitting ball 656, and the movement locus of the tip 658. A firing rail 6 that extends obliquely to the upper left when viewed from the front at a predetermined position on the top and is attached to the front surface of the firing base 652
60 and the base of the launch rail 660, the tip 658 at the tip of the hit ball 656 is allowed to pass between the launch rail 660, and at the same time, a gap through which the game ball cannot pass is formed to form the launch rail 660.
The ball stop piece 662 for holding the game ball at the base end of the ball, and the launch rail 660 by the ball stop piece 662
And a stopper 664 for restricting the hitting ball 656 (tip 658) from rotating toward the firing rail 660 from the hitting position where the game ball held at the base end can be hit.

The firing solenoid 654 in this ball hitting device 650 is not shown in detail,
The drive shaft 654a is reciprocally rotated at a strength (speed) corresponding to the rotation operation angle of the handle device 500. Further, the hitting ball basket 656 of the hitting ball launching device 650 includes a launching solenoid 65.
A fixed portion 656a fixed to the fourth drive shaft 654a, and a tip 658 extending from the fixed portion 656a in a gentle arc shape with the tip facing a normal direction with respect to the axis of the drive shaft 654a, and the tip 658 fixed to the tip. A flange portion 656b, and a stopper portion 656c that extends to the opposite side of the flange portion 656b with the fixing portion 656a interposed therebetween and can come into contact with the stopper 664 are provided. When the stopper portion 656c of the hitting ball basket 656 is in contact with the stopper 664, the tip of the tip 658 is rotated to the firing rail 660 side from the hitting position (the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). Being regulated.

The launch rail 660 of the hitting ball launcher 650 has a loose arc shape that is recessed downward so as to be substantially along the lower end extension line of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 (see FIG. 98).
The center is V-shaped with respect to the front-rear direction, and the game ball hit by the hitting ball 656 can be smoothly guided to the game board 4 side along the launch rail 660. ing. The firing rail 660 is formed by bending a metal plate.

Further, the hitting ball launcher 650 includes a stopper cover 666 that covers the front surface of the stopper 664 that can restrict the rotation end of the hitting ball 656 toward the hitting ball position, and a rotation of the hitting ball 656 at a position away from the hitting ball position. Stopper 6 that restricts the end (the rotation end in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front)
68. The hitting ball launching device 650 of this example has the stoppers 664 and 668 covered with rubber so that the impact when the hitting ball 656 abuts can be absorbed.
Generation of noise due to contact can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 63, FIG. 98, and the like, the hit ball launching device 650 of the present example is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. The upper end of the rear wall portion 604, that is, the game board mounting portion 606 (the lower side of the game board holding port 601)
A foul space 626 that extends downward with a predetermined width in the left-right direction is formed between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 in the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601. It has come to be. Then, the hit ball launching device 650 of this example hits the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by firing the game ball so as to jump over the foul space 626 on the left side of the front view from the launch rail 660. Can be done. As described above, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is positioned below the foul space 626, and the game area 1100 A game ball that became a foul ball without being driven in,
The foul space 626 falls and is received by the foul ball inlet 542e and discharged to the lower plate 302.

In addition, the hitting ball launching device 650 is configured such that the launching solenoid 654 is driven by the firing control unit 4120 with a driving strength according to the rotation operation of the handle device 500 and the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580. It is made to drive in synchronism with the drive. Specifically, in the ball feed unit 580 that supplies the game ball to the hit ball launcher 650, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON), the ball feed member 584 receives the game ball, and the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven from this state. Is released (OFF), the ball feed member 5
Since the game ball received by the ball 84 is sent to the hitting ball launcher 650 side, the launch solenoid 654 is driven (ON) substantially simultaneously with the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580.
Thus, the game ball can be smoothly supplied from the ball feed unit 580 to the rear end of the launch rail 660, and the game ball can be reliably fired by the rotation of the hitting ball cage 656.

[1-3D. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 79. 72 is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 73 is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 75 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 76 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball tank and the tank rail unit in the prize ball unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball device in the prize ball unit as seen from the exploded position. FIG. 78 is a rear view showing the relationship among the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. FIG. 79 is a cross-sectional view showing a sphere circulation passage in the prize ball unit.

The prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment stores a game ball supplied from the island facility side to the pachinko machine 1 in an island facility in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and then gives a predetermined payout instruction. Is paid out to the upper plate 301 of the pachinko machine 1. The prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball tank 720 which is attached to the upper rear surface of the prize ball base 710 and receives and stores game balls supplied from the island facility side. And a tank rail unit 730 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and arranged to send the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 to the downstream side, and a predetermined payout of the game balls arranged by the tank rail unit 730 The payout device 740 to be paid out based on the instruction, and the game ball paid out by the payout device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the dish unit, and the game ball to be paid out when the upper plate 301 is full of game balls And a full tank branching unit 770 capable of branching to the lower plate 302 side.

The prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball passage cover 780 that closes the rear opening of the prize ball passage 715 formed in the prize ball base 710, and a grounding bracket for grounding the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. 782 and an external terminal board 78 attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base 710
4 and an external terminal board cover 786 that covers the rear side of the external terminal board 784. The prize ball passage lid 780 in the prize ball unit 700 is for fastening and fixing the back cover engagement groove 780a for fixing the back cover 900 to the rear surface thereof, and the back cover 900 on the left side of the back cover engagement groove 780a in rear view. The back cover fastening hole 780b is formed (see FIGS. 73 and 75).

In the prize ball unit 700, the prize ball base 710 is formed in an inverted L shape so that the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 are along the front view, and the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail unit 730 are arranged on the upper side. In addition, a vertically long prize ball device 740 is arranged on the left side, and a full tank branch unit 770 is arranged below the prize ball device 740. Further, an external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate cover 786 are arranged immediately above the prize ball device 740 and above the tank rail unit 730 so as to be adjacent to the prize ball tank 720.

Next, the prize ball base 710 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a reverse L shape in front view so as to substantially correspond to the left side of the game board holding port 601 in front view with the upper side of the main body frame base 600 as shown in the figure. And is integrally formed of a transparent synthetic resin. This prize ball base 7
10, a peripheral wall portion 710 a extending rearward substantially along the outer periphery of the inverted L shape, and a peripheral wall portion 710.
a rear wall portion 710b extending inward from the rear end of a with a predetermined width and disposed substantially in the same plane. In this example, as shown in FIG. 75, the upper side of the peripheral wall 710 a is formed to extend backward from a position that is one step lower than the upper end of the prize ball base 710. The prize ball base 710 is located at a position where the rear wall portion 710b is deeper than the front end.
When attached to 0, a space capable of accommodating the game board 4 can be formed.

The prize ball base 710 includes a tank attachment part 711 for attaching the prize ball tank 720 to the upper side of the upper side of the peripheral wall part 710a, and the side of the tank attachment part 711 (right side in the rear view). External terminal plate mounting portion 712 for mounting the cover 786, a plurality of mounting locking portions 713 for mounting the tank rail unit 730 on the rear side of the rear end of the upper side of the rear wall portion 710b, and the rear side of the vertical side of the rear wall portion 710b A prize ball apparatus mounting portion 714 for attaching the prize ball apparatus 740, a prize ball passage 715 for guiding a game ball paid out from the prize ball apparatus 740 downward adjacent to the prize ball apparatus attachment portion 714, and a rear wall. And an attachment locking portion 716 for attaching the full tank branching unit 770 to the lower end of the portion 710b.

Further, the prize ball base 710 passes through the position of the prize ball device mounting portion 714 on the rear wall 710b in the front-rear direction and escapes through the payout motor 744 and the like that protrudes forward from the prize ball device 740.
17 and a back cover engaging groove 718 for fixing the back cover 900. Further, the detailed description of the prize ball base 710 is omitted, but the prize ball tank 720 and the prize ball device 740 are omitted.
Etc., or mounting holes or mounting bosses for mounting on the main body frame base 600 are formed at appropriate positions.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 76, the prize ball tank 720 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the top opened, and is a bottom wall portion that is substantially rectangular in plan view. 72
1 and an outer peripheral wall portion 722 that rises upward from the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 and has only a right rear portion (rear portion on the open side) projected rearwardly from the bottom wall portion 710 in a rectangular shape in plan view, A discharge port 723 formed by a portion projecting rearward from the bottom wall portion 721 at the rear right side in 722 and a plate-like shape from the left side (axial support side) in plan view of the discharge port 723 to the left end of the prize ball tank 720 , A rod-shaped shaft portion 725 extending rearward from the lower left side in plan view of the flange portion 724, a baseball tank formed near the proximal end of the shaft portion 725 and at both front ends of the outer peripheral wall 722. 72
And an attachment portion 726 for attaching 0 to the prize ball tank attachment portion 711 in the prize ball base 710.

In the prize ball tank 720, the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by the outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of game balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. The prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 is lowered toward the discharge port 723 so that the game ball on the bottom wall portion 721 rolls toward the discharge port 723. It has become.

The prize ball tank 720 includes two ball leveling members 7 that are rotatably supported by the shaft portion 725.
27. As shown in the figure, the spherical leveling member 727 is supported at one end side by a shaft portion 725 and holds a weight inside, and the other end side is suspended by its own weight. . The ball leveling member 727 is a tank rail unit 73 described later.
It is designed to hang down within 0 and can be used to level and align the game balls circulating in the tank rail unit 730. In addition, the collar portion 724 of the prize ball tank 720 is formed so as to cover substantially the upper half of the tank rail unit 730, so that the game ball can be prevented from overflowing from the tank rail unit 730. It is possible to prevent dust and the like from entering the rail unit 730.

Although not shown in detail, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 of the prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the left side (the side far from the discharge port 723) is lowered toward the right side in plan view,
The right side (the side close to the discharge port 723) in plan view is formed so as to be inclined toward the rear discharge port 723. Thereby, the flow of the game ball can be made smooth, and the prize ball tank 7
It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging in the ball 20 and to smoothly discharge the game ball from the discharge port 723 to the tank rail unit 730 side.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76, the tank rail unit 730 in the prize ball unit 700 includes a tank rail 731 disposed below the prize ball tank 720 and extending in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a bowl-like shape with a predetermined depth opened upward, and has a width (depth) in which the game balls can be aligned in two lines in the front-rear direction. The bottom is inclined so as to be low. The tank rail 731 includes a discharge port 731a (see FIG. 79) that opens downward at the left (shaft support side) end, a partition wall 731b that extends upward from the bottom at a substantially center in the front-rear direction, and a front end lower surface It protrudes further downward and the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710
And a plurality of locking protrusions 731c (see FIG. 74) locked from above.

The tank rail 731 has an end on the right side (open side) when viewed from the front, which is positioned immediately below the discharge port 723 in the prize ball tank 720. After receiving, it rolls to the left and can be delivered from the outlet 731a to the prize ball device 740 side. Further, the locking protrusion 731 of the tank rail 731
The tank rail 731, that is, the tank rail unit 730 can be attached to the winning ball base 710 by locking c to the mounting locking portion 713 of the winning ball base 710.

The tank rail unit 730 is continuous with the alignment gear 732 rotatably supported on the upper portion of the discharge port 731 a of the tank rail 731, the gear cover 733 covering the upper portion of the alignment gear 732, and the right end of the gear cover 733 when viewed from the front. A ball retainer plate 734 that closes the upper portion of the tank rail 731 and a ball stop piece that can be moved forward and backward in the tank rail 731 and can stop the game ball in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port 731a. 735 and tank rail 73
1 and a ground plate 736 that can be brought into contact with the game balls in the tank rail 731. The alignment gear 732 has a partition wall 731b of the tank rail 731 as illustrated.
Are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the game balls partitioned by two lines. Further, the ball retainer plate 734 has an attachment portion 7 to which a ball stop piece 735 is attached at the upper portion.
34a and two slits 7 which penetrate in the up-down direction and through which the protruding piece 735a of the ball stop piece 735 can be inserted
34b.

In this tank rail unit 730, two ball leveling members 727 pivotally supported on the prize ball tank 720 are inserted from above into the upstream side (open side) of the ball presser plate 734. The game balls discharged from the outlet 723 of the prize ball tank 720 into the tank rail 731 by the ball leveling member 727 are leveled and aligned in two rows along the partition wall 731b. It can be done. Further, the ball presser plate 734 is for forcibly making the game balls that have not been made one level by the ball leveling member 727, and the gap with the bottom of the tank rail 731 becomes narrower toward the discharge port 731a side. It is attached to the tank rail 731.

As shown in the drawing, the alignment gear 732 of the tank rail unit 730 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer periphery, and is supported so that the pitch of the teeth in the pair of alignment gears 732 is shifted by half a pitch. As a result, when the upper part of the game balls flowing down the tank rail 731 flow down to the discharge port 732 on the downstream side while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 732, the game balls arranged in two rows are alternately awarded one by one. To the device 740.

A narrow groove penetrating vertically is formed at the bottom of the tank rail 731 so that foreign matters such as dust rolling along with the game ball in the tank rail 731 fall downward from the narrow groove. It has become. The ground plate 736 disposed on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 is not shown in detail, but is grounded to the outside via the grounding metal fitting 782 and the grounding connector of the power supply board 851. In the tank rail 731, the game ball is grounded 73
By contacting with 6, the charged static electricity can be removed.

In addition, the tank rail unit 730 rotates the ball stop piece 735 that is rotatably attached to the attachment portion 734 a of the ball retainer plate 734, and the protrusion 735 a of the ball stop piece 735 is slit 734.
By inserting into the tank rail 730 through a, the two rows of flow paths in the tank rail 731 can be closed by the protruding piece 735a, and the supply of game balls to the prize ball device 740 side is stopped. Can be done.

Further, in the tank rail unit 730, the tank rail 731 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the state of a game ball or the like in the tank rail 731 can be visually recognized from the outside.

Subsequently, the prize ball device 740 in the prize ball unit 700 is the tank rail unit 730.
The game balls discharged and supplied from the discharge port 731a of the dish unit 30 based on a predetermined payout instruction
It is for paying out to the 0 upper plate 301. As shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, the prize ball device 740 includes a unit base 741 extending in the vertical direction attached to the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the prize ball base 710. Unit base 7 in prize ball device 740
41, on the rear surface side, as shown in the figure, a supply passage 741a that opens to the upper end and extends to a position slightly lower than the center in the vertical direction with a width slightly wider than the outer shape of the game ball, and a supply passage 741a A distribution space 741b having a space of a predetermined width that communicates with the lower end, and a prize ball that communicates with the lower left side (open side) of the distribution space 741b and that opens to the left side surface of the rear view when bent in a substantially square shape. Passage 741c
And a ball extraction passage 741d that communicates with the lower right side (axis support side) lower end of the distribution space 741b and extends downward and opens at the lower end. A supply passage 741a of the unit base 741,
The distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d are formed in a state opened rearward.

The prize ball device 740 of this example is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 and is attached to the unit base 7.
A back cover 742 whose length in the vertical direction is shorter than 41, a plate-like motor support plate 743 disposed below the back cover 742, and a rotating shaft 744a disposed on the front side of the motor support plate 743. Dispensing motor 74 fixed to unit base 741 so as to protrude rearward from 743
4 and a motor support plate 743 fixed to a rotation shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 so as to be integrally rotatable.
A first gear 745 disposed on the rear side, a second gear 746 meshed with the first gear 745 and pivotally supported by the unit base 741, and a second gear 746 meshed with the second gear 746 and pivotally supported by the unit base 741. The three gears 747 and the third gear 747 rotate integrally with the payout rotating body 748 disposed in the distribution space 741c of the unit base 741, and the payout rotating body 748 rotates integrally with the third gear 747 on the opposite side. And a rotation detection board 749 having a plurality of (three in this example) detection slits 749a that are fixed in the circumferential direction at regular intervals.

Further, the prize ball device 740 is attached to the unit base 741 and detects the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a, and the number of game balls attached to the unit base 741 and circulating in the prize ball passage 741c. A counting sensor 751 for measuring the rotation angle, a rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a of the rotation detection board 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748, and a rotation angle sensor 752 that is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742. Sensor board 75
3, a payout motor 744, a ball break switch 750, a counting sensor 751, and a prize ball relay board 754 that relays the connection between the rotation angle sensor 752 and the payout control board 4110 and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742. Yes.

Further, the prize ball device 740 includes a board cover 755 that covers the prize ball relay board 754 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742, a first gear 745, a second gear 746, and a third gear 747 (rotation detection board 749). ), And a gear cover 756 that covers the sensor substrate 753 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 741 with the back cover 742 interposed therebetween, and a supply passage 7 of the unit base 741
A supply passage grounding metal fitting 757 that can come into contact with a game ball circulating in 41a, and a motor support plate 74
3 and the payout motor 744 is fixed to the unit base 741 and the payout motor 744
And a detachable button 759 for detachably supporting the back cover 742 with respect to the unit base 741.

The prize ball device 740 of this example has a back cover 742 attached to the rear side of the unit base 741, so that a supply passage 741a, a distribution space 741b, a prize ball passage 741c, and a ball removal passage 741d.
The opened rear end of is closed. Further, the unit base 741 has a shape in which the position below the upper end of the supply passage 741a temporarily bulges backward,
The momentum of the game ball discharged and dropped from the tank rail unit 730 can be reduced. Further, the unit base 741 is partially cut out at one side (left side in the rear view) of the lower side of the supply passage 741a from the position bulged rearward and outside the position where the supply passage 741a is cut out. A switch mounting portion 741e for mounting the ball break switch 750, a sensor mounting portion 741f for mounting the counting sensor 751 in the middle of the prize ball passage 741c, and a front and rear direction penetrating below the prize ball passage 741a. A motor insertion hole 741g that is formed and into which the payout motor 744 can be inserted.

By attaching the ball break switch 750 to the switch mounting portion 741e of the unit base 741, the operation piece of the ball break switch 741e forms a part of the side wall of the supply passage 741a and exists in the supply passage 741a. When the operating piece is pressed by the playing ball, the presence or absence of the playing ball in the supply passage 741a can be detected by the cut ball switch 741e. In a state where the game ball in the supply passage 741e is not detected by the ball break switch 741e (out of ball state), the payout motor 744 is prevented from rotating, and it is determined that the ball is out of the player or the hall. It is notified to the side.

The unit base 741 includes a second gear 746 and a third gear 747 (dispensing rotary body 7).
48) and the switch mounting portion 7 in the supply passage 741a.
41e and a distribution space 741b, and a grounding metal mounting part 741i for mounting the supply path grounding metal 757, and a detachable button 759 for detachably supporting the back cover 742, which is disposed on the upper part of the unit base 741. Button support hole 741j.
The unit base 741 is configured such that the rear surface of the supply passage ground metal fitting 757 can come into contact with the game ball in the supply passage 741a by attaching the supply passage ground metal fitting 757 to the ground metal fitting attachment portion 741i. The front surface of the supply path grounding metal fitting 757 is in contact with the rear surface of the lower end of the U-shaped earthing metal fitting 782, and the static electricity of the game balls flowing through the supply path 741 a is removed via the supply path grounding metal fitting 757. Can be done.

The back cover 742 of the prize ball device 740 has a vertically long plate shape, and its upper end bulges backward. In the upper part of the back cover 742, a button insertion hole 742 for inserting a detachable button 759 is inserted.
a, a relay board mounting part 742b for attaching the prize ball relay board 754 and the board cover 755 to the substantially central rear surface in the vertical direction, and a sensor board 75 disposed below the relay board mounting part 742b.
3 is provided with a sensor board mounting portion 742c for mounting 3 and a through hole 742d through which the payout rotating body 748 can pass. The relay board mounting portion 742b of the back cover 742 is provided on the unit base 7
It is formed so as to be located on the rear side of the grounding metal mounting portion 741i.

Further, the motor support plate 743 of the prize ball device 740 is an aluminum plate in this example, and comes into contact with the metal motor housing of the payout motor 744.
The heat generated at 44 can be easily released.

As shown in FIG. 78, the payout rotator 748 of the prize ball device 740 includes three recesses 748a each having a size that can accommodate one game ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. 7
As the 48 rotates, the game balls supplied from the supply passage 741a are recessed one by one, 748a.
And can be paid out toward the prize ball passage 741c or the ball removal passage 741d. The three detection slits 749a of the rotation detecting board 749 that rotate integrally with the payout rotating body 748 are formed at positions corresponding to the space between the recesses 748a of the payout rotating body 748, respectively.
By detecting the detection slit 749a by the rotation angle sensor 752, the payout rotating body 748
The rotation position of can be detected.

The award ball apparatus 740 of this example has a payout motor when a payout command from the main control board 4100, a loan command from the CR unit 6 or the like is input to the payout control board 4110, or the ball removal switch 860b is operated. 744 rotates so that a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out to the player side (upper plate 301) or discharged to the game hall side (rear side of the pachinko machine 1). When the rotation shaft 744 a of the payout motor 744 is driven to rotate, the first gear 745 fixed to the rotation shaft 744 a rotates, and at the same time, the second gear 746 that meshes with the first gear 745 rotates, and further the second gear 746. Is rotated. The third gear 747 is fixed with a payout rotating body 748 on the front side and a rotation detecting board 749 on the rear side so as to be integrally rotatable.
8 and the rotation detection board 749 are rotated.

As shown in FIG. 78, in the prize ball device 740, a payout rotating body 748 is rotatably supported at the approximate center of the distribution space 741b. Then, a payout rotating body 74 is provided by a payout motor 744
When 8 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear, the game ball in the supply passage 741a is paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side, and the prize ball passage 741c is rotated by the rotation of the payout rotating body 748. The game balls paid out to the side are counted one by one by the counting sensor 751 and then delivered to the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. On the other hand, when the payout rotator 748 is rotated clockwise by the payout motor 744, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out toward the ball discharge passage 741d.
The game balls paid out to the ball removal passage 741d side by 48 are drawn from the lower end of the ball removal passage 741d into a ball removal passage 778 of a full tank sorting unit 770 described later, a body frame base ball removal passage 622 of the body frame base 600, and a substrate. Opening 812 of substrate unit base 810 in unit 800
, And through the discharge passage 842 of the power supply board box holder 840, it can be discharged to the outside outside of the pachinko machine 1.

Note that the unit base 741 in the prize ball apparatus 740 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and even when assembled in the main body frame 3, the award is given from the front side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710. The inside of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, the ball removal passage 741d and the like of the ball device 740 can be visually recognized, and a defect such as a ball clogging can be easily found. .

Next, with reference to FIG.
This will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 79. FIG. The full tank sorting unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 is attached to the lower end of the prize ball base 710 and guides the game ball paid out to the prize ball path 741c side of the prize ball unit 740 to the dish unit 300. When the game ball is full in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, the plate unit 300
The game balls can be distributed so as to be paid out to the lower plate 302.

The full tank branching unit 770 is fixed to the rear surface of the lower end of the prize ball base 710 at the upper part of the rear end and the latching part 770a latched to the attachment latching part 716 of the prize ball base 710 at the substantially upper center in the front-rear direction. Fixing portion 770b. The full tank branching unit 770 has a locking portion 770.
a is locked to the mounting locking portion 716 of the prize ball base 710 from the rear side, thereby mounting locking portion 71.
6, the full branching unit 770 can be attached and fixed to the lower end of the prize ball base 710 by fixing the fixing portion 770 b to the prize ball base 710 with a predetermined screw. It is like that.

Further, as shown in the figure, the full tank branching unit 770 is formed in a box shape that becomes lower as it goes from the rear end to the front end, and opens upward at a substantially horizontal center in the upper part of the rear end. A prize ball receiving port 771 for receiving a game ball flowing down the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710 and a branch space 772 arranged below the prize ball receiving port 771 and extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 79). And a normal passage 773 (see FIG. 79) for guiding the game ball from directly under the prize ball receiving port 771 to the front side in the branch space 772, and a game ball that has circulated through the normal passage 773 forward and the front end of the front end. A normal ball outlet 774 opened at the right end of the view and a full passage 775 (see FIG. 79) that guides the game ball toward the front side from a position on the right side of the rear view rather than just below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772. A), a fill-up passage 775 game ball that has flowed through the discharge forward a full sphere outlet 776 which opens in a front view the left side of the normal ball outlet 774, a.

Furthermore, the full tank branching unit 770 has a ball receiving port 777 that opens upward at the left end of the upper part of the rear end in a front view and receives a game ball flowing down the ball extracting passage 741d of the prize ball device 740,
A ball extraction passage 778 (see FIG. 79) for guiding the game ball received at the ball extraction port 777 to the front side, and a game ball flowing through the ball extraction passage 778 is discharged forward, and the normal ball outlet 774 is at the left end in front view. And a ball outlet 779 opened at a position behind the full ball outlet 776.

When the full tank branch unit 770 of this example is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3,
A normal ball outlet 774 and a full ball outlet 776 communicate with the first ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5, respectively, and communicate with each other from the normal ball outlet 774. The released game balls are supplied to the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 through the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540, and the full ball outlet 776.
The game balls released from the player are supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. The ball outlet 779 is formed so as to communicate with the upper right side of the main body frame base ball outlet passage 622 in the main body frame base 600 so that the game ball released from the ball outlet 779 is released from the main body frame base 600. It is delivered to the main body frame base ball extraction passage 622.

The full tank branching unit 770 is configured such that a game ball paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 is received by the prize ball receiving port 771 via the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. In the normal state, the game ball that has entered the prize ball receiving port 771 hangs down the branch space 772 and flows down into the normal passage 773 arranged immediately below the prize ball receiving port 771. Then, the game ball that has flowed into the normal passage 773 passes from the normal outlet 774 to the foul cover unit 540.
The first ball inlet 542a enters the upper plate 301 from the first ball outlet 544a through the first ball passage 542b.

By the way, when the game ball is further paid out from the prize ball unit 700 (the prize ball device 740) in a state where the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 is full of game balls, the first ball exit of the foul cover unit 540 is provided. The game balls that can no longer come out of the upper plate 301 side from 544a stagnate in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and eventually, the full tank branch unit 770.
The normal passage 773 upstream through the normal ball outlet 774 at the same time is also filled. In this state,
A game ball that has entered the branch space 772 from the prize ball receiving port 771 cannot enter the normal passage 773, starts moving in the lateral direction in the branch space 772, and the game ball that has moved in the lateral direction is full. The tray unit 3 enters the tongue passage 775 and passes from the full bulb exit 776 through the second bulb inlet 542c, the second bulb passage 542d, and the second bulb outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540.
00 is supplied to the lower plate 302.

The full tank branch unit 770 of the present example is formed entirely of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, foreign matter such as dust and debris that has entered the full tank branch unit 770, the occurrence of clogging, etc. can be easily found without disassembling the full tank branch unit 7700. .

In this way, the full tank branching unit 770 of this example automatically plays the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 until the game balls are full in the upper plate 301 until the game balls are full. Since the upper plate is full like the conventional pachinko machine, the game ball is not supplied to the ball hitting device by operating the ball pulling button on the upper plate. It is possible to avoid interruption of game ball driving, and it is possible to eliminate the annoyance during the game and suppress the interest in the game from being reduced.

In addition, as described above, the full tank branching unit 770 of this example branches the path of the game ball to be paid out immediately below the prize ball device 740, that is, at the rear part of the pachinko machine 1, when the upper plate 301 becomes full. Since the game ball staying in the normal passage 773 of the full tank branching unit 770 is paid out to the upper plate 301, the game ball in the upper plate 301 and the game ball in the normal passage 773 are used as a ball hitting device. A game ball that can be directly struck by 650, and the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301 is substantially the sum of the capacity of the upper plate 301 and the capacity of the normal passage 773. That is, even if the capacity of the upper plate 301 is made smaller than the capacity of the upper plate in the conventional pachinko machine, the capacity of the normal passage 773 is added, so that the same amount of game balls as in the conventional case are stored in the upper plate 301. Can do. Therefore, the door frame 5 is relatively reduced by making the upper plate 301 smaller.
The game window 101 can be made larger (wider), and a wider game area 110 can be obtained.
A pachinko machine 1 having 0 can be obtained, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to a player who plays, and the player can be entertained by a wide game area 1100. ing.

Furthermore, since the two normal ball outlets 774 and the full tank ball outlets 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 are arranged side by side on the left and right sides, the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray (the first inlet) Even when there is only one ball inlet 542a and second ball inlet 542c), the game ball can be sent to the door frame 5 side without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branching unit 770).
Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to be able to correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage dishes without changing the flow path of the game ball (full tank branching unit 770) in the main body frame 3. And it can suppress that the cost concerning the lineup of the pachinko machine 1 provided with the door frame 5 from which the number of storage dishes differs is increased.

In addition, as described above, even if the number of storage trays provided in the door frame 5 is changed, it can be handled without changing the main body frame 3, so that the entire pachinko machine 1 according to the change of the door frame 5 is achieved. Thus, various pachinko machines 1 can be provided at low cost.

Furthermore, a game ball sent from the normal ball outlet 774 to the door frame 5 side through the normal passage 773 is preferentially driven into the game area 1100, and the door frame 5 having only one storage tray. Even if it is exchanged, the game ball paid out from the prize ball device 740 can be immediately sent to the storage tray through the normal passage 773 and the normal ball outlet 774, so the time lag from payout to storage can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player due to a lack of game balls for driving, and to sufficiently cope with the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays. .

In addition, as long as the upper plate 301 is not full, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 are sent to the upper plate 301, so that the frequency of transferring the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 to the upper plate 301 is reduced. This makes it possible to devote the player to a game ball driving operation and the like, and to prevent the player's interest in games from being reduced.

Even if the normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 are arranged side by side and the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray, the first sphere The position of the lower end of the receiving port corresponding to the inlet 542a or the like is set to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 having two storage plates.
It is possible to prevent the depth of the storage tray from becoming shallow, and to deepen the storage tray so that a sufficient amount of game balls can be stored. A door frame with a different number of storage trays that can be secured without causing the player to frequently play games without worrying about the storage amount, and without changing the main body frame 3 side. 5 and the increase in the cost for changing the model of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, the position where the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branching unit 770 branches from the normal passage 773 is branched at a position as close as possible to the prize ball device 740.
The amount of game balls stored in the normal passage 773 from the normal ball exit 774 to the branch position of the full tank passage 775 even if 1 is full of game balls and the game ball can no longer come out from the normal ball exit 774 Can be increased as much as possible, and the substantial amount of game balls stored in the upper plate 301 can be increased as much as possible. In addition, in the case where only one storage tray is provided in the door frame 5, even if the storage tray becomes full of game balls and the game balls can no longer come out from the normal ball exit 773 or the full tank exit 776, Since the position where the full tank path 775 branches from the normal path 773 is arranged as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, not only the normal path 773 but also the full tank path 775 has many game balls. Can be stored, and the substantial amount of game balls stored in the storage tray can be increased as much as possible. Therefore, even if the number of storage trays provided on the door frame 5 side is different, the storage amount of the game balls in each door frame 5 is maximized without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branching unit 770). The pachinko machine 1 can be increased to a limit and can sufficiently cope with different door frames 5.

In addition, the normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 are wide enough to allow game balls to circulate in a plurality of rows, and the stopping amount (reserved amount) of the game balls in the full tank branch unit 770 is determined. Since it can be increased, even if the number of storage dishes provided in the door frame 5 is different, it is possible to prevent the substantial storage amount of the game balls in the full tank branch unit 770 from decreasing. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 that can correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage dishes without changing the flow path of the game balls in the main body frame 3 can be obtained.

Moreover, since the inside of the normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 can be seen from the outside by forming the full tank branch unit 770 with transparent resin, the game ball is clogged in the full tank branch unit 770 and a problem occurs. In this case, it is possible to easily find the place where the ball is clogged from the outside of the full tank branching unit 770, and it is possible to solve the problem at an early stage and increase the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1.

[1-3E. Ball exit opening / closing unit]
Next, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 80 is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame.
FIG. 81 is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG.
These are explanatory drawings which show the relationship between the ball | bowl exit opening / closing unit in a main body frame, and the foul cover unit in a door frame. The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment has a mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end of the main body frame base 600 in the lower rear wall portion 604 when viewed from the front.
When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the prize ball unit 700 is attached.
The normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in FIG. is there.

The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is attached to a mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 so as not to protrude from the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604. A plate-shaped opening / closing shutter 792 slidably held by the shutter base 791, an opening / closing crank 793 for sliding the opening / closing shutter 792 in the up / down direction, and the opening / closing shutter 7 via the opening / closing crank 793.
And an open / close spring 794 that urges 92 to rise.

The shutter base 791 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 has a pair of slide grooves 791a extending in the vertical direction for holding the open / close shutter 792 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction so as to protrude upward from the upper end of the shutter base 791; A rectangular opening 791b that penetrates between the pair of slide grooves 791a in the front-rear direction, and a crank that is disposed in front of the left end portion in front view and supports the open / close crank 793 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. Support part 791c
And a spring locking portion 791d for locking one end (upper end) of the opening / closing spring 794. The crank support 791c of the shutter base 791 is disposed on the left side of the opening 791b in front view, and the spring locking portion 791d is disposed in the vicinity of the upper portion on the left side from the center in the left-right direction in front view.

The opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a flat shutter body 792a and a pair of sliding protrusions (not shown) that protrude from the front surface of the shutter body 792a and slide in the slide groove 791a of the shutter base 791. And a horizontally elongated drive hole 792b that is disposed between the pair of sliding protrusions at a position facing the opening 791b of the shutter base 791 and penetrates in the front-rear direction.

Further, the opening / closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is supported by a crank support 791c of the shutter base 791 so as to be pivotable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction.
3a, a driving rod 793b extending from the outer periphery on the right side of the shaft portion 793a in the front view to the right and extending to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction of the opening 791b, and an opening / closing shutter 792 A drive pin 793c that is slidably inserted into the drive hole 792b, a contact portion 793d that extends downward from the outer periphery on the lower side in front view of the shaft portion 793a, and has a spherical tip.
A spring locking portion 793e formed on the upper surface of the driving rod 793b and locking the other end (lower end) of the opening / closing spring 794.

In this example, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is configured such that the shutter base 791 and the opening / closing shutter 792 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and are arranged on the rear side through the opening / closing shutter 792 even when the opening / closing shutter 792 is raised. The normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 in the full tank branching unit 770 are visible.

In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 of this example, the driving pin 793c of the opening / closing crank 793 rotates in the vertical direction at the same time as the opening / closing crank 793 rotates about the axis extending in the front-rear direction. Open / close shutter 792 through a drive hole 792b into which is inserted
Slides up and down. In the state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 contacts the opening / closing operation piece 542 g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 with the contact portion 793 d of the opening / closing crank 793. The contact portion 793d is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view against the urging force of the opening / closing spring 794, and the drive pin 793c rotates in the clockwise direction in the front view together with the contact portion 793d. By moving, the open / close shutter 792 is lowered so that the normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branching unit 770 can be opened.

When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 from this state, the contact portion 793c of the opening / closing crank 793 is provided.
When the door frame 5 is released from contact with the opening / closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540, the opening / closing crank 793 is rotated counterclockwise by the biasing force of the opening / closing spring 794, and at the same time, the opening / closing shutter 792 is opened. Rises so that the normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branching unit 770 can be closed.

As described above, in response to opening / closing of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 automatically switches the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700. Since it can be opened and closed, even if the door frame 5 is opened with the game ball remaining in the full tank branching unit 770, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 are opened.
It is possible to prevent the game ball from spilling.

[1-3F. Substrate unit]
Next, the substrate unit 800 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 83 to 89. FIG. 83 is a front perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 84 is a rear perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as seen from the front. Furthermore, FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as seen from the exploded position. FIG. 87 is a perspective view for explaining the operation of the standing wall portion of the power supply board box in the board unit. 88A is a cross-sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and FIG. 88B is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as seen from the front. FIG. 89 (A) is a front view of the launch power supply board box, and FIG.
It is sectional drawing of the AA line shown to A).

The board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 includes a board unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 of the main body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the rear left side of the board unit base 810, and a board unit base. Of the power supply board box 830 attached to the rear face of the right end of the front view 810, the power supply board box holder 840 attached to the rear face of the board unit base 810 so as to surround the fired power supply board box 830 from the rear side, The speaker box 8 is attached to the rear surface and the rear end
20, a power supply board box 850 formed in a size substantially flush with the rear end, a payout control board box 860 attached to the rear face of the power supply board box 850 and the speaker box 820, and the front of the payout control board box 860 A terminal board box 840 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end of the view, and a main-side relay terminal board 880 and a peripheral-side relay terminal board 882 attached to the front surface of the board unit base 810 are provided. .

As shown in the figure, the substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800 of the present example is configured to extend in the left-right direction, and the substantially central portion in the left-right direction is stepped downward and gradually tilted upward as it goes to the left and right ends. A wall-shaped shielding wall portion 811 protruding forward from the front surface, an opening portion 812 that is disposed above the position of the shielding wall portion 811 that is one step lower in the center in the left-right direction, penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the lower side of the shielding wall portion 811 And a board mounting portion 813 for mounting the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, which is formed on the front surface in the vicinity of the left end when viewed from the front, and a rectangular shape that is horizontally long in the front-rear direction on the left side of the board mounting portion 813 when viewed from the front. A plurality of vertically long slits penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the penetrating cylindrical duct portion 814 and the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 fixed to the rear surface. A hole 815, a rear view left (front view on the right) upper portion of the rear face to be opened rearward and upward firing power front the can accommodate box accommodating portion 8 of the substrate boxes 830
16.

The board unit base 810 is formed such that the shielding wall portion 811 is along the lower side of the main body frame base ball passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 in the main body frame base 600. It is possible to prevent the game ball from dropping downward from the base ball removal passage 622 and to increase the strength of the board unit base 810. Further, the board base unit 810 sends the game balls flowing down the main body frame base ball removal passage 622 to the power supply board box holder 840 disposed on the rear side of the board unit base 810 through the opening 812 penetrating in the front-rear direction. Be able to.

The board unit base 810 includes a main-side relay terminal plate 880 and a peripheral-side relay terminal plate 88.
2 is disposed at a position corresponding to the opening 614 having a rectangular opening in the main body frame base 600, and the main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 are disposed on the substrate-mounting portion 813. In the state in which the main frame terminal 600 is attached, the main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 face the front side from the opening 614 of the main body frame base 600. Further, the board unit base 810 can transmit sound from the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 to the front side satisfactorily by the duct portion 814 and the plurality of through holes 815.

Further, the substrate unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the front box housing portion 843 of the power supply board box holder 840 in which the box housing portion 816 is arranged on the rear side. Thus, a housing recess for housing the launching power supply board box 830 can be formed.

The speaker box 820 in the board unit 800 is literally provided with a speaker 821 attached facing the front side. The speaker box 820 includes a speaker 821.
At the same time as covering the rear side of the speaker 821, a horizontally long rectangular opening 8 is formed on the left side of the speaker 821 in front view.
22 is formed. Although not shown in detail, the opening 822 communicates with the space behind the speaker 821 through a predetermined labyrinth-like passage, thereby inverting the phase of the sound behind the speaker 821 and moving forward. The bass-reflex type speaker box is capable of emitting a deep bass to the diameter of the speaker 821. Note that the duct portion 814 in the board unit base 810 is connected to the opening 822 of the speaker box 820.
The sound radiated from the opening 822 can be transmitted well forward.

The launch power supply board box 830 in the board unit 800 is formed in a box shape with the rear opened, and includes a launch power supply board 831 attached so as to close the rear end opening. The launching power supply board box 830 accommodates various electronic components attached to the launching power supply board 831 and has slits 830 formed on the upper surface and the lower surface.
Heat from an electronic component or the like can be released to the outside via a.

This launching power supply board box 830 is a box housing portion 81 of the board unit base 810.
6 and a front box housing portion 844 of a power supply board box holder 840, which will be described later, are accommodated so as to be detachable from above. Thus, in the state where the main body frame 3 is assembled, if a problem occurs in the launch power supply board box 830, the launch power supply board box 830 can be easily detached from the front side of the main body frame 3 to be replaced or repaired. (See FIG. 63).

Further, the launch power supply board box 830 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 89, the launch power supply board 831 includes a DC / DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 for charging and discharging power from the DC / DC converter 831a. The combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is supplied to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 and driven. This launch power supply board box 830 includes a DC / DC converter 831 mounted on the launch power supply board 831.
In order to release the heat generated by a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the outside, slits 830a serving as heat radiation holes are formed on the upper and lower surfaces.

In addition, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the launch power supply board 831 is an electronic component that is more easily damaged by heat than the DC / DC converter 831a, the side surface of the launch power supply board box 830 on which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is disposed is provided as a heat dissipation hole. A slit 830a is formed. Further, the launch power supply board box 830 has an internal space for the DC / DC converter 83.
A partition wall 830b partitioning into two spaces, a space for accommodating 1a and a space for accommodating electrolytic capacitor SC0, is integrally formed from the bottom surface to the end opening edge so as to connect the upper surface inner wall and the lower surface inner wall. Has been. Accordingly, when the launch power supply board 831 is attached to the end opening of the launch power supply board box 830 and the internal space of the launch power supply board box 830 is closed, the internal space of the launch power supply board box 830 accommodates the electrolytic capacitor SC0 by the partition wall 830b. Two spaces, an accommodation space 830c for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a, and an accommodation space 830d for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a are formed.
Functions as a heat insulating wall that blocks heat from entering and exiting the housing space 830c for housing the battery and the housing space 830d for housing the DC / DC converter 831a.

The heat in the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is a slit as a heat radiation hole formed in each of the upper surface, the side surface, and the lower surface that communicates the accommodation space 830c with the outside air. By being discharged to the outside via 830a, the released heat can be prevented from entering the accommodation space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is accommodated. Therefore, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is D
It is possible to prevent transmission to the C / DC converter 831a. Further, the heat in the accommodation space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a is a heat radiation hole formed in the upper surface and the lower surface that communicate the accommodation space 830d with the outside air, respectively. As a result, the released heat can be prevented from entering the storage space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is stored. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a from being transmitted to the electrolytic capacitor SC0.

In the present embodiment, the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating a combined current that flows to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 are not provided on the power board 851, but are fired separately from the power board 851. By providing the power supply board 831, the size of the launch power supply board 831 can be made smaller than the size of the power supply board 851. Therefore, it becomes easy to handle by reducing the size of the launch power supply substrate 831 and the replacement work of the launch power supply substrate 831 is facilitated, which contributes to shortening the time spent for the replacement work. In this replacement operation, the launch power supply board box 830 can be exchanged in a state where the launch power supply board 831 remains attached to the end opening of the launch power supply board box 830, that is, the launch power supply board box 830.

Further, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is operated and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches the end of its life and the driving firing by the launching solenoid 654 suddenly becomes impossible to launch and the game has to be interrupted, the replacement work of the firing power supply board 831 is not performed. By being able to do easily, the interruption of the game can be eliminated at an early stage. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the impossibility of firing due to the life of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 very easily, and it is possible to eliminate the interruption of the game due to the impossibility of firing at an early stage and resume the game, thereby reducing the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

It should be noted that the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831 deteriorates and reaches the end of life due to repeated charging and discharging, for example, at a frequency of 100 times per minute every time driving firing by the firing solenoid 654 is performed. On the other hand, the power supply board 851 creates a DC power supply from the AC power supply of an island facility such as a game hall, but is not repeatedly charged and discharged at the same frequency as the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the launch power supply board 831. Compared with the launch power supply substrate 831, its lifetime is extremely long. In other words, the fired power supply board 831 reaches the end of its life due to deterioration due to charging and discharging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, whereas the power supply board 831
51 reaches the end of its life due to aging. The DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the merged current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are provided on the launch power supply board 831 separate from the power supply board 851. Thus, electronic components accompanying long-term aging can be concentrated on the power supply board 851.
As a result, the electronic component SC0 having a short lifetime can be replaced with an electronic component accompanying a long-term aging.
Can be prevented from being exchanged together.

Further, a launch power supply board 83 provided with an electrolytic capacitor SC0 for controlling the hit ball launcher 650.
1 can be removed from the front side through the game board holding port 601 for holding the game board 4, so that even if it is illegal to change to the electrolytic capacitor SC0 having a different capacity in order to change the driving characteristics, In order to detach 831, it is necessary to remove the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601, and it is difficult to perform fraud by making it difficult to replace the launch power board 831. The launch power board 831 is illegally modified. In addition to being able to deter fraud that deliberately changes the driving strength that has been optimized, it makes it difficult for the fraud to occur and the player who has been frustrated develops into fraud such as fraud The pachinko machine 1 can be controlled.

In addition, since the launch power supply board 831 can be exchanged so as to be removable, the launch power supply board 831 can be replaced even if the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the launch power supply board 831 is illegal.
31 can be exchanged immediately, fraud can be resolved, the interruption period of the game can be shortened as much as possible, and it can be premature to feel frustrated or disappointing due to the interruption of the game Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

Further, the electrolytic capacitor SC in the firing control unit 4120 that controls the ball hitting device 650.
The launching power supply board 831 having 0 is detachable from the front side through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 holding the game board 4, and when the game board 4 is exchanged due to a model change or the like, the launch control is performed. Since the firing power supply board 831 (launching power supply board box 830) of the unit 4120 can be easily replaced, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and the DC / DC converter 831a that can realize driving characteristics matching the concept of the new model to be replaced are provided. By changing to the launch power supply board 831 provided, the hitting characteristics of the hitting ball launcher 650 previously provided in the main body frame 3 can be matched with the new game board 4. Therefore, the game ball driving characteristics are set to the game board 4
Therefore, it is possible to easily enjoy the game with the new game board 4 and to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating.

In addition, since the launch power supply board 831 of the launch control unit 4120 can be detached from the front side, when replacing the launch power supply board 831, there is no need to open the main body frame 3 for island facilities such as a game hall, It is possible to simplify the time and labor required for exchange, and it is possible to exchange in a short time and to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side. Further, since the launch power supply board 831 (launch power supply board box 830) can be exchanged so as to be removable, the driving characteristics are changed as compared with the case where the entire launch control unit 4120 (dispensing control board 4110) is exchanged. Cost can be reduced, and the burden on the hall side can be reduced.

Furthermore, when changing the model or the like, only the game board 4 is replaced so that the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 can be used as they are, so that the launch control unit 4120 can be used over a long period of use.
When the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the launching power supply board 831 is deteriorated, the launching power supply board box 830 can be easily replaced from the front side as described above. It can be exchanged to solve problems, shorten the interruption period of the game as much as possible, and quickly eliminate irritation and disappointment due to the interruption of the game It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

Further, the launch power board 831 (launch power board box 830) is supported through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the launch power board 831 is held in the game board holding port 601 for detachment. Since it is necessary to remove the game board 4, even if a tool for performing an illegal act enters the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the illegal tool reaches the launch power supply board 831 by the game board 4. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from performing an illegal act on the launch power supply substrate 831 and has a high defense against the illegal act.

Further, the launch power supply board box 830 is supported through the game board holding port 601, and the position where the launch power supply board box 830 is supported is more rearward than the front surface of the main body frame 3. A space for supporting the board box 830 can be easily secured, and the pachinko machine 1 that supports the launch power board box 830 and exhibits the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

In addition, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is provided in the firing power supply substrate 831. Since the launch power supply substrate 831 can be easily detached from the front side of the main body frame 3, the electrolytic capacitor SC is provided.
Even if the load applied to the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is increased by supplying power from 0 to the firing solenoid 654 and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is likely to deteriorate, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (launching power supply board 831) can be easily replaced. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 that can solve the problems early and shorten the interruption time of the game as much as possible and can reliably achieve the above-described effects can be obtained.

Further, the power supply board box holder 840 in the board unit 800 receives a game ball that is opened upward and discharged from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the game board 4 to the lower left side of the left and right center in front view. A discharge ball receiving portion 841, a discharge passage 842 for guiding and discharging the game balls received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 downward, a discharge passage 842 and a discharge ball receiving portion 841
The front box housing portion 843 that is open forward and upward on the front side (right side in front view) and can accommodate the rear side of the launch power source board box 830, and the entire rear surface of the power source board box holder 840 seems to be recessed forward. And a rear box accommodating portion 844 that can accommodate the front end of the power supply board box 850.

In the power supply board box holder 840, the opened front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the board unit base 810, and the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 is located at a desired position to the discharge passage 842. The main body frame base 6 is formed.
A game ball that flows through the main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 at 00 and flows down to the rear side of the substrate unit base 810 through the opening 812 of the substrate base unit 810, and the details. As will be described later, the game balls discharged from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 can be discharged to the lower rear side of the pachinko machine 1 through the discharge passage 842. It has become.

Further, the power supply board box holder 840 is formed at a position corresponding to the box housing portion 816 of the board unit base 810, and the box housing portion 816 and the front box housing portion 84.
3, an accommodation recess for accommodating the launch power supply substrate box 830 can be formed.

Furthermore, the power supply board box 850 in the board unit 800 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the front open, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close the front end opening. The power supply board box 850 accommodates various electronic components attached to the power supply board 851, and externally transfers heat from the electronic parts and the like through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. Can be released. As shown in FIG. 86, a power switch 852 attached to the power supply board 851 faces the rear surface of the power supply board box 850.

The power supply board box 850 is a standing wall that protrudes rearward along the lower side of the opening where the power supply terminal 853 (see FIGS. 84 and 86) attached to the lower side of the power switch 852 in the power supply board 851 faces the rear side. Portion 850b, protrusions 850c protruding rearward from both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, and the power supply board box 85 disposed on the front side and the lower side of the standing wall portion 850b.
And a wiring guide portion 850d that forms a gap through which the wiring cord 854 can be inserted between the outer periphery and the outer periphery of the zero. Although not shown in detail, the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851 has a locking piece to be locked with the locking claw of the connector terminal 855, and the locking claw and the locking piece. And the connector terminal 855 is prevented from being detached from the power supply terminal 853.

As shown in FIG. 87, the power supply board box 850 has a standing wall portion 850b as shown in FIG.
In the state where the connector terminal 855 of the wiring cord 854 is connected to the 51 power supply terminal 853, it is formed to protrude slightly rearward from the rear end of the connector terminal 855. In the power supply board box 850 of this example, the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 in a state where the wiring cord 854 is turned from the lower front side of the power supply board box 850 to the rear end so as to be hooked to the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b. A terminal 855 is connected.

By the way, when the connector terminal where the wiring cord extends is connected to the connection terminal attached to the board, and then the wiring cord is pulled to the board side, the connector terminal is connected by the tension from the wiring cord. Since it is in a state of being pressed against the terminal side, there is a problem that it is difficult to remove the connector terminal from the connection terminal. However, according to the power supply board box 850 of this example, the front end side of the wiring cord 854 (the side opposite to the connector terminal 855 side connected to the power supply terminal 853) is directed to the power supply board 851 side (front side with respect to the main body frame 3). Even if pulled, the wiring cord 85 is formed by the standing wall portion 850b protruding rearward from the connector terminal 855.
4 is routed so that it wraps around (turns back) from the connector terminal 855,
It is possible to prevent a force from pressing the connector terminal 855 to the power supply terminal 853 side from the wiring cord 854, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 can be easily removed. Yes.

Further, since the power supply board box 850 includes the protruding portions 850c protruding rearward on both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, even if the wiring cord 854 slides along the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, The wiring cord 8 is further outward by the projections 850c provided at both ends.
54 can be prevented from sliding, and the wiring cord 854 can be prevented from coming off from the standing wall portion 850b.

Further, by inserting the wiring cord 854 into the wiring guide portion 850d of the power supply board box 850, the wiring cord 854 folded back by the standing wall portion 850b can be moved toward the standing wall portion 850b, so that the wiring cord 854 is drawn from the standing wall portion 850b. Since the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b and the wiring cord 854 can be immediately moved to the standing wall portion 850b side by the wiring guide portion 850d, a series of operations are continuously performed. This can be performed, and the work process related to assembly can be simplified.

The power supply board box 850 and the power supply board holder 840 are formed so that the dimensions in the front-rear direction in the assembled state are substantially the same as the dimensions in the front-rear direction of the speaker box 820. When attached, the rear surface of the power supply board box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820 are substantially flush with each other.

Further, in this example, the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 facing from the opening of the power supply board box 850 that covers the power supply board 851, and then the connector is connected by the standing wall portion 850b protruding rearward from the rear end of the connector terminal 855. Wiring cord 85 extending from the rear end of terminal 855
4 is folded, so that the tension acting on the connector terminal 855 when the wiring cord 854 is pulled is pulled in a direction to release the connection with the power supply terminal 853 to which the connection is fixed by a locking claw or the like. It is possible to prevent the connector terminal 855 from being disconnected by the wiring cord 854, and the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 can be avoided.
Thus, it is possible to easily remove the connector terminal 855 connected to the connector and perform maintenance such as replacement of the substrate.

Further, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850, and the bending of the wiring cord 854 can be loosened as compared with the case where there is no standing wall portion 850b. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the 854 itself, and it is possible to prevent the wiring cord 854 from being disconnected due to the unreasonable force and causing a failure.

Further, a standing wall portion 850b is provided in the vicinity of the opening of the power supply board box 850 where the power terminal 853 faces. The wiring cord 854 extending from the connector terminal 855 can be extended to the rear side as straight as possible with respect to the connector terminal 855, and the joint between the connector terminal 855 and the wiring cord 854 is broken. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a force from acting and to prevent problems such as disconnection.

Further, since the power supply board box 850 that covers the power supply board 851 is provided with the standing wall portion 850b, the power supply board 851 does not need to be provided with the standing wall portion 850b, and the power supply board 85
Assembling work of 1 can be made easy. In addition, the power supply board 85 is connected to the power supply board 85.
1 can prevent dust and dirt, etc., that cause a failure from adhering to the power supply board 851 and prevent electronic components (for example, resistors, etc.) mounted on the power supply board 851 from being attached. Capacitors, transistors, ICs, CPUs, memories, etc.) can be made difficult to touch or exchange, and the defense against fraud can be enhanced.

In addition, the direction in which the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 in the power supply board 851 is substantially perpendicular to the board surface (front-rear direction), and the connector terminal is connected to the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851. Since the force applied when connecting or removing the 855 can be easily applied to the surface of the power supply substrate 851, it is possible to prevent the shearing force from acting on the lead portion of the power supply terminal 853. Can be prevented from being energized and causing a failure of energization or the power supply terminal 853 being detached from the power supply board 851, and the pachinko machine 1 that is less prone to malfunction can be obtained.

Further, since the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 is fixed by the fixing means using the locking claw and the locking piece, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b so that the wiring cord 854 is Even if a force is applied to the connector terminal 855 in such a direction as to release the connection with the power supply terminal 853, the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 can be prevented from being released. Connection between the terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 can be reliably maintained to prevent problems such as poor contact and poor energization.

Further, since the projections 850c projecting rearward are provided at both ends of the rear end where the wiring cord 854 in the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850 is folded back, the wiring cord 854 is folded back at the standing wall portion 850b. Even if it slides along the side, the projection 850c provided at both ends of the side can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and the wiring cord 854 can be prevented from coming off the standing wall 850b. The pachinko machine 1 that reliably prevents the above-described effects can be realized.

Further, the standing wall portion 8 is provided by the wiring guide portion 850d provided in the power supply board box 850.
Since the wiring cord 854 turned back at 50b is brought closer to the standing wall 850b side,
The wiring cord 854 can be made difficult to come off from the standing wall portion 850b, and the above-described operation and effects can be surely achieved. The wiring cord 854 can be moved toward the upright wall portion 850b, a series of operations can be continuously performed, and an operation process related to assembly can be simplified to prevent an increase in cost.

Also, the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800 includes a thin box-shaped box base 861 that is horizontally long and opened rearward, and a thin box-shaped cover that is fitted into the box base 861 from the rear side and opened front. 862 and a payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 195) attached to the rear surface of the box base 861 and covered by the cover 862. Further, the payout control board box 860 includes a plurality of separation cutting portions 863 that protrude outward from the left end in the rear view and are formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862, and are provided at one location of the plurality of separation cutting portions 863. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are fixed by caulking. Thus, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, the separation control section 863 must be cut so that the box base 861 and the cover 862 cannot be separated.
When 0 is opened, the trace remains. Therefore, it can be determined whether or not the dispensing control board box 860 has been opened and closed illegally. In this example, the dispensing control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

The payout control board box 860 includes an error release switch 860a, a ball removal switch 860b, an inspection output terminal 860c, and the like attached to the payout control board 4110.
Through the rear (see FIG. 62). Also, the dispensing control board box 8
60, various connection terminals for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like face rearward through the cover 862.

Further, the terminal board box 870 in the board unit 800 is provided with a speaker box 82.
0, a board base 871 having a board mounting part 871a formed on the rear upper surface on the left side when viewed from the rear, and a board cover mounting part 871b formed on the rear side of the right end when viewed from the back, and a board mounting part of the board base 871 871a is attached from the rear side and the peripheral panel relay terminal 872 is provided on the rear surface.
a peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 to which a is attached, a connection terminal plate cover 873 having an opening portion 873b attached to the substrate cover attachment portion 871b of the substrate base 871 from the rear side and extending in the vertical direction to the rear wall portion 873a; A CR unit connection terminal plate 874 supported in a connection terminal plate cover 873 attached to the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal 874a facing rearward from the opening 873a of the connection terminal plate cover 873, and a substrate together with the connection terminal plate cover 873 Base 87
1 and a substrate box cover 875 that covers the rear side.

The peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 in the terminal board box 870 connects the pachinko machine 1 with a frequency indicator for displaying the operating state of the pachinko machine 1 provided on the island facility side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is for connecting a ball lending machine (also referred to as a CR unit 6) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine 1. The substrate base 871 in the terminal substrate box 870
The connection terminal board cover 873 and the board box cover 875 are each formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the internal peripheral panel relay terminal board 872, the CR unit connection terminal board 874, and the like can be visually recognized from the outside. It has become. Also, the board box cover 87
5 On the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, if there is a problem such as a ball clogging, the status display shows the contents of the error code displayed on the frequency indicator or CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side. A seal 876 is attached.

As shown in FIG. 88, the board base 871 in the terminal board box 870 has a board mounting portion 871a formed in a thin box shape with the rear end opened. This substrate base 871
Are formed on the inner upper portion of the board mounting portion 871a to fix the upper end of the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 (not shown), and formed on the lower inner side of the board mounting portion 871a. A locking claw 871c for locking the lower end, and a fixed piece and the locking claw 8
The peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 can be detachably held from the rear side by 71c.

The substrate base 871 is formed in a thin box shape in which the substrate cover mounting portion 871b is opened to the rear side, and the size of the inner periphery thereof is set such that the outer periphery of the connection terminal plate cover 873 can be inserted. In addition, the inner peripheral wall is an outer piece portion 871c extending in the front-rear direction. The substrate base 871 has a pair of fixing holes 87 that penetrates the outer piece 871c on the right side in the rear view in the left-right direction.
1d and a CR unit connection terminal plate 87 extending rearward from the bottom wall of the board cover mounting portion 871b
4 ridges 871e extending in the up-down direction in contact with the front surface of the board 4, and a board cover mounting portion 871b
And a locking hole 871f penetrating in the front-rear direction. The protrusion 871e on the substrate base 871 is in a state in which the amount of backward protrusion is slightly less than that of the outer piece 871c, and as much as possible on both side ends of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 as shown in the figure. It is arrange | positioned so that it may become a position near.

Further, the substrate base 871 is disposed on the rear right side rear surface of the substrate cover attaching portion 871b so as to be separated from each other in the vertical direction, and a pair of bearing portions 8 for pivotally supporting the substrate box cover 875.
71g and a rectangular tubular locking portion 871h arranged on the rear surface in the vicinity of the left end portion in the rear view and extending in the front-rear direction.
And.

The connection terminal board cover 873 in the terminal board box 870 surrounds the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal board 872 and can be inserted into the board cover mounting part 871b surrounded by the outer piece part 871c of the board base 871. A rear wall portion 873a for closing the rear end of the outer wall portion 873c, a rectangular opening portion 873b penetrating the rear wall portion 873a and extending in the vertical direction,
An inner wall portion 873d extending forward (from the substrate base 871 side) from the rear wall portion 873a substantially along the inner circumference of the opening portion 873b, and a front end of the inner wall portion 873d abut on the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. A pair of claw-like substrate holding portions 873e that hold the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and are formed on the upper and lower outer wall portions 873c.

Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 is arranged at a position corresponding to the plurality of internal connection terminals 874b attached to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and has a plurality of openings 873f penetrating through the rear wall portion 873a, and an approximately vertical direction. A box-shaped protective part 873g that covers the rear side of the opening 873f disposed in the center and that is open on the left side in the rear view, and outward from the right side end part in the rear wall view 873c (
A pair of fixed pieces 873h that extend in the right direction) and can be inserted into the fixed holes 871d of the substrate base 871, and are formed at the left end of the outer wall portion 873c when viewed from the rear, and locked to the locking holes 871f of the substrate base 871. An elastic claw-like locking claw piece 873i that is made possible. In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the inner wall part 873d extended ahead also in the upper and lower sides of the inner periphery in the center opening part 873f provided with the protection part 873g is formed.

The connection terminal plate cover 873 has a thin box shape whose front side is opened by an outer wall portion 873c and a rear wall portion 873a. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 is configured to restrict the movement of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 rearward by the front end of the inner wall portion 873d by inserting the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 into the inside from the opened front side. In addition, the pair of substrate holding portions 873e can restrict the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 from moving forward, and thus the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be detachably held. It has become. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 has the fixing piece 873h inserted into the fixing hole 871d of the substrate base 871, and the locking claw piece 873i is locked to the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871, thereby The base 871 can be detachably attached to the board cover attaching portion 871b.

The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870 has a CR unit connection terminal 874a for connecting the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side of the game hall on the front side (rear side). In addition, the payout control board 4110 and the rental unit 3
A plurality of internal connection terminals 874b for connection to 60 and the like are provided. In this example, C
In the R unit connection terminal plate 874, as shown in the figure, the CR unit connection terminal 874a is a D-sub connector having a locking function, and the internal connection terminal 874b is a square two-piece connector.

Further, the board box cover 875 in the terminal board box 870 has a board base 87.
A pair of shafts that are formed in a thin box shape with a size that substantially covers the entire rear surface of 1 and opened to the front side, and that are disposed on the right side surface in a rear view and are pivotally supported by bearing portions 871g of the substrate base 871. Part 87
5a, a through-hole 875b corresponding to the opening 873b in the connection terminal board cover 873 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, a wall 875c extending forward from the left and right ends of the through-hole 875b, and a latching portion of the board base 871 And a locking piece 875d locked to 871h.

The substrate box cover 875 has a pair of shaft portions 875 a and a bearing portion 8 of the substrate base 871.
By pivotally supporting 71g, the rear surface of the substrate base 871 can be covered with the connection terminal plate cover 873 so that it can be opened and closed. Further, the board box cover 875 has a length in which a wall 875c on the side close to the shaft portion 875a (side supported) extends to the rear surface of the substrate base 871, and a wall on the side far from the shaft portion 875a. 875c is a connection terminal board cover 873.
The length extends to the rear surface. That is, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, when the board box cover 875 is closed, the front ends of the respective barrier walls 875c are substantially in contact with the rear surfaces of the board base 871 and the connection terminal board cover 873. It is like that.

In the terminal board box 870 of this example, since the CR unit connection terminal 874a of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is a D-sub connector, the CR unit is connected to the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 as shown in FIG. The main body of the connection terminal 874a is in a floating state, and the lead portion extending from the CR unit connection terminal 874a is also exposed to the outside on the rear surface side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Also, CR unit connection end plate 87
The four internal connection terminals 874b are square two-piece connectors, and are attached so that they can be fitted and connected from the rear as shown in the figure.

And the terminal board box 870 of this example is in the assembled state, as shown in FIG.
In the direction along the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873, the protrusion 871e and the outer piece portion 871c of the substrate base 871, and the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 are provided. Since there are an outer wall portion 873c and an inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and a barrier wall 875c on the side of the shaft portion 875a of the board box cover 875 in the extending direction, a barrier wall is formed by multiple layers. And connecting terminal board cover 87
3 and the substrate base 871 have a meandering crank shape in cross section. Therefore, even if an unauthorized tool having excellent flexibility is to be inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 (boundary), the tool does not bend along the boundary, and the CR unit connection terminal It is possible to reliably prevent an unauthorized tool from entering from the direction along the surface of the plate 874, and to reliably prevent an illegal act on the CR unit connection terminal 874a provided in the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It has become.

Further, the terminal board box 870 has an inner wall portion 873 in the connection terminal plate cover 873.
Since the front end of d is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the CR
Even using a D-sub connector in which a gap is formed between the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 attached as the unit connection terminal 874a, it is possible to cover the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d. Can be prevented from being performed.

The terminal board box 870 has a pair of shaft portions 875a on the shaft portion 875a side of the through-hole 875b facing the CR unit connection terminal 874a to the substrate box cover 875 pivotally supported on the rear surface of the substrate base 871. A barrier 875c having a length between them is provided.
Since the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875 can be increased by 5c, a driver or the like is inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871, and the pair of shaft portions 8 are inserted.
Even if a gap is formed between the gaps 75a, the board box cover 875 can be prevented from being distorted and the gap can be prevented from being formed. Be able to.

Further, the terminal board box 870 of this example is configured so that the rear side of the internal connection terminal 874b near the center of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is covered with the protection portion 873g of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board box cover 875. Therefore, the internal connection terminal 8 is a two-piece connector.
Even if an illegal act of inserting a needle-like electrode through the gap between the connector main body of the connection terminal and the wiring cord in a state where the connection terminal on the wiring cord side is fitted and connected to 74b, the protective portion 873
g and the board box cover 875 can prevent the insertion of the electrode, and can also prevent an illegal act on the internal connection terminal 874b.

Thus, according to this example, since the terminal board box 870 containing the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame 3, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are attached from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. Even if an unauthorized tool is inserted through a gap between the front and back of the pachinko machine 1, the terminal board box 870 protects the accommodated CR unit connection terminal plate 874 even if the distal end of the unauthorized tool is inserted. It is possible to prevent illegal acts against the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 with certainty.

When the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is accommodated in the terminal substrate box 870, the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate are in the direction along the front surface (back surface of the substrate) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. The protrusion 871e and the outer piece portion 871c of the base 871,
Further, in the direction along the rear surface (substrate surface) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the outer wall portion 873c and inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the barrier wall 87 of the substrate box cover 875 are arranged.
5c, the barrier wall is formed by multiple layers, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 becomes a meandering crank shape. Even if an unauthorized tool having excellent flexibility is allowed to enter between the cover 873 and the substrate base 871 (boundary), the tool does not bend along the boundary, and is along the surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It is possible to reliably prevent unauthorized tool entry from the direction, CR
The CR unit connection terminal 874a provided on the unit connection terminal plate 874 and the internal connection terminal 8
It can be set as the pachinko machine 1 which can prevent the illegal act with respect to 74b reliably.

Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, each lead portion is exposed between the substrate as the CR unit connection terminal 874a. Even if a D-sub connector is used, the inner wall 873d
Thus, the outer periphery of the exposed lead portion can be covered, and it is possible to reliably prevent an illegal act from being performed.

Further, one end of the terminal board box 870 is pivotally supported on the rear surface of the substrate base 871 so that the rear surface of the connection terminal board cover 873 can be opened and closed.
73. A board box cover 8 having a plate-shaped barrier 875c extending from the side end on the pivotally supported side of the through-hole 875b corresponding to the opening 873b of 73 to the rear surface of the board base 871.
75, so that the substrate base 8 in the substrate box cover 875 is provided.
Even if a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the parts that are pivotally supported with respect to 71 to form a gap to allow an unauthorized tool to enter, an illegal tool is inserted into the connection terminal board cover 8 by the barrier 875c.
73 (CR unit connection terminal board 874) side can be prevented from reaching, and illegal acts can be prevented.

In order to take out the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870, the connection box board cover 873 must be opened after the board box cover 875 is opened.
It is possible to make it difficult to take out the unit connection terminal plate 874, and it is possible to increase the deterrent against fraud. Further, since the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875 can be increased by the barrier 875c, even if a driver or the like is inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871 to form a gap, the substrate box cover 875 is formed. Can be prevented from being distorted to prevent the formation of a gap, making it difficult to perform fraud and making it highly deterrent.

Furthermore, even if an unauthorized act of inserting the needle-like electrode through the gap between the connector main body and the wiring cord at the terminal on the wiring cord side connected to the C internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is attempted, The protective part 873g and the board box cover 875 are arranged on the rear side of the corresponding opening part 873f, that is, the rear side of the opening of the gap along the wiring cord of the connector body.
Therefore, the needle-like electrode cannot be inserted from the outside (rear side) of the terminal board box 870 into the gap of the connector body, and the connected wiring cord terminal is illegal. Can be prevented and the crime prevention ability can be increased.

In addition, since the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is provided with a substrate holding portion 873e for holding the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the outer wall portion 873c extends to the front side from the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. , Connection terminal board cover 873 to perform cheating
Even if a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the circuit board base 871 and a gap is formed, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 moves rearward together with the connection terminal plate cover 873. Therefore, the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 The positional relationship between the front end and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 does not change, and the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can remain protected by the outer wall portion 873c (connection terminal plate cover 873). Unit connection terminal board 874
Unauthorized acts on the rear CR unit connection terminal 874a and the like cannot be performed, and unauthorized acts targeting the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the CR unit connection terminal 874a, and the like can be prevented.

Furthermore, since the terminal board box 870 is formed of a transparent resin and the inside of the terminal board box 870 can be visually recognized from the outside, the terminal board box 870 can be viewed from the outside without disassembling the terminal board box 870. CR unit connection terminal board 87 housed inside
4 or the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 or the like, an unauthorized tool is not inserted, the CR unit connection terminal board 874 or the like is not replaced with an unauthorized one, or the CR unit connection terminal board 874 or the like. It is possible to easily check whether the electronic components (for example, ROM, IC, resistors, capacitors, etc.) mounted on the IC have been replaced with illegal ones, and to make it easier to detect illegal acts. In addition, since fraudulent acts can be easily detected, it is possible to hesitate to execute fraudulent acts on those who perform fraudulent acts and to increase deterrence against fraudulent acts.

Further, since the terminal board box 870 is attached to the back surface side of the main body frame 5 so that the surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like faces the rear side, the outer frame 2 is used for maintenance or the like.
When the rear side of the main body frame 5 appears by rotating the main body frame 5 to the front side, the terminal board box 87
The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like housed in 0 are in a state facing the worker side (player side), and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the terminal board box 870 can be easily inspected.

The main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 in the board unit 800 include a peripheral control unit 4140 provided in the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, a payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, etc. 5 for relaying the connection with the handle device 500, each decorative board, the operation unit 400, and the like. The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 include a plurality of connection terminals for connection to the main body frame 3 side and the door frame 5 side, and are formed on the front surface of the substrate unit base 810. By attaching to the attachment portion 813, these connection terminals face the front side from the front surface of the main body frame base 600.

The main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 are covered with a relay terminal plate cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 as shown in FIGS. In addition, only the connection terminals for connecting to the door frame 5 side face the front side through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692, and the wiring cord 196 is connected to these connection terminals. (See FIGS. 1 and 30).

Further, the main relay terminal plate 880 includes a ball rental button 361, a return button 362, a remaining rental display unit 363, and a rotational position detection sensor of the handle device 500 in the ball rental unit 360 in the dish unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side. 512, touch sensor 516, firing stop switch 518
, And the full tank detection sensor 550 of the foul cover unit 540 and the connection between the payout control board 4110 disposed on the main body frame 3 side. Further, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 is attached to each decoration unit 200, 240, 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, each decoration board 430, 432 provided in the dish unit 300 or the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400. Dial drive motor 414 and sensors 432a, 432b, 432c provided
And the connection with the peripheral control unit 4140 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side.

[1-3G. Back cover]
Next, the back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 92. 90A is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and FIG. 90B is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. FIG. 91 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a portion of the fastening mechanism in the back cover, and FIG. 92 is an exploded perspective view of the fastening mechanism in the back cover as seen from the rear side. The back cover 900 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside of the main body frame 3 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

The back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 covers the rear side of the game board holding port 601 (the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3) for holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. . The back cover 900 has a plate-like main body 9 that closes the rear opening of the game board holding port 601.
02, a side portion 904 extending forward from the right side of the main body portion 902, and a plurality of the side portions 904 arranged in line in the vertical direction at the front end of the side portion 904 and projecting downward, and the back cover pivot support portion 623 of the main body frame base 600 A pivot pin 906 that is pivotally supported on the rear surface, a back cover engagement groove 718 of the prize ball base 710 and a back cover engagement groove 780a of the prize ball passage cover 780 formed respectively at the upper part and lower part of the left side of the main body 902 when viewed from the front. And the back cover 900 in the vicinity of the engaging piece 908 engaged with the lower engaging piece 908, respectively.
And a fastening mechanism 920 for fastening the frame to the body frame 3 so as not to be opened and closed.

The fastening mechanism 920 in the back cover 900 has a circular insertion hole that penetrates in the front-rear direction to the left in the rear view of the lower locking piece 908 in the main body 902 of the back cover 900, as shown in FIGS. 921, a vertically long rectangular locking port 922 that is arranged at a predetermined distance on the left side in the rear view of the insertion hole 921 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a locking that is elastically locked to the locking port 922 from the rear side A plate-shaped guide member 923 having a strip 923a on one end side and a horizontally long slot 923b corresponding to the insertion hole 921 on the other end side, and inserted into the slot 923b of the guide member 923 from the rear side. The back cover fastening hole 78 of the prize ball passage cover 780 through the insertion hole 921
A fastening member 924 having a male screw portion 924a screwed to 0b, and a holding member 925 attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 so as to sandwich the guide member 923 therebetween. Note that the guide member 923 in the fastening mechanism 920 is formed of a soft synthetic resin and is easily bent.

The fastening mechanism 920 is configured such that the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked in a loosely fitted state with respect to the locking port 922 of the main body 902, and the guide member 923 is within a predetermined range. You can play with. The fastening mechanism 920 includes a fastening member 92.
The fastening member 924 is provided by a disk-shaped holding member 925 attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fourth screw.
Is supported by the guide member 923 through the long hole 923b, can slide in the left-right direction along the long hole 923b, and does not fall off from the long hole 923b. The fastening mechanism 920 is guided from the rear side to the locking port 922 of the main body 902.
When the third locking piece 923a is locked, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 protruding forward through the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 is inserted into the insertion hole 921 of the main body portion 902. It has become.

In the back cover 900 of this example, the shaft support pins 906 are connected to the back cover shaft support portion 62 of the main body frame base 600.
3, the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be opened and closed, and the engagement piece 908 can be opened and closed by the back cover engagement groove 71 of the main body frame base 600 and the prize ball passage lid 780.
By being engaged with 8,780a, a closed state can be achieved. Note that when the back cover 900 is in a closed state, the insertion hole 921 in the fastening mechanism 920 and the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage cover 780 are substantially aligned.

When the back cover 900 is closed, the male thread portion 924a of the fastening member 924 inserted from the rear side to the front side into the insertion hole 921 is not naturally screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Even when the cover 900 is closed, the front end of the male screw portion 924a remains at the back cover fastening hole 780b.
The fastening member 924 protrudes rearward from the main body 902 of the back cover 900. By the way, in this example, since the fastening member 924 is supported in the long hole 923b of the guide member 923 locked to the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900, the fastening member 924 does not fall off from the back cover 900. A state of being positioned on the rear side of the main body 9002 is maintained.

From this state, the front end of the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 is connected to the back cover fastening hole 78.
By inserting the screw into 0b and rotating the fastening member 924, the male screw portion 924a is screwed into (screwed into) the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the back cover 900 can be fastened and fixed. Yes. It should be noted that the fastening mechanism 920 of the present example allows the fastening member 924 to be fastened even when the guide member 923 that supports the fastening member 924 is inclined with respect to the main body portion 902 when the fastening member 924 is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Since it is supported by the long hole 923b, the fastening member 924 (male thread portion 924a) can be positioned straight with respect to the axis of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 can be satisfactorily moved to the back cover fastening hole 780b. It can be screwed in.

Further, in this example, the back cover 900 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 3 side by a single fastening mechanism 920, so that it can be easily fastened or fastened only by operating one fastening member 924. The maintenance work can be improved by simplifying the labor involved in opening and closing the back cover 900.

The back cover 900 includes a connection notch 910 that is cut upward in a rectangular shape at the lower right end of the main body 902 when viewed from the front, and a confirmation opening that penetrates the connection cutout 910 in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front. 912 and a notch portion 914 for confirmation cut out in a rectangular shape at the lower left corner of the main body portion 902 when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 5, the back cover 900 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, through the connection notch 910, the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4, the test terminal 4100f, and the like. Comes to the rear. Further, the back cover 900 has a confirmation opening portion 912 through which a board management seal 1178 (see FIG. 101) attached to the rear surface of the main control board box 1170 faces the rear side. The sealing part 1176 of the main control board box 1170 faces through the notch part 914. Thereby, even if the back cover 900 is not opened with respect to the main body frame 3, it is possible to perform operation confirmation, appearance confirmation, management state confirmation, etc. of the main control board box 1170 and the main control board 4100.

Further, the back cover 900 has a plurality of slits 916 that are elongated through the main body 902 and the side portion 904, and heat generated in the game board 4 and the like through the slits 916 is generated in the main body frame 3 (pachinko machine 1). It can be discharged outside the rear side. As shown in the figure, a plurality of through-holes 918 are provided at predetermined intervals in the left-right direction that are wide and extend long in the up-down direction at a position slightly to the left in front view from the center. These through holes 918 are in a state where the back cover 900 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 is accommodated and held in the main body frame 3, and the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4. It is located on the rear side of the cooling fan for cooling the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 provided in the apparatus so that the heat from the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like can be exhausted satisfactorily. It has become. Incidentally, the width of the through hole 918 is set to be smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball so that the game ball does not enter the pachinko machine 1 through the through hole 918.

Thereby, in this example, the back cover 90 which closes the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame 3.
A fastening member 924 for fastening 0 to the main body frame 3 is attached to the guide member 9 attached to the back cover 900.
Since the game board 4 is held in the main body frame 3, the back cover 900 is opened from the rear side of the main body frame 3 to perform maintenance or the like on the rear side of the game board 4. When
Even if the fastening of the fastening member 924 that fastens and fixes the back cover 900 to the main body frame 3 is released and the fastening member 924 is separated from the back cover fastening hole 780 b of the main body frame 3, the fastening member 924 remains the guide member 923. It is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from being lost or left in the pachinko machine 1 because it is held by the back cover 900 via
The pachinko machine 1 that can prevent the fastening member 924 from dropping from the back cover 900 can be obtained.

Further, as described above, it is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from dropping from the opened back cover 900, so that it is not necessary to store the fastening member 924 whose fastening has been released in a predetermined position during maintenance or the like. Further, it can be held in the vicinity of the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 via the guide member 923, and maintenance can be facilitated.

Further, since the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 is extended at least to the side opposite to the locking port 922 side, the guide member 923 is inclined with respect to the surface of the back cover 900. The male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 923 can be positioned straight to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924a is reliably in a correct state with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Can be fastened. Therefore, the back cover 900 can be securely fastened to the main body frame 3, and the crime prevention effect by the back cover 900 can be reliably exhibited.

Further, since the holding member 925 that holds the fastening member 924 in a freely movable manner with respect to the guide member 923 in cooperation with the head of the fastening member 924 is attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, the fastening member 924 is provided. The guide member 923 is sandwiched between the head and the holding member 925, and the male screw portion 924 a of the fastening member 924 can be reliably prevented from coming out of the elongated hole 923 b of the guide member 923, and the holding member 925 can be prevented. And a long hole 923
The fastening member 924 can be held movably with respect to the guide member 923 by b.

In addition, an accommodation recess capable of accommodating a holding member is provided around the insertion hole 921 in the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924 a of the fastening member 924 is inserted into the back cover of the main body frame 3 through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900. When the fastening hole 780b is fastened, the holding member 925 sandwiching the guide member 923 with the head of the fastening member 924 can be housed in the housing recess, so that the back cover 900 and the guide member 923 are brought into close contact with each other. Thus, the protrusion from the back cover 900 can be reduced as much as possible, and the possibility of other members coming into contact with the protruding portions of the guide member 923 and the fastening member 924 is reduced to reduce the occurrence of problems. Can improve the appearance.

Further, since the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 is used as a female screw portion and is screw-coupled to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, it is fastened only by pulling compared with engagement by a simple claw. Can not be released and the back cover 900 can be made difficult to remove, the crime prevention effect by the back cover 900 can be further enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence against fraudulent acts can be obtained.

Furthermore, since the guide member 923 has flexibility and the guide member 923 can be bent, the degree of freedom of movement of the fastening member 924 relative to the back cover 900 (insertion hole 921) can be further increased. The male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 is positioned at a straight position with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3, or the male screw portion 924 is positioned at the back cover fastening hole 7.
It is possible to make it easy to move straight with respect to 70b, and the back cover fastening hole 7
The male screw portion 924a can be securely fastened to 80b.

In addition, in the state where the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is in contact with the inner wall extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 in the locking port 922 of the back cover 900, the locking port Since it is elastically locked to 922, the guide member 9 is mounted so as to be freely movable.
23 can be moved so as to rotate about the axis extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921, and is engaged with the locking port 922. Stop piece 923a
Can be pivotally supported. Accordingly, the long hole 923 on the distal end side of the guide member 923 is used.
The fastening member 924 held by b is inserted into the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, that is, the main body frame 3.
Since the back cover fastening hole 780b of the rear cover can be rotated so as to open and close, the insertion hole 921
In addition, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be easily inserted into the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening work by the fastening member 924 can be easily performed.

Further, a plurality of back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780 a are further provided at positions different from the back cover fastening holes 780 b in the main body frame 3, and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780 are formed in the back cover 900.
a plurality of engaging pieces 908 that are elastically engaged with a, respectively.
Since the engagement piece 908 is engaged with the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a of the main body frame 3, the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 separately from the fastening by the fastening member 924. The fastening work can be reduced as much as possible by using only one place for fastening using the member 924, and workability such as assembly and maintenance can be improved. Further, as described above, the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 by the engagement of the engagement piece 908 and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a separately from the fastening member 924, so that the closed range is wide. Even in the back cover 900, the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 (the rear side of the game board 4) can be closed in a good state without increasing the number of fastening points by the fastening member 924.

Further, the back cover 900 can be pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3 by pivotally supporting the pivot pins 906 of the back cover 900 on the back cover pivot support portion 623 of the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600). Therefore, by simply rotating the back cover 900 in the closing direction and closing the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3, the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 and the back cover fastening of the main body frame 3 are fastened. The hole 780b can be easily aligned, and the fastening member 924 held by the back cover 900 through the insertion hole 921 can be easily fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Further, since the back cover 900 is pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3, the back cover 900 can be opened even when the fastening by the fastening member 924 is released and the back cover 900 is opened during maintenance or the like. It is possible to keep the cover 900 pivotally supported on the main body frame 3, and it is not necessary to remove the back cover 900 from the main body frame 3, and the time and effort required to open and close the back cover 900 can be simplified.

[1-3H. Side security board]
Next, the side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. The side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 forms the left side surface of the main body frame 3 in a front view as shown in the figure, and is attached to the main body frame base 600. The side crime prevention plate 950 is a metal main body 95 extruded in a shallow U shape in a plan view.
2, a mounting bracket 954 fixed to the top and bottom near the inner front end of the main body 952 and attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600, and a positioning member 956 that is fixed to the inner side of the main body 952 and engages with the positioning recess 1119 of the game board 4. It is equipped with.

The main body 952 of the side security plate 950 has a side plate piece 952a having a length substantially the same as the height of the main body frame base 600 and extending in the vertical direction and having a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction, and a side plate piece 952a.
A front end piece 952b extending rightward from the front end of the front end piece, a middle piece 952c arranged so as to form a predetermined amount of gap on the rear side of the front end piece 952b and having a smaller protruding amount than the front end piece 952b, and a side plate piece A rear end piece 952 extending from the rear end of 952a to the right in the front view longer than the front end piece 952b.
d (see FIG. 106). The main body 952 includes a side plate piece 952a and a front end piece 9.
52b and the rear end piece 952d are formed in a shallow U-shape, and the front left side portion of the front component member 1110 and the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 is between the middle piece 952c and the rear end piece 952d. It is inserted (see FIG. 106).

The side security plate 950 of this example is configured such that the mounting bracket 954 is attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 and the rear end piece 952d of the main body 952 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600. When the side security plate 950 is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the front end piece 952 b of the main body 952 is connected to the shaft side of the shaft side reinforcing sheet metal 152 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5. It is designed to be inserted into the U-shape of the U-shaped projecting piece 166 and to prevent the insertion of a tool for performing an illegal act between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the left side when viewed from the front. (See FIG. 106). Further, the main body 952 of the side security plate 950 is provided.
Is a metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extrusion mold material and includes a front end piece 952b, a middle piece 952c, and a rear end piece 952d arranged in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the side plate piece 952a. The strength and rigidity of the side crime prevention plate 950 are increased, and the strength of the entire body frame 3 can be increased to favorably support the game board 4, the door frame 5, and the like.

Thus, according to this example, when the front surface of the main body frame 3 is closed with the door frame 5, the door frame 5 is interposed between the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the crime prevention side face plate 950. The rear side piece of the pivot-side U-shaped projecting piece 166 formed in a substantially U-shape of the reinforcing unit 150 is inserted (enters), and the front end piece 952b is inserted into the pivot-side U-shape. Therefore, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the U-shaped protrusion 166 on the pivotal side of the door frame 5 is attached to the front end piece 952 b of the main body frame 3. It is possible to prevent the pivoted U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 from moving in a direction away from the main body frame 3 and prevent the closed door frame 5 from being opened. And can be used to perform illegal acts such as opening the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3 It can be a pachinko machine 1 that can be stopped.

In addition, since the security side plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is set. The body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be made difficult to be distorted by an unauthorized tool, and the crime prevention performance in the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. In addition, since the main body frame base 600 that supports the game board 4 is formed of synthetic resin, the security side plate 950 on the side that supports the door frame 5 (the shaft support side) is formed of metal. Compared with the case where the entire main body frame 3 is made of metal, the cost associated with the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Furthermore, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the locking device 1000 that locks the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 is engaged with the hook cover 165 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 at one location between the upper and lower ends. The door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 on the lock device 1000 side (open side)
The three door frame hooks 1041 are used to lock the frame between the door frame 5 and the body frame 3 even when the open side is beaten by an unauthorized tool such as a bar. It is possible to prevent the door frame 5 from being forcibly opened.

Further, the rear end of the side piece 952a in the crime prevention side plate 950 is extended rearward from the front surface (game area 1100) of the game board 4, and the dimension in the front-rear direction of the side piece 952a is increased. Since the bending rigidity against the load applied in the front-rear direction is increased, the security side plate 95
It is possible to further increase the strength and rigidity of the entire zero, and to prevent the crime prevention side plate 950 from being forcibly bent and being cheated.

Further, since the security side plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed by a metal extrusion mold material, the security side plate 950 (main body 952) having a predetermined cross-sectional shape having the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c can be easily obtained. It can be formed, and even if the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced, the increase in cost can be suppressed, and defects such as a decrease in strength that occur during processing are compared with the case where the metal plate is bent. The security side plate 950 can be reduced as much as possible and has high durability and high strength.

[1-3I. Locking device]
Next, the lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97. FIG. 93A is a left side view of the locking device in the main body frame, and FIG. 93B is a perspective view of the locking device in the main body frame as viewed from the front. FIG. 94A is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and FIG. 94B is a glass door slide rod and a body frame slide rod provided slidably inside the U-shaped base of the lock device. It is a rear perspective view which shows these, (C) is a front perspective view of (B). Further, FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the locking device as seen after disassembling, and FIG. 96 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the glass door sliding rod and the main body frame sliding rod in the locking device. FIG. 97 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the tamper-proof member in the lock device.

The locking device 1000 in the main body frame 3 includes the peripheral wall portion 6 in the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3.
And is attached from the substantially upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the outer side surface on the open side of 05. As shown in FIG.
Open side) Door hook hole 620 formed in the upper part of the side and lock locking hole 621 formed in the lower part.
And a plurality of lock attachment portions 625 formed on the right side surface in front view of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the main body frame base 600.

As shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, the lock device 1000 includes a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame that is slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. The U-shaped sliding rod 1040, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be illegally slid. Base body 1001
Fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 attached to the lower part of the head.

The U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 is formed by bending a predetermined metal plate so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and includes a door frame sliding rod 1040 and a main body frame sliding rod 1050.
Are slidably arranged. Note that the U-shaped base 1001 has an extremely thin lateral width as compared to a conventional locking device integrated into a base having an L-shaped cross section. Thereby, the horizontal dimension of the locking device 1000 can be made as thin as possible, and the horizontal dimension of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be relatively increased. 1100 wide game board 4 can be provided.

The U-shaped base body 1001 is attached in a state in which the open side having a U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, The open side of the base body 1001 is closed by the main body frame base 600. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 arranged inside the U-shaped substrate 1001 are separated from the U-shaped substrate 10 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065.
01 is completely covered, and the anti-fraud structure is such that it is difficult to perform an illegal act on the lock device 1000 from the outside.

Further, the U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 has a rectangular shape through which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can penetrate vertically on the closed side (front side) opposite to the open side (rear side). Hook through opening 1002 and peripheral wall 605 of main body frame base 600 on the front side
A screw-fixing portion 1003 projecting outward in the upper part and middle of a side surface 1001b (see FIG. 95) in contact with the side surface 1 and a side surface 1 opposite to the side surface 1001b projecting the screw-fastening portion 1003
001a (see FIG. 95) on the open side (front side) of the upper end and the middle part, and on the open side both sides 10
And locking protrusions 1004 protruding forward from the lower ends of 01a and 1001b.

Screw fixing portions 1003 and locking protrusions 1004 of the U-shaped base 1001 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and the locking protrusions 1004 are attached to the door hook holes 620 of the main body frame base 600. When the screw locking portion 1003 is inserted into the lock locking hole 621 from the rear side and moved upward, the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting portion 625 of the main body frame base 600 are aligned with each other. By screwing a screw (not shown) to the lock attachment portion 625, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3).

The locking device 1000 is mounted not only on the upper and middle screw fixing portions 1003 but also on the screw fixing portion 1003 formed on the lock mounting piece 1008 described later and in the vicinity of the cylinder lock through hole 611. Also, the lock attaching portion 625 is fixed to the main body frame base 600 with a screw (not shown), and the lower part of the lock device 1000 is also attached.

Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three locations on the open side (front side) of the U-shaped base 1001 are connected to the upper and lower door hook holes 620 and the locking locking holes. 621
Since the screw fixing portion 1003 of the U-shaped base body 1001 is fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws, the locking device 1000 can be attached to the main body frame base 600 (with a very simple structure). It can be firmly fixed to the body frame 3).

In other words, even when the locking device 1000 is configured by concentrating on the U-shaped base 1001 having a very small width, the locking device 1000 is locked and fixed on the front side and the rear side of the locking device 1000.
Can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, after the locking projection 1004 constituting the front locking structure (which may be a fixed structure) protrudes from the side surface 1001a that does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001, Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the rear side fixing structure projects from the side surface 1001b close to the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001 to the peripheral wall portion 605 side, the front locking structure is the peripheral wall portion 605. And the side 1
The locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as not to be loose as compared with the case where it is formed on 001b.

The U-shaped base 1001 is provided with insertion holes 1005 penetrating left and right in the upper, middle, and lower sides of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. The rivet 100 is inserted into the insertion hole 1005 in a state where the body frame sliding rod 1050 is accommodated.
By inserting and crimping 6, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be slidably mounted in the vertical direction inside the U-shaped base 1001. .

That is, as shown in FIG. 94 (C), the rivet 1006 penetrates the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 formed at the upper, middle and lower portions of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and FIG.
As shown in (B), a rivet 1006 penetrates the lower end portions of long holes 1055 and 1061 for rivets formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 respectively for the body frame sliding rod 1050. The door frame sliding rod 1040 can be moved upward, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be moved downward.

Further, the U-shaped base 1001 is formed of a tamper-proof cutout portion 100 formed on the closed side surface of the lower portion thereof.
7 and a lock mounting piece 1008 for projecting toward the side from the front end of the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 in the main body frame base 600 on the open side, and for mounting the cylinder lock 1010;
An insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021, and a relief lateral hole 1022 are formed on the side surface 1001 b in contact with the peripheral wall 605. Fraud prevention notch 10 of U-shaped base 1001
Although the details of 07 will be described later, the stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 moves forward and backward. Further, the lock attachment piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001 is provided with a lock device 1000.
Is mounted on the back surface of the main body frame base 600 and protrudes laterally from the front end of the side surface 1001b so as to be positioned below the lower end side of the game board holding port 601. The lock insertion hole 1009 through which the cylinder penetrates and the lock mounting substrate 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010
Mounting holes 1013 formed in the upper and lower portions 1014 for mounting with screws 1012, and screw fixing portions 1003 formed for mounting the lower part of the locking device 1000 on the back surface of the main body frame 3. , Is formed.

The U-shaped base 1001 has an insertion vertical opening 1020 through which the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. A spring locking piece 1021 for locking the spring 1035 that urges the second tamper-proof member 1032 upward, and a clearance lateral hole 1022 that forms a clearance hole so as not to obstruct the movement of the connecting pin 1034; It has.

The cylinder lock 1010 in the lock device 1000 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 in the U-shaped base 1001. In this cylinder lock 1010, a lock mounting substrate 1011 for fixing to a lock mounting piece 1008 is fixed to the rear end of a cylindrical cylinder lock body, and a lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock body extends from the rear surface of the lock mounting substrate 1011. At the same time, an engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engaging cam 1016 is formed in a boomerang shape, and one end side of the engaging cam 1016 rotates when the body frame slides 1050.
The second engagement member 1017 engages with the lower engagement hole 1062 and the other end engages with the upward engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 during rotation. A mating piece 1018 is provided.

This cylinder lock 1010 has a cylindrical cylinder lock main body portion inserted into a lock insertion hole 1009 formed in the lock attachment piece 1008 from the rear side, and attachment holes 1013 formed at two positions on the lock attachment substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base 1001 by screwing a screw 1012 into the mounting hole 1014 of the lock mounting piece 1008.

Fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base 1001 of the locking device 1000
This is to prevent the body frame sliding rod 1050 from being illegally lowered by, for example, a piano wire or a wire without rotating the cylinder lock 1010 with an official key. The fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by a connecting pin 1034 as shown in FIG. First fraud prevention member 10
Reference numeral 23 denotes a vertically long plate-like shape that is supported by the U-shaped base body 1001 so as to be swingable about the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end. Specifically, the first tamper-proof member 1023 has a door frame sliding rod 104 disposed inside the U-shaped base 1001 through the swing shaft hole 1025.
0 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are attached together with a lowermost insertion hole 1005 and a rivet 1006.

Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 has an insertion longitudinal opening 1 of the U-shaped base 1001 on its plate-like surface.
A projecting piece insertion hole 1026 is provided which is opened vertically at a position overlapping with 020 and into which the second engaging projecting piece 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 can be inserted. The protruding piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 10
20 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 penetrates the U-shaped base 10.
The rising engagement hole 1045 and the second engagement protrusion 10 of the sliding frame 1040 for the door frame provided inside 01
18 is engaged. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is provided with the protruding piece insertion hole 1.
A slanting portion 1024 that is slanted and can be brought into contact with the rear surface side of the first engagement protrusion 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 is rotated is provided on the outer side of the front diagonally upper side of 026. The first fraud prevention member 1 is brought into contact with the first engagement protrusion 1017 when the engagement cam 1016 is rotated.
023 swings about the swing shaft hole 1025 (clockwise direction in FIG. 97B).

Furthermore, the first fraud prevention member 1023 further includes a stopper piece portion 1027 that protrudes toward the U-shaped base 1001 side from an obliquely lower lower side of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026, and a position where the stopper piece portion 1027 protrudes. A regulation protrusion 1031 that protrudes downward, and a pin hole 1029 and a connection hole 1030 that pass through the front side of the regulation protrusion 1031 in the left-right direction and are arranged vertically.
The stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is intruded into and engaged with the fraud prevention cutout portion 1007 and the engagement cutout portion 1066 of the main body frame slide rod 1050 when the main body frame slide rod 1050 is locked. Thus, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can be prevented from sliding illegally. Further, the restricting protrusion 1031 of the first fraud preventing member 1023 is formed by the spring 10.
By abutting against the second tamper-proof member 1032 biased upward by 35, the second tamper-proof member 1032 can be restricted from moving upward (biasing direction).

Further, the pin hole 1029 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is configured such that the guide pin 1028 is inserted and fixed from the back side of the first fraud prevention member 1023, and the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 is The first fraud prevention member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 by engaging with a horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 in the U-shaped base 1001. Can be done. Furthermore, the connection hole 1030 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 is for connecting the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 in a pivotable manner by a connection pin 1034.

On the other hand, the second fraud prevention member 1032 connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 is the reverse “te”.
It is formed of a letter-shaped plate material, and has a connection hole 1033 at one upper end and a spring locking hole 103 at the other upper end.
6 and the contact portion 1037 are provided at the lower end portion. The second fraud prevention member 1032 can be connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 so as to be relatively rotatable by inserting the connection pin 1034 after aligning the connection hole 1033 with the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023. It can be done. Further, the second fraud prevention member 1032 locks the lower end (other end) of the spring 1035 whose upper end (one end) is locked to the spring locking piece 1021 of the U-shaped base 1001 in the spring locking hole 1036. Thus, the spring 1035 is biased upward. Further, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is configured such that the abutting portion 1037 abuts on the closing plate 25 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed.

Next, the door frame sliding rod 1040 in the lock device 1000 is slidably supported inside the U-shaped base 1001 and is formed of a vertically long metal plate-like member. This door sliding rod 1040 has a door frame hook portion 1 that protrudes forward at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of one vertical side.
041 is provided. The door frame hook portion 1041 of the door sliding rod 1040 is formed of a U-shaped base 10.
When the door sliding rod 1040 is housed in 01, it protrudes forward from the open side of the U-shaped base 1001, and when the lock device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the main body It protrudes forward from a door hook hole 620 (see FIGS. 63 and 68, etc.) formed in the frame base 600, and engages with a hook cover 165 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the door frame 5. Be able to. The door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape as shown in the figure, and thereby the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover are lifted by raising the door frame sliding rod 1040. The locked state with 165 can be released.

Also, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed in the center of the upper, middle, and lower side surfaces, and has a vertically long rivet slot 1042 through which the rivet 1006 is inserted, below the uppermost rivet slot 1042, and for the door frame. A guide protrusion 1043 protruding in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided at the lowermost end of the sliding rod 1040. Rivet slot 1042 for the sliding slide 1040 for the door
The rivet 1006 that is inserted through the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base body 1001 is inserted therethrough, and the rivet 1006 is formed in a vertically long shape so as not to interfere with the lifting operation of the door frame sliding rod 1040. ing. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 penetrating the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 is in contact. Also, the sliding frame 1040 for the door frame
The guide protrusion 1043 is inserted into the protruding piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and the door frame sliding It is possible to guide the sliding movement between the flange 1040 and the main body frame sliding flange 1050.

Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed with a spring hook portion 1046 for locking one end of the spring 1048 at the upper end portion. The other end of the spring 1048 locked to the spring hook portion 1046 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 in the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and the door frame sliding is performed by the spring 1048. The collar 1040 is biased downward, and the main body frame sliding collar 1050 is biased mutually upward. Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 includes a contact elastic piece 1047 formed in a convex shape in the middle in the vertical direction, and is stamped from one side surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 by press molding. It is formed in a convex shape. The contact elastic piece 1047 is configured to contact the inner surface of the U-shaped base 1001, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be prevented from rattling inside the U-shaped base 1001. It is like that.

Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 includes a vertically long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 on the side surface of the lower portion. The play hole 1044 is provided at the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 so as not to obstruct the rotation of the engagement cam 1016 when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. This constitutes a space in which the part can move. Further, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted into the rising engagement hole 1045 and rotated, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised by the rotation operation of the engagement cam 1016. It is for engaging with. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with a relief notch 1049 that is notched larger in the vertical direction than the fraud prevention notch 1007 at the lower rear of the vertical side. This escape notch 1049 is obstructed by the door frame sliding rod 1040 so that the stopper piece 1027 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 is securely engaged with the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066. The corresponding part is notched so as not to become.

On the other hand, the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, a connecting wire rod 1052 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and It has. That is, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is not formed of a single vertically long metal plate as in the prior art, and the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. A plate material is formed by pressing, and the metal upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 1053. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be efficiently stored in the narrow space of the U-shaped base 1001.

The upper hook member 1051 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes a hook portion 1054 formed rearward at the upper end portion, and a long rivet hole 1055 penetrating in a horizontal direction in a plate surface portion adjacent to the hook portion 1054. , A protruding piece moving hole 1056 that passes through the rivet long hole 1055 in the left-right direction, a spring hook portion 1057 formed at the lower end of the vertical side in front of the protruding piece moving hole 1056, and a lower side of the spring hook portion 1057 And a contact portion 1059 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the upper hook member 1051. The hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 has a hook penetrating opening 1 above the U-shaped base body 1001.
It engages with a closing plate 24 that penetrates 002 and is provided at the upper part of the outer side of the outer frame 2, and a locking claw portion is formed upward.

The rivet slot 1055 of the upper hook member 1051 is provided with a door frame sliding rod 1040.
The rivet 1006 is disposed at a position corresponding to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the upper portion of the rivet. In a normal state where the rivet 1006 passes through the rivet slot 1055, the rivet 1006 is the lowermost end of the rivet slot 1055. The upper hook member 1051 can move downward. The upper hook member 1051 has a protruding piece moving hole 1056 into which the guide protruding piece 1043 above the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1040. The mutual movement with 1050 can be guided.

Further, the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured such that the other end of the spring 1048 is locked. The connecting hole 1058 of the upper hook member 1051 is
The upper end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is bent and inserted. Further, when the abutting portion 1059 of the upper hook member 1051 is stored in the U-shaped base 1001, the U-shaped base 1
The upper hook member 1051 can slide smoothly without sliding in the sliding operation of the upper hook member 1051.

On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is for the rivet penetrating in the left-right direction near the upper end of the plate surface portion of the lower hook member 1052 and the hook portion 1065 projecting rearward from the lower end portion. A long hole 1061, a downward engagement hole 1062 disposed below the long hole 1061 for rivets, and an idle hole 1063 extending downward from the lower rear side of the downward engagement hole 1062;
A projecting piece moving hole 1064 formed near the lower end below the play hole 1063 and the lower hook member 10.
52 at the front end of the upper end of the vertical side of 52, an engagement notch 1066 formed at the lower part of the vertical side behind the lower hook member 1052, and the upper and lower sides of the lower hook member 1052. A contact portion 1067.

The hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 passes through the hook penetration opening 1002 below the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with the closing plate 25 formed at the lower portion on the open side of the outer frame 2. A locking claw is formed upward. The lower hook member 1052
The rivet long hole 1061 is formed at a position corresponding to the rivet long hole 1042 formed in the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and the rivet 10
In a normal state where 06 is penetrated, the rivet 1006 penetrates the lowermost end portion of the rivet slot 1061. As a result, the lower hook member 1052 can move downward.

Further, when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052 is rotated to move the main body frame sliding rod 1050.
For engaging so as to descend. Also, the play hole 10 of the lower hook member 1052
63, a space in which the tip of the second engagement protrusion 1018 can move so as not to obstruct the rotation operation when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. It can be formed. Further, the guide piece 1043 below the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the protruding piece moving hole 1064 of the lower hook member 1052, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding plate are inserted. The mutual movement with the palpit 1050 can be guided.

The lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is inserted into the connecting hole 1060 of the lower hook member 1052. Further, the contact portion 1067 of the lower hook member 1052 is
When housed in the U-shaped base 1001, the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 comes into contact, and when the lower hook member 1052 slides relative to the U-shaped base 1001, there is a backlash. It can be slid smoothly.

Next, assembly of the lock device 1000 of this embodiment will be described. To assemble the lock device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are used.
Are connected by a connecting wire rod 1053, and the guide protrusion 1043 of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame in this state.
Are inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the rivet long holes 1042 and the rivet long holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned and overlapped. The hook portion 105 of the upper hook member 1051 in the state
4 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are passed through the hook penetration opening 1002 of the U-shaped base 1001, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are connected to the U-shaped base 1001. After inserting into the letter-shaped space, the rivet 1006 is inserted through the insertion hole 1005.

When the rivet 1006 is inserted, the rivet 1006 has a rivet slot 1055.
1061 and 1042 are inserted. When the lowermost rivet 1006 is inserted, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 and attach the first tamper-proof member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001 at the same time. Further, before attaching the first tamper-proof member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 are coupled by the coupling pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is coupled to the pin hole. After fixing with a screw (not shown) at 1029, the guide pin 102
8 needs to be inserted into the lowermost opening of the insertion vertical opening 1020.

Further, with the rivet 1006, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001, and the spring 1048 is moved to the spring hook portion 104.
6, 1057, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are biased in opposite directions, and the spring 1035 is connected to the spring locking piece 1021 and the spring locking hole. 103
6 and the second anti-tampering member 1032 is in contact with the restricting protrusion 1031.
Thereafter, the cylindrical body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock attachment piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the attachment hole 1014 with a screw 1012. At this time, the distal end portion of the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted outside the inclined portion 1024 and into the insertion vertical opening 1020, and the second engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016. Piece 1018
The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 so that the tip end portion thereof is slightly inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

In order to attach the assembled locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 in this way, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600. While inserting, the locking projection 1004 protruding in a bowl shape is inserted into the main body frame base 600.
Are inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621 and moved upward, and the screw fixing portion 1003 protruding in the horizontal direction in this state is aligned with the lock mounting portion 625, and a screw (not shown) is inserted into the corresponding hole. By screwing, the locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking protrusion 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed to protrude from the side surface 1001a that does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, while the rear portion is fixed. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the structure is formed so as to project in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b that contacts the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001, the front locking structure contacts the peripheral wall portion 605. Compared with the case where it is formed on the side surface 1001b, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame base 600 so as not to be loose.

Next, the operation of the locking device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97. As shown in FIG. 96, when the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. Further, the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are locked, and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the door frame 5 The hook cover 165 is locked. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The front end of the first engagement protrusion 1017 is the main body frame sliding rod 1
The lower hook member 1052 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring 1048 by engaging with the lowering engagement hole 1062 at 050, and the connecting wire rod 1053 and the upper hook member 10 connected thereto are connected.
51 is also pushed down and descends. As a result, the locking state between the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is released, and the main body frame 3 is removed by pulling the main body frame 3 to the front side. The frame 2 can be opened.

When the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are connected to the spring 1048.
However, since the upper sides of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are inclined downward toward the outside, the force is forcedly increased. By pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2, the upper side inclined portions of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 come into contact with the lower end portions of the closing plates 24 and 25. The upward claw portions of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 are locked again, and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is raised and returned to the locked state.

On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 rotates in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The front end of the two engaging protrusions 1018 engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and pushes the door frame sliding rod 1040 upwardly against the urging force of the spring 1048. For this reason, the hook cover 165 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 are provided.
Since the locked state is released from 041, the door frame 5 can be opened with respect to the main body frame 3 by pulling the door frame 5 to the front side.

When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is lowered by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as that shown in FIG. 96A).
Since the lower side of the door frame hook portion 1041 is inclined upward toward the outside, the door frame 5 is forcibly forced.
Is pressed against the main body frame 3, the lower inclined portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 comes into contact with the upper end portion of the hook cover 165, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 rises upward. The downward claw portion of the hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 165 are locked again, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 is lowered to return to the locked state. In addition, the sliding frame 10 for door frames in this embodiment.
40 is formed to have a length substantially the same as the entire length of the U-shaped substrate 1001 and the U-shaped substrate 1.
001 is attached over substantially the entire length of the side surface in the vertical direction of the main body frame 3, and the door frame hook portion 1041, which is a locking portion with the door frame 5, is connected to the upper end portion and the center of the door frame sliding rod 1040. Part, bottom 3
Since the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are locked at the entire length in the longitudinal direction, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are forcibly opened between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. It is not possible to perform fraudulent acts to insert fraudulent tools.

Thus, the locking device 1000 of the door frame 3 of this embodiment releases the locking of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and in the other direction. The door frame 5 can be unlocked with respect to the main body frame 3 by rotating. Further, the lock device 1000 of this example has a main body frame sliding rod 10 without inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010.
Unauthorized actions such as hooking a piano wire or the like on the 50 hook portions 1054 and 1065 and lowering the piano wire cannot be performed. The first structure for preventing such fraud is a lock mechanism composed of a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped base 1001. Sliding frame for door frame in closed space
040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are accommodated.

First, the operation of the lock mechanism, which is the first fraud prevention structure, will be described with reference to FIG. First, when the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 97 (A), the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 are in contact. It has become a state. In this state, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is rotated counterclockwise by the biasing force of the spring 1035 so that the stopper piece 1027 enters the fraud prevention notch 1007 and the stopper piece 1027 is intrusion prevention notch. 1007 for the main body frame at a position corresponding to 1007
0 is engaged with the engagement notch 1066 formed in the lower hook member 1052. As a result, even when the piano frame or the like is hooked on the main body frame sliding rod 1050 and pulled down, the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 are engaged.
It is impossible to illegally pull down (unlock) 050 downward, and an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3 cannot be performed.

On the other hand, when the main body frame 3 is normally unlocked by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010, FIG.
7 (B), the first engagement protrusion 10 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated by rotating the key.
17 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 is rotated, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other. The stopper piece 1027 starts to rotate around the angle 1025 in the clockwise direction shown in the figure, and also moves so as to be retracted from the tamper-proof notch 1007. As a result, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. When the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated in this state and the first engagement protrusion 1017 is also rotated, the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 is moved to the lower hook member 1.
Since the entire body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered by engaging with the lower engagement hole 1062 of 052, the locked state between the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 is released. The main body frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2.

Note that when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031, so the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the state shown in FIG.
When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 contact from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 97 (A) is obtained. This
The first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when the main body frame 3 is closed. In the present embodiment, the first fraud prevention member 1023
And the second fraud prevention member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 from being illegally performed. Because the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened later and the illegal act of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like is practically difficult to perform, the unauthorized operation on the body frame sliding rod 1050 It is devised not to be able to.

Further, even in the lock mechanism that is the above-described first fraud prevention structure, it is impossible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an unauthorized action, in this embodiment, the lock device 1000 is connected to the main body frame 3 (the main body frame base 6).
00), the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside the U-shaped substrate 10 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, respectively.
Since it is housed in the 01 closed space and is completely covered, an attempt is made to pull down the body frame sliding rod 1050 provided in the closed space of the U-shaped base body 1001 by inserting a piano wire or the like. However, since both sides 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base body 1001 prevent the unauthorized tool from entering the closed space, the structure is such that unauthorized acts cannot be easily performed.

As described above, the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment has the sliding frame 1040 for the door frame in the inside of the U-shaped base 1001 whose width is extremely thin as compared with the conventional lock device concentrated on the L-shaped base. The body frame sliding rod 1050 is slidably provided and the cylinder lock 1010 for operating the locking device 1000 is attached to the U-shaped base 1001 at a position below the lower end side of the game board 4. Therefore, while greatly increasing the size of the game board 4 in the left-right direction and the up-down direction,
Even if the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is enlarged, the lock device 1000 can be firmly attached to the back side of the main body frame 3.

Moreover, since the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 is attached so that the open side of the U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame 3, in the state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered by the U-shaped base body 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, respectively. It is impossible to easily perform an illegal act such as pulling down a body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside by inserting a piano wire or the like.

Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking protrusions 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower portions of the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621. The structure is such that the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at the upper, middle, and lower portions of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws. With this structure, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600).

In the locking device 1000 of this example, the screw fixing portion 1003 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 and the cylinder lock through hole 6 of the main body frame 3 as a structure for fixing the lower portion of the U-shaped base body 1001 with screws.
11 shows a structure in which a lock attaching portion 625 formed in the vicinity of the upper portion of 11 is screwed.
Instead of this, a screw 1012 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock attachment piece 1008 is used, and the lock attachment hole in which the tip of the screw 1012 is screwed through the lock attachment piece 1008 is located above and below the cylinder lock through hole 611. It is good also as a structure formed in. Even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 is not screwed, the locking device 1000 can be attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame only by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting portion 625 at the rear of the locking device 1000. It can be fixed sufficiently firmly on the back surface of the base 600).

Further, in the lock device 1000 of this example, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are provided.
The U-shaped base body 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b is completely covered. For example, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are provided on the peripheral wall portion 605.
An L-shaped base (tablet base) is provided with a side face 1001b that is slidably mounted on the opposite side face 1001a not in contact with the rivet and the side face 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall 605 is omitted. A sliding frame 104 for a door frame is formed in a closed space formed by 1001a and the first side wall 540.
It is good also as a structure which accommodates 0 and the sliding rod 1050 for main body frames, and there can exist an effect similar to the locking device 1000 mentioned above.

As described above, according to the main body frame 3 of the present example, the transparent prize ball base 710 having the peripheral wall portion 710a extending rearward (front-rear direction) on the rear side of the body frame base 600, and the upper side of the prize ball base 710 The prize ball tank 720 for storing the game balls supplied from the island facility side of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed is aligned with the game balls discharged from the prize ball tank 720 to align the rear wall portion 710b of the prize ball base. A transparent tank rail unit 730 mounted on the rear side, and a game ball released from the tank rail unit 730 is discharged to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 based on a predetermined payout instruction, and the rear wall portion 710b of the prize ball base 710 A part of the prize ball device 74 which is attached to the rear side is transparent.
0 and a transparent back cover 900 having a side portion 904 extending to the rear end of the main body frame base 600 and having a rear surface arranged substantially flush with the rear surface of the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. Therefore, the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame base 600 through the prize ball base 710 and the back cover 900 can be visually recognized. Easily inspect the back of the game board 4 without opening the back cover 900 that covers the back (visual inspection)
The pachinko machine 1 can be made.

Further, not only the rear side (rear surface) of the game board 4 but also the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized through the transparent prize base 710, the back cover 900, etc. When the game board 4 is removed from the front side to the 601, even if tools such as a screwdriver or pliers, cleaning waste, dust or dirt remain between the game board 4 and the back cover 900, remove them. It can be easily detected from the image, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of any malfunction due to the residue.

Further, as described above, since the rear surface and rear side surface of the game board 4 can be viewed from the outside, unauthorized devices and tools for performing illegal acts are attached to the rear side and side surfaces of the game board 4. Even if it is done, it can be easily discovered, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed, and it is also possible to easily find unauthorized devices attached to the game board 4 from the outside,
The pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrence against fraudulent behavior can be provided, which can be used to prevent unauthorized installation of devices.

Also, since the rear side of the game board 4 is covered with the prize ball base 710 and the back cover 900, other members in the island facility where the game machine 4 is installed come into contact with the game board 4 or the game board 4 It is possible to prevent foreign matters such as dust and dust from adhering to the rear side, and it is possible to keep the game board 4 in a good state and suppress the occurrence of problems.

In addition, the rear surface of the prize ball tank 720 is located at a position about twice as deep as the depth D of the main body frame base 600 from the front end of the main body frame base 600, that is, the depth D of the main body frame base 600. Is about half the depth of the main body frame 3, the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be more easily seen through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, and the like, and the above-described effects are surely achieved. be able to. Further, since the depth D of the main body frame base 600 is about half of the depth of the main body frame 3, the height when the main body frame base 600 is turned down can be made as low as possible to obtain a flat shape. Further, it is possible to facilitate the attaching operation of attaching the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, etc. to the rear side of the main body frame base 600.

Further, the rear surface (main body portion 902) of the transparent back cover 900 is connected to the rear surface of the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, etc. attached to the prize ball base 710,
Since the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 can be made to be a substantially flat surface because it has substantially the same surface shape, it can be caught by other members in the island facility that is installed by eliminating the rear projection. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems by preventing the contact. In addition, since the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 is substantially flat, when the pachinko machine 1 is transported, it is possible to use a buffer material with a simple shape and to increase the accumulation efficiency (storage efficiency). The cost related to the machine 1 can be reduced.

In addition, the back cover 900 is provided with a plurality of slits 916 and through-holes 918, and the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be directly visually recognized through the slits 916 and the like. The rear side of 4 can be further easily seen, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved. Further, even if the back side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame base 600 is covered with the back cover 900, heat from the game board 4 can be released to the outside through the slits 916 and the like of the back cover 900. The heat from the game board 4 can be prevented from accumulating, and the control of the game is unstable due to the heat, and the occurrence of problems due to deformation of members such as synthetic resin is suppressed. be able to. Furthermore, the slit 916 and the through hole 918 of the back cover 900
The size of the game ball cannot pass through, for example, even if the game ball spills on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, It is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems due to the invasion of game balls.

[1-4. Basic configuration of game board]
Next, the basic configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 98 is a front view showing the game board attached to the main body frame with the door frame of the pachinko machine removed. FIG. 99 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as seen from the front, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as seen from the rear. FIG. Further, FIG. 102 (A) is an enlarged front view showing the function display unit in the game board in a state attached to the pachinko machine, and FIG. 102 (B) is a front view showing another form of the function display unit. FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the game board using the game panel of the embodiment different from the example of FIG. 100 and the like, as viewed from the front, and FIG. 104 is the game as viewed from the rear of FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view of a board. FIG. 105 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming panel in the gaming board of FIG. 103 cut in the vertical direction.

As shown in the figure, the game board 4 according to the present embodiment has a front configuration in which an outer periphery of the game area 1100 into which a game ball is driven by a player operating the handle device 500 is substantially rectangular in shape. A member 1110, a plate-like game panel 1150 that is arranged on the rear side of the front component member 1110 and defines the rear end of the game area 1100, a board holder 1160 that is arranged on the lower rear side of the game panel 1150, and a board holder 1160 A game ball attached to the rear surface of the game area 1100
A main control board box 1170 that houses a main control board 4100 that controls the content of games played by driving in, and a predetermined game status can be displayed based on a control signal from the main control board 4100. And a function display unit 1180 that is attached to a predetermined position so as to be visible to the player. The game board 4 is not shown in FIGS. 98 to 105 and will be described in detail later.
0 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150 (see FIGS. 108 to 115, etc.).

The game board 4 of this embodiment includes a front component member 1110, a game panel 1150, and a board holder 11.
60, the main control board box 1170, and the function display unit 1180 form a basic configuration, and are accommodated in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 that are attached to the game panel 1150, and the main control board box 1170. A detailed configuration characterizing the pachinko machine 1 (game board 4) is formed by the main control board 4100. Here, a basic configuration of the game board 4 will be described, and a detailed configuration will be described later.

[1-4A. Previous component]
Next, the front component member 1110 in the game board 4 will be described. The front component member 1110 in the game board 4 of this example has a substantially rectangular shape whose outer shape can be inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the inner shape penetrates in a front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. Game area 11 by the inner periphery of the inner shape
The outer periphery of 00 is defined. The front component member 1110 has an outer rail 1111 that extends in an arc shape from the lower left end toward the left side from the center in the left-right direction in a front view and extends to the upper right side through the center upper end in the left-right direction in the front view. An inner rail 1112 that is arranged substantially inside the outer rail 1111 along the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from the center lower part in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left part in the front view so as to smoothly continue from the lower end of the inner rail 1112 An inner peripheral rail 1113 extending in an arc shape to a position below the end (upper end) of the outer rail 1111 along the counterclockwise circumferential direction when viewed from the front, and the end (upper end) of the inner peripheral rail 1113 and the outer rail 1111 , The inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, which can be contacted with the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1111. Is located at the lowermost end of the game area 1100 at the boundary of the outer area, and is supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1112 so as to be rotatable, and closes between the outer rail 1111. In this way, it is possible to rotate only between the closed position extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and the open position where the outer rail 1111 is opened by rotating in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. A backflow prevention member 1116 biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side;
It has.

When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the front component member 1110 has a lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 as shown in FIG. It is positioned on the extension of the firing rail 660 in the device 650. Between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the firing rail 660, a space extending in the left-right direction and downward is formed, and a game ball launched along the firing rail 660 of the hitting ball launcher 650 is Then, it jumps over the space and is driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls upward along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow prevention member 1116 pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1112 is used. The game area 1 is turned by rotating it toward the open position against the biasing force.
It is possible to enter into 100.

In addition, when the game ball is strongly hit by the hit ball launching device 650, the game ball that rolls along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 comes into contact with the stop portion 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. The rolling direction of the game ball can be forcibly changed by the game ball coming into contact with the stop 1114, and the inner rail 1 can be changed from the outer rail 1111.
It is possible to prevent the game ball from rolling continuously to 113. In addition,
Even if a game ball that has entered (being struck) into the game area 1100 attempts to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 returns to the closed position by the biasing force before that. The backflow prevention member 1116 prevents the backflow of the game ball.

In addition, when the game ball that has been driven into the game area 1100 is not received in a starting port 2101, 2102, a winning port 2103, 2104, 2201, etc., which will be described later, it flows down to the lower end of the game area 1100. Then, it is guided to the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150 by the out port guiding surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, and discharged from the out port 1151 downward to the rear side of the game board 4. ing.

On the other hand, when the game ball launched from the hitting ball launcher 650 cannot enter the game area 1100 beyond the backflow prevention member 1116 at the tip of the inner rail 1112, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 Rolls downward in the opposite direction, and the outer rail 111
From the lower end opening between 1 and the inner rail 1112, the upper end of the firing rail 660 and the outer rail 111
The foul space 626 formed between the lower end of 1 and the foul space 6 is dropped.
The foul bulb entrance 5 of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 located at the lower part of 26.
42e is received and discharged to the lower plate 302 in the plate unit 300.

Note that the outer rail 1111 in the front component member 1110 has a metal plate attached to the surface thereof, so that the wear resistance due to rolling of the game ball is enhanced, and the game ball rolls smoothly. ing. In addition, the stopper 1114 has an elastic body such as rubber or synthetic resin on the surface, and even if the game ball rolls vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and collides, the impact is reduced. The game ball can be repelled inward.

Further, the front component member 1110 includes a wall-shaped crime prevention projection 1117 protruding forward from the lower outer side of the outer rail 1111 and a substantially center in the vertical direction along the inner peripheral rail 1113 from the lower side of the out-port guide surface 1115. And a groove-shaped rail crime prevention groove 1118 that is recessed from the front end by a predetermined amount. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the security projection 1117 in the front component member 1110 has a crime prevention rear end protrusion 183 of the security cover 180 in the door frame 5.
Thus, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the shaft support side (left side in front view), Game area 110
It cannot be made to reach within 0.

Further, when the front structural member 1110 of this example is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3,
A post-crime projecting piece 182 of the security cover 180 in the door frame 5 is inserted into the rail security groove 1118, and the post-crime projecting piece 182 is outside the inner rail 1112 (on the opposite side to the game area 1100). ) The inner frame 1112 and the outer rail 1111 are inserted between the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111 so as to be substantially in contact with the surface. Unauthorized equipment such as a piano wire that has entered between 5 and 5 is gaming area 1
It is possible to prevent reaching into 100.

Further, the front component member 1110 is spaced apart in the vertical direction at the left end in the front view and is recessed from the front to the rear and opened to the left end, and is spaced in the vertical direction at the right end in the front view. A pair of game board stoppers 1120, a fixed recess 1121 that is disposed on the left side of the front view of the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and opened downward and is formed in an arc shape on the upper side and recessed from the front side. In the vicinity of the left end portion of the lower end, there is provided a spherical passage cutout portion 1122 that is cut out in a rectangular shape extending long in the left-right direction upward from the lower end. The positioning recess 1119 of the front component member 1110 is fitted with a positioning member 956 attached to the inside of the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3, so that the left end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 is viewed from the front. However, it is possible to restrict movement in the front-rear direction. Further, the game board stopper 1120 can be detachably locked to the game board locking portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 1120 is attached to the game board. By being locked by the locking portion 608, the right end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction. .

Further, the fixing recess 1121 of the front component member 1110 is a front view of the game board fixture 690 pivotally supported on the front surface of the main body frame 3 in a state where the game board 4 is inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. When rotated clockwise, the fixed piece 690a of the game board fixture 690 is inserted, and the lower end of the game board 4 is restricted from moving forward by the game board fixture 690. It is like that. Further, the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front component member 1110 is formed with the same ball passage cutout portion 1152 at the same position of the game panel 1150, and the game board 4 is connected to the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. In the inserted state, the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 is inserted into the notches 1122 and 1152 for the ball passage.

Further, the front component member 1110 has a laterally long through hole 1123 penetrating in the front-rear direction in the vicinity of the right end of the front end at the lower end, and a thickness in the front-rear direction from the center in the left-right direction on the lower side of the through hole 1123 to the left side of the front view. A fastening portion 1124 formed thinly and a certificate sticking portion 1125 disposed on the left side of the through hole 1123 as viewed from the front is attached. Although the detailed illustration of the fastening portion 1124 in the front component member 1110 is omitted, when the game board is attached to the conventional main body frame, a predetermined fastening band is attached to the fastening hole formed in the conventional main body frame. By wrapping and fastening each other, it is possible to make it difficult to remove the game board 4 and to prevent unauthorized removal of the game board 4.

Further, in the front component member 1110, a display unit 1181 of a function display unit 1180 described later is disposed on the outer right side of the rail security groove 1118 along the inner peripheral rail 1113 and in the lower right of the front view. The front component member 1110 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1126 projecting rearward from the left and right ends of the lower portion of the rear surface, and a plurality of positioning projections 112 projecting rearward from the rear surface of the inner rail 1112.
7. The mounting boss 1126 penetrates the game panel 1150 and engages with the fixed boss 1162 of the substrate holder 1160, and a predetermined screw is screwed from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160 to the mounting boss 1126 through the fixed boss 1162. By wearing it, the game panel 1150 can be held between the front component member 1110 and the substrate holder 1160. Further, the positioning protrusion 1127 can be fitted into an inner rail fixing hole 1155 formed in the game panel 1150 to fix the inner rail 1112 at a predetermined position of the game panel 1150.

[1-4B. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 will be described. Game panel 1 of this example
150 is formed of a wood board material such as a veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and the outer shape is substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component member 1110. This gaming panel 1150 is horizontally long in the front-rear direction on the left side in front view of the lower end in front view and the out-port 1151 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-out guide surface 1115 in the front component member 1110 at the lower part of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front , And is opened downward and has a spherical passage cutout portion 1152 having the same shape as the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front component member 1110, and a rearward projecting portion of the function display unit 1180 that penetrates the lower right corner when viewed from the front. An insertion hole 1153 into which 1182 is inserted.

In addition, the game panel 1150 has a mounting boss 1 of the front component member 1110 near the left and right ends of the lower part.
A plurality of boss insertion holes 1154 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to 126, and the front component 1
A plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1155 into which 110 positioning projections 1127 are inserted and fixed, and a groove-shaped out-ball discharge that is recessed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface to the front side on the rear surface side of the out port 1151 and is opened downward on the lower end side. A groove 1156 (see FIG. 101) and a notch 1157 formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the front component member 1110 and notched so as to penetrate from the right end in the front view in the front-rear direction. . In addition, the game panel 1150 includes a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component member 1110 at appropriate positions.

The gaming panel 1150 in the gaming board 4 of this example can partition the rear end of the gaming area 1100 whose outer periphery is partitioned by the front component member 1110, and although not shown, A plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement within a corresponding range, and a front unit 2000 is attached. A back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. In addition, the gaming panel 1150 is formed so that the out port 1151 is positioned at the lowermost end of the gaming area 1100, and in the state assembled to the gaming board 4, the front component 111
A game ball guided rearward by the out-port guide surface 1115 formed at the lowermost end of the game area 1100 at 0 enters the out-port 1151 and is discharged to the rear side of the game board 4.

[1-4C. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1160 in the game board 4 will be described. The substrate holder 1160 is formed in a horizontally long box shape that is open at the top and front. The substrate holder 1160 includes
An out sphere discharge portion 1161 formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction is formed at the front end of the bottom wall portion at the approximate center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and the upper surface of the bottom wall portion is the out sphere discharge portion 1161.
The game ball discharged from the out port 1151, the front unit and the back unit of the game panel 1150 and supplied (discharged) to the upper surface of the bottom of the substrate holder 1160 is discharged as an out ball. The portion 1161 is discharged downward. In addition,
When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the out ball discharge section 1161 is positioned immediately above the discharge ball receiving section 841 of the board unit 800 in the main body frame 3, and is discharged from the game board 4. All of the game balls thus made are discharged to the lower rear side of the pachinko machine 1 through the discharge passage 842 of the board unit 800.

The substrate holder 1160 includes a plurality of fixed bosses 1162 that protrude forward from the front ends of the upper and lower ends of the side wall portion. The plurality of fixed bosses 1162 have game panels 115 at the ends.
20 is inserted into the boss insertion hole 1154 from the rear side, and is fitted to the rear end of the mounting boss 1126 of the front component 1110. The board holder 1160 can be assembled to the front component member 1110 by screwing a predetermined screw into the mounting boss 1126 through the fixed boss 1162 from the rear side of the holder 1160. The game panel 1150 can be held between the front component member 1110 and the substrate holder 1160.

Further, as shown in FIG. 101, the substrate holder 1160 has a fixing portion 11 in which a fixing piece 1174 of the main control board box 1170 can be fitted from the side to the left end of the rear surface of the rear surface in the rear view.
63, and a locking portion 1164 that is arranged to face the fixing portion 1163 and that can lock the elastic fixing piece 1175 of the main control board box 1170 from the rear. This substrate holder 1
The main control board box 1170 can be detachably supported on the rear surface of the board holder 1160 by the fixing part 1163 and the locking part 1164 of 160.

[1-4D. Main control board box]
Next, the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 will be described. The main control board box 1170 includes a thin horizontal box-shaped board base 1171 with the rear side opened, and a thin horizontal box shape with the front side opened to cover the rear surface of the board base 1171 and is fitted into the board base 1171 from the rear side. A board cover 1172 to be combined, and a main control board 4100 having electronic components and terminals mounted on the rear side at the front end of the board cover 1171 are provided. Further, the main control board box 1170 extends outward from the left side end of the board base 1171 when viewed from the back and is fitted to the fixing part 1163 of the board holder 1160 and from the right side of the board cover 1172 when viewed from the right side. And an elastic fixing piece that protrudes rearward and is elastically locked to the locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160.

The main control board box 1170 includes an elastic fixing piece 1175 as shown in FIG.
The substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 11 are arranged at the right end of the rear view when viewed from the back.
72, a sealing portion 1176 capable of sealing the opening and closing of the substrate 72, a substrate base 1171 and a substrate cover 1172.
A hermetic seal that is applied across the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 at the lower end of
And a transparent seal protective cover 1177 that covers the surface of the hermetic seal, and a substrate management seal 1178 that is affixed to the rear surface of the substrate cover 1172. The sealing part 1176 of the main control board box 1170 has the same configuration as the separation cutting part 863 of the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800, and the four sealing parts 117.
In any one of 6, the caulking is fixed. In order to separate the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, the main control substrate box 1170 is caulked and fixed to the sealing portion 11.
76 needs to be cut, and a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1170 remains. Thus, it can be clearly determined from the outside whether or not the main control board box 1170 has been opened illegally.

In this example, four sealing portions 1176 of the main control board box 1170 are provided, so that the main control board box 1170 can be opened and closed up to three times.
Further, the main control board box 1170 of this example includes a board base 1171 and a board cover 1172.
A sealing seal is applied across the substrate base, and when the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 are separated, it is necessary to cut or peel off the sealing seal. It has become. Accordingly, the main control board box 1170 is illegally opened and closed, and the internal main control board 4100 is illegally modified or replaced with an illegal main control board (or a ROM storing a game content program or the like). However, it can be visually confirmed from the outside, and it is possible to prevent such illegal acts from being performed.

The main control board box 1170 has an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction of the board cover 1172 at an appropriate position, and is attached to the main control board 4100 through the opening.
Various connection terminals for connecting to the AM clear switch 4100c, the test terminal 4100f, the peripheral control board 4010, the payout control board 4110, and the like face the rear side. The main control board 4100 can be checked from the outside without opening the main control board box 1170 by connecting a predetermined measuring device to the test terminal 4100f facing the rear surface of the main control board box 1170. Even if the above-described sealing portion 1176 and the sealing seal are cleverly crafted, the presence or absence of unauthorized modification to the main control board 4100 can be confirmed other than visually, and the pachinko machine 1 having high crime prevention performance is obtained. Be able to.

[1-4E. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 in the game board 4 will be described. The function display unit 1180 is mounted and arranged at a predetermined position of the front component member 1110. The display unit 1181 is disposed on the front surface of the front component member 1110 so as to be visible from the player side. A rear projecting portion 1182 projecting rearward from the rear surface.

In the display portion 1181 of the function display unit 1180 of this example, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 102 (A), the game state that changes depending on the game ball that has been driven into the game area 1100 is displayed at the left end of the front view. A game status indicator 1183 consisting of a single LED to display the number of suspensions related to the acceptance of a game ball to the first start port 2101 consisting of two LEDs arranged vertically on the right side of the game status indicator 1183 1st special symbol memory display 1184 for the first special symbol memory 1184 and the first special symbol result that is placed on the right side of the first special symbol memory display 1184 and drawn by receiving a game ball to the first start port 2101 The first special symbol display 1185 made up of one 7-segment LED for display as the first special symbol display 1185 and the second start opening 210 A second special symbol display 1186 composed of one 7-segment LED for displaying the second special lottery result drawn by accepting game balls as a second special symbol, and the right side of the second special symbol display 1186 And a second special symbol memory display 1187 for displaying the number of reserves related to the acceptance of game balls to the second start port 2102.

The display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 includes a second special symbol display 1186.
A normal symbol memory display 1188 composed of four LEDs for displaying the number of reserves related to the passage of the gate portion 2401 by the game ball, which are arranged in an arc shape substantially along the inner peripheral rail 1113 from directly above, and a normal symbol memory A normal symbol display 1189 composed of one LED for displaying a normal lottery result, which is placed under the display unit and is drawn by passing a game ball through the gate portion 2401, as a normal symbol, and a normal symbol memory display From two LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (rounds) of the open / close pattern of the grand prize winning opening 2103 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “big hit”, arranged side by side on the diagonal upper right side of 1188 And a round indicator 1190.

The game status indicator 1183 in the function display unit 1180 of this example is a color LED that can change the emission color of red, green, and orange. Various game states (for example, a probability variation state, a time shortening state, a probability variation short state, a big hit gaming state, a small hit gaming state, etc.) can be displayed by the combination.

Also, the first special symbol memory display 1184 in the function display unit 1180 receives a game ball at the first start port 2101 when the first special symbol display 1185 cannot display the first special symbol in a variable manner. In this case, the number of the first special symbols on which the start of the variable display is suspended (stored) is displayed. This first special symbol memory display 11
84 has a first special symbol memory lamp 1184a and a first special symbol memory lamp 1184b made of predetermined LEDs, and the number of holds is determined by the lighting / flashing pattern of the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b. It can be displayed. Specifically, for example, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a is turned on and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is turned off when the number of holdings is one, and the first special symbol memory lamp 1 when the number of holdings is two.
When both 184a and 1184b are lit and the number of holdings is three, the first special symbol memory lamp 11
84a blinks and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is lit, and when the number of holdings is four, both the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b blink. In addition,
In this example, up to four are reserved.

In addition, the second special symbol memory display 1187 in the function display unit 1180 receives a game ball at the second start port 2102 when the second special symbol display 1186 cannot display the second special symbol in a variable manner. In this case, the number of the second special symbol that is suspended (stored) is displayed (stored). This second special symbol memory display 11
87 has a second special symbol memory lamp 1187a and a second special symbol memory lamp 1187b made of predetermined LEDs, and the number of holds is determined by the lighting / flashing pattern of the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b. It can be displayed. Specifically, for example, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a is turned on when the number of holdings is one, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b is turned off, and the second special symbol memory display lamps 1187a, When the number of holdings is three, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a blinks and the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b is lit. When the number of holdings is four, the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned on. Both are now flashing. In this example, up to four are reserved.

Further, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 in the function display unit 1180 are selected by the first special lottery that is drawn by receiving the game balls to the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102. The result and the second special lottery result are displayed. The 7-segment LED stops after fluctuating for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result, and the first 7-segment LED light emission pattern (special symbol) is stopped. The player can recognize the special lottery result and the second special lottery result.

Further, the normal symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is a color LED that can change the emission color of red, green, and orange, and a combination of the emitted emission color and lighting / flashing. Thus, it is possible to display a normal lottery result that is drawn by passing a game ball through the gate portion 2401. Normal symbol display 118
Similarly to the special symbol, the normal symbol display by No. 9 is displayed with a light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result after being displayed for a predetermined time.

In addition, the normal symbol storage display 1188 in the function display unit 1180 can display the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1189 when the normal symbol cannot be variably displayed.
When the game ball passes through, the number of retained symbols (stored number) of the normal symbols for which the start of variable display is suspended (stored) is displayed. The normal symbol storage indicator 1188 includes four normal symbol storage lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from below, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the normal symbol storage lamp 1188a from the bottom according to the number of holds. By sequentially lighting up to 1188d, it is possible to display the number of reserved normal symbols. In this example, up to four normal symbol fluctuation displays are held (stored).

Furthermore, the round indicator 1190 in the function display unit 1180 includes a 10-round display lamp 1190a and a 15-round display lamp 1190b made up of predetermined LEDs. Numbers can be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 102A, the function display unit 1180 of this example can be viewed from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 with the game board 4 attached to the pachinko machine 1. It has become. In addition, the game status indicator 1183, the first special symbol storage indicator 1184, the first special symbol indicator 1185, and the second special symbol indicator 11 of the function display unit 1180.
86, the second special symbol storage indicator 1187, the normal symbol storage indicator 1188, the normal symbol indicator 1189, and the round indicator 1190 are attached to the front surface of the function display board 1191 (see FIG. 195). Further, a connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rear protrusion 1182 of the function display unit 1180.

In this example, since the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front component member 1110 of the game board 4, the front unit 2000 and the back unit 30 attached to the game panel 1150.
Compared with the case of preparing for 0, the function display unit 1180 can be used as the basic configuration of the game board 4, and the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified to prevent the cost from increasing. The model of the pachinko machine 1 (front unit 2000 and back unit 3
Even if the detailed configuration of the game board 4 that can be characterized by the model of the pachinko machine 1 is different, the position of the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 does not change. A store clerk or the like can recognize the position of the display unit 1181 without being confused.

Further, the function display unit 1180 of the pachinko machine 1 may be configured as shown in FIG. In this example, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 configured by 7 segment LEDs are each configured by eight LED groups. In addition, the first special symbol memory indicator 1184 and the second special symbol memory indicator 1187,
Each is composed of four LED groups, and the normal symbol memory display 1188 has two LEs.
D is configured.

This function display unit 1180 can achieve the same effects as described above,
Since the first special symbol indicator 1185 and the second special symbol indicator 1186 are configured by eight LED groups, the special symbol displayed to the player as compared with the case where the seven-segment LED is used. It can make it difficult to remember the design. Therefore, since the content displayed on the function display unit 1180 is difficult to understand, it is possible to suppress the display of the function display unit 1180 from becoming concerned about the display during the game, and it is possible to suppress difficulty in concentrating on the game. The game can be more enjoyed by devoting itself to movable effects and effects images.

[1-4F. Second embodiment of game panel]
Subsequently, the gaming panel 1 having a form different from the gaming panel 1150 in the gaming board 4 described above.
200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 to 105. 103 to 10.
5, the front component 1110, the substrate holder 1160, and the main control substrate box 1170
Are the same as those described above, and a detailed description thereof is omitted here. The gaming panel 1200 of the present embodiment is thinner than the gaming panel 1150 described above, and the front component 11
10 is a plate-shaped front component 1 that can partition the rear end of a game area 1100 whose outer periphery is partitioned by 10
A panel plate 1210 having an outer shape smaller than the outer shape of 110 and a frame-like panel holder 1220 that holds the panel plate 1210 so as to be detachable from the front side and are attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1110 are provided.

The gaming panel 1200 panel plate 1210 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than the gaming area 1100, and is made of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, methacrylic resin, glass, metal, etc. It is formed of an inorganic plate. The thickness of the panel plate 1210 is thinner than the panel holder 1220 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary that can be sufficiently held even if a failure nail (not shown) is installed on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. The thickness is 8 to 10 mm. In this example, panel plate 1210 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1210 has a plurality of fitting holes 1211 formed of round holes arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and penetrating in the front-rear direction, a long hole 1212 disposed in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion and extending in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction, It has. The fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 are connected to the game area 110.
It is arranged outside 0 and performs positioning with the panel holder 1220.
Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with stepped engagement step portions 1213 whose front sides are recessed at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side, respectively. The engagement step portion 1213 is cut out to approximately half the plate thickness of the panel plate 1210 and, like the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212,
Arranged outside the gaming area 1100, the panel plate 1210 is attached to the panel holder 122.
It is for engaging and fixing to 0.

The panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1214 at predetermined positions. Positioning projections 11 projecting from the rear side of the inner rail 1112 in the inner rail fixing hole 1214
By fitting and fixing 27, the inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position. Further, the panel plate 1210 will be described later in detail, but the attacker unit 21
00 and a plurality of openings 121 penetrating in the front-rear direction for attaching the center accessory 2500 and the like
The attacker unit 2100 and the like are inserted and fixed from the front side with respect to the opening 1215 (see FIG. 133 and the like).

On the other hand, the panel holder 1220 in the gaming panel 1200 has a size that includes the panel board 1210 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is substantially the same thickness as the gaming panel 1150 made of the above-described wood board (in this example, about 20 mm) of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1220 includes a holding step portion 1221 that holds the panel plate 1210 in a detachable manner and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and is substantially the same size as the game area 1100 inside the holding step portion 1221. It mainly includes a through-hole 1222 that penetrates in the direction.

The holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 has a depth from the front surface that is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and the front surface of the panel plate 1210 held in the holding step portion 1221 is the front surface of the panel holder 1220. It is designed to be almost the same surface. In addition, the holding step portion 1221 has a front inner peripheral surface of a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1210. With this clearance, even if the panel plate 1210 expands and contracts relatively due to temperature changes and changes over time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed. An elastic member such as rubber may be packed in the clearance.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 formed in the panel plate 1210 held by the holding step portion 1221, and the holding step portion 122.
1 extends forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1210 and has a fitting hole 1211 and a long hole 1212 in the panel plate 1210.
Are provided with a plurality of protruding pins 1223 that can be fitted and inserted. These protruding pins 1223
The panel holder 1220 and the panel plate 1210 can be positioned with respect to each other by fitting and inserting them into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with an engaging claw 1224 and an engaging piece 1225 that engage with the engaging step portion 1213 at a position corresponding to the engaging step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210. More specifically, the engaging claw 1224 is disposed on the upper holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the upper engaging step portion 1213 on the panel plate 1210, and the holding step portion 122.
1 protrudes forward from the front surface of 1 and is elastically engaged with the engaging step 1213.
The engaging claw 1224 is sized so that the tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1220. On the other hand, the engagement piece 1225 has a holding step portion 1221 below the panel holder 1220.
Corresponding to the lower engaging step portion 1213 in the panel plate 1210, and the holding step portion 12.
A predetermined amount toward the upper side (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder 1220 in a state where a predetermined gap of a size that allows the engagement step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210 to be inserted is formed between the front surface of the panel plate 1210 It is made into the form extended. The panel plate 12 is connected to the engagement claws 1224 and the engagement pieces 1225.
By engaging the 10 engaging step portions 1213, the panel plate 1210 is attached to the panel holder 1220.
Is detachably held.

Further, the panel holder 1220 has a mounting boss 1126 provided on the front component member 1110.
Is provided with a boss insertion hole 1226 that penetrates in the front-rear direction.
26, by inserting the mounting boss 1126 of the front component member 1110 into the panel holder 1220.
And the front component 1110 are positioned relative to each other.

As shown in FIG. 104, the panel holder 1220 has a mounting support portion 1227 that is recessed by a predetermined amount on the rear side so that the center in the vertical direction is slightly lower and the outer periphery is left below.
Is provided. The mounting support portion 1227 causes the rear surface of the panel holder 1220 to be recessed above the predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, with the rear outer peripheral portion protruding rearward, and the amount of the depression ( The depth (in this example, about 2.5 mm) that can accommodate the flange-like fixing portion 3001a (see FIG. 113 and the like) of the back box 3001 in the back unit 3000 that is attached and fixed to the attachment support portion 1227. It is desirable to be between 1 and 3 mm). By attaching and fixing a predetermined member to the mounting support portion 1227, it is possible to prevent the fixing portion 3001a from projecting to the rear side of the panel holder 1220, and the panel holder 1220, that is, the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3. The pachinko machine 1 can be securely installed and mounted in the game board holding port 601.

Further, as shown in the drawing, the panel holder 1220 has a plurality of mounting holes 1228 arranged in the mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side and on the upper side of the receiving recess 630h and capable of screwing a predetermined screw.
Are arranged in a predetermined arrangement. In addition, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 1229 arranged so as to correspond to the mounting holes 1228. This positioning hole 12
Reference numeral 29 denotes a positioning protrusion (for example, a positioning protrusion that protrudes forward from a fixing portion 3001a formed in a flange shape on the front surface of the back box 3001 in a member attached and fixed using the mounting hole 1228 (not shown). )) Is inserted. In this example, the positioning hole 1229 is a blind hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) when viewed from the back.

In addition, with respect to the mounting hole 1228, the inner diameter of the hole is mixed with that having a large diameter and a small diameter so that the mounting hole has an appropriate diameter according to the size or weight of a predetermined member to be mounted and fixed. 12
28 may be used.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a plurality of thinned portions 1230 that open to the rear surface side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, so that the weight of the panel holder 1220 is reduced by the thinned portions 1230. It has become. As shown in FIG. 103, these thinning portions 1230 are not formed in the predetermined range from the front side of the housing recess 630h, that is, from the lower end on the front side of the panel holder 1220 to a predetermined height. Then, since the front surface of the panel holder 1220 becomes a substantially flat surface, the rear surface of the front component member 1110 disposed on the front surface becomes a substantially flat surface, and the game ball launched from the ball hitting device 650 However, it is guided smoothly. In addition, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a thinned portion 1230 so that the mounting holes 1228 and the like are formed in a boss shape, and supports the panel holder 1220 and maintains the strength of the panel holder 1220. To do
A box-like rib is formed.

The panel holder 1220 is formed with a positioning unit 1231 corresponding to positioning means such as an obstacle nail planting device (not shown) or an assembly jig, and holds the game panel 1150 on the obstacle nail planting device. Can be set in the state. Panel holder 1
In the lower part of 220, an out port 1232 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-port guide surface 1115 of the front component member 1110, penetrates horizontally in the front-rear direction on the left side when viewed from the lower end, and is opened downward. A ball passage cutout portion 1233 having the same shape as the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the constituent member 1110, and an insertion hole 1234 through which the rear protrusion portion 1182 of the function display unit 1180 penetrates in the front lower right corner portion when viewed from the front. It is equipped with.

Further, the panel holder 1220 has a groove-shaped out sphere discharge groove 1235 (see FIG. 104) which is depressed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface to the front side on the rear surface side of the out port 1232 and whose lower end side is opened downward. And a notch portion 1236 formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the member 1110 and notched so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction from the right end in front view. Also,
The panel holder 1220 includes a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component member 1110 at appropriate positions.

The out-ball discharge groove 1235 in the panel holder 1220 is formed in the main body frame 3 (the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 606 in the main body frame base 600) when the game board 4 is inserted and held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. The game board 4 is moved relative to the main body frame 3 in the left-right direction when the out-ball discharge groove 1235 is fitted with the positioning protrusion 607. Being regulated.

The gaming panel 1200 of the present embodiment has a holding step 122 of the panel holder 1220 from the front.
The panel plate 1210 can be held in the panel holder 1220 by fitting and inserting the panel plate 1210 into 1 and engaging the engagement claws 1224 and the engagement pieces 1225 with the engagement step portion 1213. At the same time, the front side of the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220 are substantially flush with each other, and the panel plate 1210 can be held in the panel holder 1220 without modification of a conventionally used obstacle nail planting device. In this state, it can be set in a conventional obstacle nail planting device, and an increase in the cost for planting the obstacle nail can be suppressed.

In addition, although not shown in the drawing, the gaming panel 1200 of this example has a plurality of obstacle nails planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement within a range corresponding to the gaming area 1100 on the front surface of the panel board 1210. At the same time, a front unit 2000 is attached. A back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1220. Thereby, since the thin panel plate 1210 supports only the front unit, it is possible to prevent the panel plate 1210 from being distorted by the load of the front unit.

Furthermore, since the gaming panel 1200 has a divided structure of the panel board 1210 and the panel holder 1220, even if the panel board 1210 is a transparent board, it is possible to suppress an increase in the weight of the gaming panel 1200 as a whole. Game area 1100 through board 1210
The pachinko machine 1 whose rear side is visible to the player can be embodied, and the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention can be obtained.

In addition, since the gaming panel 1200 is divided into a panel plate 1210 and a panel holder 1220, the panel plate 1210 whose position such as an obstacle nail or a winning opening changes depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1 is used as a replacement part. The panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part, and the pachinko machine 1 including the game board 4 that can be used for various models can be obtained by replacing only the panel plate 1210.

Further, since the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 in a predetermined arrangement in advance, the back unit 3000 is mounted and fixed on the rear surface side of the panel holder 1220 according to the model.
Even if the mounting and fixing positions of various predetermined members such as these are different positions, the panel holder 1220 is designed to be independent of the model by designing the fixing portions of the various members to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 1228. One common part can be used.

[1-5. Security structure of pachinko machine]
Subsequently, the security structure in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be mainly described with reference to FIGS.
This will be described with reference to 07. FIG. 106 is a partial cross-sectional view showing a security structure on the shaft support side of the pachinko machine. FIG. 107 is a perspective view seen from the rear side in a state where the game board is accommodated.

First, as shown in FIG. 106, the security structure on the pivot support side in the pachinko machine 1 of this example is the pivot support side of the main body frame base 600 formed of synthetic resin in the main body frame 3 (left side in front view).
It is comprised by the metal crime prevention side plate 950 attached to the side surface of this, and the metal reinforcement unit 150 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 formed of the synthetic resin in the door frame 5.

As described above, the security side plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed of an extrusion mold material made of metal (for example, aluminum alloy), and the vertical dimension is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the main body frame base 600. In addition, the dimension in the front-rear direction is larger than the dimension in the front-rear direction in which the front component member 1110 and the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 are combined. This side crime prevention plate 950 extends in the vertical direction, extends in the front-rear direction, and forms a side surface of the main body frame 3, and a front end extending from the front end of the side piece 952a to the inner side (open side) in a substantially right angle direction. A piece 952b, a middle piece 952c extending along the front end piece 952b from the side piece 952a so as to form a predetermined amount of clearance on the rear side of the front end piece 952b, and extending inward from the rear end of the side piece 952a in a substantially perpendicular direction. And a rear end piece 952d. Thereby, the front end of the security side plate 950 is
The front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c have a substantially U-shaped cross section that opens inward (open side).

Further, the side security plate 950 (main body 952) has a side security plate 950 by a front end piece 952b, a middle piece 952c, and a rear end piece 952d arranged in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the side plate piece 952a.
The strength and rigidity of the main body frame 3 are increased, and the game board 4 and the door frame 5 can be favorably supported.

On the other hand, the reinforcement unit 150 of the door frame 5 is formed in a frame shape so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 in the door frame 5 using spot welding, rivets, or the like, as described above. The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 on the shaft support side is provided with a shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 having a substantially U-shaped cross section opened outward (the shaft support side). In the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150, the strength of the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further increased by the support-side U-shaped projecting piece 166, and the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is difficult to bend. .

By the way, in this example, since the door frame 5 is attached and supported only at the upper and lower points of the upper shaft support portion 156 and the lower shaft support portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3, the door frame 5 on the shaft support side. If an unauthorized tool such as a screwdriver or a bar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed, and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is increased. There is a risk of cheating.
On the other hand, in the security structure of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the security side face plate 950 are provided. A rear piece of a pivot-side U-shaped projecting piece 166 formed in a substantially U-shape of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 is inserted (enters), and the front end piece 952a is pivotally supported. The side U-shaped projecting piece 166 is sandwiched. Accordingly, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the pivotal U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 comes into contact with the rear surface side of the front end piece 952 b of the main body frame 3. Since the pivot-side U-shaped projecting piece 166 can be prevented from moving away from the main body frame 3, the closed door frame 5 can be prevented from being opened.
It is possible to prevent an unauthorized act such as opening the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3.

In addition, since the security side plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is set. Since the strength and rigidity of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be made difficult to be distorted by an unauthorized tool, the crime prevention performance can be improved.

Further, since the rear end of the side piece 952a in the security side plate 950 extends rearward from the game panel 1150 in the game board 4, the main body frame base 600 on the rear side of the rear end of the side piece 952a is assumed. Even if the player is destroyed, an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire cannot be entered from the rear end of the side piece 952a into the game area 1100 on the front surface of the game board 4 (game panel 1150). Can be surely prevented. In addition,
As shown in FIG. 106, the side frame plate 12 of the outer frame 2 is in contact with the outer side of the security side plate 950, so that the pachinko machine 1 has a robust side surface and is destroyed from the side surface side. It is possible to fully oppose the act. In general, in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the side surface of the pachinko machine 1 is inserted and fixed within the frame of the island facility for installing the pachinko machine 1, so that the player side From the (front side), it is almost impossible to allow an unauthorized tool to enter the rear side of the rear end of the side piece 952c, and the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 is further improved.

Subsequently, as a crime prevention structure from the rear side in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, as shown in FIG. 107, a prize ball base 710, a tank rail 731 in the main body frame 3 for housing the game board 4,
Unit base 741, full tank branch unit 770, and back cover 90 of prize ball device 740
Since 0 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, the game board 4 is removed from the main body frame 3 or the back cover 900 is opened on the rear side or the side of the game board 4 accommodated in the main body frame 3. Even if it is not, it can be visually recognized from the rear side of the main body frame 3. Thereby, the game board 4
Even if a fraudulent device is attached to the rear side or the like, it can be easily detected and illegal acts can be prevented. Further, since it is possible to easily find an unauthorized device or the like attached to the game board 4 from the outside, it is possible to hesitate to attach an unauthorized device, and it is possible to increase deterrence against unauthorized acts. ing.

In addition, since the rear side and the side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize base 710, the back cover 900, etc., the main body frame can be used for maintenance and model change. When the game board 4 is attached to or detached from the board 3, even if tools such as a screwdriver or pliers, cleaning waste, dust or dirt remain between the main body frame 3 and the game board 4, remove them. Therefore, it is possible to prevent any trouble from occurring, and to improve the maintainability of the pachinko machine 1.

[2. Detailed configuration of game board]
Subsequently, a detailed configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
A description will be given with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 109 is a front view of the game board showing the second attacker unit in an easy-to-see manner, FIG. 110 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from diagonally right front, and FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally left front. FIG. 112 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed obliquely from behind. FIG. 113 is a perspective view disassembled for each main member constituting the game board and viewed from diagonally forward, and FIG. 114 is a perspective view exploded for each main member constituting the game board and viewed obliquely from the rear. FIG.

The game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 111.
A frame-shaped front component member 1110 that defines an outer periphery of a game area 1100 into which a game ball (also simply referred to as a “ball”) as a game medium is driven when the player operates the handle device 500. When the front structural member 1110 is attached to the pachinko machine 1 in the lower right corner when viewed from the front, the function display unit 11 is arranged at a position where the door frame 5 is visible from the game window 101 to the player side.
80 and a plurality of openings 1215 (see FIG. 113 and the like) that are attached to the rear side of the front component member 1110 so as to close the game area 1100 and penetrate the front and rear in a predetermined shape at positions corresponding to the game area 1100 And a board-like gaming panel 1200 that partitions the rear end of the gaming area 1100.

The gaming panel 1200 of this example has a transparent panel board 1210 having a plate shape capable of partitioning the rear end of the gaming area 1100 whose outer periphery is partitioned by the front component member 1110 and having an outer shape smaller than that of the front component member 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1220 that holds the panel plate 1210 so as to be detachable from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1110. An opening 1215 of the game panel 1200 is formed in a transparent panel plate 1210.

Further, on the gaming panel 1200 of this example, a decorative seal 1102 having a pattern in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the front side of the transparent panel board 1210 (FIG. 1).
13). The decorative seal 1102 is formed with an opening 1102a that penetrates a predetermined amount (for example, 0.2 mm to 1 mm) larger than the outer diameter of the obstacle nail G planted on the panel plate 1210. Thus, the decorative seal 1102 does not come into contact. By the way, when a shrinkage difference is generated between the decorative seal 1102 and the panel plate 1210 due to temperature change, secular change, or the like, the decorative seal 11 is moved by the obstacle nail G that moves together with the panel plate 1210.
When 02 is pulled or pushed, wrinkles may occur in the decorative seal 1102 and the appearance may be deteriorated. It is possible to avoid being pulled or pushed by avoiding contact with the obstacle nail G by an amount corresponding to the gap with the obstacle nail G in the opening 1102a. Can be prevented, and the appearance of the gaming panel 1200 (in the gaming area 1100) can be maintained in a good state.

This decorative seal 1102 is applied to a transparent film so that a pattern or the like is partially translucent. The decorative seal 1102 is a decoration of the ball guiding unit 3060 in the back unit 3000 disposed on the rear side through the transparent portion. Members 3064 and 3065 and a lower front movable production unit 360
0 etc. can be visually recognized from the player side (see FIG. 109). Further, since the decorative seal 1102 is provided so that the pattern or the like has translucency as described above, the back left top decorative unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, the back left decorative member 3704 in the back left movable effect unit 3700, and the like. By emitting light in a planar shape, it is possible to emit light as if the pattern is self-lighting. Accordingly, the gaming panel 1200 that defines the rear end of the gaming area 1100.
The design (decorative sticker 1102) emits light, so that the design (game area 1100) can be conspicuous and the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention can be obtained. Yes.

The game board 4 includes a front unit 2000 attached from the front side to the opening 1215 of the game panel 1200, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1200 (panel holder 1220), and a rear side of the back unit 3000. And a substrate holder 1160 attached to the lower rear portion of the game panel 1150 so as to cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 from the rear side.
And a main control board box 1170 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1160.

The front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the present example is arranged along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 on the upper left side of the attacker unit 2100 and the attacker unit 2100 arranged on the upper side of the out port 1151 in the lower part in the game area 1100. Front left movable production unit 2300,
A gate member 2400 disposed on the upper left side of the front left movable effect unit 2300 and slightly on the left side from the center in the up-down direction in the game area 1100, and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 disposed substantially at the center of the game area 1100 It is equipped with.

In addition, the back unit 3000 in the game board 4 is a box shape attached to the rear side of the game panel 1150 and opened on the front side, and a back box 3001 in which an opening 3001c facing the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is formed on the rear wall 3001b. A back upper left decorative unit 3050 arranged near the front surface in the back box 3001 above the opening 3001c and in the left corner when viewed from the front, and capable of light emission decoration, and the back box 3
A ball guiding unit 3060 disposed below the opening 3001c in the vicinity of the front surface in 001 and guiding the game ball received by the front unit 2000 downward, and a back surface attached to the front side of the rear wall 3001b in the back box 3001 The middle movable effect unit 3100 and the rear rear upper movable effect unit 32 arranged on the upper side and the front side of the back middle movable effect unit 3100 in the back box 3000.
00 and the back-up front movable effect unit 3 arranged on the front side of the back-up / down moveable effect unit 3200
400, a back-under-back movable effect unit 3500 disposed between the ball guidance unit 3060 and the back-inside movable effect unit 3100 in the back box 3000, and a back-under-front movable effect unit attached to the front side of the ball guide unit 3060 3600 and a back left movable effect unit 3700 disposed on the left side of the opening 3001c of the back box 3000 and on the front side of the back middle movable effect unit 3100.
And.

The back box 3001 in the back unit 3000 has a substantially rectangular opening 3001c penetrating in the front-rear direction on the rear wall 3001b, and the display screen is forward (from the opening 3001c (
A liquid crystal display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear side of the rear wall 3001b of the back box 3001 so as to face the player side.

Further, on the back side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4, a peripheral control board box 1910 that houses a peripheral control board 4010 having a peripheral control part 4140 and a liquid crystal control part 4150 is provided, as will be described in detail later. Yes.

[2-1. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the front unit 2000 of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 and 116. FIG. FIG. 115 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 116 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the rear.

The front unit 2000 in the game board 4 is arranged at an upper portion of the out-out 1151 at a substantially lower center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100 and is supported by the front surface of the game panel 1200 (panel plate 1210), and the attacker unit 2100. The front left movable effect unit 2300 that is arranged on the upper left side of the game area 1100 and extends from the outer periphery of the game area 1100 to the center side in the left-right direction, and on the upper left side of the front left movable effect unit 2300 A gate member 2400 that is disposed and supported on the front surface of the gaming panel 1150, and a frame-shaped center accessory 2 that is disposed at a substantially central portion of the gaming area 1100 and supported by the gaming panel 1150.
500.

As will be described in detail later, the attacker unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 has a first start port 2101 in which game balls can be received at all times, and a gate portion in the gate member 2400 that is disposed below the first start port 2101. A second start port 2102 and a second start port 2102 that allow game balls to be received according to a normal lottery result that is drawn by passing a game ball 2401.
A special winning opening 2103 that is arranged below the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102 and can receive a gaming ball in accordance with a special lottery result drawn by receiving a gaming ball. And two general winning ports 2104 that are arranged two on each of the left and right sides above 2103 and are capable of receiving game balls at all times.

Although the details of the attacker unit 2100 in the front unit 2000 will be described later, objects located on the left and right sides of the big prize opening 2103 on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a player who plays with the pachinko machine 1). Is provided with a pair of projector units 2150 (2150L, 2150R) that project a predetermined image. The projector unit 2150 makes it difficult for light to be irradiated (projected) to enter the player's field of view.

The front left movable effect unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail later.
The shelf 2301a is formed so as to be lowered toward the right in the front view and can guide the game ball flowing down in the game area 1100 to the center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100. The front left movable effect unit 2300 will be described in detail later.
Three decorative bodies 2302, 2303, 2304 simulating lanterns are provided below the shelf 2301a, and can be swung according to the gaming state. Further, the front left movable effect unit 2300 is formed to be paired with the front right movable effect unit 2600 in the center accessory 2500.

Further, the gate member 2400 of the front unit 2000 is provided with a gate portion 2401 having a size that allows only one game ball to pass therethrough, and a gate sensor for detecting the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2401. 2402 is provided.

Further, the center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 is attached to a large opening 1215 formed substantially at the center of the panel plate 1210, and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 arranged on the rear side is visually recognized from the player side. It is formed in a frame shape having a window portion 2501 that can be used. In the center accessory 2500, a substantially frame-shaped flange portion 2502 that comes into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1200 (panel plate 1210) and a game ball that has flowed down in the game area 1100 are prevented from entering the frame. A peripheral wall 2503, a warp inlet 2504 that opens to a predetermined position of the peripheral wall 2503, a warp outlet 2505 that discharges a game ball that has entered the warp inlet 2504 into the frame, and a game ball that is discharged from the warp outlet 2505 in the left-right direction And a stage 2510 for releasing into the game area 1100 and returning to the game area 1100.

Further, although the details will be described later in the center role 2500, the front side (
An object detection means 2530 capable of detecting an object located on the player side), a logo decoration unit 2540 arranged along an arcuate outer periphery in the right direction when viewed from the front in the left-right direction, and a logo decoration unit A second attacker unit 2550 arranged below 2540 and on the right side of stage 2510;
And a front right movable effect unit 2600 arranged to be paired with 00.

[2-2. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 to 120. FIG. FIG. 117 is a perspective view of the attacker unit, and FIG. 118 is a perspective view of the attacker unit as viewed from the rear lower side. FIG. 119 is a front view of (a) the attacker unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in (a).
It is sectional drawing. Further, FIG. 120 is an explanatory diagram showing a projection area by the projector unit of the attacker unit.

The attacker unit 2100 of the game board 4 in the front unit 2000 of this example has an opening 1215 formed in the lower portion of the center in the left-right direction on the panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1200.
On the other hand, after being inserted from the front side, it is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1200 (panel plate 1210). The attacker unit 2100 has a plurality of reception openings (winning openings) through which game balls that have been driven into the game area 1100 can be received. Specifically, a first start port 2101 disposed at the uppermost position in the approximate center in the left-right direction, and a first start port 2101
The second start port 2102 arranged on the lower side (directly below) and the lower side (directly below) the second start port 2102
The rectangular large winning opening 2103 that is arranged in the left and right and extends greatly in the left and right directions than the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102 and two on both the left and right sides of the large winning opening 2103 at a position higher than the large winning opening 2103. A total of four general winning openings 2104 arranged one by one.

The first start port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 is open on the upper side, so that game balls can always be received (winning). On the other hand, the second start port 2102 disposed below the first start port 2101 is, as illustrated, a pair of blade-like movable pieces 2105 disposed substantially upright on both the left and right sides of the second start port 2102. Thus, the space between the first start port 2101 is closed, and in the state shown in the figure, the game ball cannot be received into the second start port 2102. The pair of movable pieces 2105 that close the second starting port 2102 are pivotally supported at the lower end side, and the second starting port is opened by rotating the upper end side in a direction away from each other. The game ball is ready to be received at 2102. That is, the second start port 2
Reference numeral 102 denotes a variable winning opening formed by a pair of movable pieces 2105.

Further, the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 can be opened and closed by a horizontally long rectangular opening and closing member 2106 that can close the opening. The opening / closing member 2106 is pivotally supported about a substantially lower side, and in a substantially vertical state, the big winning opening 2103 can be closed to make it impossible to receive a game ball, and the upper side is directed forward. When it is rotated so as to move, the special winning opening 2103 is opened so that a game ball can be received. That is, the special winning opening 2103 is a variable winning opening by the opening / closing member 2106.

The attacker unit 2100 has a width (width) in which the width in the left-right direction of the first start port 2101 is slightly larger than the outer shape of the game ball, and the game balls can be received one by one. Further, the second start port 2102 of the attacker unit 2100 has a width in the left-right direction when the upper ends of the pair of movable pieces 2105 are rotated in directions away from each other and expanded to be three times the outer shape of the game ball. The width is about 5 times. Furthermore, the big prize opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100
The width in the left-right direction when the opening / closing member 2106 is opened is 5 to 8 times the outer shape of the game ball. As a result, in a state where each of the winning ports 2101, 2102 and 2103 can be received, the lower winning port can receive game balls more easily.

Further, the four general winning ports 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 are opened upward on both the left and right sides with the large winning port 2103 interposed therebetween, and are arranged at higher positions as they move away from the large winning port 2103. The one start port 2101, the second start port 2102, and the prize winning port 2103 are arranged substantially symmetrically with respect to the axis line connecting the center in the left-right direction.

More specifically, the attacker unit 2100 of this example is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1210 in the game panel 1200, and has a first start port 2101 and a big prize port 2103 at a position corresponding to the center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100. In addition, a plate-shaped base plate 2110 capable of forming the second start port 2102 and the general winning port 2104, and the first start port 2101 in the base plate 2110
A pair of movable pieces 2105 attached to the lower front surface of the lower shaft and pivotally supported so as to be rotatable, and the second start port 2
A central receiving member 2111 having an opening 102 and an upper side and a rear side are formed, and a general winning opening 2104 that is open upward is formed. And four side receiving members 2112.

Also, the attacker unit 2100 is attached to the rear side of the base plate 2110 and has a special winning opening 21.
An open / close member 2106 that opens and closes 03 is pivotally supported, and a pair of movable pieces 2105 and an open / close member 2106 are driven to rotate, and an attacker drive unit 2120 on the rear side of the base plate 2110 to the left and right of the attacker drive unit 2120 Attacker unit 2100 mounted on both sides
And a pair of projector units 2150 capable of projecting an image onto a predetermined object (for example, a player) located further forward (player side).

The base plate 2110 of the attacker unit 2100 is formed in a plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and has a shallow relief-like decoration on the surface. The base plate 2110 has a second start port 210.
2 has an opening 2110a of a size penetrating in the front-rear direction and allowing a game ball to pass therethrough. In addition, the base plate 2110 includes a flange 2110b that extends backward from a position where the first start opening 2101 and the general winning opening 2104 are formed and can guide the game ball. Further, the base plate 2110 has two general winning ports 2104 arranged on the left and right sides with the grand winning port 2103 interposed therebetween.
The projector unit 215 is formed at a position below the general winning opening 2104 between them.
A circular lens port 2110c facing the zero tip lens is provided.

Center receiving member 21 attached to the front surface of base plate 2110 in attacker unit 2000
11 is formed in a fan shape whose front surface bulges upward. Although detailed illustration is omitted,
The center receiving member 2110 includes a pair of shaft portions that extend rearward from the rear surface of the front plate at intervals wider than the left and right widths of the opening 2110a in the base plate 2110, and the movable piece 2105 is rotated by these shaft portions. It can be pivotally supported.

Further, the four side receiving members 2112 are formed in a disk shape on the front surface, and are formed in a bowl shape in which the upper and rear sides are released.

Further, the attacker drive unit 2120 in the attacker unit 2100 is a start port solenoid 2 for opening and closing a pair of movable pieces 2105 that open and close the second start port 2102.
121, a start-port drive mechanism base 2123 that supports the start-port solenoid 2121 and is attached to the rear side of the base plate 2110, an attacker solenoid 2124 for opening / closing the open / close member 2106 that closes the prize winning port 2103, and an attacker solenoid 2124 is supported, and the opening / closing member 2106 is pivotally supported.
110, an attacker drive mechanism base 2126 attached to the rear side, a second start port sensor 2127 for detecting a game ball supported at a predetermined position of the attacker drive mechanism base 2126 and received by the second start port 2102, and a second start A count sensor 2128 that detects a game ball that is supported at a position different from the mouth sensor 2127 and received in the special winning opening 2103, and a start port solenoid 2121 and an attack solenoid 21 that are supported by the upper surface of the attacker drive mechanism base 2126.
24, a second start port sensor 2127, and an attacker unit relay board 2130 for relaying the connection between the count sensor 2128 and the main control board 4100.

Although not shown, the start port solenoid 2121 has a plunger that can be advanced and retracted by energization and is biased in the protruding direction by a coil spring.
The plunger is supported by the start port drive mechanism base 2123 so that the plunger protrudes forward at a position behind the second start port 2102 below 1. In the attacker unit 2100 of this example, when the start port solenoid 2121 is energized, the plunger of the start port solenoid 2121 moves backward against the urging force of the coil spring, and a pair of movable pieces are connected via a transmission member engaged with the tip of the plunger. The upper ends of 2105 are rotated in directions away from each other, and the second starting port 2102 is in an open state.

Further, the start port drive mechanism base 2123 is formed in a box shape so that the start port solenoid 2121 can be accommodated and supported from the front side. The first guiding portion 2123a that guides the game ball that has circulated through the portion 2110b rearward, and the gaming ball that is formed below the portion that supports the starting port solenoid 2121 and is received in the second starting port 2102 is guided downward. Second guiding part (detailed illustration is omitted)
And.

Although not shown in the figure, the attacker solenoid 2124 in the attacker drive unit 2120 has a plunger that can be advanced and retracted by energization and that is urged in the protruding direction by a coil spring, as with the start port solenoid 2121. In the attacker unit 2100 of this example, when the attacker solenoid 2124 is energized, the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2124 is immersed, and the opening / closing member 2106 is connected via the transmission member engaged with the tip of the plunger.
The upper end of the game is rotated so as to move relatively forward, and the special winning opening 2103 is opened.

In the attacker unit 2100 of this example, the first start port 2101 and the general winning port 2104 are in a state where they can always accept game balls. On the other hand, in the second starting port 2102, a pair of movable members are driven by energizing the starting port solenoid 2121 in accordance with a normal lottery result in which a game ball passes through the gate portion 2401 in a gate member 2400 described later. Piece 2105
Can be expanded and accepted. Also, in the big winning opening 2103, according to the special lottery result (for example, the special lottery result is “big hit” by receiving the game ball in the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102 (start winning prize). ”), The opening / closing member 2106 is opened / closed in a predetermined pattern and can be received by energizing the attacker solenoid 2124.

Also, the attacker unit 2100 includes a grand prize opening decoration board 2131 that is supported by the lower part of the attacker drive mechanism base 2126 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface thereof.
The interior of 103 can be illuminated.

Further, the two projector units 2150 of the attacker unit 2100 are provided with the base plate 21.
10 has a translucent mounting base 2151 mounted on the rear side, a substantially cylindrical projector body 2152 mounted on the mounting base 2151 from the rear side, and a plurality of LEDs on the front surface mounted on the rear side of the mounting base 2151. Is mounted, and the mounting base 2 covers the rear side of the attacker side decorative board 2153 and the projector main body 2152.
151, the cover 2154 attached to the rear side.

As shown in FIG. 119 (b), the projector main body 2152 of the projector unit 2150 is arranged at the rear of the main body and can radiate light forward (in this example, a high-intensity white LED is used). And a plurality of lens groups 2 arranged on the front side of the light source unit 2156
157 and an image film 2158 on which an image to be projected that is disposed at a predetermined position in the lens group 2157 is depicted. The projector unit 2150 includes a light source unit 21.
By causing 56 to emit light, the image depicted on the image film 2158 can be projected onto an object positioned in the projection range in front of the projector unit 2150.

In this example, the optical axes of the left and right projector units 2150R and 2510L do not cross each other, and images can be projected at different positions. In this example, the optical axis of the projector unit 2150 is set so that an image is projected onto the projection region TR from both shoulders to both chests for a player seated in a normal state on the front side of the pachinko machine 1. (See FIG. 120).

The attacker unit 2100 includes a first start port 2101 and four general winning ports 2104.
The game balls received in are sent to the passage hole 3061a and the general discharge passage 3061b of the unit base 3061 in the ball guiding unit 3060 of the back unit 3000 described later.

Also, the attacker unit 2100 is discharged downward after the game ball received in the second starter port 2102 is detected by the second starter port sensor 2127 supported by the attacker drive mechanism base 2126. ing. Further, the attacker unit 2100 is configured such that the game ball received in the special winning opening 2103 is discharged downward after being detected by the count sensor 2128.

In the attacker unit 2100 of the present embodiment, the attacker solenoid 2124 is arranged so that the forward / backward direction of the plunger 2124a is the left / right direction, and the attacker solenoid 2
124 is arranged as close as possible to the opening / closing member 2106. Therefore, the dimension in the front-rear direction of the attacker unit 2100 can be shortened by 5 to 30% compared to the conventional product. A wider rear space of the unit 2100 can be secured.

In addition, the attacker unit 2100 of this example is configured so that two projector units 2150 allow other pachinko machines arranged on the opposite side of the object (eg, player, game hall) located outside the pachinko machine 1 (game board 4). Machine, wall, etc.) can be projected and displayed, can provide the player with a novel image effect that has not existed in conventional pachinko machines, and attracts the player's attention strongly It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game, and to entertain the player and to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

Further, when the projector unit 2150 of the attacker unit 2100 emits light according to the gaming state, as shown in FIG. 120, the projection area TR covering the shoulder and arm and chest of the player.
In addition, a predetermined image is projected and displayed, but since it is a position that is not directly noticeable by the player, a player or the like who does not know the light emitting effect by the projector unit 2150 can use the projector unit 2150. Even if the production starts, the game will continue without notice. On the other hand, since the projection area TR is an area that extends from the shoulder of the player to the arm,
By projecting the image projected from the projector unit 2150 onto the front half of the player's shoulder, arm, etc., when viewing the player from the side, a part of the image projected from the projector unit 2150 can be seen. Thus, other players can easily notice the effect (coming opportunity) by the projector unit 2150. Therefore, other players than the player himself / herself notice the arrival of the opportunity first, and the people around the player become aware of the light emission effect by the projector unit 2150 for the first time. Therefore, not only a player who plays a game with the pachinko machine 1 but also other players together can increase the expectation of the game, and this pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to play. Can be done.

In addition, since the projector unit 2150 displays an image on the player himself, the player can greatly surprise the player by presenting an image effect that has never been seen on a conventional pachinko machine. It can be strongly attracted to the projected image, etc.
It is possible to entertain the player with the projected image and the like, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

When a predetermined image is projected and displayed on the player by the projector unit 2150,
In each decoration unit or the like that can be decorated with light emission provided in the door frame 5 or the game board 4, the light emission decoration may be turned off or reduced, so that the projection area illuminated by the light emission of the projector unit 2150. A part of the player's body located in the TR is reflected on the glass plate 594 of the glass unit 590 of the door frame 5 so that it can be easily seen by the player, and the light emission effect by the projector unit 2150 can be easily noticed. Projector unit 2150
It will be possible to entertain the production by.

In addition, the object detection means 2530 provided in the center accessory 2500 described later detects the seating position of the player, and the projector unit 2150 (2150L or 2150R) corresponding to the seating position of the player emits light. The predetermined image may be projected onto the player with certainty.

In addition, when the projector unit 2150 in the attacker unit 2100 detects an illegal act, the light source unit 2156 emits light.

[2-3. Front left movable production unit]
Next, the front left movable effect unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 121 to 124. FIG.
1 (a) is a perspective view of the front left movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front left movable effect unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the front left movable effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 123 is an exploded perspective view of the front left movable effect unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 124 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the front left movable effect unit.

The front left movable effect unit 2300 in the front unit 2000 of the game board 4 is located on the left side of the horizontal center in the game area 1100 on the panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1200 on the lower side from the vertical center. Panel plate 121 in contact with the outer periphery
It is fixed to the front surface of zero.

The front left movable effect unit 2300 of this example is a shallow box shape in which one side of the front view is formed in an arc shape along the outer periphery of the game area 1100, the outer shape of the front view is formed in a substantially triangular shape, and the front side is opened. Unit body 2301, a lower left first decorative body 2302 that is disposed in the unit main body 2301 and that is rotatably supported at the upper end side and is shaped like a lantern, and a left side of the lower left first decorative body 2302 in front view A lower left second decorative body 2303 that is disposed in the unit main body 2301 and that is rotatably supported at the upper end side and is shaped like a lantern, and is smaller than the lower left first decorative body 2302, A movable support mechanism 2320 that supports the lower left first decorative body 2302 so as to be movable within a predetermined range, and is arranged on the rear side of the unit main body 2301;
A lower left side drive solenoid 2330 for moving and driving the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 via the movement support mechanism 2320 and a lower left side drive solenoid 23, respectively.
30 is attached to the rear side and is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 2301, and includes a unit base 2304 that supports the movement support mechanism 2320 in cooperation with the unit main body 2301.

Further, the front left movable effect unit 2300 is mounted on the front side of the unit base 2304 so as to extend upward from the vicinity of the rear end on the upper side of the unit main body 2301.
5, a right base plate 2306 attached to the front side of the unit base 2304 so as to extend rightward from the vicinity of the rear end on the right side of the unit main body 2301 when viewed from the front, and a unit main body 2301
A plate-like decorative member 2307 attached to the front left corner of the front, a front upper decorative member 2308 attached to the front edge of the upper side of the unit main body 2301 and having a predetermined decoration, and attached to the lower corner of the unit main body 2301 and having a predetermined decoration. The front lower decoration member 2309 is provided.

Further, the front left movable effect unit 2300 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 2304 on the rear side of the unit main body 2301, and a left side decorative board 231 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface.
0 and a left decorative body decorative board 2311 which is disposed on the rear side of the unit main body 2301 and on the front side of the left side decorative board 2310 and attached to the front surface of the unit base 2304 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. Yes. Reference numeral 2312 in the drawing is a head cover that protects the tip of the plunger that moves forward and backward in the lower left side drive solenoid 2330. Further, the lower left side drive solenoid 2330 is attached to the unit base 2304 so that the plunger advances and retreats in the left-right direction from the right side when viewed from the front.

The unit main body 2301 of the front left movable effect unit 2300 has a box-shaped upper surface,
The shelf 2301a is formed so as to be lowered toward the right in the front view, and can guide the game ball flowing down in the game area 1100 to the center in the horizontal direction in the game area 1100. Yes. Further, the unit main body 2301 is formed so that three-dimensional unevenness is formed on a bottom surface (a surface parallel to the surface of the game panel 1200) formed in a box shape, and at least the bottom surface has translucency. Yes. The unit main body 2301 has an opening 2301b penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the upper part of the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303. Opening 2301 of the unit main body 2301
The lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 arranged on the front side through b and the movement support mechanism 2320 are connected to each other.

As shown in the figure, the movement support mechanism 2320 of the front left movable effect unit 2300 is supported by the unit main body 2301 and the unit base 2304 so as to be rotatable about the axis extending in the front-rear direction, and the upper end side is the lower left first. A drive crank 2321 connected to the tip of the plunger of the lower left side drive solenoid 2330 at a substantially central position in the longitudinal direction, and a lower end at a position on the left side of the drive crank 2321 when viewed from the front. A hook-like actuating link member 2322 whose side is rotatably supported by a unit main body 2301 and a unit base 2304 around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and whose upper end side rotatably supports the lower left second decorative body 2303; Actuate so that actuating link member 2322 extends substantially parallel to drive crank 2321 And a, a connecting member 2323 for connecting to each other in a rotatable state and upper side of the upper side and the driving crank 2321 of link member 2322.

The driving crank 2321 of the moving support mechanism 2320 has a lower left first decorative body 2 on the upper end side.
302 and the connecting member 2323 are respectively supported and connected by a single shaft member. Similarly to the drive crank 2321, the operation link member 2322 is also supported and connected to the lower left second decorative body 2303 and the connection member 2323 by one shaft member on the upper end side. Further, the drive crank 2321 and the operation link member 2322 are formed such that the distance between the pivot axis and the axis supporting the decorative bodies 2302 and 2303 is the same distance. When the drive crank 2321 is rotated by the lower left side drive solenoid 2330, the movement support mechanism 2320 is actuated via the connecting member 2323.
22 is always rotated so as to be parallel to the drive crank 2321.

As shown in the figure, in this example, the connecting member 2323 is formed in a curved shape. Although illustration is omitted, the front left movable effect unit 2300 includes a drive crank 2
A stopper for restricting the rotation range of 321 is provided.

Lower left first decorative body 2302 and lower left second decorative body 2303 of the front left movable effect unit 2300
As shown in the drawing, each is formed in a shape imitating a lantern and is formed in a plate shape. Further, the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 are formed to have translucency. Although not shown in detail, the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 are assembled as the front left movable effect unit 2300, and the lower left first decorative body 2302 is the lower left second decorative body 2303. The lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 are shaken by driving the lower left side drive solenoid 2330 so that they do not come into contact with each other.

The upper base plate 2305 and the right base plate 2306 in the front left movable effect unit 2300 include plate-like flange portions 2305a and 2306a that can come into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1200, respectively. The front left movable effect unit 2300 can be attached to the game panel 2300 by fixing the flange portions 2305a and 2306a of the upper base plate 2305 and the left base plate 2306 to the front surface of the game panel 1200. Further, the upper base plate 2305 and the right base plate 2306 are formed so as to have translucency.

The left side decorative board 2310 of the front left movable effect unit 2300 is an LE mounted on the front surface.
By emitting D, it is possible to illuminate and decorate a portion outside the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 in front view in the front left movable effect unit 2300. In addition, the left decorative body decorative substrate 2311 can light-decorate the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 by causing the LED mounted on the front surface to emit light.

Next, the movement of the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 in the front left movable effect unit 2300 will be described. The front left movable production unit 2300 of this example is shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 24 (a), in the normal state (when the left lower side drive solenoid 2330 is not energized), the drive crank 2321 and the operating link member 2322 are approximately perpendicular to the upper end side from the vertical state. While being inclined by 45 degrees, the plunger of the lower left side drive solenoid 2330 is in a state of being advanced from the main body.

In a normal state, the driving crank 2321 and the operating link member 2322 are viewed from the front by the load of the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 supported by the upper ends of the driving crank 2321 and the operating link member 2322. Although a force for rotating in the clockwise direction is applied, the driving crank 2321 and the operation link member 2322 are restricted from rotating further in the clockwise direction by a stopper (not shown).

When the lower left side drive solenoid 2330 is energized from this normal state, the plunger moves to the left in a front view, and the drive crank 23 is connected to the tip of the plunger at the center in the longitudinal direction.
21 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in front view with the lower end side as the center. When the drive crank 2321 rotates, the operation link member 2322 connected by the connecting member 2323 also rotates in the same direction simultaneously with the drive crank 2321. In this example, as shown in FIG. 124B, the drive crank 2321 and the operation link member 23 are driven even when the lower left side drive solenoid 2330 is driven (energized) to retract the plunger.
22 is a state in which the upper end side is inclined toward the right in a front view with respect to the vertical state.

When the drive crank 2321 and the operation link member 2322 are rotated in the counterclockwise direction by a predetermined range by driving the lower left side drive solenoid 2330, the lower left first decoration body 2302 and the lower left second decoration supported on the upper ends thereof. The body 2303 will also rotate. The lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 are supported so that the upper ends thereof are rotatable (
Therefore, when the drive crank 2321 and the operation link member 2322 rotate, the inertial force acts on the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303, and the rotational movement stops. Then, the drive crank 2321 and the operating link member 23 are driven by the inertial force.
Thus, it swings around the upper end that is pivotally supported by 22.

On the other hand, when energization of the lower left side drive solenoid 2330 is stopped in a state where the lower left side drive solenoid 2330 is energized (the state shown in FIG. 124 (b)), the plunger of the lower left side drive solenoid 2330 becomes free. At this time, the drive crank 2321 and the operation link member 2322 that support the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 are in a state in which the upper end side is inclined in the right direction in a front view from a vertical state, as illustrated. Because
Due to the load acting from the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303, a force acts to rotate the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 in the clockwise direction in front view. Thus, the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 rotate in the clockwise direction, and automatically return to the normal position.

When the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 return to the normal state, inertial force acts on the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303, respectively.
When the rotational movement is stopped, the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 are swung.

Therefore, the front left movable effect unit 2300 of the present example has a lower left side drive solenoid 2330.
By repeating energization and de-energization as appropriate, the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 can be swung with a looseness, and the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 The movement can be enjoyed and the player can be informed of the arrival of a chance by swinging the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303.

[2-4. Gate member]
Next, the gate member 2400 of the front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 115 and 116. The gate member 2400 in the game board 4 is inserted from the front side with respect to the opening 1215 formed on the left side of the panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1200 on the left side and slightly above the center in the vertical direction. Thus, it is fixed to the front surface of the gaming panel 1200 (panel plate 1210). The gate member 2400 has a gate portion 240 having a width that allows only one game ball to pass therethrough.
1, and a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2401 can be detected by a gate sensor 2402 disposed in the gate portion 2401.

Note that the gate member 2400 of this example is formed to have a shorter length in the front-rear direction than the conventional gate member, and a portion of the game panel 1150 on the rear side of the front surface of the game panel 1150 is the game panel 115.
It is within the thickness of 0. That is, only the wiring cord connected to the gate sensor 2402 extends from the rear surface of the game panel 1150.

[2-5. Center character]
Next, the center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 125 to 134. 125 is a front view of the center character, FIG. 126 is a perspective view of the center character as seen from the front, and FIG.
FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the center role as seen from the back. FIG. 128 is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. FIG. 130 is an enlarged front view showing the second attacker unit in the center accessory, and FIG. 131 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the second attacker unit. Further, FIG. 132 is an exploded perspective view of the front right movable effect unit in the center accessory disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. FIG. 134 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the front right movable effect unit in the center accessory.

The center accessory 2500 of this example is a transparent plate-like panel board 12 in the game panel 1200.
10 is inserted from the front side into an opening 1215 that is formed so as to penetrate substantially the center, and is fixed to the front surface of the panel plate 1210. As shown in FIG. A large window 250 that penetrates in the front-rear direction in a frame shape that occupies most of the region 1100.
1 is provided.

In the center accessory 2500, the shape of the outer periphery of the upper frame is linearly inclined at a steep angle and lowered by a predetermined amount from the approximate center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and then gradually decreases toward the left. A plurality of step shapes which are inclined to each other. On the other hand, in the center accessory 2500, the outer peripheral shape on the right side of the upper frame is a curved shape (arc shape) substantially along the inner periphery of the game area 1100. In the center accessory 2500, the outer periphery of the right half in a front view is formed in an arc shape along the inner periphery of the game area 1100.

The center accessory 2500 includes a plate-like flange portion 2502 that comes into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1150, and a game ball that bulges forward from the flange portion 2502 and flows down in the game area 1100 from the approximate center in the left-right direction. And a peripheral wall 2503 that guides the game ball to the left and right and prevents the game ball from entering the frame. Further, the center accessory 2500 is a panel plate 1210.
A warp inlet 2504 (see FIG. 111) that is open on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the peripheral wall portion 2503 located on the front side of the wall and allows a game ball flowing down the game area 1100 to enter, and a warp inlet 2504
The warp outlet 2505 that releases the game ball that has entered the frame into the frame, and the game area 1 on the upper side of the attacker unit 2100 after rolling the game ball released from the warp outlet 2505 in the left-right direction
And a stage 2510 disposed below the lower inner edge of the window portion 2501.

The stage 2510 in the center accessory 2500 is generally curved so that both ends in the left-right direction are raised, and the wavy shape is such that the position corresponding to the approximate center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 is slightly higher. Is formed. This stage 2510 is formed on a lower upper surface (valley) on both sides with respect to the center in the left-right direction, and is formed with a guide surface 2511 that is widened in the left-right direction and tilted so as to become lower toward the front, and a guide surface 2511. A front wall 2512 that rises lower than the outer diameter of the game ball from the front end side, and a rear wall 2513 that rises higher than the outer diameter of the game ball from the rear end side. The game ball supplied from the warp outlet 2505 can be discharged to the front side (in the game area 1100) through the guide surface 2511.

Further, the center accessory 2500 opens to the rear rear wall 2513 toward the rear of the rear wall 2513 with respect to the position of the apex that is slightly higher corresponding to the approximate center in the left-right direction on the stage 2510, and the chance that the game ball can enter. An entrance 2514, and a chance exit 2515 that is disposed directly below the chance entrance 2514 on the lower side of the stage 2510 from which the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2514 can be released and opened forward are provided. A game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2514 is released from the chance exit 2515 into the game area 1100. Further, as shown in FIG. 108 and the like, this chance exit 2515 is arranged immediately above the first start port 2101 in the attacker unit 2100, and the chance exit 2525
The game ball released from 15 is accepted (wins) into the first start port 2101 with a high probability.

In the center accessory 2500, substantially the entire stage 2510 is formed of a transparent member, and the back and rear movable movable effect unit 3500 and the like of the back unit 3000 disposed on the rear side through the stage 2510 are visually recognized from the player side. Be able to.

The center accessory 2500 includes an insertion frame-like portion 2506 that protrudes rearward from the inner peripheral edge side of the frame-like flange portion 2502 and is inserted into an opening 1215 formed in the panel plate 1210. And the insertion frame-shaped portion 2506, a frame-shaped center main body frame 2520
Is configured.

Further, the center accessory 2500 closes the window portion 2501 penetrating in the front-rear direction to close the stage 2
A transparent protective plate 2516 (see FIG. 128 and the like) disposed on the rear side of the 510 and the game area 11
00 (the glass unit 590 in the door frame 5), an object detection means 2530 capable of detecting an object located on the front side (player side), and the upper center in the horizontal direction within the width of the frame in the center accessory 2500 From the front view, the pachinko machine 1 is arranged along the arcuate outer periphery in the right direction.
The logo decoration unit 2540 showing the concept of the game, the second attacker unit 2550 disposed below the logo decoration unit 2540 and on the right side of the stage 2510, and the center of the gaming area 1100 in the left-right direction below the second attacker unit 2550 And a front right movable effect unit 2600 disposed at a position symmetrical to the front left movable effect unit 2300.

The center accessory 2500 has a peripheral wall 2503 on the right side of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front.
The outer periphery of the game area 1100 has a shape substantially along the inner periphery of the game area 1100. When attached to the panel board 1210 of the game panel 1200, the outer periphery of the logo decoration unit 2540 extends along the outer periphery from the upper part of the center accessory 2500 to the right side. Thus, a gap slightly larger than the outer shape of the game ball is formed up to the upper end of the second attacker unit 2550, and the game ball is moved to the second attacker unit 2550 (second game area 2551) by making a right strike. Can be typed in easily. Further, the center accessory 2500 is attached to the panel plate 1210,
On the outer periphery on the left side of the center accessory 2500, a region having a predetermined width is formed between the inner periphery of the game region 1100.

The object detection means 2530 of the center accessory 2500 is arranged at the left periphery in the front view of the game object 2501 and the upper object detection sensor (non-contact sensor) 2531 disposed at the periphery of the window 2501 at the approximate center in the left-right direction. Left object detection sensor (non-contact sensor) 2532 and gaming window 25
A right object detection sensor (non-contact sensor) 2533 disposed on the right edge in a front view of 01;
Lower object detection sensor (non-contact sensor) 253 disposed below the right object detection sensor 2533
4 is provided.

The object detection means 2530 receives a light emitting unit that emits detection light composed of invisible light such as infrared rays in a predetermined forward direction, and a reflected light of the detection light that is disposed adjacent to the light emitting unit and emitted from the light emitting unit. Each of which is capable of detecting a hand or the like of a moving player within a predetermined range in front of the game area 1100. In addition, the object detection means 2530 can detect the left, right, top, and bottom directions by the four object detection sensors 2531, 2532, 2533, and 2534, respectively.
The movement of the player's hand or the like (movement direction, movement speed, etc.) can be detected by the detection signals 2533 and 2534. Note that the object detection means 2530 can be operated at the time of an effect performed by a start winning prize, thereby enabling an effect that a player can participate in, and providing an effect with a sense of unity with the player to make the player more enjoyable. It is supposed to be.

The object detection means 2530 is provided with each object detection sensor 2531, 2 when in a predetermined gaming state.
The detection of 532, 2533 is made effective, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 has a game area 1100.
An effect image that prompts the user to move the hand in a predetermined direction is displayed, and the player moves in front of the game area 1100 to detect the hand that has been moved. ,
It is intended to enhance the interest by allowing players to participate in the production of the game.

Although not shown in detail, the logo decoration unit 2540 of the center object 2500 is arranged on the rear side of the logo lens, which is three-dimensionally shaped so as to have translucency and the logo characters are lifted. A diffusing lens member having a plurality of prismatic lenses, a transparent logo unit base disposed behind the diffusing lens member and supporting the logo lens and the diffusing lens member;
And is attached to the front side of a frame-shaped center main body frame 2520 in the center accessory 2500. The center accessory 2500 is attached to the rear side of the center body frame 2520 at a position corresponding to the logo decoration unit 2540, and has a plurality of LEDs (full color L) on the front surface.
ED) and a board cover 2542 that covers the rear side of the logo decoration board 2541.

[2-5A. Second attacker unit]
Next, the second attacker unit 2550 in the center accessory 2500 will be described.
The second attacker unit 2550 of the center accessory 2500 has a window portion 2501 in front view.
Is arranged below the logo decoration unit 2540 at a position adjacent to the lower right side of the.
The second attacker unit 2550 has a peripheral wall portion 250 on the front side of the center body frame 2520.
The second game area 25 in which the game balls flowing down along the outer periphery on the right side of the front view 3 can be distributed
51, a second big prize opening 2552 that is arranged at a predetermined position in the second game area 2551 and can receive a game ball, a blade-like second opening and closing member 2553 that can open and close the second big prize opening 2552,
A second attacker driving mechanism 2560 that rotates the second opening / closing member 2553 according to the gaming state to enable or disable the reception of the game ball into the second big prize opening 2552.

In addition, the second attacker unit 2550 of the center accessory 2500 has a second game area 255.
A plate-like rear end wall 2554 that defines one rear end and is substantially flush with the flange portion 2502 of the center body frame 2520 and extends from the flange portion 2502 toward the window portion 2501;
A discharge opening 2555 that opens in the front-rear direction at a position downstream of the second big prize opening 2552 in the rear end wall 2554 and allows the game balls received in the second big prize opening 2552 to pass through, and a second big prize. A second count sensor 2556 that detects a game ball received in the mouth 2552, a transparent distribution guide member 2570 that can guide the flow of the game ball in the second game area 2551,
The second attacker cover 25 attached to the front surface of the distribution guide member 2570 and provided with a predetermined decoration.
57.

As shown in the drawing, the second opening / closing member 2553 of the second attacker unit 2550 is supported so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, the distal end side is a free end, and the width is increased toward the distal end side. Is formed in a blade shape (a shape similar to the cross-sectional shape of a wing such as an airplane). When the second opening / closing member 2553 is in a state of rising substantially vertically with the base end side as the lower side, the second big prize winning opening 2552 can be closed (closed state), Then, the second big prize opening 2552 can be opened (opened state). The second opening / closing member 2553 has a pair of engagement protrusions 2 protruding rearward from the rear surface on the base end side.
553a and the second attacker drive mechanism 256 via these engaging projections 2553a.
It can be rotated by transmitting the drive from zero.

Further, the second attacker drive mechanism 2560 of the second attacker unit 2550 has the rear end wall 25.
As shown in FIG. 131, the second attacker solenoid 2561 having a plunger that advances and retreats in the left-right direction, and the plunger advance and retreat drive of the second attacker solenoid 2561 A rotation transmission piece 2562 that rotates the second opening / closing member 2553 by transmitting it to the engagement protrusion 2553a, and supports the rotation transmission piece 2562 and the second attacker solenoid 2561, and is attached to the rear side of the center body frame 2520. A bracket 2563.

The second attacker solenoid 2561 of the second attacker drive mechanism 2560 is supported by the bracket 2563 so that the plunger advances and retreats from the left side in a front view. Further, the rotation transmission piece 2562 of the second attacker drive mechanism 2560 has an upper end side on the second attacker solenoid 2.
A pair of engagements in the second opening / closing member 2553 are supported at the upper position of the portion where the plunger of 561 is advanced and retracted by the bracket 2563 so that the lower end side extended downward from the second attacker solenoid 2561. It is inserted between the protrusions 2553a, and is connected to the tip of the plunger in the second attacker solenoid 2561 at a substantially intermediate portion in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction).

Thus, when the second attacker drive mechanism 2560 causes the second attacker unit 2561 to advance and retract the plunger, the rotation transmission piece 2562 rotates about the upper end, and the lower end of the rotation transmission piece 2562 moves in an arc shape. . When the lower end of the rotation transmission piece 2562 moves in an arc shape, the lower end of the rotation transmission piece 2562 becomes the pair of engaging protrusions 2 in the second opening / closing member 2553.
One of the 553a abuts, and the abutting engagement protrusion 2553a is pushed in the moving direction of the lower end of the rotation transmitting piece 2562, and the second opening / closing member 2553 rotates.

In this example, the second opening / closing member 2553 is raised, that is, the second big prize opening 25.
When 52 is in the closed state, as shown in FIG. 131 (a), the rotation transmission piece 2562 is suspended substantially vertically, and the plunger of the second attacker solenoid 2561 is in the forward position. It has become. When the second opening / closing member 2553 is laid down, that is, when the second big prize opening 2552 is in the open state, as shown in FIG.
2 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction by a predetermined angle (about 15 degrees) when viewed from the front, and the plunger of the second attacker solenoid 2561 is in the retracted position.

The distribution guide member 2570 of the second attacker unit 2550 forms a plurality of flow paths through which game balls can be distributed in the second game area 2551, and the game balls that have not been received in the second big prize opening 2552 are game areas. It can be released into 1100. As shown in FIG. 130, the distribution guide member 2570 includes an area entrance 2571 into which a game ball that has flowed down along the outer periphery on the right side of the front surface of the peripheral wall 2503 enters, and game balls that have entered from the area entrance 2571 A deceleration channel 2572 bent in a crank shape for decelerating the speed, and the deceleration channel 25
72 is a shelf-shaped branch guide shelf 2573 that receives the game ball supplied from 72 and is formed so that the left end side is lowered in front view, and the game ball passes from the left end of the branch guide shelf 2573 The first branch port 25 that opens downward with a predetermined width and can communicate with the second grand prize winning port 2552
74 and a second branch port 2575 which opens toward the branch guide shelf 2573 on the left side of the first branch port 2574 and allows game balls to pass therethrough and does not communicate with the second big winning port 2552.

In addition, the distribution guide member 2570 includes a shelf-like branch opening shelf 2576 that is inclined so that the right end thereof becomes lower in the right direction in front view from the vicinity of the lower end of the second branch opening 2575, and the second grand prize winning opening 255.
2, the second opening / closing member 2553 can be rotated to the right so that the game ball that has entered the first branch port 2574 can be circulated, and the second big prize opening is located below the right end of the branch port shelf 2576. The first flow path 2577 in which 2552 is arranged, and the game ball 11 is opened at the downstream end of the first flow path 2577 to play the game ball.
A game that has entered the second branch port 2575 and the first outlet 2578 that can be released into the 00, the large inlet channel 2579 that communicates the second major prize winning port 2552 and the outlet 2555 disposed in the first channel 2577 A second flow path 2580 through which the ball flows and a second discharge port 2581 that opens at the downstream end of the second flow path 2580 and discharges the game ball into the game area 1100 are provided.

The first branch port 2574 of the distribution guide member 2570 has the right end as the left end of the branch guide shelf 2573 and the left end as the left end of the branch port shelf 2576, and the opening width (width in the left-right direction) is a game. The width is twice to three times the outer diameter of the sphere. Further, the second branch port 2575 of the distribution guide member 2570 has an opening slightly smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball (for example, 0.5 mm to 1).
mm), and the game ball is difficult to enter as compared with the first branch port 2574. The second branch port 2575 has a lower end disposed at a position slightly above the top surface of the branch port shelf 2576 and is disposed so as to form a step with the branch port shelf 2576. Accordingly, even if the game ball rolls on the branch port shelf 2576 toward the second branch port 2575, the game ball does not easily enter the second branch port 2575 by contacting the step.

The branch opening shelf 2576 of the distribution guide member 2570 is formed to be shorter than the width of the first branch opening 3574, and the lower side of the right end is the upper end of the second big winning opening 2552 in front view. A second opening / closing member 2553 is rotatably disposed in the first flow path 2577 of the distribution guide member 2570 at a position substantially immediately below the right end of the branch port shelf 2576, and the second opening / closing member 2553.
The first opening 2578 is closed by the second opening / closing member 2553 when the second is turned and turned in the clockwise direction (the second big prize opening 2552 is open). That is, when the second grand prize opening 2552 is in the open state, the game ball that has entered the first branch opening 2574 is guided to the second big prize opening 2552 by the second opening / closing member 2553 and is not released from the first discharge opening 2578. It is like that.

In this example, a part of the distribution guide member 2570 and the second attacker cover 2557 are formed to be transparent, so that the inside of the second game area 2551 can be viewed from the outside (player side). ing. In the present example, the second count sensor 2556 is connected to the distribution guide member 2.
The large inlet channel 2579 at 570 is disposed upstream of the outlet 2555.

The second attacker unit 2550 of this example is a peripheral wall portion 250 in the center accessory 2500.
3, the game ball that has flowed down along the outer periphery on the right side of FIG. 3 is once decelerated in the deceleration channel 2572, and then is guided to roll in the left direction by the branch guide shelf 2573. In the second attacker unit 2550, on the left side of the branch guide shelf 2573, a first branch port 2574 that can communicate with the second grand prize port 2552 and a second branch port 2575 that does not communicate with the second grand prize port 2552 are opened. The game balls rolling and released from the branch guide shelf 2573 are connected to any branch port 2574,
By entering 2575, the player can be thrilled and excited, and the player can be entertained.

When the game ball released from the branch guide shelf 2573 enters the second branch port 2575, the game ball is released from the second discharge port 2581 into the game area 1100 through the second flow path 2580. In addition,
As described above, since the size of the second branch port 2575 is only slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball, the game balls released from the branch guide shelf 2573 almost enter the second branch port 2575. There is no such thing as it enters the first branch port 2574.

On the other hand, when the game ball released from the branch guide shelf 2573 enters the first branch port 2574, the game ball is sent to the first flow path 2577. When the second opening / closing member 2553 is raised and the second big prize opening 2552 is in the closed state, the game ball sent to the first flow path 2577 is not received by the second big prize opening 2552, but at the lower end. It is discharged from the opened first discharge port 2578 into the game area 1100. On the other hand, when the second opening / closing member 2553 rotates in the clockwise direction in front view and the second big prize opening 2552 is in the open state, the game ball sent to the first flow path 2577 is It is guided to the upper surface of the member 2553 and received in the second big prize opening 2552, flows through the big incoming flow path 2579, is detected by the second count sensor 2556, and is then discharged out of the game areas 1100 and 2551 from the outlet 2555. It will be. In addition, when the second opening / closing member 2553 is in the open position, the first opening 2578 is closed by the second opening / closing member 2553, so that the second opening / closing member 2553 is sent to the first flow path 2577 through the first branch port 2574. A game ball is received in the second grand prize opening 2552. The second opening / closing member 2
Depending on the timing at which 553 performs an opening / closing operation, even if the game ball enters the first branch port 2574, it is not received by the second grand prize port 2552, but is released from the first discharge port 2578 into the game area 1100. There is.

Thus, according to the second attacker unit 2550 of the center accessory 2500, when the second opening / closing member 2553 rotates to the open position and the second big prize opening 2552 is in the open state, the peripheral wall of the center accessory 2500 When a game ball enters between the right outer periphery of the portion 2503 and the inner periphery of the game area 1100, the second big prize opening 25 passes through the first branch port 2574 and the first flow path 2577.
Since the game ball is accepted to 52, the game ball can be awarded to the second big prize opening 2552 by a simple driving operation, and even a player who is not familiar with the pachinko machine 1 can easily enjoy it. ing.

Further, according to the second attacker unit 2550, the game ball is guided by the wall-shaped flow path by the distribution guide member 2570 in the second game area 2551 where the second big prize opening 2552 is arranged. Since the game ball is not guided by the nail, the guide direction of the game ball is changed by tilting the obstacle nail due to the contact of the game ball or the like, and the second big prize opening 255.
It is possible to reliably avoid the change in the probability of accepting 2 and to maintain the original state over a long period of time so that the player can be fully entertained. .

[2-5B. Front right movable production unit]
Next, the front right movable effect unit 2600 in the center accessory 2500 will be described. The front right movable effect unit 2600 of the center actor 2500 is the second attacker unit 2
Front left movable effect unit 2300 across the center in the left-right direction of game area 1100 below 550
Are arranged symmetrically with each other, and are substantially symmetrical with the front left movable effect unit 2300. In the front right movable effect unit 2600, one side of the front view is the game area 110.
A shallow box-shaped unit main body 2601 formed in an arc shape along the outer periphery of 0 and having a substantially triangular outer shape in front view and opened on the front side, and disposed in the unit main body 2601 and rotated at the upper end side A lower right first decorative body 2602 that is supported and formed in the shape of a lantern, and is arranged in the unit main body 2601 on the right side of the lower right first decorative body 2602 in the front view, and the upper end side is rotatably supported. The lower right second decorative body 2603, which is shaped like a lantern and is smaller than the lower right first decorative body 2602, the lower right second decorative body 2603, and the lower right first decorative body 2602
Movably supported within a predetermined range and disposed on the rear side of the unit main body 2601, and the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 are respectively disposed via the movable support mechanism 2620. A lower right side drive solenoid 2630 to be moved and a lower right side drive solenoid 2630 are attached to the rear side and attached to the rear side of the unit main body 2601, and support the movement support mechanism 2620 in cooperation with the unit main body 2601. Base 26
04.

The front right movable effect unit 2600 includes a left base plate 2606 attached to the front side of the unit base 2604 so as to extend leftward from the vicinity of the rear end of the left side of the unit main body 2601 when viewed from the front, and a front surface within the unit main body 2601. A plate-shaped decorative member 260 attached to the right corner
7 and a front upper decorative member 2 attached to the front end of the upper side of the unit main body 2601 and having a predetermined decoration
608 and the front lower decorative member 2 attached to the lower corner of the unit main body 2601 and having a predetermined decoration
609.

Further, the front right movable effect unit 2600 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 2604 on the rear side of the unit main body 2601 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.
0 and a right decorative body decorative board 2611 which is disposed on the front side of the right side decorative board 2610 on the rear side of the unit main body 2601 and attached to the front face of the unit base 2604 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face. Yes. Reference numeral 2612 in the drawing denotes a head cover that protects the tip of the plunger that moves forward and backward in the lower right side drive solenoid 2630. Further, the lower right side drive solenoid 2630 is attached to the unit base 2604 so that the plunger advances and retreats in the left-right direction from the left side when viewed from the front.

The unit body 2601 of the front right movable effect unit 2600 has a box-shaped upper surface,
It is formed so as to become lower toward the left in a front view, and flows down in the second game area 2551 in the second attacker unit 2550, and the first discharge port 2578 or the second discharge port 2
The shelf 2601a can guide the game ball released from 581 to the center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100. The unit main body 2601 is formed so that three-dimensional irregularities are formed on a bottom surface (a surface parallel to the surface of the game panel 1200) formed in a box shape, and at least the bottom surface is translucent. Yes. The unit body 2601
Are formed with openings 2601b penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the upper portions of the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603. A lower right first decorative body 2602 and a lower right second decorative body 260 arranged on the front side through the opening 2601b of the unit main body 2601.
3 and the moving support mechanism 2620 are connected to each other.

As shown in the figure, the movement support mechanism 2620 of the front right movable effect unit 2600 is supported by the unit main body 2601 and the unit base 2604 so as to be rotatable around the axis extending in the front-rear direction, and the upper end side is lower right. A drive crank 2621 connected to the tip of the plunger of the lower right side drive solenoid 2630 at a substantially central position in the longitudinal direction, and a position on the right side of the drive crank 2621 when viewed from the front. The lower end side is supported by the unit main body 2601 and the unit base 2604 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and the upper end side is a hook-like operation link member that rotatably supports the lower right second decorative body 2603. 2622 and the operating link member 2622 operate so as to extend substantially parallel to the drive crank 2621 And a, a connecting member 2623 for connecting to each other in a rotatable state and upper side of the upper side and the driving crank 2621 of link member 2622.

The drive crank 2621 of the movement support mechanism 2620 has a lower right first decorative body 2 on the upper end side.
602 and the connecting member 2623 are respectively supported and connected by one shaft member. Similarly to the drive crank 2621, the operation link member 2622 is also supported and connected to the lower right second decorative body 2603 and the connection member 2623 by one shaft member on the upper end side. Further, the drive crank 2621 and the operation link member 2622 are formed such that the distance between the rotation axis and the axis supporting the decorative bodies 2602 and 2603 is the same distance. When the drive crank 2621 is rotated by the lower right side drive solenoid 2630, the movement support mechanism 2620 is actuated via the connecting member 2623.
22 is always rotated so as to be parallel to the drive crank 2621.

As shown in the figure, in this example, the connecting member 2623 is formed in a curved shape in an arc shape. Although illustration is omitted, the front right movable effect unit 2600 includes a drive crank 2
A stopper for restricting the rotation range of 621 is provided.

Lower right first decorative body 2602 and lower right second decorative body 2603 of the front right movable effect unit 2600.
As shown in the drawing, each is formed in a shape imitating a lantern and is formed in a plate shape. Further, the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 are formed to have translucency. Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 are assembled as the front right movable effect unit 2600, the lower right first decorative body 2602 is the lower right first decorative body 2602. The two lower decorative bodies 2603 are positioned in front of each other, and when the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 are shaken by the driving of the lower right side drive solenoid 2630, they do not contact each other. It has become.

The right base plate 2306 in the front right movable effect unit 2600 is formed to have translucency. The right side decorative board 2610 of the front right movable effect unit 2600 emits the LED mounted on the front surface, thereby causing the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body in the front right movable effect unit 2600 in front view. A portion outside 2603 can be decorated with light emission. Further, the right decorative body decorative board 2611 is an LE mounted on the front surface.
By emitting D, the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 can be illuminated and decorated.

The front right movable effect unit 2600 in the center accessory 2500 of this example is configured such that the upper part of the unit base 2604 is attached to the rear side of the center main body frame 2520.

Next, the movement of the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 in the front right movable effect unit 2600 will be described. The front right movable effect unit 2600 of this example is shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 34 (a), in the normal state (when the right lower side drive solenoid 2630 is not energized), the drive crank 2621 and the operating link member 2622 move from the vertical state toward the left side from the upper end side. In addition to being inclined by about 45 degrees, the plunger of the lower right side drive solenoid 2630 is advanced from the main body.

In a normal state, the drive crank 2621 and the operation link member 2622 are moved to the front by the load of the lower right first decoration body 2602 and the lower right second decoration body 2603 supported by the upper ends of the drive crank 2621 and the operation link member 2622. Although a force that rotates counterclockwise as viewed is applied, the drive crank 2621 and the operating link member 2622 are restricted from rotating further counterclockwise by a stopper (not shown). Yes.

When the lower right side drive solenoid 2630 is energized from this normal state, the plunger moves to the right in front view, and the drive crank 26 connected to the tip of the plunger at the center in the longitudinal direction.
21 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front with the lower end side as the center. When the drive crank 2621 rotates, the operation link member 2622 connected by the connecting member 2623 also rotates in the same direction simultaneously with the drive crank 2621. In this example, as shown in FIG. 134 (b), the lower right side drive solenoid 2630 is driven (energized).
Even when the plunger is retracted, the drive crank 2621 and the operating link member 262
2 is a state in which the upper end side is inclined toward the left in a front view with respect to a vertical state.

When the drive crank 2621 and the operation link member 2622 are rotated in the clockwise direction by a predetermined range by driving the lower right side drive solenoid 2630, the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right first The two decorative bodies 2603 will also rotate. The lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 are pivotally supported together with the rotation of the drive crank 2621 and the operation link member 2622 because the upper ends thereof are rotatably supported (axially supported). Then, an inertial force acts on the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603,
When the rotational movement is stopped, the drive crank 2621 and the operation link member 262 are caused by the inertial force.
2 and swings around the upper end pivotally supported by 2.

On the other hand, when energization to the lower right side drive solenoid 2630 is stopped in a state where the lower right side drive solenoid 2630 is energized (the state shown in FIG. 134 (b)), the plunger of the lower right side drive solenoid 2630 becomes free. . At this time, the drive crank 2621 and the operation link member 2622 that support the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 are tilted leftward in a front view from a state in which the upper end side is vertical as shown in the figure. Since it is in a state
The lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 are rotated counterclockwise in a front view by the load acting from the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603, respectively. The force acts, and the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 rotate counterclockwise and automatically return to the normal position.

In addition, when the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 return to the normal state, inertial force acts on the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603, respectively. ,
When the rotational movement is stopped, the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 are swung loosely.

Therefore, the front right movable effect unit 2600 in the center accessory 2500 of the present example repeats energization and non-energization to the lower right side drive solenoid 2630 as appropriate, so that the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decoration. The body 2603 can be swung freely, the movement of the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 can be enjoyed, and the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body can be enjoyed. The player can be informed of the arrival of a chance by swinging the body 2603.

[2-6. Overall configuration of the back unit]
Subsequently, for the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment,
This will be described with reference to FIGS. 135 to 139. 135 is a front view of the back unit of the game board, FIG. 136 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 137 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 138 is an exploded perspective view of the main unit in which the rear unit is disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 139 is an exploded perspective view of the main unit in which the rear unit is disassembled and viewed from the rear. is there.

The back unit 300 of this example includes a back box 3001 that is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1150 and has an open front side, in which an opening 3001c that faces the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is formed on the rear wall 3001b. Near the front surface in the box 3001 above the opening 3001c, the back left upper decoration unit 3050 is arranged at the left corner when viewed from the front and can be illuminated according to the game state, and near the front surface in the back box 3001 below the opening 3001c. Sphere that is arranged on the side and guides the game ball received in the first start opening 2101 and the general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 in the front unit 2000 and the second large winning opening 2552 of the center accessory 2500 to a predetermined position below. The guidance unit 3060 is attached to the front side of the rear wall 3001b in the back box 3001, and is opened according to the gaming state. And back in the mobile production unit 3100 to close the part of the c,
In the back box 3000, it is arranged on the upper side and the front side of the back middle movable effect unit 3100 and is movable according to the gaming state, and is arranged on the front side of the rear rear upper movable effect unit 3200 and according to the gaming state. Movable front front movable production unit 3400 and back box 300
The back-under-back movable effect unit 3500 which is arranged between the ball guidance unit 3060 and the back middle movable effect unit 3100 within 0 and moves according to the game state, and is attached to the front side of the ball guide unit 3060 according to the game state. Movable front front movable production unit 3600 and back box 300
A back left movable effect unit 3700 which is arranged on the left side of the 0 opening 3001c and on the front side of the back middle movable effect unit 3100 and is movable according to the gaming state.

Further, the back unit 3000 includes a horizontally long bottom substrate base 3010 attached near the lower end of the rear surface of the back wall 3001b of the back box 3001, a panel relay substrate 3011 attached to the rear side of the back bottom substrate base 3010, and a back box. 3001 is a plate-like oblong back base board base 3012 that is rotatably attached along the lower side of the opening 3001c on the rear face of the rear wall 3001b, a lamp drive board 3013 attached to the rear face of the back base board base 3012, and a back box 300
A rear rectangular board substrate 3014 having a vertically long rectangular shape attached to the left side of the rear wall 3001b in the rear view of the opening 3001c, a motor drive board 3015 attached to the rear side of the rear right board base 3014, and a back box 3001. A horizontally long plate-like back upper substrate base 3016 attached to the upper side of the opening 3001c on the rear surface of the rear wall 3001b, and a back upper back relay substrate 3017 attached to the rear side of the back upper substrate base 3016 are provided.

Further, the back unit 3000 is a shallow box-like back left upper substrate base 3018 that is attached to the upper left corner in a front view inside the back box 3001 and opened in the right direction, and a back left attached to the right side of the back left upper substrate base 3018. A relay board 3019 and a wiring support member 3020 extending in the vertical direction and attached to the vicinity of the front end of the right side surface in the back box 3001 are provided.

Although not shown, the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear side of the back box 3001 on the right side of the opening 3001c in the rear view and substantially at the center in the vertical direction. A lock member is provided for holding the cover.

Although detailed description of the back box 3001 in the back unit 3000 is omitted, the back upper left decoration unit 3050, the ball guiding unit 3060, and the back middle movable effect unit 31 are appropriately positioned.
00, back-back movable effect unit 3200, back-up front movable effect unit 3400, back-under-back movable effect unit 3500, back-bottom-before-movable effect unit 3600, back-back movable effect unit 370
0, mounting holes and mounting bosses for mounting the substrate bases 3010, 3012, 3014, 3016, 3018, the wiring support member 3020, and the like.

Further, the back box 3001 includes a flange-shaped fixing portion 3001a extending outward from the front end, and is fixed to the rear side of the game panel 1150 via the fixing portion 3001a. In addition, as shown in FIG. 139 and the like, the back box 3001 has a fixed frame piece 3001d that extends rearward in a frame shape on the rear surface side of the rear wall 3001b from the periphery of the opening 3001c at a position outside the predetermined width.
And an insertion recess formed at a predetermined position of the fixed frame piece 3001d and into which the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be inserted. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is inserted into the fixed frame piece 3001d from the rear side. It has become.

[2-7. Back upper left decorative unit]
Next, the back upper left decoration unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 will be described.
As shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, the back upper decoration unit 3050 of the back unit 3000 is disposed in the vicinity of the upper left front end in a front view of the back box 3001, and the upper end is attached to the upper front edge of the back box 3001. A lower end is attached to the upper part of the back left movable production | presentation unit 3700 mentioned later. The back left top decorative unit 3050 is a shallow box-like light-transmitting back left top decorative member 3051 that is decorated on the front and opened at the back, and a base member 3052 that closes the rear end of the back left top decorative member 3051. And a back upper left decorative board (not shown) mounted on the front side of the base member 3052 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface.

This back upper decoration unit 3050 is formed in an arc shape along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 formed in a substantially circular shape, and the back left upper decoration board LED provided inside emits light. The upper left decorative member 3051 can be appropriately decorated with light emission in a planar shape. The back upper left decorative member 3051 emits light in a planar shape, so that the game area 110
A pachinko machine 1 that can brighten and decorate the corresponding part of the decorative seal 1102 attached to the gaming panel 1200 (panel board 1210) that partitions the rear end of 0 and makes the inside of the gaming area 1100 brighter and more conspicuous. Can be done.

[2-8. Ball guidance unit]
Next, the ball guiding unit 3060 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 140 and 141. FIG. 140 is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 141 is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit as viewed from the back. The ball guiding unit 3060 of the present example includes a front end and an opening 300 in the back box 3001 in the back unit 3000.
In the state where it is arranged at a position lower than 1c and assembled to the game board 4, the center accessory 25
The rear side of 00 is positioned below the stage 2510. In addition, the ball guiding unit 3060 is a first start port 21 of the attacker unit 2100 in the front unit 2000.
01 and the game ball received in the general winning opening 2104 and the game ball received in the second large winning opening 2552 of the second attacker unit 2550 in the center accessory 2500 can be received and discharged downward. is there.

The ball guiding unit 3060 includes a unit base 3061 attached to the lower part of the front end of the back box 3001 and extending in the left-right direction; A transparent substrate cover 3063 covering the front surface of the lower stage decorative substrate 3062, a lower stage left decorative member 3064 and a lower stage right decorative member 3065 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3061 along the lower edge of the substrate cover 3063, It has.

As shown in the drawing, the spherical guiding unit 3060 is formed in a loose V shape in which the shape of the upper end of the unit base 3061 is lowered at the center in the left-right direction.
062 and the substrate cover 3063 are also formed in a loose V shape along the upper end of the unit base 3061. A unit base 3061 of the ball guiding unit 3060 is disposed in the center in the left-right direction, and is received in the first starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 and through which a game ball guided rearward by the flange 2110b can pass. 3061a, a general discharge passage 3061b that receives the game ball received by the general winning opening 2104 in the attacker unit 2100 and guided backward by the collar 2110b and guides it downward, and the second large winning opening 2552 in the center accessory 2500. The second discharge passage 3061 that receives the game ball received from the discharge port 2555 and guided to the rear of the center accessory 2500 and guides it downward.
c.

The general discharge passage 3061b of the unit base 3061 is formed at a position corresponding to each of the four general winning ports 2104 in the attacker unit 2100, and the game balls received in the two adjacent general winning ports 2104 are individually separated. It forms so that it may join after receiving and it will discharge | emit downward from one place. Further, the general discharge passage 3061b has a configuration in which the front side is opened, and the front end side is closed by the rear surface of the attacker unit 2100 or the rear surface of the panel plate 1210 so that the game ball does not fall forward. .

Further, the second discharge passage 3061c of the unit base 3061 is connected to the unit base 3061.
After receiving the game ball from the second grand prize opening 2552 at the upper part of the unit base, after guiding it to the vicinity of the lower part of the unit base 3061 on the front side of the unit base 3061, the rear side of the unit base 3061 through the opening through the unit base 3061 To the unit base 30
It is formed so as to be guided to a position closer to the center in the left-right direction on the rear side of 61 and discharged downward. The second discharge passage 3061c is configured such that the front side is open on the front side of the unit base 3061, and the front end side is closed by a plate-like second discharge passage cover 3066.

The ball guiding unit 3060 further includes a first discharge passage member 3067 that is attached to the rear side of the unit base 3061 and guides and discharges the game ball that has passed through the passage hole 3061a of the unit base 3061 downward. Although not shown in the drawing, the first discharge passage member 3067 is configured such that the front is open and the front end is closed by the rear surface of the unit base 3061. Further, the first discharge passage member 3067 has a passage hole 306 from the front side.
The game ball that has passed through 1a is guided in the lower left direction when viewed from the rear, and is discharged downward from a position adjacent to the second discharge passage 3061c.

Further, the ball guiding unit 3060 includes a back left lower relay board 3068 attached to the left end front surface of the unit base 3061 and a back lower right relay board 3069 attached to the right end front face of the unit base 3061.

Further, the ball guiding unit 3060 is attached to a predetermined position of the first discharge passage member 3067 and detects a game ball received by the first start port 2101 and a general discharge passage 3061c in the unit base 3061. For detecting a game ball received at the general winning opening 2104 and a general winning opening sensor 3071 for detecting a game ball received at the general winning opening 2104 and a position adjacent to the passage hole 3061a at the center in the left-right direction of the unit base 3061. A magnetic detection sensor 3072.

In this example, four general winning opening sensors 3071 in the ball guiding unit 3060 are provided. For the general winning opening 2104 arranged on the left and right sides of the attacker unit 2100 and close to the large winning opening 2103, In the discharge passage 3061a, only the general winning opening sensor 3071 is detected, and the general winning opening 2104 arranged at a position far from the big winning opening 2103 has two in the general discharge passage 3061a. It is detected by a general winning opening sensor 3071. As a result, it is possible to know in which general winning opening 2104 the game ball has been received.

In addition, the magnetic detection sensor 3072 of the ball guiding unit 3060 includes an attacker unit 210.
Magnetism acting in the vicinity of 0 can be detected, and fraud using a magnet or the like can be detected.

The game balls guided downward by the general discharge passage 3061b, the second discharge passage 3061c, and the first discharge passage member 3067 of the ball guiding unit 3060 are discharged onto the bottom wall portion of the substrate holder 1160, and the substrate holder 1160 The out ball discharge portion 1161 is discharged below the game board 4. Further, the ball guiding unit 3060 can make the stage 2510 in the center accessory 2500 be illuminated and decorated by causing the LED mounted on the under-stage decoration substrate 3062 to emit light.

[2-9. Backward movable production unit]
Next, the back middle movable effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 142 to 153. 142 is a front view of the back middle movable production unit in the back unit, FIG. 143 is a perspective view of the back middle movable production unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 144 is a perspective view of the back middle movable production unit viewed from the rear. It is. FIG. 145 is an exploded perspective view of the back middle movable effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. FIG. 146 is an exploded view of the back middle movable effect unit for each main member. FIG. Further, FIG. 147 is a perspective view of the back middle drive mechanism in the back middle movable effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 148 is a rear perspective view of the back middle drive mechanism in the back middle movable effect unit. Further, FIG. 149 is an exploded oblique view of the back middle drive mechanism for each main member and is seen from the front, and FIG. 150 is an exploded view of the back middle drive mechanism for each main member and the rear view. FIG. In addition, FIG. 151 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back middle movable effect unit.

The back middle movable effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the rear wall 3001b so as to close the opening 3001c from the front side in the back box 3001. This inside movable effect unit 3100 is attached to the front surface of the rear wall 3001b in the back box 3001, and has an opening window 3101a that is substantially the same size as the opening 3001c and penetrates in the front-rear direction. Back middle unit base 3101 and back middle unit base 3
The left and right door members 3120L, 3120R, and the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R, which are arranged in front of 101 and whose vertical direction is higher than the height of the opening window 3101a, are formed according to the gaming state. A back middle drive mechanism 3150 attached to the front side below the opening window 3101a in the back middle unit base 3101 by being driven to move in the left-right direction between a position outside the opening window 3101a and a position on the front side of the opening window 3101a. It is equipped with.

In addition, the back middle movable effect unit 3100 is attached to the front upper end of the back middle unit base 3101 and restricts the upper ends of the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R from moving forward so that the rear middle unit base 3101 has substantially the full width. A plate-like back, middle, and upper decorative member 3 extending in the left-right direction
102 and the back middle unit base 31 on the front side of the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R
A plate-shaped back middle lower decorative member 3103 attached along the lower end of the open window 3101a at 01 and extending in the left-right direction over substantially the entire width of the back middle unit base 3101, and the right side of the open window 3101a in the back middle unit base 3101 The upper and lower ends are arranged in the back and upper decorative member 31.
02 and a plate-like back middle right front decorative member 31 attached to the front surface of the back middle lower decorative member 3103, respectively.
04 and the opening window 3 in the back middle unit base 3101 behind the left door member 3120L.
A plate-shaped back middle left decorative member 3105 attached to the left front surface of 101a and substantially the same height as the open window 3101a, and a right front surface of the open window 3101a in the back middle unit base 3101 behind the right door member 3120R. And a plate-like back middle right decorative member 3106 having the same height as the open window 3101a.

Further, the back middle movable effect unit 3100 has a position detection sensor attached to the rear side of the back middle unit base 3101 and below the opening window 3101a and capable of detecting the movement positions of the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R. A back middle relay board 3108 and a board cover 3109 that covers the rear surface of the back middle relay board 3108 and is attached to the rear side of the back middle unit base 3101 are provided. The back intermediate relay board 3108 includes a position detection sensor 3108a and a door decoration board 31.
25, left door drive motor 3161, right door drive motor 3181 and lamp drive board 301
3 and the motor drive board 3015 are relayed. The back intermediate relay board 3108 is provided with a position detection sensor 3108a as shown in FIG.
With the position detection sensor 3108a, the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R are in contact with each other at the retracted positions where the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R are positioned on the left and right sides of the opening window 3101a, respectively, and at the approximate center in the left-right direction. It is arranged so that it can be detected at the center appearance position.

In addition, the code | symbol 3110 in a figure is the left door member 3120L and the right door member 312 which abbreviate | omitted illustration.
This is a wiring retainer for fixing the wiring connecting the 0R door decoration board 3125 and the back intermediate relay board 3108.

The left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R of the back middle movable effect unit 3100 are:
The left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R are formed in a substantially bilaterally symmetric shape. The left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R are frame bodies 31 in a form in which both the left and right sides extend up and down with respect to the vertically long rectangular frame shape, imitating the soft nishiki of a kite.
21, a transparent plate-like door body 3122 disposed on the rear side of the frame 3121, and a door body 3122
Between the rear wall of the back middle unit base 3101 and the back middle upper decorative member 3102 attached to the upper end of the door body 3122. An upper guide member 3124 that is slidably guided, and a door decoration board that is disposed on the rear side of the door body 3122 and has a through-hole corresponding to the central opening in the frame 3121 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side. 3125 and the door decoration board 3125 are formed in substantially the same shape and are arranged between the door decoration board 3125 and the door main body 3122, and the door decoration board 3
And a light guide member (not shown) that guides light from the LED in 125 to the frame.

The left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R have a plate-like door body 3122 formed transparently, and are members (decorations) arranged on the rear side through a vertically long rectangular opening formed in the center of the frame 3121. Members, the liquid crystal display device 1900, etc.) can be visually recognized. In addition, the frame 3121 can be decorated with light emission by causing the LED of the door decoration board 3125 to emit light.

Further, the movable base 3123 of the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R penetrates in the left-right direction, and the guide hole 3123 into which the rail shaft 3151 of the back middle drive mechanism 3150 is inserted.
a, a belt fixing portion 3123b fixed to the driving belts 3165 and 3185 of the middle back drive mechanism 3150, and a detection piece 3123c that extends backward and can be detected by a position detection sensor provided on the back middle relay board 3108. It is equipped with.

The left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R are provided in the guide hole 3 of the movable base 3123.
By inserting the rail shaft 3151 of the back middle drive mechanism 3150 into the 123a, the rail shaft 3152 is guided to be slidable in the left-right direction. The left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R are guided in the left-right direction at the same position by the single rail shaft 3151, and the sides facing each other are brought into contact with each other. Thus, one large surface can be formed. Further, as described above, since the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R are guided in the left-right direction by one rail shaft 3151, they cannot overlap each other in the front-rear direction and cannot be overtaken. Yes.

As shown in FIGS. 147 to 150, the back middle drive mechanism 3150 of the back middle movable effect unit 3100 is a long rail shaft that slidably guides the lower ends of the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R in the left-right direction. 3151 and a body base 3152 that supports both ends of the rail shaft 3151 and is formed by bending a metal plate. The rail shaft 3151 in the back middle drive mechanism 3150 is formed in a cylindrical shape. Also, the back middle drive mechanism 3150
The main body base 3152 of the main body 31 extends in the left-right direction with a substantially U-shaped cross section with the front open.
52a, a rail support piece 3152b extending upward from both upper ends of the main body 3152a and supporting the end of the rail shaft 3151, and a fixed piece 3152c extending forward from both lower ends of the main body 3152a. The main body base 3152 is formed with mounting holes, openings, and the like at appropriate positions.

Further, the back middle drive mechanism 3150 is provided with the left fixed piece 3 in the main body base 3152 in front view.
A plate-like left base 3160 fixed to the upper side of 152c, and a left door drive motor that passes through the left base 3160 from the lower side and has a rotating shaft extending upward and attached to the lower side of the left fixed piece 3152c in the main body base 3152 3161, a left drive gear 3162 fixed to the rotation shaft of the left drive motor 3161, a driven gear 3163a meshing with the left drive gear 3162, and a drive pulley 3163b rotating integrally with the lower side of the driven gear 3163a. 3160 and a left drive rotator 3163 rotatably supported by the main body base 3152, and a left disposed on the left side of the right fixed piece 3152c in the main body base 3152 at the same height as the drive pulley 3163b in the left drive rotator 3163. A driven pulley 3164 and a left driven pulley 316
4 and the left driving belt 31 wound around the driving pulley 3163b of the left driving rotating body 3163.
65, a pulley support member 3166 that rotatably supports the left driven pulley 3164 and is slidably attached to the main body base 3152 in the left-right direction, and the pulley support member 31
66, a spring fixing member 3167 fixed to the main body base 3152 at a position on the left side of 66, and disposed between the spring fixing member 3167 and the pulley support member 3166, and the spring fixing member 3167 and the pulley support member 3166 are separated from each other. A tension spring 3168 biasing in the direction;
A gear cover 3 which is attached to the upper side of the left base 3160 and covers the upper side of the left drive gear 3162
169.

Further, the back middle drive mechanism 3150 is provided with the right fixed piece 3 in the main body base 3152 in front view.
A plate-like right base 3180 fixed to the upper side of 152c, and a right door drive motor which passes through the right base 3180 from the lower side and whose rotating shaft extends upward and is attached to the lower side of the right fixed piece 3152c in the main body base 3152 3181, a right drive gear 3182 fixed to the rotation shaft of the right drive motor 3181, a driven gear 3183a meshing with the right drive gear 3182, and a drive pulley 3183b rotating integrally with the upper side of the driven gear 3183a, and a right base 3180. And a right driven rotator 3183 rotatably supported by the main body base 3152 and a right follower disposed on the right side of the left fixed piece 3152c on the main body base 3152 at the same height as the driving pulley 3183b in the right driven rotator 3183. Pulley 3184 and right driven pulley 318
4 and the right drive belt 31 wound around the drive pulley 3183b of the right drive rotator 3183.
85, a pulley support member 3186 that rotatably supports the right driven pulley 3184 and is slidably attached to the main body base 3152 in the left-right direction, and the pulley support member 31
86, a spring fixing member 3187 fixed to the main body base 3152 at a position on the right side of 86, and disposed between the spring fixing member 3187 and the pulley support member 3186, and the spring fixing member 3187 and the pulley support member 3186 are separated from each other. A tension spring 3188 biasing in the direction;
Gear cover 3 attached to the upper side of the right base 3180 and covering the upper side of the right drive gear 3182
189.

As shown in the figure, the back middle drive mechanism 3150 has a right drive belt 3185 disposed above the left drive belt 3165. Further, the middle back drive mechanism 3150 has a belt fixing portion 3123 of the movable base 3123 in the left door member 3120L at a portion located on the front side of the left drive belt 3165 that is circulated by the drive pulley 3163b and the left driven pulley 3164.
b is fixed, and the movable base 3 of the right door member 3120R is located at the front side of the right drive belt 3185 that is circulated by the drive pulley 3183b and the right driven pulley 3184.
The belt fixing portion 3123b of 123 is fixed (see FIG. 143 and the like).

Further, the middle back drive mechanism 3150 is attached to a predetermined position of the main body 3152a in the main body base 3152, and the left drive belt 3165 and the right drive belt 3185 are connected to the main body base 3152.
A protective member 3153 is further provided to prevent contact with the contact member 3153. This protective member 315
3 is a semi-cylindrical portion extending in the vertical direction and projecting forward is the main body 3 of the main body base 3152.
It is attached so as to protrude forward from a vertically extending surface of 152a, and when the rotating left driving belt 3165 or right driving belt 3185 is bent, it comes into line contact before the main body base 3152. Thus, the left driving belt 3165 and the right driving belt 3185 can be prevented from coming into surface contact with the main body base 3152, and the left driving belt 3165 and the right driving belt 3185 can be prevented from wearing out early. It has become.

This middle back drive mechanism 3150 is driven by a left door drive motor 3161 with a left drive belt 3165.
, And the left door member 3120L is moved to the retreat position where the left door member 3120L is entirely located on the left side of the left end of the opening window 3101a in the back middle unit base 3101 when viewed from the front.
The right end of 0L can be moved in the left-right direction between the maximum appearance position located slightly to the left from the right end of the opening window 3101a. Further, the back middle drive mechanism 3150 rotates the right drive belt 3185 by the right door drive motor 3181 so that the right door member 3120R is entirely moved to the right side from the right end in the back middle unit base 3101 when viewed from the front of the opening window 3101a. The left door of the right door member 3120R can be moved in the left-right direction between the left end of the opening window 3101a and the maximum appearance position located slightly to the right.

Next, the movement of the back movable movable effect unit 3100 of this example will be described. This back middle movable effect unit 3100 has a left door drive motor 3161 and a right door drive motor 31 according to the gaming state.
By rotating 81, the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R can be moved in the left-right direction. In the back movable movable unit 3100, in the normal state, the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R are respectively connected to the back middle unit base 31.
The open window 3101a at 01 is in the retracted position located on the left and right sides when viewed from the front. In this retracted position, the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R are located outside the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the liquid crystal display means 1
The effect image displayed in 900 is not obstructed (see FIG. 108 and the like). Also,
In the retracted position, the left door member 3120L is positioned on the rear side of the back left movable effect unit 3700, which will be described later, and the right door member 3120R is positioned on the rear side of the back center right front decorative member 3104, and the right door member. 3120R is almost invisible to the player.

When the left door drive motor 3161 and the right door drive motor 3181 are driven to rotate in appropriate directions while the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R are in the retracted positions, respectively, the left drive belt 31
65 and the right drive belt 3185 rotate (circulate), respectively, and the left door member 3120L moves to the right and the right door member 3120R moves to the left. Left door member 3120L
When the right door member 3120R moves to the right and left, respectively, the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R are movable so that the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is gradually blocked from the left and right, and the display area becomes narrower. Production can be performed. And the left door member 31
The right end of 20L and the left end of the right door member 3120R come into contact with each other at a substantially center in the left-right direction, and the left door member 3
When 120L and the right door member 3120R move to the center appearance position, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be brought into a closed state (FIG. 151 (a)).
See).

As shown in FIGS. 151 (b) and 151 (c), the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120
Since R can be independently moved in the left-right direction by the left door drive motor 3161 and the right door drive motor 3181, only the left door member 3120L or only the right door member 3120R is moved to the front side of the liquid crystal display means 1900. It is also possible to move (appear).

By the way, the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120 of the back middle movable effect unit 3100.
Since the rear side of R can be visually recognized through the vertically long rectangular opening of the frame body 3121, when the left door member 3120 L or the right door member 3120 R is moved to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the liquid crystal display device By displaying an image corresponding to the opening of the frame 3121 on the display screen 1900, the player can be given an illusion that the image is displayed on the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R. It becomes like this. Therefore, the left door member 3120
The decoration of the L and the right door member 3120R (the pattern of the cocoon) can be changed in various ways, so that the pachinko machine 1 that does not get tired can be obtained. Moreover, you may make it display a moving image as an image, and, thereby, with respect to a player, the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R
Since it is possible to make an illusion as if it were a display means such as a liquid crystal display device itself, it is possible to perform a collaborative effect between an image effect and a movable effect, and to provide a variety of effects to the player Can be done.

[2-10. Backward-movable production unit]
Next, the back-up / down movable effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 152 to 168. 152 is a front view of the rear rear movable production unit in the rear unit, FIG. 153 is a perspective view of the rear rear movable production unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 154 is a rear view of the rear rear movable production unit. FIG. FIG. 155 is an exploded perspective view of the rear rear movable stage production unit divided into an arm slide unit and an arm unit, and FIG. 156 is an exploded rear perspective view showing the arm rear unit and arm unit. FIG. Further, FIG. 157 is an exploded perspective view of the arm slide unit of the rearward movable movable effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 158 is an exploded perspective view of the arm slide unit of the rearward movable effect unit as seen from the rear. It is a disassembled perspective view. Further, FIG. 159 is a perspective view of the arm unit of the rearward movable movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 160 is a perspective view of the arm unit of the rearward movable effect unit as viewed from the rear.

FIG. 161 is an exploded perspective view of the arm unit of the rearward movable movable effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 162 is an exploded perspective view of the arm unit of the rearward rear movable effect unit as seen from the rear. FIG. FIG. 163 is an exploded perspective view of the upper arm unit of the arm unit as seen from the front, FIG. 164 is an exploded perspective view of the upper arm unit of the arm unit as seen from the rear, and FIG. FIG. 17 is an exploded perspective view of the unit forearm unit disassembled and viewed from the front.
6 is an exploded perspective view of the forearm unit of the arm unit as seen from behind. Furthermore, FIG. 167
FIG. 168 is an explanatory diagram showing movement by the arm slide unit in the back upper movable effect unit, and FIG. 168 is an explanatory diagram showing movement by the arm unit in the rear upper motion effect unit.

In the back unit 3000 of the present embodiment, the back-up / down movable production unit 3200 includes a back box 3
It is arranged above the opening 3001c in 001 and above the middle movable effect unit 3100. The rear rear movable production unit 3200 includes an arm slide unit 3210 attached to the front surface of the rear wall 3001b above the opening 3001c in the back box 3001 and extending in the left-right direction over substantially the entire width of the back box 3001. Slide unit 321
An arm unit 3250 arranged on the front side of 0 and made slidable in the left-right direction by the arm slide unit 3210 and imitating an arm (a part below the shoulder) of a predetermined character;
It has.

[2-10A. Arm slide unit]
As shown in FIGS. 157 and 158 and the like, the arm slide unit 3210 in the rear rear movable production unit 3100 is attached to the front surface of the rear wall 3001c in the back box 3001, and is a shallow box-shaped and horizontally long rectangular shape. Slide base 3211 and slide base 32
11, a slide rail 3212 attached to the lower part of the front surface and extending in the left-right direction, a slider 3213 having a rack gear 3213a guided in the left-right direction by the slide rail 3212 and extending in the left-right direction at the upper end, and an arm unit 3250 attached to the front surface. A pinion gear 3214 that meshes with the rack gear 3213a of the slider 3213 and is rotatably supported by the slide base 3211. A first pinion gear 3214 that meshes with the pinion gear 3214 and is rotatably supported by the slide base 3211 at a position on the left side of the pinion gear 3214 when viewed from the front. Meshes with one transmission gear 3215, the second transmission gear 3216 meshed with the first transmission gear 3215, and supported by the slide base 3211 so as to be rotatable at a position on the left side of the first transmission gear 3214 when viewed from the front. Small diameter gear 3217a, and Small-diameter gear to rotate integrally with the rear side of the small-diameter gear 3217a 3217
a large-diameter gear 3217b having a diameter larger than a, and the second transmission gear 32 being connected to the slide base 3211.
A transmission gear 3217 that is rotatably supported at a position on the left side of the front view 16 and a transmission gear 3217.
The large-diameter gear 3217b and a drive gear 3218 disposed at the left side of the transmission gear 3217 as viewed from the front, and an arm slide drive motor 3219 disposed in front of the drive gear 3218 and having the drive gear 3218 fixed to the rotation shaft. And.

The arm slide unit 3210 covers the front side from the pinion gear 3214 to the drive gear 3218, is attached to the upper left front surface of the slide base 3211, and has a horizontally long plate-like gear cover 3220 to which the arm slide drive motor is attached on the front side. , Slide rail 3
The arm unit 325 is disposed below the 212 and attached to the slide base 3211.
A horizontally long slide guide 3221 that slidably supports the rear surface of 0, and a slide base 321
1, a slide position detection sensor 3222 that is disposed in the vicinity of both the left and right ends on the front surface of 1, a sensor cover 3223 that covers the front side of the slide position detection sensor 3222 and is attached to the slide base 3211, and a pinion gear The arm slide drive motor 321 is attached to the front surface of the slide base 3211 at a position on the right side of the front view from 3214.
9, the rear rear relay board 32 for relaying the connection between the slide position detection sensor 3222 and the arm unit relay board 3259 and the lamp driving board 3013 and the motor driving board 3015.
24, and a wiring retainer 3225 for holding wiring for connecting the back and rear relay substrate 3224 and the arm unit relay substrate 3259.

The slide rail 3212 in the arm slide unit 3210 is an Acculide (registered trademark) slide rail. In addition, a detection piece 3213b extending upward is provided at both left and right ends of the slider, and the detection piece 3213b is a slide position detection sensor 32.
22, the slide position in the left-right direction of the slider 3213 (arm unit 3250) can be detected. Also, arm slide unit 321
The zero gear cover 3220 cooperates with the slide base 3211 to cooperate with the pinion gear 3214.
The first transmission gear 3215, the second transmission gear 3216, and the transmission gear 3217 can be supported so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

When the pinion gear 3214 is rotationally driven by the arm slide drive motor 3219, the arm slide unit 3210 rack gear 3213 meshed with the pinion gear 3214.
The slider 3213 can be moved (slid) in the left-right direction by a, and the arm unit 3250 attached to the front surface of the slider 3213 can be moved in the left-right direction.

[2-10B. Arm unit]
The arm unit 3250 in the rear rear movable production unit 3200 is shown in FIGS. 161 and 16.
2 and the like, an arm unit base 3251 attached to the front surface of the slider 3213 in the arm slide unit 3210, and a first rotating shaft 3252 that is supported at a predetermined position in the arm unit base 3251 and extends in the front-rear direction. The upper arm unit 3300 which is supported by the first rotation shaft 3252 so that the proximal end thereof is pivotable and has a shape imitating the upper arm of a predetermined character, covers the front surface of the upper arm unit 3300 on the proximal end side, and the arm unit Arm unit cover 3 attached to the front side of base 3251 and supporting the front end side of first rotating shaft 3252
253, an upper arm drive motor 3254 attached to the front surface of the arm unit cover 3253 for rotating the upper arm unit 3300 about the first rotation shaft 3252, and an upper arm unit 3300.
And a forearm unit 3350 that is rotatably supported at the front end side of the upper arm unit 3300 and has a shape imitating the forearm of a predetermined character.

The arm unit 3250 is fixed to the rotation shaft of the upper arm drive motor 3254 and is disposed between the arm unit base 3251 and the arm unit cover 3253. The arm unit 3250 meshes with the drive gear 3255 and is larger than the drive gear 3255. A large-diameter gear 3256a having a diameter, and a small-diameter gear 3256b that is disposed so as to be integrally rotatable at the front side of the large-diameter gear 3256a and that has a smaller diameter than the large-diameter gear 3256a and meshes with the upper-arm drive gear 3302 of the upper-arm unit 3300. And a transmission gear 3256 that is rotatably supported by an arm unit base 3251 and an arm unit cover 3253.

The arm unit 3250 is attached to the front surface of the arm unit base 3251, and can be brought into contact with the rear surface of the arm unit base 3251 of the upper arm unit 3300.
2 and an upper arm rotation guide 3257 having an arcuate sliding ridge 3257a centered on 2 and an upper arm rotation for detecting both ends of the upper arm unit 3300 attached to a predetermined position of the arm unit cover 3253. The arm unit relay board 3259 attached to the front surface of the arm unit base 3251 and the front surface of the arm unit relay board 3259 at a position on the left side of the position detection sensor 3258 and the first rotation shaft 3252 in front view. And a plate-like substrate cover 3260 that is disposed on the rear side of the upper arm unit 3300 and is attached to the arm unit base 3251.

Further, the arm unit 3250 has an arm unit cover 3 above the upper arm unit 3300.
253 and the substrate cover 3260, which are respectively attached to the upper front surface, and are supported so as to be rotatable about an upper guide bracket 3261 extending forward and an axis extending in the vertical direction at the tip of the upper guide bracket 3261, And a guide roller 3262 that can come into contact with a rear surface of a unit base 3401 in a front / back front movable effect unit 3400 described later.

Also, the arm unit 3250 includes a back upper rear relay board 3224, an upper arm drive motor 3254, an upper arm rotation position detection sensor 3258, an upper arm decoration board 3305, a forearm drive motor 3307, a forearm rotation position detection sensor 3316, and a forearm decoration body 3352. An arm unit relay board 3259 for relaying the connection to the arm unit, and a wiring cover 3263 for fixing the wiring for connecting the arm unit relay board 3259 and the forearm decoration board 3353 provided in the forearm unit 3350.

The arm unit 3250 is inserted into the first rotation shaft 3252 and inserted into the cylindrical first bush 3264 for rotatably supporting the upper arm unit 3300 and the second rotation shaft 3351a of the forearm unit 3350. A cylindrical second bushing 3265 for rotatably supporting the forearm unit 3350 with respect to the upper arm unit 3300.

The arm unit 3250 and the arm unit cover 3253 are formed in a shallow box shape in which the rear surface, the left side surface, and a part of the bottom surface are opened in a front view, and the upper end of the upper arm unit 3300 is accommodated inside. Thus, the upper arm unit 3300 extends from the opened left side surface and a part of the bottom surface to the outside. The arm unit cover 3253 has an upper arm unit 3 described later.
One end side of the upper arm assist spring 3303 in 300 is locked.

The upper arm unit 3300 of the arm unit 3250 is supported so that the base end side is rotatable with respect to the first rotation shaft 3252 supported by the arm unit base 3251 and the arm unit cover 3253 as shown in FIGS. 163 and 164 and the like. An upper arm base 3301 having a first shaft portion 3301a and extending in a plate shape in a predetermined direction, and a first shaft portion 330 of the upper arm base 3301.
An upper arm drive gear 3302 that is attached to the rear side of 1a and is formed in a fan shape around the first rotation shaft 3252 and meshes with the small diameter gear 3256b of the transmission gear 3256, and one end side is locked to the arm unit cover 3253. The other end side is locked to the upper arm base 3301, and the distal end side of the upper arm base 3301 is upward with the first rotation shaft 3252 as the center (clockwise direction when viewed from the front).
An upper arm assist spring 3303 for applying an urging force to the upper arm base 3301 so as to rotate
An upper arm decoration body 3304 which is attached to the front surface of the upper arm base 3301 and which covers the front surface and imitates the upper arm of a predetermined character.

The upper arm base 3301 of the upper arm unit 3300 has a first shaft portion 33 provided on the proximal end side.
01a is formed in a cylindrical shape that extends short in the front-rear direction, and a first rotation shaft 3252 is inserted through a first bush 3264 therein. The upper arm base 3301 has a cylindrical second shaft portion 3301b that extends in the front-rear direction by inserting a second rotation shaft 3351a of a forearm unit 3350, which will be described later, on the distal end side, and an axial center of the second shaft portion 3301b. And a slit 3301c which is formed in an arc shape and can regulate the rotation range of the forearm unit 3350. The upper arm base 3301 is formed of a material having translucency.

The upper arm drive gear 3302 of the upper arm unit 3300 is a small diameter gear 325 of the transmission gear 3256.
A portion that meshes with 6b is formed so as to spread in a fan shape in the direction opposite to the distal end side of the upper arm unit across the axis of the first rotation shaft 3252. Further, the upper arm drive gear 3302 includes a detection piece 3302 a that is detected by an upper arm rotation position detection sensor 3258 (see FIG. 163) attached to the arm unit cover 3253.

Although not shown in detail, the upper arm assist spring 3303 of the upper arm unit 3300 is wound in a coil shape with the first rotation shaft 3252 as a substantial axis, and is bent so that the tip on one end side extends forward. The arm unit cover 3253 is locked at a predetermined position.
The upper arm assist spring 3303 has a coiled portion disposed on the front side of the upper arm base 3301 and the other end extending to the rear side of the upper arm base 3301 through a through hole (not shown). It is locked on the rear side of the upper arm base 3301 (see FIG. 162).

The upper arm decoration body 3304 of the upper arm unit 3300 is disposed on the proximal end side in the insertion hole 3304a through which the first shaft portion 3301a of the upper arm base 3301 can be inserted, and in the vicinity of the insertion hole 3304a (upper left portion in front view). Motor mounting portion 33 for mounting the forearm drive motor 3307
04b and the second shaft portion 3301b of the upper arm base 3301 formed on the distal end side can pass therethrough and the distal end opening 3304 penetrating in a fan shape up to the outer peripheral edge of the arc-shaped slit 3301c.
c and a through hole 3304d extending in an arc shape around the axis of the second shaft portion 3301b on the upper side of the tip opening 3304c in the drawing. This upper arm ornament 3304 is formed to have translucency.

The upper arm unit 3300 includes an upper arm decoration board 3305 that is attached to the rear side of the upper arm base 3301 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a second shaft portion 33 on the rear side of the upper arm base 3301.
A plate-shaped protection plate 330 having a ridge attached to the front end side than 01b and protruding rearward.
6 are provided.

Further, the upper arm unit 3300 includes a motor mounting portion 3304b on the front surface of the upper arm decorative body 3304.
A forearm drive motor 3307 which is attached to the rear arm and has a rotation shaft extending rearward, a drive gear 3308 which is fixed to the rotation shaft of the forearm drive motor 3307 and is disposed between the upper arm decoration body 3304 and the upper arm base 3301, A driven gear 3309 that meshes with the gear 3308 and is rotatably supported by the upper arm base 3301, a large-diameter large-diameter gear 3310a that meshes with the driven gear 3309, and a large-diameter gear 3310a that rotates integrally with the front surface of the large-diameter gear 3310a. Also small diameter small gear 33
10b and rotatably supported by the upper arm base 3301, a drive gear portion 3311a that meshes with a small-diameter gear 3310b of the transmission gear 3310 and extends in an arc shape, and a shaft center of the drive gear portion 3311a A transmission rotating body 3311 that has a crank pin 3311b protruding forward from a position separated by a predetermined distance, and is rotatably supported by the upper arm base 3301.
A hook-like link member 3312 whose base end side is rotatably supported with respect to the crank pin 3311b of the transmission rotating body 3311 and whose distal end side is rotatably supported with respect to the transmission pin 3351b of the forearm unit 3350; It has.

The upper arm unit 3300 has one end attached to the intermediate portion in the longitudinal direction of the link member 3312 and the other end attached to a predetermined position of the upper arm base 3301.
Forearm assist spring 3313 that biases the front arm side of the forearm unit 3350 to rotate upward (counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front) via 312 and a forearm rotation position for detecting the rotation position of the transmission rotating body 3311 And a detection sensor 3316.

The transmission rotating body 3311 of the upper arm unit 3300 is rotated so that the crankpin 331 is rotated.
1b revolves at a predetermined radius. Further, the transmission rotating body 3311 is provided with a slit 3311c extending in an arc shape around the rotation axis, and the slit 3311c.
A restriction protrusion 3301d protruding from the inner upper arm base 3301 is inserted.
Accordingly, the transmission rotating body 3311 can be rotated only within the range of the slit 3311c extending in an arc shape. The transmission rotator 3311 includes a detection piece 3311d extending rearward. The detection piece 3311d extends to the rear side of the upper arm base 3301 through the arc-shaped opening 3301e of the upper arm base 3301, and the upper arm attached to the upper arm decoration board 3305 on the rear side of the upper arm base 3301. Rotation position detection sensor 3
316 is detected.

The upper arm unit 3300 further includes a lock bracket 3314 attached so as to cover a part of the forearm drive motor 3307 on the front surface of the upper arm decorative body 3304, and a lock pin 3315 extending forward from the front surface of the lock bracket 3314. Yes. This lock pin 331
Reference numeral 5 denotes a locking piece 3401e of the unit base 3401 in the back upper front movable effect unit 3400 when the upper arm unit 3300 is set to the storage position extending substantially in the horizontal direction and the arm unit 3250 is set to the origin position by the arm slide unit 3210. The upper arm unit 3300 can be prevented from rotating downward by being locked by the locking piece 3401e (see FIG. 174).

As shown in FIGS. 165 and 166, the forearm unit 3350 in the arm unit 3250 includes a second rotation shaft 3351a and a second rotation shaft 3 extending rearward from a predetermined position on the base end side.
A plate-like forearm base 3351 having a transmission pin 3351b extending rearward at a position deviated by a predetermined amount from 351a and rotatably supporting the distal end side of the link member 3312, and extending in a predetermined direction;
A forearm decoration body 3352 that is attached to the front side of the forearm base 3351 and covers the front surface and imitates the forearm of a predetermined character is provided. Forearm base 335 of forearm unit 3350
1, the transmission pin 3351b is disposed at a position obliquely lower left from the second rotation shaft 3351a in the rear view. The forearm decorative body 3352 is formed to have translucency.

The forearm unit 3350 includes a forearm decoration board 3353 disposed between the forearm decoration body 3352 and the forearm base 3351 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a forearm decoration board 3353.
And a diffusing lens member 3354 for diffusing light from the LEDs of the forearm decorative board 3353. The forearm unit 3350 irradiates the forearm decoration body 3352 with light from the LED of the forearm decoration board 3353 widely diffused by the diffusing lens member 3354, so that the entire forearm decoration body 3352 is substantially uniform. It can be brightly decorated.

The transmission pin 3351b of the forearm unit 3350 is inserted into a slit 3301c extending in an arc shape of the upper arm base 3301 in the upper arm unit 3300, and a disc-shaped end member is attached to the rear end. Thus, the slit 3301c cannot be removed. The forearm unit 3350 rotates only within the range of the slit 3301c of the upper arm base 3301 extending in an arc shape around the axis of the second rotation shaft 3351a.

[2-10C. Arm unit movement]
Next, the movement of the arm unit 3250 in the back and rear movable production unit 3200 will be described. As shown in FIG. 167 (a) and the like, the arm unit 3250 of the present example is in a state where the arm unit 3250 is moved to the rightmost in the front view by the arm slide unit 3210 (the state of the origin position). Further, in a normal state, the upper arm unit 3300 of the arm unit 3250
And the forearm unit 3350 extend in a substantially horizontal direction, and the upper arm unit 33
00 and the forearm unit 3350 are in a state where they overlap each other when viewed from the front. In other words, in a normal state, the upper arm unit 3300 extends in a substantially horizontal direction (in the storage position state), and the forearm unit 3350 overlaps with the upper arm unit 3300 (in the storage position state). ing. Thus, from the player side, the arm unit 3250
Is almost invisible. Although details will be described later, in this normal position, the lock pin 3315 of the upper arm unit 3300 in the arm unit 3250 is used.
However, the locking piece 3401 of the unit base 3401 in the back top front movable effect unit 3400
e is locked (locked) to the upper arm unit 3300 in the direction of the standby position (
It is in a state where it cannot be rotated counterclockwise (when viewed from the front).

First, the movement by the arm slide unit 3210 will be described. As described above, when the drive gear 3218 is rotated in an appropriate direction (in this example, a clockwise direction in the front view) by the arm slide drive motor 3219 of the arm slide unit 3210 from a normal state, the drive gear 3218 The rotation is performed by the transmission gear 3217, the second transmission gear 3216, and the first transmission gear 32.
15 is transmitted to the pinion gear 3214, and the rotation of the pinion gear 3214 causes the slider 3213 to slide in the left-right direction (left direction in the front view in this example) via the rack gear 3213a meshing with the pinion gear 3214. It becomes.

When the slider 3213 of the arm slide unit 3210 slides, the arm unit 3250 attached to the front surface of the slider 3213 also slides together, and the entire arm unit 3250 is slid in the left-right direction (left direction) from the origin position. (See FIG. 167 (b)). Even if the upper arm unit 3300 (upper arm decoration body 3304) of the arm unit 3250 and the forearm unit 3350 (forearm decoration body 3352) overlap with each other, the arm unit 3250 can be slid in the horizontal direction by the arm slide unit 3210. The arm unit 3250 is hardly visible from the player side.

When the arm unit 3210 that has been slid leftward from the origin position is returned to the origin position, the arm unit 3210 is rotated via the slider 3213 by rotating the arm slide drive motor 3219 in the opposite direction. The whole can be slid rightward in a front view, and can be returned to the original position.

Next, the movement of the upper arm unit 3300 by the arm unit 3250 will be described. From the normal state where the upper arm unit 3300 of the arm unit 3250 extends substantially in the horizontal direction (in the storage position), the upper gear drive motor 3254 moves the drive gear 3255 in a predetermined direction (in this example, a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). , The rotation of the drive gear 3255 is transmitted to the upper arm drive gear 3302 of the upper arm unit 3300 via the transmission gear 3256, and the entire upper arm unit 3300 together with the upper arm drive gear 3302 is centered about the first rotation shaft 3252. It will rotate so that the side may move downward (appearance position side).

In this example, the transmission gear 3256 is provided between the drive gear 3255 and the upper arm drive gear 3302.
The rotation from the upper arm drive motor 3254 is transmitted to the upper arm drive gear 3302 while being decelerated by the transmission gear 3256. That is, the transmission gear 32
56, the rotational torque of the upper arm drive motor 3254 is amplified and transmitted to the upper arm drive gear 3302 (upper arm unit 3300).
Even if the weight on the 0 side is heavy, the load applied to the upper arm drive motor 3254 can be suppressed.

Further, in this example, the upper arm unit 3300 can be rotated within an angle range of about 90 degrees from the state of the substantially horizontal storage position to the state of the standby position hanging substantially vertically. (See FIG. 174 (c)). Further, the forearm unit 3350 is rotated about the first rotation shaft 3252 together with the upper arm unit 3300 by the drive of the upper arm drive motor 3254.

When the upper arm unit 3300 is rotated from the storage position in which the upper arm unit 3300 extends in the substantially horizontal direction to the appearance position in which the distal end side is lowered below the base end side, the distal end side of the upper arm unit 3300 is the liquid crystal display device 1.
It moves to the front side of 900, and can be visually recognized from the player side. It should be noted that the upper arm unit 3300 remains in the storage state where the forearm unit 3350 overlaps the upper arm unit 3300.
Is rotated in the direction of the appearance position, the player can actually see the upper arm unit 330.
The proximal end side of the forearm unit 3350 can be seen instead of the 0 distal end side, and most of the upper arm unit 3300 is hidden by the forearm unit 3350.

When returning the upper arm unit 3300 from the state where the distal end side of the upper arm unit 3300 in the arm unit 3250 is positioned lower than the base end side (state of the appearance position), the upper arm drive motor 3254 is moved in the direction opposite to the above. The upper arm unit 33 is driven to rotate
The tip end side of 00 can be rotated upward, and the upper arm unit 3300 can be returned to the storage position.

Next, the movement of the forearm unit 3350 in the arm unit 3250 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 168 (a), when the forearm unit 3350 extends in a substantially horizontal direction and overlaps the upper arm unit 3300 (normal state), the forearm unit 3350 is rotatably supported by the weight of the forearm unit 3350. A rotational moment that moves the front end side of the forearm unit 3350 downward (rotates clockwise in a front view) about the second rotation shaft 3351a acts on the forearm unit 3350. Then, due to the rotational moment acting on the forearm unit 3350, the transmission pin 3351 of the forearm unit 3350.
The crank pin 3311 of the transmission rotating body 3311 through the link member 3312 connected to b.
A force that pulls the crank pin 3311b in the direction of the transmission pin 3351b acts on b.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 168 (a), when the forearm unit 3350 overlaps with the upper arm unit 3300 (in the storage position), the crank pin 331 in the transmission rotating body 3311 is used.
1b is an axis connecting the center of the crank pin 3311b and the center of the transmission pin 3351b,
Located above the center of the transmission rotating body 3311 (position slightly revolved to one side),
The restriction protrusion 3301d is in contact with one end of the slit 3311c of the transmission rotating body 3311. In this state, the crank pin 331 of the transmission rotating body 3311
When a force pulling in the direction of the transmission pin 3351b is applied to 1b due to the rotational moment applied to the forearm unit 3350, the crank pin 3311b attempts to revolve counterclockwise as a direction approaching the transmission pin 3351b. Slit 3311c
Since the restricting projection 3301d is in contact with one end of the transmission rotor 3311, the transmission rotating body 3311 cannot rotate further counterclockwise, and the crank pin 3311b
Will continue to stop in its current state without revolving. Therefore, the forearm unit 335
In the state where 0 is the storage position, the rotational moment applied to the forearm unit 3350 is the link member 3.
Even if it acts on the crankpin 3311b via 312, the crankpin 3311b does not revolve, the transmission rotor 3311 does not rotate, and the forearm unit 3350 does not rotate naturally.

The arm unit 3250 of the present example has the forearm unit 3350 replaced by the upper arm unit 3300.
The forearm drive motor 3 attached to the upper arm unit 3300 from the storage position overlapped with the upper arm unit 3300
When the drive gear 3308 is driven to rotate in an appropriate direction (in this example, counterclockwise in the front view) by 307, the rotation of the drive gear 3308 is transmitted to the drive gear portion 3311a via the driven gear 3309 and the transmission gear 3310. The transmission rotator 3311 provided with the drive gear portion 3311a
And the crank pin 3311b provided on the transmission rotating body 3311 is connected to the transmission rotating body 331.
It revolves at a predetermined radius around the axis of one. The crank pin 3311b has a link member 3312 whose front end is pivotally supported by the transmission pin 3351b of the forearm unit 3350.
The link member 33 is supported by the rotation of the crankpin 3311b.
12, the transmission pin 3351 b revolves around the axis of the second rotation shaft 3351 a, and the forearm unit 3350 has a distal end side away from the upper arm unit 3300 (the direction of the unfolded position, the clockwise direction when viewed from the front). It will turn to.

As described above, when the forearm unit 3350 is in the retracted position, the revolution position of the crank pin 3311b is the axis line connecting the center of the crank pin 3311b and the center of the transmission pin 3351b. Since the position slightly revolves to one side (counterclockwise direction) with respect to the center, the transmission rotating body 3311 is transmitted by the forearm drive motor 3307.
When the shaft is rotated clockwise, the crank pin 3311b transmits the transmission pin 3351b via the link member 3312 until the axis connecting the crank pin 3311b and the transmission pin 3351b passes through the center of the transmission rotation body 3311. As a result, the forearm unit 3350 rotates in the counterclockwise direction around the second rotation shaft 3351a. When the crank pin 3311b further rotates in the clockwise direction and the axis connecting the crank pin 3311b and the transmission pin 3351b moves downward from the center of the transmission rotating body 3311, the crank pin 3311b is linked to the link member 3312. Via the transmission pin 3
351b is pushed away from the transmission rotating body 3311, and the forearm unit 335 is pushed.
0 rotates in the clockwise direction around the second rotation shaft 3351a.

In this example, the forearm unit 3350 is moved from the storage position where it overlaps with the upper arm unit 3300.
It can be rotated in a clockwise direction within a range of about 60 degrees in a front view.

In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, in the back-up / down rear movable production | generation unit 3200 of this example, arm unit 3
250 slide movement in the left-right direction, rotation of the upper arm unit 3300, and forearm unit 3
Since the rotation of 350 can be independently moved separately, the upper arm unit 330
0 and the forearm unit 3350 are rotated simultaneously, or the upper arm unit 330 is simultaneously moved with the slide.
0 and the forearm unit 3350 can be rotated, and various patterns of movement can be performed. Accordingly, it is possible to make a more natural movement as a movable effect unit imitating the arm of a predetermined character, and to attract the player's interest strongly.

[2-11. Backward front movable production unit]
Next, the back-up front movable effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 169 to 173. FIG. 169 is a front perspective view of the front back movable movable effect unit in the back unit, and FIG. 170 is a rear perspective view of the back front movable effect unit. FIG. 171 is an exploded perspective view of the front front movable effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 172 is an exploded oblique view of the back front front movable effect unit and the rear view. Further, FIG. 173 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the front / back front movable effect unit.

The back front movable effect unit 3400 is disposed on the front side of the back upper rear effect unit 3200 and attached to the front surface of the back box 3001. This back-up front movable production unit 3400 includes a unit base 3401 attached to the front surface of the back box 3001, and a back-up front where the rotary shaft extends forward through the unit base 3401 attached to the rear side of the unit base 3401. Drive motor 3402, drive gear 3403 fixed to the rotation shaft of backside front drive motor 3402 and disposed on the front side of unit base 3401, gear portion 3404a meshing with drive gear 3403, and rotation on the front surface of gear portion 3404a A drive rotating body 3404 having a crank pin 3404b extending forward from a position eccentric from the center and rotatably supported by the unit base 3401, and the crank pin 3404a of the driving rotating body 3404 slide in the left-right direction. The long hole-shaped first slit 3405a and the first slit 3405a are inserted in the positive direction. Seen extending out unit base 3 from the left side and the left side position than the drive rotor 3404 backward
A pair of slide support shafts 3405b supported by 401 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction;
A link member 3405 disposed on the front side of the drive rotating body 3404, and a second slit 3405c having a long hole disposed on the left side of the slide support shaft 3405b and extending in the left-right direction;
A transmission pin 3406a that is slidably inserted into the second slit 3405c of the link member 3405 and extends rearward, and a rotation that is disposed on the left side of the transmission pin 3406a and is rotatably supported by the unit base 3401. A back front decorative body 3406 that includes a moving shaft 3406b, extends in a predetermined direction with a side on which the rotation shaft 3406b and the transmission pin 3406a are disposed as a base end side, and is formed in a shape simulating a predetermined item. ing.

The unit base 3401 of the front front movable effect unit 3400 is configured such that the upper end extends in the left-right direction and the left side portion of the front view extends from the approximate center in the left-right direction at the upper end to the lower side. The pair of guide rollers 3262 of the arm unit 3250 in the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 can come into contact and roll in the left-right direction. In addition, the unit base 3401 has a rear upper front drive motor 3402 on the rear side of the left end in rear view.
Motor mounting portion 3401a for mounting the motor and a pair of slide support shafts 3405b of the link member 3405, which are arranged on the left side of the motor mounting portion 3401a in a front view, are slidably inserted. A shaft hole 340 that is disposed on the left side of the front view of the slit 3401b and the vertical guide slit 3401b and into which the rotating shaft 3406b of the front upper decorative body 3406 is inserted.
1c and a rotation guide slit 3401 penetrating in an arc shape around the axis of the shaft hole 3401c
d.

Further, the unit base 3401 of the front back movable effect unit 3400 includes a locking piece 3401e that is arranged on the left side of the front view of the rotation guide slit 3401d and protrudes leftward. By disposing the lock pin 3315 of the upper arm unit 3300 in the arm unit 3250 of the back / upper rear movable rendering unit 3200 on the upper side of the locking piece 3401e, it is possible to restrict the lock pin 3315 from moving downward. It is possible to lock the unit 3300 from rotating naturally.

The link member 3405 of the front back movable production unit 3400 is a long hole-shaped first slit 34.
05a is formed to have substantially the same length as the revolution radius of the crankpin 3404b in the drive rotor 3404. In the link member 3405, a pair of slide support shafts 3405 b that are separated in the vertical direction are arranged at positions that are substantially symmetrical with respect to the vertical axis about the axis of the first slit 3405 a that extends in the horizontal direction. Further, the second slit 3 of the link member 3405
405c is arranged at a position substantially coaxial with the axis of the first slit 3405a extending in the left-right direction.

This link member 3405 has a pair of slide support shafts 3405b which are unit bases 340.
By being inserted into one vertical guide slit 3401b, it is supported so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and the crank pin 3404b of the drive rotator 3404 inserted into the first slit 3405a revolves. It is designed to slide up and down. The pair of slide support shafts 3405b in the link member 3405 is slidably inserted into the vertical guide slit 3401b via guide bushes 3407 inserted on both front and rear sides with the unit base 3401 interposed therebetween. .

The back front front decorative body 3406 of the back front front movable effect unit 3400 is configured to extend in a predetermined direction, and the bush 340 extends from the rear surface on the proximal end side to the shaft hole 3401c of the unit base 3401.
A rotating shaft 3406b that is rotatably inserted through 8 extends. Further, when the back upper front decorative body 3406 is extended in the left-right direction so that the base end side is the right side when viewed from the front, the back upper front decorative body 3406 is inclined obliquely to the lower right (about 45 ° axis) with respect to the rotation shaft 3406b. Link member 34 from the position on the line)
A transmission pin 3406a inserted into the second slit 3405c of 05 extends rearward.

The back front decorative body 3406 extends rearward from a position opposite to the transmission pin 3406a with the rotation shaft 3406b interposed therebetween, and is a pair of guide pins disposed on the circumference centering on the rotation shaft 3406b. 3406c. A pair of guide pins 3406c of the front upper decorative body 3406
Guide bush 3409 into the rotation guide slit 3401d of the unit base 3401.
When the back upper front decorative body 3406 is rotated about the rotation shaft 3406b, the back front front decorative body 3406 is swayed as much as possible. It is possible to suppress and smoothly rotate on the same surface.

Further, the back front decorative body 3406 includes a detection piece 3406d detected by a front back rotation position detection sensor 3410 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3401. At the extended position (storage position), the detection piece 3406d
Is detected by the back upper front rotation position detection sensor 3410.

Next, the movement of the back front decorative body 3406 in the back front movable effect unit 3400 will be described. As shown in FIG. 173 (a), the back front decorative body 3406 is in a storage position extending in the left-right direction in a normal state. In this state (storage position state), the back front decorative body 3406 is located above the liquid crystal display device 1900 and hidden behind the center accessory 2500 so that it is hardly visible from the player side.

Further, when the back front decorative body 3406 is in a normal position (storage position), the drive rotating body 340 is driven.
No. 4 crank pin 3404b is located at the lowest position (bottom dead center). In this state, a rotational moment is generated by the load on the back front decorative body 3406 to rotate the back front front decorative body 3406 in the counterclockwise direction about the rotation shaft 3406b when viewed from the front. Thus, a force is applied to raise the link member 3405 via the transmission pin 3406a. However, since the crank pin 3404b inserted into the first slit 3405a of the link member 3405 is located at the bottom dead center, the crank pin 340
Even if an upward force is applied to 4b, the transmission rotator 3404 does not rotate, and the back upper front decorative body 3406 continues to maintain the retracted position against the rotational moment.

When the back front decorative body 3406 is in the retracted position, the drive gear 3403 is driven to rotate in a predetermined direction (in this example, counterclockwise in the front view) by the front front drive motor 3402. The drive rotator 3404 is rotated in the clockwise direction by the gear portion 3404a engaged with the crankshaft, and the crank pin 3404b is revolved in the clockwise direction from the position of the bottom dead center. When the crankpin 3404b revolves, the crankpin 3404b rises, and the link member 3405 also rises as the crankpin 3404b rises. When the link member 3405 is lifted, the transmission pin 3406a of the back front decorative body 3406 inserted into the second slit 3405c of the link member 3405 is lifted, and the back front decorative body 3406 is lifted by the lift of the transmission pin 3406a. Rotating shaft 3406b
Will be turned counterclockwise as viewed from the front.

When the back front decorative body 3406 rotates counterclockwise, the front end side of the back front decorative body 3406 moves downward, and the front end side of the back front decorative body 3406 moves to the liquid crystal display device 19.
It descends to the front side of 00 and becomes visible from the player side. Then, when the crank pin 3404b of the drive rotator 3404 reaches the uppermost top dead center by the back front drive motor 3402, the rotation drive of the back front drive motor 3402 stops and the rise of the link member 3405 stops. At the same time, the rotation of the front back decorative body 3406 is also stopped.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 173 (b), when the crankpin 3404b is revolved to the top dead center, the back front decorative body 3406 is moved about 90 in the counterclockwise direction from the retracted position.
It is in a state where it has been rotated (state of standby position).

In the case where the back front decorative body 3406 is returned from the appearance position where the distal end side is located below the proximal end side to the storage position where the proximal end side and the distal end side are substantially at the same height. By rotating the back front drive unit 3402 in the direction opposite to the above, the drive rotator 340 is driven.
The link member 3405 can be lowered via the fourth crank pin 3404b, and the lower and upper front decorative body 3406 is rotated in the clockwise direction around the rotation shaft 3406b by the lowering of the link member 3405. Thus, it can be returned to the storage position.

[2-12. Relationship between the front-back movable production unit and the rear-upper movement production unit]
Next, the relationship between the back and front movable effect unit 3400 and the back and rear movable effect unit 3200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 174 and 175. FIG. 174 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the back-up front movable effect unit and the back-up rear movable effect unit in the back unit.
FIG. 174 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the back-up front movable effect unit and the back-up / down movable effect unit subsequent to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 174 and the like, the relationship between the back-front movable movable effect unit 3400 and the rear-back movable movable effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 is as follows. The rear upper front decorative body 3406 of the back upper front movable effect unit 3400, the upper arm unit 3300 (upper arm decorative body 3304) and the forearm unit 3350 (forearm decorative body) of the rear upper rear movable effect unit 3200. 3352
Are formed in substantially the same size. This upper arm unit 3300 (upper arm decoration 3304
) And the forearm unit 3350 (the forearm decorative body 3352) are in a normal state as shown in FIG.
The storage position shown in FIG.

Also, the back upper front movable effect unit 3400 and the rear upper rear effect unit 3200 are in the normal state (the back upper front decorative body 3406, the upper arm decorative body 3304, and the forearm decorative body 3352 are in the storage position, FIG. ))), The upper arm decorative body 3304 is provided behind the back upper front decorative body 3406.
And the forearm decoration 3352 are almost hidden, and the upper forearm 3304 and the forearm decoration are hidden behind the back upper front decoration 3406 and the center accessory 2500 located above the liquid crystal display device 1900. The body 3352 is hardly visible from the player side. Also,
In this normal state, the lock pin 3315 of the forearm unit 3300 in the rear upper movable effect unit 3200 is connected to the unit base 340 in the rear upper movable effect unit 3400.
1 is in contact with the locking piece 3401e, and the downward movement is restricted (locked).

From this normal state, the arm slide unit 3 in the back-and-back movable production unit 3200
The arm slide drive motor 3219 210 is driven to slide the arm unit 3250 leftward in a front view, and the lock pin 3315 of the upper arm unit 3300 in the arm unit 3250 is moved to the unit base 3401 in the rear upper movable effect unit 3400. Is moved to a position on the left side of the locking piece 3401e (see FIG. 174 (b)). As a result, the lock pin 3315 can move downward, and the lock is released.

Subsequently, the back front front drive motor 3402 of the back top front movable effect unit 3400 and the upper arm drive motor 3254 of the back back top movable effect unit 3200 are driven simultaneously, and the back top front decorative body 34
06 and the upper arm decoration body 3304 (and the forearm decoration body 3352) are rotated about 90 degrees counterclockwise in front view (see FIG. 174 (c)). In the state of FIG. 174 (c), the back upper front decorative body 3406 and the upper arm decorative body 3304 are both in a standby position (rotated about 90 degrees counterclockwise from the storage position). Thus, the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 are almost hidden behind the back upper front decorative body 3406.

With the upper back forebody 3406 and the forearm ornament 3304 rotated to the standby position, the upper arm drive motor 3254 rotates the upper arm ornament 3304 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the forearm drive motor 3307 The forearm decorative body 3352 is rotated in the clockwise direction (see FIG. 175 (d)). As a result, the base end side of the upper arm decorative body 3304 is the back upper front decorative body 340.
6, the forearm decorative body 3352 is rotated so that the front end side is away from the upper arm decorative body 3304 from the state where the forearm decorative body 3352 overlaps the upper arm decorative body 3304, and the upper arm decorative body 3304 is moved from the rear side of the back upper front decorative body 3406. And a part of forearm decoration 3352 appears.

In this state, when the arm unit 3250 is moved leftward in front view by the arm slide drive motor 3219 of the arm slide unit 3210, the front end side of the forearm unit 3352 hidden behind the back upper front decorative body 3406 is It moves to the left side from the front upper decorative body 3406 and the entire forearm decorative body 3352 is in an appearance position where it can be seen from the player side (see FIG. 175 (e)).

As described above, a high-impact movable effect is obtained by combining the front-upper front decorative body 3406 of the back-upper front movable effect unit 3400 with the upper-arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 of the back-upper rear movable effect unit 3200. It is possible to entertain the player. In addition to the above, the back upper movable decorative body 3406, the upper arm decorative body 3304, and the forearm decorative body 3352 can be moved independently at various timings to perform various patterns of moving effects. Yes, you can get tired of it.

[2-13. Moveable directing unit behind the back]
Next, the back bottom back movable production unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 176 to 184. FIG. 176 is a perspective view of the rear rear movable movable effect unit in the rear unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 177 is a perspective view of the rear lower rear movable effect unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 178 is an exploded perspective view of the rear-under-behind movable effect unit divided into the rear-under-behind decorative body unit and the lifting unit, etc., and FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled into the decoration body unit and the raising / lowering unit etc., and was seen afterwards.
Further, FIG. 180 is an exploded perspective view of the rear back and rear decoration body unit of the rear back and rear movable production unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 181 is an exploded perspective view of the back and bottom rear decoration body unit from the rear. It is a perspective view. Moreover, FIG. 182 is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of a back lower back decorative body unit. In addition, FIG.
83 is a perspective view showing a schematic configuration of the elevating unit in the rear back movable movable effect unit.
Furthermore, FIG. 184 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back-downward movable rendering unit.

The back-under-back movable effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 is disposed below the opening 3001c in the back box 3001 and in front of the back-inside movable effect unit 3100. This back-behind movable production unit 3500 includes a back-bottom post-decoration body unit 3510 having a decoration simulating a tiled roof, and the back-bottom back-decoration body unit 3510 ascending and descending in the vertical direction according to the gaming state. An elevating unit 3550 mounted in the interior 3001 and a back / rear decorative board 3501 mounted on the rear side of the back / rear decorative unit 3510 are provided. The back and back decorative board 3501 is provided with a plurality of LEDs that are turned on / off depending on the number of lottery results held by the start winning.

The rear back rear decoration unit 3510 in the rear back movable production unit 3500 extends in the left-right direction and has a first decorative body 3511 that is shaped like a roof of a building, and a first decorative body 351.
A horizontally long second decorative body 3512 arranged on the lower side of 1 and formed in a shape simulating a wall of a building, and disposed on the front side of the second decorative body 3512 and formed in a shape simulating a building's windbreak A back-bottomed rear movable decorative body 3513 (left movable body 3513L,
A right movable body 3513R), and a shallow box-shaped unit cover 3514 that supports the rear movable movable body 3513 under the back so as to be slidable in the left-right direction, and has a second decorative body 3512 attached to the front surface and opened laterally and rearward. The unit cover 3514 includes a horizontally long plate-like unit base 3515 that is closed on the rear side of the unit cover 3514 and has left and right ends attached to the left pedestal 3554 and the right pedestal 3561 of the lifting unit 3550.

The first decorative body 3511 of the back-under-back decorative body unit 3510 includes a plurality of hemispherical reserved number display portions 3511a arranged in the left-right direction at the upper end thereof, and the back-under-back rear arranged on the rear side. Light is emitted by LEDs for holding display provided on the decorative substrate 3501. The hold number display portion 3511a can display the hold number according to the number of lights.

As shown in the drawing, the second decorative body 3512 of the back-bottom rear decorative body unit 3510 is formed with a horizontally long opening 3512a at the approximate center in the left-right direction. The unit cover 3514 of the back lower back decorative body unit 3510 further extends downward from the lower left side of a rectangular portion extending in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and a motor mounting portion for mounting the back back rear opening / closing drive motor 3516. 3514a
And a long left slit 3514 formed in a lower part of a rectangular portion extending in the left-right direction on the right side of the motor mounting portion 3514a and extending in the left-right direction and arranged in the left-right direction.
b and a right slit 3514c.

The back lower back decorative body unit 3510 is attached to the left front surface of the unit cover 3514 and passes through the unit cover 3514 so that the rotation shaft extends rearward.
516, a drive gear 3517 that is fixed to the rotating shaft of the rear rear open / close drive motor 3516 and disposed between the unit cover 3514 and the unit base 3515, meshes with the drive gear 3517, and rotates to the unit cover 3514 and the unit base 3515. A first transmission gear 3518 that is supported, a second transmission gear 3519 that meshes with the first transmission gear 3518 and is rotatably supported by the unit cover 3514 and the unit base 3515, and a second transmission gear 3519.
A left pinion gear 3520 that is rotatably supported by the unit cover 3514 and the unit base 3515, and a left rack gear 3521a that meshes with the left pinion gear 3520 and extends in the left-right direction, and can be slid in the left-right direction by the unit cover 3514. And a left slider 3521 supported by.

The left slider 3521 of the rear back decorative unit 3510 includes a plate-like hanging piece 3521b extending downward from the right end of the left rack gear 3521a extending in the left-right direction and a hanging piece 352.
A unit cover 351 that extends forward from the lower end of 1b and is spaced apart in the left-right direction.
And a pair of mounting bosses 3521c that pass through the four left slits 3514b and are attached to the lower rear surface of the left movable body 3513L in the lower back movable decorative body 3513. The left slider 3521 can be slid left and right by inserting a pair of mounting bosses 3521c into the left slit 3514b of the unit cover 3514. The left slider 3521 is attached to the mounting boss 3521c of the left slider 3521. The left movable body 3513L is also slidable in the left-right direction.

The left slider 3521 has a left rack gear 3521 at the upper end of the hanging piece 3521b.
an extending portion 3521d extending in a rod shape long in the opposite direction (rightward in front view) to a, and the extending portion 35
A right transmission rack gear 3521e formed at the lower right portion of 21d and extending in the left-right direction;
And a detection piece 3521f protruding forward from the left end of 521d. Note that the left slider 3521 is urged rightward as viewed from the front by a tension spring 3531.

In addition, the back lower back decorative body unit 3510 has a right transmission rack gear 35 of the left slider 3521.
21e and a right pinion gear 3522 rotatably supported by the unit cover 3514 and the unit base 3515, and a right transmission rack gear 35 sandwiching the right pinion gear 3522.
A right slider gear 3523a that is disposed on the opposite side of 21e and has a right rack gear 3523a extending in the left-right direction that meshes with the right pinion gear 3522, and is slidably supported by the unit cover 3514 in the left-right direction. ing.

The right slider 3523 of the rear back decorative unit 3510 extends forward from the left front surface of the right rack gear 3523a extending in the left-right direction and is spaced apart in the left-right direction so as to open the right slit 3514c of the unit cover 3514. Movable decorative body 3 after penetrating and front end under back
A pair of attachment bosses 3523b attached to the lower rear surface of the right movable body 3513R at 513
It has. The right slider 3523 is slidable in the left-right direction by inserting a pair of mounting bosses 3523b into the right slit 3514c of the unit cover 3514, and is attached to the mounting boss 3523b of the right slider 3523. The right movable body 3513R is also slidable in the left-right direction.

Note that a pair of mounting bosses 3521 c and a right slider 3523 in the left slider 3521.
The pair of mounting bosses 3523b are slidably supported with respect to the left slit 3514b and the right slit 3514c of the unit cover 3514 via the slide bush 3530, respectively.

Further, the back lower back decorative body unit 3510 includes a second decorative body 3512 and a unit cover 351.
4, a translucent plate-shaped guide lens member 3524 that is arranged so that the front side thereof faces through the opening 3512 a of the second decorative body 3512, and a plurality of guide lenses that are arranged on the rear side of the guide lens member 3524. And a rear back and middle decorative board 3525 on which the LEDs are mounted. The front side of the guide lens member 3524 facing the opening 3512a of the second decorative body 3512 can be seen from the player side when hidden behind the back bottom movable movable body 3513 when the back bottom back movable decorative body 3513 is closed. There is no such thing.

Although not shown in the drawing, the guide lens member 3524 is provided with predetermined characters and decorations in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1. It can be decorated. In addition, the back and back inside decorative board 35
25, the left slider 3 is detected by detecting the detection piece 3521f of the left slider 3521.
An open / close position detection sensor 3526 for detecting the slide position of 521 (back and back movable decorative body 3513) is attached.

Further, the back lower back decorative body unit 3510 includes an auxiliary member 3527 attached to the lower front surface of each of the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R in the back lower back movable decorative body 3513,
Gear cover 3 attached to the rear side of unit cover 3514 and covering the rear surface of drive gear 3517
528 and a light guide member 3529 for guiding the light from the decoration LED mounted on the front surface side of the back bottom decorative substrate 3501 to the rear surface of the first decorative body 3511 so that the entire first decorative body 3511 is illuminated and decorated. And.

In the normal state (in the closed position), the back-under-bottom movable ornament body 351 in the back-under-bottom movable effect unit 3500 of this example is as shown in FIG. 182 (a).
The left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R are in contact with each other, and the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R have a gust of wind. In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R are each provided with the magnet arrange | positioned in the mutually attracting direction, and when it mutually contacts, it is hard to leave | separate.

In a normal state, the left rack gear 3521a and the right transmission rack gear 3521e of the left slider 3521 are meshed with the left pinion gear 3520 and the right pinion gear 3522 at a substantially left end position when viewed from the front. Further, the right rack gear 3523a of the right slider 3523 is meshed with the right pinion gear 3522 at a substantially right end position when viewed from the front.

When the drive gear 3517 is driven to rotate in a predetermined direction (in this example, a clockwise direction in the front view) by the rear back and rear opening / closing drive motor 3516 from this normal state, the first transmission gear 3518 and the second transmission gear 3519 are moved. Accordingly, the left pinion gear 3520 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the left rack gear 3521a meshed with the upper side of the left pinion gear 3520.
As a result, the left slider 3521 moves to the left.

When the left slider 3521 moves to the left in front view, the right transmission rack gear 3521e provided at the right end of the left slider 3521 also moves to the left, so the right transmission rack gear 3521
The right pinion gear 3522 whose upper side meshes with e rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. The right rack gear 3523 meshed with the lower side of the right pinion gear 3522
The right slider 3523 moves to the right by a.

Therefore, when the drive gear 3517 is rotated in a predetermined direction (clockwise direction in a front view) by the rear back and rear opening / closing drive motor 3516, the left slider 3521 is moved to the left and the right slider 3523 is moved.
Will move simultaneously in the right direction, so the left slider 3521 and the right slider 35
The left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R, which are respectively attached to 23, move in directions away from each other.

When the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R move in directions away from each other, the rear back movable decorative body 3513 is separated from the center in the left-right direction, that is, the left movable body 35.
13L and the right movable body 3513R move in directions away from each other, so that the back and bottom movable decorative body 3513 opens, and the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513 are moved.
The front side of the guide lens member 3524 disposed on the rear side of the rear back movable decorative body 3513 can be seen from between R and the rear.

Then, when the left slider 3521 and the right slider 3523 reach the left moving end and the right moving end, respectively, the driving of the back / under rear opening / closing drive motor 3516 stops and at the same time the left movable body 3513.
The movement of L and the right movable body 3513R is also stopped, and the back and rear movable decorative body 3513 is opened (see FIG. 182 (b)).

When the back-under-back movable decorative body 3513 is returned from the open position to the normal closed position, the back-under-bottom open / close drive motor 3516 is driven to rotate in the direction opposite to the above so that it can be moved to the left. The body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R can be moved toward each other, and the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R are moved until they come into contact with each other, so that the normal state can be restored. It has become.

On the other hand, the up-and-down unit 3550 in the rear back movable movable effect unit 3500 is shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 179, FIG. 183, etc., the horizontally long plate-like unit main body base 3551 attached to the back box 3001, and the ascending and descending vertically attached to the front surface of the unit main body base 3551 apart from each other in the left-right direction. A rack gear 3552, a rod-shaped lifting shaft 3553 that is disposed close to the left lifting rack gear 3552 in front view and supported by the unit main body base 3551 and extends in the vertical direction, and is supported by the lifting shaft 3553 so as to be movable in the vertical direction. Plate-like left pedestal 3554, a box-like left gear box 3555 attached to the front surface of the left pedestal 3554, and a left gear box 3555 attached to the left side of the left gear box 3555 when viewed from the front. Back / up / down drive motor 355 with a rotating shaft extending inward
6, a drive gear 3557 that is fixed to the rotation shaft of the back and forth rear elevation drive motor 3556 and disposed in the left gear box 3555, a large diameter gear 3558 a that meshes with the drive gear 3557,
And a small-diameter gear 3558 that rotates integrally with the large-diameter gear 3558a and has a smaller diameter than the large-diameter gear 3558a.
a transmission gear 3558 that is rotatably supported by the left gear box 3555 and a small-diameter gear 3558b of the transmission gear 3558, and is engaged with an elevating rack gear 3552 that is disposed on the left side when viewed from the front, by the left gear box 3555. And a left pinion gear 3559 that is rotatably supported.

In addition, the elevating unit 3550 in the back-under-back movable effect unit 3500 includes a guide support member 3560 that is attached to the front surface of the unit main body base 3551 adjacent to the right elevating rack gear 3552 in front view, and a guide support member. 3560, a right pedestal 3561 supported so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, a box-shaped right gear box 3562 attached to the front surface of the right pedestal 3561, and a guide support through the right gear box 3562. One end side (right end side in front view) is rotatably supported by the member 3560 and is slidable in the vertical direction, and the other end side (left end side in front view) is rotatably supported by the left gear box 3555 and left. A pinion gear 3559 is fixed so as to be integrally rotatable, and extends in the left-right direction. Right gear box 35 in the drive shaft 3563
And a right pinion gear 3564 which is fixed so as to be integrally rotatable within the unit 62 and meshes with the right lifting rack gear 3552.

Further, the elevating unit 3550 in the back and rear movable production unit 3500 has a shaft cover 3565 that is attached to the left pedestal 3554 and the right pedestal 3561 at both left and right ends, and covers the drive shaft 3563, and is attached to the front of the left pedestal 3554 to drive the lamp. Substrate 301
3 and the relay board 3566 for relaying the connection between the motor drive board 3015 and the back and bottom rear opening / closing drive drive motor 3516 of the back and bottom back decorative body unit 3510, the back and bottom back middle decoration board 3525, and the like.
A wiring holding member 3567 that is attached to the front of the unit main body base 3551 on the left side of the left pedestal 3554 and that can hold the wiring, and that is attached to the lower part of the wiring holding member 3567. And a raising / lowering position detection sensor 3568 (see FIG. 184) for detecting the raising / lowering position of the rear back decoration unit 3510. The lift position detection sensor 3568 can detect the lift position of the back lower back decorative body unit 3510 by detecting a detection piece 3555a (see FIG. 184) provided in the left gear box 3555. ing.

As shown in FIG. 183, the left pedestal 3554 of the lifting unit 3550 has a lifting shaft 35.
It is supported by a plurality of rollers 3569 in contact with 53 so as to be vertically movable. Further, the lifting unit 3550 is attached to the left pedestal 3554 and the right pedestal 3561 on the left and right ends of the unit base 3515 in the back lower back decorative body unit 3510, respectively.

This elevating unit 3550 is driven by a rear elevating drive motor 3556 by a drive gear 3557.
Is rotated in a predetermined direction, the left pinion gear 3559 rotates via a transmission gear 3558 that meshes with the drive gear 3557, and at the same time is arranged on the right side via a drive shaft 3563 that constitutes the rotation axis of the left pinion gear 3559. The right pinion gear 3564 also rotates in the same direction as the left pinion gear 3559. And the left pinion gear 35
59 and the right pinion gear 3564 rotate at the same time, and the left pinion gear 3559 and the right pinion gear 3564 are moved up and down by the lifting rack gear 3552 that meshes with the left pinion gear 3559 and the right pinion gear 3564, respectively, and is fixed to the unit body base 3551. Will move in the direction.

In other words, the left pinion gear 35 is driven by rotating the back-and-bottom rear elevation drive motor 3556.
The left pedestal 3554 and the right pedestal 3561 are moved in the vertical direction via the left gear box 3555 and the right gear box 3562 that rotatably support the 59 and the right pinion gear 3564, respectively. The attached back bottom decorative unit 3510 can also be moved in the vertical direction.

Next, a description will be given of the movement of the behind-the-back movable effect unit 3500. In the normal state, this back-under-back movable effect unit 3500 is in a state where the back-under-bottom post-decorative body unit 3510 is positioned below by the elevating unit 3550 and the back-under-bottom post-movable decoration body 3513 is closed ( Closed state) (see FIG. 184 (a)). In this normal state, the first decorative body 3511 and the back lower back movable decorative body 35 in the back lower back decorative body unit 3510 are provided.
Part of 13 can be seen from the player side through the frame of the center accessory 2500 (see FIG. 108 and the like).

Then, from this normal state, the entire rear lower back decorative body unit 3510 is raised from the lowered position to the raised position by rotationally driving the rear lower rear lifting drive motor 3556 (FIG. 184).
see b)). As a result, the first decorative body 3511, the second decorative body 3512, and the back lower back movable decorative body 3513 of the back lower back decorative body unit 3510 are located above the stage 2510 in the center accessory 2500 and are from the player side. Fully visible.

In the state where the back lower back decorative body unit 3510 is moved to the raised position, the back lower back movable opening / closing drive motor 3516 moves the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R of the back lower back movable decorative body 3513.
Are moved in directions away from each other to change from a closed position in contact with each other to an open position in which they are separated from each other. When the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R are in the open position apart from each other, the front surface of the guide lens member 3524 disposed on the rear side between the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R is on the player side. (See FIG. 184 (c)). In this state, the guide lens member 3524 can be illuminated and illuminated by emitting light from the LED on the back, bottom, and back decorative board 3525 disposed on the rear side of the guide lens member 3524. It is possible to suggest the arrival of a chance to the person.

In addition to the above-described movement, the back-under-bottom movable effect unit 3500 moves in the back-under back-decoration unit 3510 before the back-bottom back-decoration body unit 3510 is moved to the lifted position by the lift unit 3550. After the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R of the rear movable decorative body 3513 are changed from the closed position to the open position, the back lower back decorative body unit 3510 is moved from the lowered position to the raised position. May be.

[2-14. Front-bottom front movable production unit]
Next, the back lower front movable effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 185 to 189. FIG. 185 is a perspective view of the back-under-front movable effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 186 is a perspective view of the back-under-front movable effect unit as seen from the back. FIG. 187 is an exploded perspective view of the front-under-bottom movable effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 188 is an exploded perspective view of the back-under-front movable effect unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 189 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back bottom front movable effect unit.

The back-under-front movable effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 is disposed below the opening 3001c in the back box 3001 and is attached to the front surface of the ball guiding unit 3060. From the stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 Also, the player can see the player from the player's side through the transparent game panel 1200 at the lower position (see FIG. 109 and the like). As shown in the drawing, the back-front-front movable effect unit 3600 includes a back-bottom front left unit 3600L and a back-bottom front right unit 3600R that are respectively provided on both the left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100. The back bottom front left unit 3600L and the back bottom front right unit 3600R are formed substantially symmetrically with respect to the left-right direction.

The front-bottom front movable production unit 3600 (back-bottom front left unit 3600L and back-bottom front right unit 3600R) includes a shallow box-shaped unit base 3601 that is attached to the front surface of the ball guiding unit 3060 and is open to the front. In the 3601 box, the back front first decorative body 3602 formed in a shape imitating a lantern disposed at a position near the center in the left-right direction in the gaming area 1100, and the gaming area 1100 in the back bottom front first decorative body 3602 A back front front second decorative body 3603 that is arranged on the opposite side (outside) with respect to the center in the left-right direction and imitates a lantern and is slightly smaller than the back bottom front first decorative body 3602, and a back bottom front second decoration The body 3603 is arranged on the opposite side (outer side) of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction and imitates a lantern, and is more than the second decorative body 3603 behind the back. And around small under-formed back before the third decorative body 3604, and a.

The lower back front first decorative body 3062 of the lower back front movable effect unit 3600 extends rearward from the vicinity of the upper end on the rear surface and the rear from a position below the rotational shaft 3602a. And an operating shaft 3602b. The back lower front second decorative body 3063 includes a rotation shaft 3603a extending rearward from the vicinity of the upper end on the rear surface, and an operation shaft 3603b extending rearward from a position below the rotation shaft 3603a. I have. Further, the back lower front third decorative body 3604 includes a rotation shaft 3604a extending rearward from the vicinity of the upper end on the rear surface, and a rotation shaft 36.
And an operation shaft 3604b extending rearward from a position lower than 04a. The back lower front first decorative body 3602, the back lower front second decorative body 3603, and the back lower front third decorative body 3604
Each has a weight attached in the vicinity of the lower end.

The unit base 3601 of the front lower front movable effect unit 3600 is the front lower front first decorative body 36.
No. 02 rotating shaft 3602a is inserted, and a first bearing portion 3601a for rotatably supporting the lower back front first decorative body 3602, and a lower back front first decoration formed below the first bearing portion 3601a. Body 3
The first opening 3601b through which the operation shaft 3602b of 602 can pass and the rotation shaft 3603a of the back lower front second decorative body 3603 are inserted so as to rotatably support the lower back front third decorative body 3603. The second bearing portion 3601c, the second opening 3601d formed under the second bearing portion 3601c and through which the operating shaft 3603b of the back lower front decorative body 3603 can pass, and the back lower front third ornament. A rotation shaft 3604a of the body 3604 is inserted and a third bearing portion 3601e for rotatably supporting the lower back front third decorative body 3604; and a lower back front third formed on the lower side of the third bearing portion 3601e. A third opening 3601f through which the operating shaft 3604b of the decorative body 3604 can pass.

The first opening 3601b, the second opening 3601d, and the third rear part 3601f of the unit base 3601 are a first bearing part 3601a, a second bearing part 3601c, and a third bearing part 36.
The first opening 360 is formed so as to extend in an arc shape with the axis of 01e as the center.
In 1b, the second opening 3601d, and the third rear portion 3601f, the operating shafts 360 of the back lower front first decorative body 3602, the back lower front second decorative body 3603, and the back lower front third decorative body 3604 are provided.
2b, 3603b, 3604b can move freely. Unit base 3
601 includes a first bearing portion 3601a, a second bearing portion 3601c, and a third bearing portion 3601e.
Are provided with arc-shaped guide grooves 3601g formed on the lower front surface of the first opening 3601b, the second opening 3601d, and the third opening 3601f, respectively.

With respect to the first bearing portion 3601a, the second bearing portion 3601c, and the third bearing portion 3601e of the unit base 3601, a back lower front first decorative body 3602, a back lower front second decorative body 3603,
And each rotation shaft 3602a, 3603a, 3604a of the back bottom front third decorative body 3604 is inserted and supported so as to be rotatable via a bush 3605. Further, through the first bearing portion 3601a, the second bearing portion 3601c, and the third bearing portion 3601e of the unit base 3601, the back bottom front first decorative body 3602, the back bottom front second decorative body 3603, and the back bottom front third Each rotation shaft 3602a, 3603a, 3604a of the decorative body 3604 extends to the rear side of the unit base 3601. Further, the first opening 3601b and the second opening 360 of the unit base 3601.
Through the 1d and third rear part 3601f, the operation shafts 3602b, 3603b, 360 of the back lower front first decorative body 3602, the back lower front second decorative body 3603, and the back lower front third decorative body 3604 are provided.
4b extends to the rear side of the unit base 3601.

In addition, the back lower front movable effect unit 3600 has operation shafts 3602b and 3603 on one end side of the front lower front first decorative body 3602, the back lower front second decorative body 3603, and the back lower front third decorative body 3604.
b, 3604b, and a projection 3606a to be inserted into each corresponding guide groove 3601g of the unit base 3601 on the other end side.
Rotation restricting members 3606 are provided that are respectively attached to the rear side of the back lower front second decorative body 3603 and the back lower front third decorative body 3604. The rotation restricting member 3606 is provided on the unit base 360.
The back lower front first decorative body 3602 is formed by a protrusion 3606a inserted into one guide groove 3601g.
The back lower front second decorative body 3603 and the back lower front third decorative body 3604 are each provided with a guide groove 3601g.
The rotation range can be regulated so as not to rotate beyond this range.

The back lower front movable effect unit 3600 is disposed on the rear side of the unit base 3601, and the back lower front first decorative body 3602, the back lower front second decorative body 3603, and the back lower front third decorative body 360.
Rotating shaft 3602a, 3603a, 3604a and operating shaft 3602b, 3603b in FIG.
, 3604b and the rotation shafts 3602a, 3603a, 3604, respectively.
Crank pins 3607a, 3608a, 3 extending backward from positions different from the axis of a
A first crank member 3607, a second crank member 3608, and a third crank member 3609 having 609a are provided. In the present example, the crank pins 3607a and 3609a of the first crank member 3607 and the third crank member 3609 are arranged in the back lower front first decorative body 360.
2 and the operation shafts 3602b and 3604b of the back bottom front third decorative body 3604, and the crank pin 3608a of the second crank member 3608 is connected to the operation shaft 3603b of the back bottom front second decorative body 3603. On the other hand, it is arranged at a position on the opposite side across the rotation shaft 3603a.

Furthermore, the front-bottom front movable production unit 3600 can be slid left and right in a front view,
First crank member 3607, second crank member 3608, and third crank member 3609
Each of the crank pins 3607a, 3608a, 3609a includes a slider 3610 having a transmission portion 3610a into which the crank pins 3607a, 3608a, 3609a are inserted in a loosely fitted state, and a back-under front drive solenoid 3611 that drives the slider 3610 to move in the left-right direction. This back bottom front drive solenoid 3611
By sliding the slider 3610 in the left-right direction, the first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, and the crank pins 3607a, 3608a, 3609a inserted in the transmission portion 3610a of the slider 3610 are moved. The first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, and the third crank member 3609 can be rotated around the axis of the rotation shafts 3602a, 3603a, 3604a by moving in the left-right direction. By rotating the second crank member 3608 and the third crank member 3609, the back lower front first decorative body 3602, the back lower front second decorative body 3603,
And the back lower front third decorative body 3604 can be rotated.

In addition, the lower back front movable effect unit 3600 is disposed between the first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, the third crank member 3609 and the slider 3610 and attached to the rear side of the unit base 3601. Crank pins 3607a and 3608 of the first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, and the third crank member 3609
a, 3609 having an opening 3612a through which the slider 3610 can pass, and a plate-like slide base 3612 that supports the slider 3610 in the left-right direction; and a slider 3610 and a back-under front drive solenoid 3611 that are attached to the rear side of the slide base 3612 Unit cover 361 covering the rear side
3 is provided.

In addition, the lower back front movable effect unit 3600 is disposed between the unit base 3601 and the slide base 3612, is attached to the rear side of the unit base 3601, and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side. A substrate 3614 is provided. In this example, the unit base 3601, the back lower front first decorative body 3602, the back lower front second decorative body 3603, and the back lower front third decorative body 3604 are formed so as to have translucency. , Back bottom front decorative board 36
By appropriately emitting 14 LEDs, the back lower front first decorative body 3602 and the back lower front second decorative body 3
603, the back bottom front third decorative body 3604, and the like can be decorated with light emission.

Next, the movement of the front back front movable effect unit 3600 will be described. As shown in FIG. 189 (a), the back-under-front movable drive unit 3600 is in a normal state (a state where power is not supplied to the back-under-front drive solenoid 3611). The coil spring (not shown) is in a state of being advanced (protruded) toward the center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 when viewed from the front. Although not shown in detail, the second front decorative body 360
3 is in a state of being arranged on the rear side of the back lower front first decorative body 3602 and the back lower front third decorative body 3604.

In this normal state, when the lower back front drive solenoid 3611 is driven to move the plunger backward (moving away from the center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction), the slider 3610 connected to the tip of the plunger is also the same as the plunger. It will slide a predetermined amount in the direction.
When the slider 3610 slides, the crank pins 3607a, 3608a, and 3609a of the first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, and the third crank member 3609 inserted into the transmission portion 3610a of the slider 3610 are transferred to the transmission portion 3610a. Accordingly, the first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, and the third crank member 3609 are pushed in the same direction as the sliding direction of the slider 3610.
It will rotate around the axis of 02a, 3603a, 3604a.

By the way, the crank pins 3607a, 3607 of the first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, and the third crank member 3609 in the back-under-front movable effect unit 3600.
The first crank member 3607 and the third crank member 3609 are disposed below the rotation shafts 3602a and 3604a, whereas the second crank member 3608 is disposed above the rotation shaft 3603a. Even if each crank pin 3607a, 3608a, 3609a is moved in the same direction by the slider 3610,
Only the second crank member 3608, the first crank member 3607 and the third crank member 360
9 is rotated in the opposite direction.

Then, the lower back connected to the first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, and the third crank member 3609 by the rotation of the first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, and the third crank member 3609, respectively. The front first decorative body 3602, the back lower front second decorative body 3603, and the back lower front third decorative body 3604 rotate. That is, when the back-bottom front drive solenoid 3611 is driven to slide the slider 3610, the back-bottom front first decorative body 3602 and the back-bottom front third decorative body 3604 rotate in the same direction, and at the same time, the back-bottom front front The two decorative bodies 3603 are configured to rotate in the opposite direction to the back lower front first decorative body 3602 and the back lower front third decorative body 3604 (see FIG. 189 (b)).

When the drive of the lower back front drive solenoid 3611 is released, the plunger of the lower back front drive solenoid 3611 is moved forward by the biasing force of a coil spring (not shown), and the slider 3610 is also moved to the normal position along with the movement of the plunger. The first crank member 3 is moved
607, the second crank member 3608, and the third crank member 3609 are rotated in the opposite direction to the back lower front first decorative body 3602 and the back lower front third decorative body 3604, so that the back lower front first The decorative body 3602, the back lower front second decorative body 3603, and the back lower front third decorative body 3604 rotate in the opposite direction to the above and return to the normal state.

Accordingly, the back bottom front first decorative body 3602, the back bottom front second decorative body 3603, and the back bottom front third decorative body 3604 can be rotated by the back bottom front drive solenoid 3611. By sliding the slider 3610 back and forth in the left-right direction by the drive solenoid 3611, the back lower front first decorative body 3602, the back lower front second decorative body 3603, and the back lower front third decorative body are driven by the back lower front drive solenoid 3611. 3604 can be swung freely, and the player's interest can be attracted.

In addition, the back lower front second decorative body 3603 disposed between the back lower front first decorative body 3602 and the back lower front third decorative body 3604 is the back lower front first decorative body 3602 and the back lower front third decorative body 3604. Since it rotates in the opposite direction to the decorative body 3604, the back lower front first decorative body 3602 and the back lower front second decorative body 36 are provided to the player.
03, and the back lower front third decorative body 360 can be given an illusion that the back lower front first decorative body 3602, the back lower front second decorative body 3603, and the back lower front third decorative body. The movement of 3604 can be enjoyed.

[2-15. Back left movable production unit]
Next, the back left movable effect unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 is mainly shown in FIG.
This will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 194. FIG. 190 is a perspective view showing the back left movable effect unit 3700 in the back unit. FIG. 191 is an exploded perspective view of the rear left movable effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 192 is an exploded perspective view of the rear left movable effect unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 193 is an explanatory view showing the movement of one movable unit in the back left movable effect unit, and FIG. 194 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the back left movable effect unit.

The back left movable effect unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 is arranged on the left side of the opening 3001c of the back box 3000 and in front of the back middle movable effect unit 3100. The back left movable effect unit 3700 includes a unit base 3701 attached to the left side of the opening 3001c on the front side of the back middle movable effect unit 3100 in the back box 3001.
Three movable units 3710 (a rear upper left movable unit 3710A, a rear left middle movable unit 3710B, and a rear lower left movable unit 3710C) mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3701 in the vertical direction are disposed on the front side of the movable unit 3710. A plate-like decorative base 3702 attached to the unit base 3701 and having translucency, and a decorative base 370
2 is mounted on the front side of the back left decorative board 3703 with a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face, and is a shallow box-like light-transmitting cover that covers the front face of the back left decorative board 3703 and is attached to the decorative base 3702 with the rear side open. Back left decorative member 3704, back left decorative member 3704 and decorative base 3
And a side decoration board 3705 on which a plurality of LEDs that are arranged along the side surface on the right side of the front view 702 and can emit light in the right direction are mounted.

The back left movable effect unit 3700 of this example can emit the LED on the back left decorative substrate 3703 to emit light in a planar shape. The back left decorative member 3704 of the back left movable effect unit 3700 is not shown in detail, but is arranged behind the left area of the center accessory 2500 in a front view in the game area 1100. The game area 110 is obtained by causing the back left decorative member 3704 to emit light in a planar shape.
A pachinko machine 1 that can brighten and decorate the corresponding part of the decorative seal 1102 attached to the gaming panel 1200 (panel board 1210) that partitions the rear end of 0 and makes the inside of the gaming area 1100 brighter and more conspicuous. Can be done.

The unit base 3701 of the back left movable effect unit 3700 has three first shaft portions 3701a extending from the right end in the front view to the front and spaced apart in the vertical direction, and substantially the same as the first shaft portions 3701a. Three second shaft portions 3701b disposed at a height and extending forward from a position slightly to the right from the left end, and three solenoid mounting portions 3701c disposed at the upper right of each second shaft portion 3701b are provided. . The unit base 3701 is provided with a mounting boss extending forward for mounting the decoration base 3702.

The three movable units 3710 of the back left movable effect unit 3700 are configured by substantially the same mechanism. The movable unit 3710 includes a back left drive solenoid 3711 that is attached to each of the three solenoid attachment portions 3701c of the unit base 3701 so that the plunger protrudes downward, and a connecting portion to which the tip of the plunger in the back left drive solenoid 3711 is connected. 3712a and the collar part 37 extended in the left-right direction with the connecting part 3712a in the middle
12b, a shaft hole 3712c formed on the left end side in front view of the flange portion 3712b and into which the second shaft portion 3701b of the unit base 3701 is rotatably inserted, and the shaft hole 3712c at an end portion on the opposite side of the flange portion 3712b. A movable lever 3712 having an elongated engagement hole 3712d formed and extending in the same direction as the flange 3712b, and an engagement pin 3713a inserted into the engagement hole 3712d of the movable lever 3712 so as to be rotatable and slidable. The first flange 3713b extending rightward in front view from one end of the engagement pin 3713a and the first shaft 3701a of the unit base 3701 formed on the right end of the first flange 3713b are rotatably inserted. Rotating hole 3713c
And an actuating lever 3713 having a second flange 3713d extending longer than the first flange 3713b on the upper side in a direction substantially perpendicular to the direction in which the first flange 3713b extends from the rotation hole 3713c.

As shown in the figure, the movable lever 3712 in the movable unit 3710 has a connecting portion 3712a connected to the plunger of the back left drive solenoid 3711, and a shaft hole 3712c on the proximal end side.
The distance between the engagement hole 3712d on the distal end side and the coupling portion 3712a is longer than the distance between the shaft hole 3712c and the coupling portion 3712a (in this example, 4 to 6 times larger). Length) is formed. Thereby, the moving distance of the engagement hole 3712d in the movable lever 3712 is increased with respect to the advance / retreat distance of the plunger of the back left drive solenoid 3711.

In addition, the movable unit 3710 of the back left movable effect unit 3700 includes an operation lever 3713.
The back left first movable decorative body 3714, which is rotatably supported at the tip of the second collar portion 3713d and has a three-dimensional decoration on the front side, and the back left first movable decorative body 3714 and the second collar portion 3713d A back left second movable decorative body 3715 disposed in between and rotatably supported at a substantially central position in the longitudinal direction of the second collar portion 3713d and provided with a three-dimensional decoration on the front surface side; Body 37
A rear left third movable decorative body 3716 which is arranged on the rear side of 15 and is attached to the front surface of the second flange 3713d and has a three-dimensional decoration on the front surface side; And a rear left movable decorative board 3717 mounted on the rear side of the second flange 3713d and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face.

In this example, the operating lever 3713, the back left first movable decorative body 3714, the back left second movable decorative body 3
715 and the back left third movable decorative body 3716 are formed so as to have translucency, and the back left first movable decorative body 3714 is emitted by causing the LED of the back left movable decorative substrate 3717 to emit light.
The back left second movable decorative body 3715 and the back left third movable decorative body 3716 can be decorated with light emission.

Next, the movement of the back left movable effect unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 will be described. As shown in FIG. 193 (a), the back left movable effect unit 3700 has a plunger of each back left drive solenoid 3711 projecting downward in three movable units 3710 arranged in the vertical direction, as shown in FIG. The distal end side of the movable lever 3712 (engagement hole 3712
d side) is positioned below the base end side (shaft hole 3712c side). And
The distal end side (engagement pin 3713a side) of the first flange 3713b of the operating lever 3713 is connected to the rotation hole 371 via the engagement pin 3713a inserted into the engagement hole 3712d of the movable lever 3712.
3c (first shaft portion 3701a) is positioned below, and the second flange portion 3713d extending upward from the rotation hole 3713c is positioned on the left side of the rotation hole 3713c in front view. .

As a result, in a normal state, the second flange 3713d of the operating lever 3713 has the rotation hole 37.
13c (first shaft portion 3701a) is located on the left side, so the back left first movable decorative body 3714, the back left second movable decorative body 3715, and the back left third supported by the second collar portion 3713d. The movable decorative body 3716 is also located on the left side as a whole. Therefore, under normal conditions,
Back left first movable decorative body 3714, back left second movable decorative body 3715, and back left third movable decorative body 3
Most of 716 is located on the left side of the right end of the unit base 3701 and is hardly visible from the player side (see FIG. 194 (a) and the like).

When the back left drive solenoid 3711 is driven from this normal state to move the plunger upward, the movable lever 3712 rotates counterclockwise around the shaft hole 3712c as viewed from the front, and engages on the tip side. The hole 3712d rises and moves to a position higher than the shaft hole 3712c. When the engagement hole 3712d of the movable lever 3712 is raised, the engagement pin 3713a of the operating lever 3713 inserted into the engagement hole 3712d is also raised.
With the rise of 13a, the entire operation lever 3713 is rotated in the clockwise direction in front view. As a result, the second collar 3713d of the operating lever 3713 moves to a position on the right side of the rotation hole 3713c. The movable decorative body 3715 and the back left third movable decorative body 3716 also move to the right (see FIG. 193 (b)).

By driving the back left drive solenoid 3711, the operating lever 3713 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the back left first movable decorative body 3714, the back left second movable decorative body 3715, and the back left third movable decorative body. When 3716 moves to the right side, most of the back left first movable decorative body 3714, the back left second movable decorative body 3715, and the back left third movable decorative body 3716 are positioned on the right side of the right end of the unit base, It appears on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and can be clearly seen from the player side (see FIG. 194 (b)).

If the back left first movable decorative body 3714, the back left second movable decorative body 3715, and the back left third movable decorative body 3716 are moved by the rotation of the operating lever 3713, the back left first movable decorative body 3 is moved.
714, since the inertial force acts on the back left second movable decorative body 3715 and the back left third movable decorative body 3716, when the operation lever 3713 starts rotating or stops rotating, The back left first movable decorative body 3714 and the back left second movable decorative body 371 supported so as to be rotatable.
5 and oscillate.

When the back left drive solenoid 3711 stops driving (energization) with the back left first movable decorative body 3714, the back left second movable decorative body 3715, and the back left third movable decorative body 3716 appearing, The movable lever 3712 is rotated by gravity so that the tip side (engagement hole 3712d side) moves downward, and the plunger of the back left drive solenoid 3711 returns to the normal state protruding downward.

[2-16. Liquid crystal display device]
Next, the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4 of this example will be described. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 in the back unit 3000, and can display a predetermined effect image according to the gaming state. As shown in FIG. 139 and the like, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a fixed piece 1902 that protrudes outward from the left and right sides, and is attached to the back box 3001 via the fixed piece 1902.

Further, as shown in FIG. 112 and the like, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a peripheral control board box 1910 that houses a peripheral control unit 4140, a liquid crystal control unit 4150 (see FIG. 195), and the like, and a lower part of the peripheral control board box 1910. And a volume 1912 extending rearward. By rotating the volume 1912 in an appropriate direction, the volume output from each speaker 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5, the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the like can be adjusted. It has become.

Further, the liquid crystal display device 1900 uses a light-brightness white LED as a backlight.

[3. Various substrates]
Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 195 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a group of main boards 4000 and a group of peripheral control boards 4010, and various controls are shared by these two groups. A group of main boards 4000 includes a main control board 4100 for controlling game operations (game progress),
And a payout control board 4110 for controlling payout of game balls and the like. Also,
A group of peripheral control boards 4010 includes a peripheral control unit 4140 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 4100, and an effect image on the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on commands from the peripheral control unit 4140. And a liquid crystal control unit 4150 for controlling the display.

[3-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 195, the main control board 4100 for controlling the progress of the game is a main control MPU 4100a which is a microprocessor having a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device), a main control input circuit 4100f to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid for driving various solenoids A drive circuit 4100g, and a RAM clear switch 4100c for completely erasing information stored in a RAM 4100e built in the main control MPU 4100a (hereinafter also referred to as “main control built-in RAM 4100e”). . The main control MPU 4100a
In addition to the built-in ROM 4100d (hereinafter also referred to as “main control built-in ROM 4100d”) and the main control built-in RAM 4100e, a watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like are also built-in. Has been.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 includes a first start port sensor 3022 for detecting a game ball received in the first start port 2101 and a second start port sensor for detecting a game ball received in the second start port 2102. 2127 and the detection signal from the second count sensor 2556 are input via the main control I / O port 4100b, respectively, or the magnetic sensor attached to the gate sensor 2402, the general winning opening sensor 3071, the count sensor 2128, and the back unit 3000. The detection signal from the detection sensor 3072 is transmitted to the panel relay board 3 attached to the game board 4.
012 and the main control I / O port 4100b.

The main control MPU 4100a determines the main control I / O port 410 based on these detection signals.
By outputting a control signal from 0b to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g, a drive signal is output to the start port solenoid 2121, the attack solenoid 2124, and the second attack solenoid 2561 via the panel relay board 3012, or the main control I / O port 410
0b, panel relay board 3012, back bottom back decoration board 33 of back bottom movable production unit 3500
501 and the function display board 1191, the first special symbol display 1185, the second special symbol display 1186, the first special symbol storage display 1184, the second special symbol storage display 1187,
A drive signal is output to the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the game state display 1183, and the round display 1190.

In the present embodiment, the first start port sensor 3022, the second start port sensor 2127, the gate sensor 2402, the count sensor 2128, and the second count sensor 2556 include
While a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used, the general prize opening sensor 307 is used.
1, a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used. this is,
The game balls frequently enter the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102, and the gate unit 240
1 frequently passes, the detection of the game ball by the first start port sensor 3022, the second start port sensor 2127, and the gate sensor 2402 also frequently occurs. Therefore, long-life proximity switches are used for the first start port sensor 3022, the second start port sensor 2127, and the gate sensor 2402. In addition, when a big hit gaming state that is advantageous for the player occurs, the game winning ball 2103 and the second game winning port 2552 are opened and game balls frequently enter,
The detection of game balls by the count sensor 2128 and the second count sensor 2556 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch having a long life is also used for the count sensor 2128 and the second count sensor 2556. On the other hand, the general winning opening 21 where game balls do not enter frequently.
In 04, detection by the general winning a prize opening sensor 3071 does not occur frequently. For this reason, the general winning opening sensor 3071 uses a mechanical switch that has a shorter life than the proximity switch.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various information related to games (game information) and various commands related to payouts to the payout control board 4110, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110. Or Furthermore, the main control MPU
The 4100a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010 described later via the main control I / O port 4100b (main control). The boards between the board 4100 and the peripheral control unit 4140 are electrically connected by a harness (not shown). The main control MPU 4100
Although a detailed description thereof will be described later, a receives the various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110, and shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 4140.

The main control board 4100 is supplied with various voltages from a power supply board 851 as described in detail later. The power supply board 851 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. BC0 (FIG. 169)
See). The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 4100a to store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM 4100e in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM 4100e when the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c is also output to the payout control board 4110.

The main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors the drop of various voltages supplied from the power supply board 851 and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning voltage when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. In addition to being input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I / O port 4100b, the power failure notice signal is also transmitted to the payout control board 4110 and the like via a harness (not shown).

[3-2. Dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 195, the payout control board 4110 for controlling the payout of game balls and the like controls the payout control unit 4111 for performing various controls relating to payout, and the launching control by the launching solenoid 654, and also sends the ball by the balling solenoid 585. A launch control unit 4120 that performs control, an error LED display 4130 that displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and an error LED display 41
30, an error release switch 860a for releasing the error displayed on the ball 30 and the ball in the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail 731 and the prize ball device 740 are discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to remove the ball. A ball removal switch 860b for starting the operation.

[3-2A. Dispensing control unit]
A payout control unit 4111 for performing various controls related to payout on the payout control board 4110 is as follows.
As shown in FIG. 195, a payout control MPU 411 which is a microprocessor incorporating a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like.
1a, a payout control I / O port 4111b as an I / O device, and a payout control MPU4
External watchdog timer 411 for monitoring whether or not 111a is operating normally
1c (hereinafter referred to as “external WDT 4111c”), a payout motor drive circuit 4111d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740, and detection signals from various detection switches relating to payout are input. A payout control input circuit 4111e. The payout control MPU 4111a has a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “the payout control built-in R”).
OM ". ) And RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”), functions and the like are also built in to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU 4111a of the payout control unit 4111 receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 4100 and various commands related to payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port 4111b. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c from 4100 being input via the payout control I / O port 4111b, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 is input, or the ball break switch 750 Detection signals from the counting sensor 751 and the rotation angle sensor 752 are input via the prize ball relay board 754.

A ball break switch 750 that detects the presence or absence of a game ball in a supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740, and a prize ball passage 7 formed in the base unit 741.
A detection signal from a counting sensor 751 that detects a game ball flowing down in 41c is first input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the prize ball relay board 754 of the prize ball device 740, and the payout control I / O port 4111b is input. To the payout control MPU 4111a. The detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a formed on the rotation detection board 749 of the prize ball device 740 is first sent via the sensor board 753 of the prize ball device 740 and the prize ball relay board 754. Input to the payout control input circuit 4111e and payout control I / O port 41
It is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via 11b.

The door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 and the outer frame 2
A detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 is first input to the payout control input circuit 4111e and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 for detecting whether or not the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full of the stored game balls is first sent to the handle device relay board 192 and the main side relay terminal. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the plate 880 and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

The payout control MPU 4111a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 to the payout motor 744 via the payout control I / O 4120b and the prize ball relay board 754, and displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as an error LED. A signal to be displayed on the machine 4130 is output to the error LED display 4130 via the payout control I / O port 4111b, or a command for indicating the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is sent to the payout control I / O port 4111b. Or the number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 via the payout control I / O port 4111b. The external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in the game hall (hall). This hall computer monitors the player's game by ascertaining the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko gaming machine 1, game information of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the like.

The error LED display 4130 is a segment display and displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and graphics. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 4130 include the following. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is notified that it is “normal”, and when the numeral “0” is displayed, it indicates that it is “connection abnormality” (specifically, with the main control board 4100). Notification that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 4110 and the board, and when the number “1” is displayed, it is “out of ball” (specifically, out of ball) Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, a notification is made that there is no game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740, and the number “
When “2” is displayed, it indicates that the ball is “spherical” (specifically, the supply passage 7 formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740 based on the detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752).
41) that the payout rotating body 748 and the game ball are meshed in the vicinity of the entrance at the entrance of the distribution space 741b communicating with 41a), and the number “3” is notified.
Is displayed, it means that it is “counting switch error” (specifically, the counting sensor 7
51 indicates that a malfunction has occurred in the counting sensor 751), and when the number “5” is displayed, it indicates a “retry error” (specifically, a retry of the payout operation). That the number of times has reached a preset upper limit value), and when the number “6” is displayed, it is “full tank” (specifically, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 is displayed). Based on the fact that the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the stored game balls), and when the number “7” is displayed, it indicates that “CR is not connected” (payout control board 4110). To the CR unit 6 that the electrical connection has been cut off), and when the number “9” is displayed, it is “in stock” (specifically, it is still paid) Sphere number by non game ball is notifying) has reached the predetermined number of balls.

The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending switch 365a and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return switch 365b are first sent via the frequency display board 365, the main relay terminal board 880, and the CR unit connection terminal board 874. Are input to the CR unit 6. The CR unit 6 sends a signal specifying the number of game balls to be lent out in accordance with the ball lending request signal.
It transmits to the dispensing control board 4110 via the CR unit connection terminal board 874 in a serial manner,
This signal is received by the payout control I / O port 4111b and input to the payout control MPU 4111a. The CR unit 6 updates the remaining degree of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls, and the remaining degree is displayed as a remaining number display 365c.
Are output to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the main relay terminal plate 880, and the frequency display plate 365, and this signal is input to the remaining frequency display 365c.

[3-2B. Launch control unit]
A launch control unit 4120 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 654 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 585 is, as shown in FIG. 195, a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input. 4120a, an oscillation circuit 4120b that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a firing timing control circuit 4120c that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 based on the clock signal, and this A firing solenoid driving circuit 4120d that outputs a driving signal to the firing solenoid 654 based on the firing reference pulse, and a ball feeding solenoid driving circuit 4120e that outputs a driving signal to the ball feeding solenoid 585 based on the firing reference pulse are provided. . Based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit 4120b, the firing timing control circuit 4120c generates a firing reference pulse so that 100 gaming balls are launched toward the gaming area 1100 per minute and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d. At the same time, a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e.

A touch sensor 516 that detects whether a palm or a finger is touching the front 506 of the rotating handle body, and a launch stop switch 518 that detects whether or not the game ball is forcibly stopped according to the player's will. The detection signal is first input to the launch control input circuit 4120a via the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal plate 880, and then input to the launch timing control circuit 4120c. CR unit 6 and CR unit connection terminal board 8
74 is electrically connected to the launch control input circuit 4120a as a CR connection signal, and is input to the launch timing control circuit 4120c. The signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball toward the game area 1100 according to the rotational position of the front of the rotary handle body 506 is first sent to the handle device relay board 19.
2 and input to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d via the main relay terminal plate 880.

The firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d emits a drive current for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the front of the rotary handle body 506 based on a signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512. When the reference pulse is input, it is output to the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120e generates a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 585 via the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the handle device relay board 192 when the ball feeding reference pulse is input. When the ball feeding member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 301 by the output and the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the constant current is obtained. Is stopped, the game ball received by the ball feeding member 584 is sent to the hitting ball launching device 650 side. Thus, the firing solenoid drive circuit 41
While the drive current output from 20d to the firing solenoid 654 is variably controlled,
The drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e to the ball feed solenoid 585 is controlled to be constant.

The power supply board 851 for supplying various voltages to the payout control board 4110 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 169) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. . With this capacitor BC1, the payout control M
The PU 4111a provides various information in the power-off process even when the power is shut off.
Can be stored in M. The stored various information is stored in the payout control built-in RA when the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated at power-on.
It is completely erased (cleared) from M.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 195, the peripheral control board 4010 includes a peripheral control unit 4140 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 4100, and a liquid crystal display device 1900 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 4140. A liquid crystal control unit 4150 for performing drawing control.

[3-3A. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 195, a peripheral control unit 4140 that performs presentation control on the peripheral control board 4010 performs a peripheral control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 4140b that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality sound performance. Sound source IC4 to perform
140c and a sound ROM 4140d in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC 4140c is stored.

The peripheral control MPU 4140a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When various commands are received from the main control board 4100, each peripheral board of the game board 4 is received based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal or gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED etc.
A game board side for transmitting drive signals from the port to the lamp drive board 3013 and the motor drive board 3015 and for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided in the game board 4 Drive data and color LED of each decorative board provided in the game board 4
A game board side drive light emission data composed of a game board light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a flashing signal, a gradation lighting signal, etc. to a back box 3001 from a serial I / O port for a game board decoration drive board Door side for transmitting to each relay board 3017, 3019, 3068, 3069, etc. attached to the rear surface, or for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5 Drive data and color LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5
Door side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a peripheral panel relay terminal board from the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive board 872, and control data (display command) indicating a screen to be transmitted to the door frame base substrate 194 via the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 or displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 from the liquid crystal control unit serial I / O port. In addition to transmitting to the control unit 4150, sound ROM
A control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from 4140d is output to the sound source IC 4140c.

Detection signals from various original position detection sensors for detecting the original positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 are relay boards 3017, 3019, 30 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001.
68, 3069, etc., are input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a. A rotation detection sensor 432 that detects the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 provided in the door frame 5.
a, 432b, and a detection signal from the pressure detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 are the door frame base substrate 194, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 8
72 to the peripheral control MPU 4140a.

In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and monitors the operation of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 based on the operation signal. doing.

The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on control data (sound commands) from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and is provided in the main body frame 3 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882. In addition, control is performed so that music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects flow from the speaker 821 and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872.
Music and effects tailored to various effects from the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5 via the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 and the door frame base substrate 194 and the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3. Control is performed so that sound flows. The peripheral control board 4010
The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume 1912 mounted on the peripheral control board box 1910 and projecting backward from the peripheral control board box 1910.

In addition to the watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”) built into the peripheral control MPU 4140a, the peripheral control unit 4140 is not shown, and an external watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external”). The peripheral control MPU 4140a uses the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT together to diagnose whether or not its system is running out of control.

The display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is performed by a serial input / output port. In this embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km (k ) BPS
second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”). On the other hand, peripheral control MPU
Each relay board 3017, 3019, 30 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 from 4140a.
68, 3069, etc., are performed by a plurality of serial input / output ports different from initial data, door frame side lighting / blinking command, game board side lighting / blinking command, movable body drive command, display command. A bit rate of 250 kbps is set.

Each relay board 3017, 3019, 3068, 3 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001.
069 and the like indicate lighting signals or flashing signals based on the received door frame side lighting / blinking command, and the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 25 provided on the door frame 5 through the peripheral relay terminal plate 882.
Each decorative board 2 provided in the game board 4 with a lighting signal or a flashing signal based on the game board side lighting / flashing command output to the LEDs 6, 286, 320, 322, 430, 432, etc.
153, 2310, 2311, 2541, 2610, 2611, 3062, 3125, 3
Or output to LEDs such as 305, 3353, 3501, 3525, 3614, 3703, 3705, and 3717. Further, each relay board 3017 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001.
, 3019, 3068, 3069, etc., a drive signal based on the received drive command of the movable body, a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5 via the peripheral relay terminal plate 882,
Each drive motor 3161, 3181, 3219, 3254, 3307 provided in the game board 4
, 3402, 3516, 3556, etc., and drive solenoids 2330, 2630, 3611
, 3711 or the like.

The peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, or in the operation unit 400 provided in the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5. Rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect a rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401, and a pressing operation unit 40 in the operation unit 400.
The detection signal from the pressure detection sensor 432c that detects the operation 5 is the peripheral relay terminal plate 882.
And the relay boards 3017, 3019, 3068, 30 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001.
69 or the like.

The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and each relay board 3017, 3019, 3068, 3069, etc. attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 and the peripheral side relay terminal. Door frame 5 through plate 882
From the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the main frame 3 or from the speakers 821 of the main body frame 3 via the relay boards 3017, 3019, 3068, 3069 and the like attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001. Control to play music and sound effects.
In this example, as described above, the side speakers arranged on the left and right sides of the lower side of the gaming window 101, the upper speakers 222 and 262 arranged on the upper side of the gaming window 101, and the lower part of the main body frame 3 are provided. An acoustic signal (for example, 2ch) is transmitted to the low-frequency speaker 821 as sound information.
By sending a stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, 2.1ch surround signal or 4.1ch surround signal to which a lower speaker 391, which will be described later, is added, a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) is presented than before. Be able to.

[3-4. LCD controller]
Next, a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that performs drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the peripheral control board 4010, as shown in FIG.
50a, liquid crystal control ROM for storing various processing programs, various commands and various data
4150b and VDP (Video Di) for controlling the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 described above.
an abbreviation of “spray processor”) 4150c, a character ROM 4150d for storing various data of a screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and this character ROM 4150d.
A character RAM 4150e to which various data stored in is transferred and copied.

The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a incorporates a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, and the like, and is based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 4140.
Drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is performed by controlling 4150c. Liquid crystal control M
When the PU 4150a is operating normally, the peripheral control unit 414 sends an operation signal to that effect.
Output to 0. The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a receives an execution signal (to be described later) from the VDP 4150c, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900, schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010, its control data (display command), and A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the screen configuration in time series, and the order of screens drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is defined. Non-resident area transfer schedule data is the character ROM 415
When various data stored in 0d are transferred to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e, non-resident area transfer data defining the order of the data is arranged in time series. As this non-resident area transfer data, screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 in accordance with the progress of the schedule data is stored in advance from the character ROM 4150d to the character RAM 4150e.
The order of transferring various data to the non-resident area is defined.

The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the top screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010 from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs it to the VDP 4150c. Extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and output to the VDP 4150c. In this way, the liquid crystal control MP
The U4150a extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b one by one from the head screen data and outputs it to the VDP 4150c.

When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is input, the VDP 4150c extracts sprite data from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data, and generates drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. The generated drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display device 1900. The VDP 4150c is a liquid crystal control MPU 41.
When the screen data from 50a is not accepted, an in-execution signal indicating that is displayed on the LCD control MP
Output to U4150a. The VDP 4150c employs a line buffer method. The “line buffer method” is a method for drawing the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display device 1900.
This is a method in which drawing data for lines is held in a line buffer, and drawing data for one line held in the line buffer is output to the liquid crystal display device 1900.

The character ROM 4150d stores a very large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. If the capacity of the character ROM 4150d increases, that is, if the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150d cannot be ignored, and the drawing speed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is affected. Therefore, in this embodiment, the character R 4150e having the fast access speed is added to the character R.
The sprite data stored in OM4150d is transferred and copied, and this character RA
Sprite data is extracted from M4150e. The sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is expanded into a bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150d in a compressed state.

Here, the “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” means the liquid crystal display device 19.
This is an image displayed as a unit of 00. For example, the liquid crystal display device 1900
When various persons are displayed on the screen, the data for drawing each person is called “sprite”. Thus, when a plurality of persons are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are
The position on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap (hereinafter referred to as “sprite superposition order”) are set and drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

Note that the sprite is configured by bonding a plurality of rectangular regions of 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, it is expressed using a total of six characters arranged in 2 × 3 horizontal, for example. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be expressed using a larger number of characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

The liquid crystal display device 1900 repeats the main scanning in which the display state for each pixel is set in one direction along the pixel and the direction crossing the one direction sequentially from left to right as viewed from the front. It is driven by the sub-scan to be performed. The liquid crystal display device 1900 includes:
When the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is input, the data is sequentially output to the pixels for one line from left to right as viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 as main scanning. When the output for one line is completed, the liquid crystal display device 1900 shifts to the line immediately below as sub-scanning. Similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As main scanning, the data are sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right as viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900.

[4. Game contents]
The game content in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 196 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the main control board. First, a functional configuration related to game effect control on the main control board 4100 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Note that a functional configuration relating to payout of game balls will be omitted. In the main control board 4100 of this example, various game controls, performance controls, and the like are realized by executing a predetermined program stored in advance in a ROM (not shown) by the main control MPU 4100a. The main control board 4100 includes a gate sensor 2.
When a detection signal of a game ball is input from 402, a normal random number generating means 4200 for generating a predetermined normal random number that becomes a lottery result for the normal symbol, and the generated normal random number are temporarily stored according to a predetermined condition. A normal symbol variation pattern stored in the ROM of the main control board 4100 is converted into a normal symbol variation pattern corresponding to a normal lottery result based on a normal random number stored in the normal symbol retention storage unit 4202 and the normal symbol retention storage unit 4202. A normal symbol change pattern selecting means 4204 selected from the table, a normal symbol display control means 4206 for variably displaying the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 1189 based on the selected normal symbol change pattern, and a normal symbol display control means 4206 The normal random number (normal lottery result) displayed on the normal symbol display 1189 is “normal hit”. The starting opening solenoid 2121 to drive the pair of movable pieces 21
Start opening / closing control means 4208 for expanding 05, and normal symbol memory number display control means 4210 for displaying the number of normal symbol random numbers stored in the normal symbol hold storage means 4202 as the stored number on the normal symbol memory display 1188. And.

The above-described normal symbol hold storage means 4202 generates a predetermined number of normal random numbers (for example, four) generated by the detection signal of the game ball from the gate sensor 2402 while the normal symbol display control means 4206 displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol. ) And the execution of the stored normal random number is suspended until the normal symbol can be displayed in a variable manner.

The main control board 4100 has a predetermined first lottery result for the first special symbol based on the detection signal detected by the first start port sensor 3022 by the start winning to the first start port 2101. A first special random number generating means 4212 for generating a special random number; a first special symbol holding storage means 4214 for temporarily storing the first special random number generated in the first special random number generating means 4212 according to a predetermined condition; Generated based on the first special lottery result based on the first special random number stored in the first special symbol storage unit 4214 and the detection signal detected by the first start port sensor 3022 by the start winning to the first start port 2101 The first special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the changed random number is selected from a predetermined special symbol variation display pattern table stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board 4100. First special symbol variation pattern selection means 4216 and the first special symbol display unit 1185 variably display the first special symbol based on the first special symbol variation pattern selection means 4216 selected by the first special symbol variation pattern selection means 4216. First special symbol display control means 4218 and first special symbol memory number to be displayed on first special symbol memory display 1184 as the number of first special random numbers stored and stored in first special symbol reservation storage means 4214 Display control means 4220.

Further, the main control board 4100 has a predetermined second lottery result for the second special symbol based on the detection signal detected by the second start port sensor 2127 by the start winning to the second start port 2102. A second special random number generating means 4222 for generating a special random number; a second special symbol holding storage means 4224 for temporarily storing the second special random number generated in the second special random number generating means 4222 according to a predetermined condition; Generated based on the second special lottery result based on the second special random number stored in the second special symbol storage unit 4224 and the detection signal detected by the second start port sensor 2127 by the start winning to the second start port 2102 The second special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the changed random number is selected from a predetermined special symbol variation display pattern table stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board 4100. Second special symbol variation pattern selection means 4226 and second special symbol display unit 1186 variably displays the second special symbol based on the second special symbol variation pattern selection means 4226 selected by second special symbol variation pattern selection means 4226. Two special symbol display control means 4
228 and second special symbol memory number display control means 4230 for displaying the number of the second special random numbers held in the second special symbol hold memory means 4224 on the second special symbol memory display 1187 as the memory number. ing.

These first special symbol storage unit 4214 and second special symbol storage unit 4224 are:
When the first and second special symbols display control means 4218 and 4228 cannot change the special symbols such as the first and second special symbols are variably displayed, the first start port sensor 3022 and the second start symbol The first special random number and the second special random number triggered by the detection signal from the mouth sensor 2127 are each stored up to a predetermined number (for example, four each), and the first stored is stored until special symbols can be displayed in a variable manner. The execution of special random numbers or second special random numbers is suspended.

The main control board 4100 receives the first special random number and the second special random number held by the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214 and the second special symbol hold storage unit 4224 as the start ports 2101 and 211, respectively.
The second special random number, that is, the second special random number, that is, the second special random number, that is, the second special random number, that is, the second special random number, that is, the second special random number, The lottery result hold related to the start port 2102 is preferentially executed (digested).

The main control board 4100 also includes a first special random number (first special lottery result) and a second special random number (stored in the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214 and the second special symbol hold storage unit 4224).
If the special lottery result based on the 2nd special lottery result) is “big hit”, a big win gaming state is generated that is advantageous to the player, and if the special lottery result is “small hit”, a small win gaming state is generated Based on an instruction from the advantageous gaming state generating means 4232, the opening / closing member 2106 or the second opening / closing member 2553 for closing the special winning opening 2103 or the second large winning opening 2552 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern. In this way, a special prize opening / closing control means 4234 for controlling the driving of the attacker solenoid 2124 or the second attacker solenoid 2561 is provided. In this example, the special winning opening opening / closing drive control means 4234, for example, drives the attacker solenoid 2124 when the special lottery result is “big hit”, and drives the second attacker solenoid 2561 when the special lottery result is “small hit”. It comes to drive.

Further, the main control board 4100 has a special lottery result based on the first special random number or the second special random number (
In accordance with the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result), there is further provided a fluctuation pattern table changing means 4236 for changing the first special symbol fluctuation pattern table and the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table. The variation pattern table changing means 4236 changes to a variation pattern table (for example, a variation pattern table in a low probability non-short-time state or a variation pattern table in a high-probability time-short state) according to the gaming state.

Furthermore, the main control board 4100 has a special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) based on the first special random number and the second special random number, the first special lottery result and the variable random number. Based on one special symbol variation pattern, the second special symbol variation pattern according to the second special lottery result and the random number, and the first special symbol memory, the second special symbol memory, etc. Command generating means 4238 for generating a command for use, and command transmitting means 4240 for transmitting the command generated by the command generating means 4238 to the peripheral control unit 4140.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is transparent when the player rotates the handle device 500 arranged at the lower right of the door frame 5. A game is started with a game ball by being driven into the upper part of the game area 1100 arranged on the front surface of the panel 1200. A game ball that has been driven into the upper portion of the game area 1100 flows down in the game area 1100 on the left or right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the strength of the game. It should be noted that the game ball driving strength can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle device 500, and the game ball can be driven harder as it is rotated in the clockwise direction. Further, in the game area 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1200 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game balls come into contact with the obstacle nails so that the game balls flow down. The speed is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movements can be enjoyed.

When the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 flows down from the approximate center in the left-right direction and reaches the peripheral wall portion 2503 of the center accessory 2500, the peripheral wall portion 250 whose left side is lowered.
3 to the left area of the center object 2500. And center actor 2
When a game ball flowing down the left side of 500 enters the gate part 2401 of the gate member 2400 disposed on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and is detected by the gate sensor 2402,
Based on the detection signal, the main control board 4100 generates a normal random number as a normal lottery result by the normal random number generation means 4200. Based on the ordinary random number, the function display unit 11
The normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1189 at 80 is variably displayed (the normal symbol indicator 1189 consisting of one LED emits light alternately in red, green and orange) for a predetermined time (for example, between 2 seconds and 30 seconds). ) The normal symbol extracted after the passage and based on the normal random number (normal lottery result) is stopped and displayed (the normal symbol display 1189 emits light in either red or green). The normal symbol fluctuation display is performed based on the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selected from a predetermined normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection table in the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection means 4204.

Specifically, if the selected random number is a “normal hit” random number, the normal symbol indicating the winning is stopped (the normal symbol indicator 1189 emits green light), and the selected normal random number is a “normal lose” random number. In the case of, stop display is performed with a normal symbol suggesting a loss (the normal symbol indicator 1189 emits red light). Then, when the normal symbol indicating the hit is stopped and displayed, the pair of movable pieces 2105 for closing the second start port 2102 are expanded for a predetermined time (for example, between 0.3 seconds and 3 seconds), and the first A game ball can be awarded to the second starting port 2102.

Note that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the expansion time of the movable piece 2105 at the second start port 2102 may be changed according to the gaming state. For example, when controlled in a non-time-short state Compared to the case where the time-short state is controlled, the fluctuation time may be changed to a short time or the expansion time may be changed to a long time. Specifically, for example, the normal symbol variation pattern table for selecting the normal symbol variation pattern in the normal symbol variation pattern selection means 4204 can be easily changed by replacing the table with a different table for each gaming state. it can.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, an area where a game ball can flow down from the center in the left-right direction is provided on the upper side of the center accessory 2500, but the right side from the center extends along the outer periphery of the game area 1100. After entering the second game area 2551 disposed on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 through the arcuate passage extending downward, the shelf 2601a of the front right movable effect unit 2600 is moved from the first discharge port 2578. Are released to the upper right of the attacker unit 2100 below the stage 2510 in the gaming area 1100 and flow down in the gaming area 1100. As a result, in a normal gaming state, when a game ball enters this area, the game ball is sent to the lower side of the center object 2500 without obtaining an opportunity to enter the gate member 2400 or the warp entrance 2504. As the number decreases, the movement of the game ball becomes less enjoyable.

Therefore, the player plays the game by appropriately adjusting the amount of rotation of the handle device 500 so that the game ball flows down the left side region from the center in the left-right direction on the upper side of the center accessory 2500, and strongly strengthens the game ball against the dark clouds. It is possible to suppress the game operation such as driving and entertain the game by the operation of the original handle device 500 of the pachinko machine 1 and prevent the interest from deteriorating. Note that the second game area 2551 can be easily driven into the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 simply by operating the handle device 500 to be driven strongly without adjusting the rotation amount of the handle device 500 as appropriate. When the second big prize opening 2552 is in the open state, it becomes easy to aim at the second big prize opening 2552, and the second big prize opening 2552 is surely received to entertain the player. Can be done.

By the way, in this example, if the passing of the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2402 while the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display 1189 while the normal symbol is changing, the normal symbol that is changing is stopped and generated first.
Until the result of the extracted ordinary random number is determined, the ordinary random number memory holding means 42 stores the ordinary random number (including the ordinary symbol variation pattern) extracted based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2402.
The display is temporarily stored at 02 and the display is held, and the number of stored normal random numbers (also referred to as the hold number) is displayed on the normal symbol storage display 1188.
This normal symbol memory display 1188 is composed of four LEDs, and the number of LEDs to be lit is suggested by the number of each LED to be lit. In this example, up to four are memorized and displayed. ing. When the number of memories exceeds four, the ordinary random number extracted based on the detection signal of the gate sensor 2402 is discarded.

  In addition, the game ball that has been driven into the game area 1100 and has flowed down the left side of the center role 2500 is moved toward the center of the game area 1100 below the center role 2500 by the shelf 2301a of the front left movable effect unit 2300. It is like that. When a game ball wins a general winning opening 2104 arranged below the center bonus 2500 and is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3071, the main control board 4100 pays out a payout control board 4110 based on the detection signal. A predetermined payout command is sent to the payout control board 4110 according to the payout command, and the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740 is controlled so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are placed on the upper plate 301. To be paid out.

  Note that a game ball driven into the game area 1100 does not win any of the general prize opening 2104, the first start opening 2101, the second start opening 2102, the big prize opening 2103, and the second big prize opening 2552. In this case, the game area 1100 is provided at the lower center in the left-right direction and is discharged from the out port 1232 (1151) to the lower rear side of the game board 4. In addition, regardless of whether the game ball wins the general winning port 2104, the first starting port 2101, the second starting port 2102, the big winning port 2103, or the second large winning port 2552, the winning game ball The game board 4 is discharged to the lower rear side without being returned to the area 1100.

On the other hand, when a game ball flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2504 that opens to the left side surface of the center accessory 2500, the stage 25 of the center accessory 2500 is reached.
10 is supplied. Then, the game ball supplied onto the stage 2510 rolls on the stage 2510 in the left-right direction, is mainly discharged forward from the guide surface 2511, and is returned to the game area 1100.

On the other hand, when a game ball that rolls on the stage 2410 enters the chance entrance 2514 that opens to the rear side at the approximate center in the left-right direction, the chance exit 2 that opens just above the first start port 2101.
It is discharged from the game area 1100 from 515 and is received by the first start port 2101 with a high probability. When a game ball is received in the first start port 2101 and detected by the first start port sensor 3022, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls from the prize ball device 740 via the main control board 4100 or the like. Is dispensed to the upper plate 301.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the first start port 2101, the second start port 2102, and the big prize opening 2103 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction, so that the game balls released from the stage 2510 are The first start port 2101 and the like are received with a high probability, and when the second start port 2102 and the grand prize winning port 2103 are acceptable, there is a high possibility that the game ball will be received when it is released from the stage 2510. Therefore, not only the first start port 2101 but also the second start port 21
For 02 and the grand prize opening 2103, it is possible to enhance the interest by giving a sense of expectation regarding the acceptance of game balls.

By the way, the game ball passes through the gate part 2401 of the gate member 2400 and passes through the gate sensor 2.
When the “normal winning” is drawn as a result of the normal lottery detected by 402, as described above, the pair of movable pieces 2105 that close the second start port 2102 can be widened for a predetermined time to make a prize, and the prize is won. When the game ball is received into the second start port 2102 and detected by the second start port sensor 2127 when it becomes possible, a predetermined number (for example, four) is received from the prize ball device 740 via the main control board 4100 or the like. ) Is paid out to the upper plate 301.

Further, in the main control board 4100, when a game ball wins the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 and is detected by the first start port sensor 3022 and the second start port sensor 2127, the first start is started. At the port 2101, the first special random number generator 4212 generates and extracts a predetermined first special random number. At the second start port 2102, the second special random number generator 4222 generates and extracts a predetermined second special random number. Is called. Then, based on the extracted special random number, it is extracted after the change display of the special symbol displayed on the corresponding first special symbol display 1185 or second special symbol display 1186 of the function display unit 1180 is started. The special symbol corresponding to the special random number is stopped and displayed as a special lottery result.

  In the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode that suggests “big hit”, the attacker unit 2100 is in accordance with the mode that suggests “big hit”. A big hit gaming state occurs in which the opening / closing member 2106 or the second opening / closing member 2553 of the second attacker unit 2550 is opened / closed in a predetermined pattern, and during that time, a game ball is awarded to the big winning opening 2103 or the second big winning opening 2402. As a result, more game balls can be acquired. In addition, when one game ball wins the grand prize opening 2103 or the second big prize opening 2402, a predetermined number (for example, 13) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 301 from the prize ball device 740. .

  In addition, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186 in a manner suggesting “small hit”, the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 has a predetermined pattern. A small hit gaming state that opens and closes at the time of occurrence occurs, and in the meantime, a game ball is awarded to the big prize opening 2103 so that more game balls can be obtained. When a single game ball wins the big prize opening 2103, a predetermined number (for example, 13) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 301 from the prize ball device 740.

  Note that, in the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 as well, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display are displayed in the same manner as the normal symbol variation display due to the passage of the game ball to the gate member 2400. When the special symbol is variably displayed on the device 1186 or when the special symbol such as the big hit gaming state cannot be variably displayed, the game ball wins the start opening 2101, 2102 and the first start opening sensor 3022, the second start When it is detected by the mouth sensor 2127, the first special random number extracted based on the detection signals from the first start port sensor 3022 and the second start port sensor 2127 until the special symbol change display becomes possible. The second special random number is stored in the first special symbol hold storage means 4214 or the second special symbol hold storage means 4224, and the display thereof is put on hold. The number of special random numbers, and displays in the first special symbol memory indicator 1184 or the second special symbol memory indicator 1187.

  The first special symbol memory display 1184 and the second special symbol memory indicator 1187 are each composed of two LEDs, so that the number of memories is suggested by the combination of the light emission state of each LED that is turned off / on / flashing. In this example, up to four each are stored and displayed. In addition, when the number of memories exceeds four, the extracted special random number is discarded. The second special random number stored (held) in the second special symbol hold storage unit 4224 by the priority hold digesting unit 4231 has priority over the first special random number stored in the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214. Are executed (digested). That is, the lottery result hold related to the second start port 2102 and the third start port 2415 is executed (digested) in preference to the lottery result hold related to the first start port 2101.

  Further, in the main control board 4100, the first special random number extracted based on the detection of the first starting port sensor 3022 and the second starting port sensor 2127 and the special random number of the second special random number are used in a predetermined jackpot determination table. , It is determined whether the special random number is “lost”, “small hit”, or “big hit”, and is detected by the first start port sensor 3022 when the first start port 2101 is started. The first symbol random number extracted on the basis of the detected signal and the second symbol random number extracted on the basis of the detection signal detected by the second start port sensor 2127 by the start winning to the second start port 2102 and the symbol determination table By checking, “big hit” is either “10R big hit” or “15R big hit”, or “probable change short no hit” “probable variable hit”, “short time hit”, “probable change short time” Ri "and the like is adapted to also be determined.

  When the special lottery result based on the first special random number or the second special random number extracted (lottery) triggered by the start winning of the game ball to the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 is “small hit” The main control board 4100 closes the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 in an open state for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds; in this example, approximately 0.5 seconds). The opening / closing pattern is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice).

On the other hand, when the special lottery result based on the extracted first special random number or second special random number is “big hit”, the main control board 4100 causes the advantageous game state generating means 4232 to open or close the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 or the second attacker. After the second opening / closing member 2553 of the unit 2550 is in an open state, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds for a long time opening, about 0.5 seconds similar to a small hit for a short time opening), or An opening / closing pattern (a single opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) that closes the opening / closing member 2106 when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls satisfy the winning prize opening 2103 when any of the winning conditions is satisfied. , And repeats a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds), 10 rounds for “10R big hit”, 15 rounds for “15R big hit”, respectively. , It adapted to generate a favorable jackpot gaming state to the player. After the predetermined number of rounds, for “big hit”, the big hit determination table is exchanged for one of the big hit determination table at the high probability and the big hit determination table at the low probability according to the gaming state determined by the design random number. It is like that.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 are used.
And the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1180 according to the first special random number and the second special random number extracted in response to the start winning of the game ball at the third starting port 2415 (according to the special lottery result). In addition to the display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 variably displayed, the liquid crystal display device 1
Also in 900, an effect image corresponding to a special random number (special lottery result) is displayed. Specifically, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, each decoration is displayed in a state where a series of decorative symbol sequences composed of a plurality of different symbols is displayed (for example, three columns of a left decorative symbol, a middle decorative symbol, and a right decorative symbol). The variable display of the symbol sequence is started, and then it is sequentially stopped (in this example, it is stopped in the order of left decorative symbol → right decorative symbol → middle decorative symbol), and finally all decorative symbol sequences are stopped. Then, the determination result of the special random number extracted by the combination of the symbols displayed in a stopped state is suggested to the player side. That is, according to the special lottery result by the start winning, after the plurality of decorative symbol sequences are variably displayed, the effect image that is stopped and displayed so as to suggest the special lottery result is displayed. The first and second special symbol indicators 1185
, 1186 is larger than the special symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the player generally pays attention to the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

Note that the special symbol variation display on the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 is directly controlled by the main control board 4100 (FIG. 2).
31), the change display of the symbols on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control board 4150 based on a command related to the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control unit 4140. It has become so. As a result, the variable display of the symbols on the liquid crystal display device 1900 that the player particularly pays attention to is controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 or the like, so that a certain one related to the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 4100 A plurality of symbol variation patterns can be prepared in advance for one command to increase the symbol variation patterns in the liquid crystal display device 1900.

In addition, in the peripheral control unit 4140, in addition to the control of the effect image, the drive motors 3161 and 31 provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are based on a command related to the lottery result.
81, 3219, 3254, 3307, 3402, 3516, 3556 and drive solenoids 2330, 2630, 3611, 3711 are operated as appropriate, and the decorative boards 2153, 2310, 2311, 2541, 2610, 2611 provided in the game board 4 are provided. , 3062
, 3125, 3305, 3353, 3501, 3525, 3614, 3703, 3705
, 3717 are made to emit light appropriately, and the player can be entertained by a movable effect and a light effect.

[5. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 4100 (particularly the main control MPU 4100a) will be described. FIG. 197 (a) is a flowchart showing a procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU 4100 a of the main control board 4100 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

As shown in FIG. 197 (a), the main control board 4100 according to this embodiment first stores various registers and RAMs as processing in step S1 on the condition that the RAM clear switch 4100c is operated. Initialize the stored data. The RAM clear switch 4100c is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and cannot be operated unless the main body frame 3 is opened. Further, the RAM clear switch 4100c outputs a clear signal to the main control board 4100 in response to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the power is turned on. When it is determined that there is, initialization processing (step S1) is executed to initialize various registers and data stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a.

Although not shown, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a backup process for storing information (for example, various flags) indicating the progress of the game in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is executed. If the RAM clear switch 4100c is not operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the information stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). Then, a restoration process for restoring the state according to the information is executed. Further, when the RAM clear switch 4100c is operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the initialization process is executed without executing the recovery process to set the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state.

Next, as a process in step S2, a random number that is a number to be updated within a predetermined numerical range is updated. That is, in the main control board 4100 according to this embodiment, special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) used for the lottery process for the display mode when the variable symbol display is stopped, and the special symbols. Reach by the variable random number used for the lottery process for a predetermined time (variation time) required for the variable display control of the display, the decorative symbol variable display executed by the liquid crystal display device 1900 in response to the special symbol variable display (Left decorative design and right decorative design are stopped in the same design and the middle decorative design is not yet stopped, or the left, middle and right decorative designs are all displayed in the same design. Reach random numbers used in lottery processing for determining whether or not to win, symbol random numbers used in lottery processing to determine the type of jackpot when it is determined that the jackpot is based on the special random number ( One symbol random number, the second symbol random number), a random number to be subjected to such a lottery process to Toraku of per serving as operation trigger of the movable piece 2105 (usually random)
It has a random number counter that holds random numbers.

In this example, a common reach random number is used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, that is, even when the first starting port 2101 is won for starting, the second starting port 2102 is won for starting. Even if it is configured, the reach random number is acquired from the same counter that updates the reach random number, but the reach ratio of the reach effect is obtained by acquiring from the counter in which the random number range for updating the reach random number is different. The first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be different from the first reach determination table as a reach determination table to be compared with the acquired reach random number. You may make it vary the execution ratio of reach production by providing the 2nd reach determination table in which a determination value is set.

In the process of step S2, a random number (variable random number) that is not related to the winning of these random numbers.
The counter operation of the random number counter is performed in the form that only is updated. Note that after the processes of steps S1 and S2 are performed in this way, only the process of step S2 is basically repeated. However, in this embodiment, the following timer interrupt control is performed every 4 ms, for example.

FIG. 197 (b) is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU 4100 a of the main control board 4100.

As shown in FIG. 197 (b), in this interrupt control, first, a register saving process is performed as the process of step S11. Next, as processing of step S12, detection signals from various switches such as the gate sensor 2402, the first start port sensor 3070, the second start port sensor 2127, the count sensor 2128, the general winning port sensor 3071, and the like are received. Entered. Next, as a process in step S13, a random number update process for updating the value of the random number counter that generates the random number is performed. This step S1
In the process of No. 3, the random number counter is operated in the form of updating the random numbers (special random number, normal random number) related to the display mode when the variable symbol display of the special symbol and the normal symbol is stopped. Is called.

After the random number is updated in this way, the main control MPU 4 of the main control board 4100
100a performs the special symbol process process including the lottery process concerning the display mode at the time of the variation display stop of the special symbol as the process of step S14. This special symbol process will be described later, but here, basically, the main control MPU 4100a R
The corresponding process is selectively executed based on the special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, second special symbol process flag) indicating the progress of the game stored in the AM.

Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 executes a normal symbol process process including a lottery process related to a winning win as an operation trigger of the movable piece 2105 as the process of step S15. Even in this normal symbol process, basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. Also, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is a big hit gaming state (
During the predetermined period after the end of the 10R big hit game state), the lottery process is executed so that the movable piece 2105 is driven more frequently (so-called time-short state). In this embodiment, the winning probability of the normal symbol is increased only for a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game state, the time required for the variable symbol variable display control is shortened, and the lottery result of the normal symbol is obtained. When a hit is made, such a short time state is realized by extending the opening time of the movable piece 2105 and increasing the number of times the movable piece 2105 is opened.

When the special symbol process (step S14) and the normal symbol process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 then performs the special symbol process as step S16. R of main control MPU4100a
Processing for transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of AM to the peripheral control board 4010 or the like is performed. Next, as the processing of step S17, the same R in the above normal symbol process processing.
For example, a command set in a predetermined area of AM is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010 or the like.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, next, as the processing of step S18, for example, hit information (15R big hit, 10R supplied to the hall management computer)
Information output processing that outputs data such as big hits.

Then, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 detects the first start port sensor 3070, the second start port sensor 2127, the count sensor 2128, the general winning port sensor 3071, etc. as the process of step S19. When the signal is on,
A payout control command is output to the payout control board 1186 so that prize balls according to these signals are paid out to the player. Thus, the payout control M mounted on the payout control board 1186.
The PU 4110a outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 4111d to the payout motor 744 so as to pay out a prize ball to the player.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 executes a storage process for checking increase / decrease in the number of start memories as a process of step S20. Then, step S21
As the process, a test terminal process, which is a process of outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the pachinko machine 1 to be confirmed outside the gaming machine, is executed. After that, the drive control of the actuator that operates constantly is performed (step S22), the contents of the register are restored (step S23), and the control is terminated when the interrupt permission state is set (step S24). It becomes.

With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by an interrupt process by a timer. However, in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred may be set. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol process (step S14).

Now, assuming that the random numbers used for various lottery processes are updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 198, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is first controlled by the first start port sensor 3070. On condition that the detection signal is in the on state (the ball enters the first start port 2101) (step S31), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the random number counter and is obtained from the RAM number. A first start port passing process such as storing in one special symbol holding storage area is executed (step S32). Also, on condition that the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2127 is in an ON state (the ball enters the second start port 2102) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is set to the random number. A second starting port passage process is executed such as obtaining from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol holding storage area of the RAM (step S).
34).

Next, it is determined whether or not a big hit running flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is controlled is set (step S35). If the big hit running flag is set, the big hit gaming state is controlled. A big hit control process (step S40) is executed. In the jackpot control process, the results of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped are “15R (right) probability variable jackpot (specific 1)”, “10R. (right)
When it comes to a mode that suggests "probability big hit (specific 2)" and "15R (right) rank-up probable big hit (specific 3)", depending on the 15R or 10R big hit game state, the second big prize opening 25
52 is opened, and when it becomes a mode that suggests "10R (left) probability variation big hit (specific 4)" or "15R (left) rank up probability variation big hit (specific 5)", it opens for 15R or a long time. According to the 10R big hit game state of the game, the winning prize opening 2103 is controlled to be opened, and “10R (
When it becomes a mode that suggests “left) latent probability change big hit (specific 6)”, the process of controlling the big winning opening 2103 to the open state is executed according to the 10R big hit gaming state of short-time release.

On the other hand, if the big hit execution flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit gaming state is controlled is set (step S36), and the small hit execution flag is set. If is set, the small hit control processing (the control of the small hit gaming state (
Step S41) is executed. In addition, in the small hit control process, the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped is “small hit”.
In this manner, a process for controlling the big winning opening 2103 to the open state is executed according to the small hit game state similar to the 10R big hit game state that is opened for a short time.

If neither big hit execution flag nor small hit execution flag is set, the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is “ On the condition that it is “0” (step S37), the first special symbol process including the lottery processing relating to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S38), and the second special symbol is suspended. On the condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the storage area is not “0” (step S37), the display mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the second special symbol is applied. A second special symbol process process including a lottery process is executed (step S39). Thus, in this example, the value of the second special reservation number counter is “0”.
If not, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first start port passage process (step S32).

If it is determined in the process of step S31 that the first start port sensor 3070 is in an on state and a game ball has entered the first start port 2101, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first determines the counter value by the first special hold number counter as the main control M as the process of step S41.
Obtained from the RAM of the PU 4100a. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned number of reserved special symbols is “4” which is the maximum value.

In the process of step S41, if it is determined that the number of the first special symbol hold is not the maximum value, the following steps are performed to newly put the variable display control of the first special symbol on hold. The processing of S42 to S44 will be performed. That is, first, the above step S
As the processing of 42, the first special reservation number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the processing of step S43, the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, as the processing of step S44, each random number thus obtained is used as the first special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reserved number counter in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU 4100a. To store.

However, if it is determined in the process of step S41 that the number of the first special symbol hold is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly held.
That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S42 to S44, the first special symbol variation display control is not newly put on hold.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a displays the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number acquired in step S43. Whether or not, if the big hit is a big hit type, if the big hit or small hit is not, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, or the type type of the game effect to be executed After performing the effect pre-determination process for determining the pre-determination information such as before starting the variable display according to the start winning (step S45),
The process ends.

FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second start port passage process (step S34).

If it is determined in the process of step S33 that the second start port sensor 2127 is in an on state and a game ball has entered the second start port 2102, as shown in FIG. In addition, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first determines the counter value by the second special reservation number counter as the main control M as the process of step S51.
Obtained from the RAM of the PU 4100a. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned number of reserved second special symbols is the maximum value “4”.

In the process of step S51, if it is determined that the second special symbol hold count is not the maximum value, the following steps are performed to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol on hold. The processing of S52 to S54 will be performed. That is, first, the above step S
As a process of 52, the second special reservation number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the processing in step S53, the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, as the processing of step S54, the second special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special reserved number counter in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU 4100a is used as the processing in step S54. To store.

However, if it is determined in the process of step S51 that the second special symbol hold count is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly held.
That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S52 to S54, the second special symbol variable display control is not newly put on hold.

FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect preliminary determination processing (steps S45 and S55). When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 starts the effect pre-determination process, the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 202 (A) and the acquired random number, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, Whether or not the big hit or the small hit is made by comparing the variable random numbers, the type of the big hit if the big hit, or the reach effect as a game effect executed by the liquid crystal display device 1900 if the big hit or the small hit is not Or the type of game effect to be executed is specified (step S61).

In the prior determination table shown in FIG. 202 (A), step S4 of the first start port passing process is performed.
When the first special random number is acquired in step 3, if the high probability flag indicating that the control of the high probability state is executed is set, the high probability jackpot judgment value is compared with the first special random number. If the high probability flag is not set, whether or not the big hit is determined by comparing the low probability big hit judgment value with the first special random number. This high-probability jackpot determination value (3819-3918) is set in a later-described high-probability jackpot determination table (see FIG. 206A) and is the same randomness as the jackpot determination value compared with the first special random number. The jackpot judgment value (3909-3918) with a low probability is set to a jackpot judgment table (see FIG. 206 (A)) at a low probability described later and is compared with the first special random number. The same random number is assumed. For this reason, by comparing the first special random number and the pre-judgment table in step S61, it is accurately specified whether or not it will be a big hit, and "big hit 1-12" as the big hit as the pre-judgment information, not a big hit “Lose” and “Reach 1-4”
Can be classified.

In the prior determination table shown in FIG. 202 (A), when the first special random number is acquired in step S43 of the first start port passage process, the same randomness is obtained regardless of whether or not the high probability flag is set. It is also specified whether or not a small hit is made by comparing the small hit determination value set to a numerical value with the first special random number. These small hit judgment values at the time of high probability or low probability (3800
-3818) is a jackpot determination table at the time of high probability or low probability described later (FIG. 206A).
And the same random number value as the small hit determination value to be compared with the first special random number. For this reason, by comparing the first special random number and the pre-determination table in step S61, it is accurately specified whether or not it is a small hit, and the pre-determination information includes the small hit “big hit 1
2 ”.

In the prior determination table shown in FIG. 202 (A), when the second special random number is acquired in step S53 of the second start port passing process, a high probability flag indicating that the control in the high probability state is being executed. If it is set, it is determined whether it is a big hit by comparing the high probability jackpot judgment value with the second special random number. If the high probability flag is not set, the low probability jackpot judgment value is determined. Is compared with the second special random number to determine whether or not a big hit has occurred.
This high-probability jackpot determination value (3819-3918) is the same as the jackpot determination value set in the high-probability jackpot determination table (see FIG. 206A) to be described later and compared with the second special random number. The jackpot judgment value (3909-3918) with a low probability is set to a jackpot judgment value (3909-3918) at a low probability, which will be described later, and is compared with the second special random number. The same random number is assumed. For this reason, by comparing the second special random number and the pre-judgment table in step S61, it is accurately specified whether or not it will be a big hit, and "big hit 1-12" as the big hit as the pre-judgment information, not a big hit “Lose” and “Reach 1”
-4 ".

In the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 202 (A), if it is determined in step S61 that the first special random number is compared with the pre-determination table and a big hit is specified, a determination value indicating which big hit is to be made. And the first symbol random number are used to identify the type of jackpot. Specifically, the determination value (64-175) indicating that it is a big hit of the specific 1 is set in a symbol determination table (see FIG. 206C) described later and is compared with the first symbol random number. Among them, the determination value (0-63) indicating that it is the same random number as the determination value indicating that it is a specific 1 big hit, and the specific 2-5 or non-specific big win is a symbol determination table (to be described later) FIG.
6 (see (C)) and the same random number value as the determination value indicating that it is a specific 2-5 or non-specific jackpot among the judgment values to be compared with the first symbol random number, The decision value (176-199) indicating that the value is set to a symbol determination table (see FIG. 206C), which will be described later, is a big jackpot of 6 specified among the decision values compared with the first symbol random number. The same random number as the determination value indicating

In addition, in the prior determination table shown in FIG.
By comparing a determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with a variable random number, it is specified which reach effect is to be executed from among the multiple types of reach effects to be a big hit. Specifically, a determination value (0 indicating that the normal reach effect is executed in the big hit of the specific 1
-4) is a random value that is the same as the determination value indicating that the normal reach effect is executed among the determination values that are compared with the variable random number, and is a super reach effect with a low jackpot expectation (hereinafter, this is also referred to as a weak SP reach). The determination value (5-29) indicating that execution is performed is set to the same random value as the determination value indicating that the super-reaching effect having a low jackpot expectation degree is executed among the determination values compared with the variable random numbers. A determination value (30-216) indicating that a super-reach production (hereinafter, also referred to as a strong SP reach) with a high expectation degree of jackpot is performed other than a specific super-reach production (also referred to as a specific strong SP reach). Is the same random number as the determination value indicating that the super-reach effect with a high degree of expectation of jackpots other than the specific super-reach effect is executed among the determination values contrasted with the variable random number. The determination value (217-240) indicating that a specific super reach effect is to be executed among the super reach effects with a high degree of expectation of jackpot is to execute the specific super reach effect among the determination values compared with the variable random numbers. The same random number as the determination value indicating

Further, the determination value (0-4) indicating that the normal reach effect is executed in the specific 2-5 or non-specific big hit is the determination value indicating that the normal reach effect is executed among the determination values compared with the variable random numbers. The determination value (5-29), which is the same random number value and indicates that the super-reaching effect having a low jackpot expectation level is to be executed, is a super-reach effect having a low jackpot expectation level among the determination values compared with the variable random number. The determination value (30 to 216) indicating that the determination value (30-216) other than a specific super reach effect is executed is compared with the random number value, which is the same random value as the determination value indicating execution. The same random number value as the judgment value indicating that a super-reach production with a high degree of expectation of jackpots other than a specific super-reach production is performed, A determination value (217-240) indicating that a specific super reach effect is to be executed among the super-reach effects having a high waiting level indicates that a specific super reach effect is to be executed among the determination values compared with the variable random numbers. The random number is the same as the judgment value.

In addition, a determination value (0) indicating that the normal reach effect is executed in the big hit of the specific 6
-89) is the same random value as the determination value indicating that the normal reach effect is to be executed among the determination values compared with the variable random numbers, and the determination value indicating that the super reach effect having a low jackpot expectation value is to be executed ( 90-189) are set to the same random value as the determination value indicating that the super-reaching effect having a low jackpot expectation is executed among the determination values compared with the variable random numbers, A determination value (190-216) indicating that a non-specific super reach effect is to be executed executes a super reach effect with a high degree of expectation of jackpot that is other than the specific super reach effect among the determination values compared with the variable random numbers. A determination indicating that a specific super reach effect is to be executed from among the super reach effects having a high expectation degree of jackpot. (217-240) is the same random number and the judgment value indicating that perform certain super reach demonstration of the determination value to be compared with variation random number.

For this reason, in step S61, the first symbol random number is compared with the prior determination table, and the random number is compared with the prior determination table, so that the type of jackpot is accurately identified. "Big jackpot 1" which is a big hit of a specific 1 of the "big hit 2" which is a big hit of a specific 1 from a weak SP reach, "Big hit 3" which is a big hit of a specific 1 from a strong SP reach other than a specific strong SP reach , "Big hit 4" as specific 1 big hit from specific strong SP reach, "specific big 5" from normal reach, or "special hit 5" including non-specific big hit, specific 2-5 from non-specific SP reach "Big jackpot 6", which includes a specific jackpot,
“Big jackpot 7” including specific 2-5 or non-specific jackpots from strong SP reach other than specific strong SP reach, “Big jackpot” including specific 2-5 or non-specific jackpots from specific strong SP reach “8”, “big hit 9” as the big 6 hit from normal reach, “big hit 10” as the big 6 hit from weak SP reach, specific 6 big hits from strong SP reach other than specific strong SP reach It can be classified into either “big hit 11” or “big hit 12” which is a specific 6 big hit from a specific strong SP reach.

In the prior determination table shown in FIG. 202 (A), if it is determined in step S61 that the second special random number is compared with the prior determination table and the big hit is specified, the determination value indicating which big hit is to be determined. And the second symbol random number are identified. Specifically, the determination value (64-199) indicating that it is a big hit of the specific 1 is set in a symbol determination table (see FIG. 206C) described later and is compared with the second symbol random number. Among them, the determination value (0-63) indicating that it is the same random number as the determination value indicating that it is a specific 1 big hit, and the specific 2-5 or non-specific big win is a symbol determination table (to be described later) FIG.
6 (see (C)), and the same random number value as the determination value indicating that it is a specific 2-5 or non-specific jackpot among the determination values to be compared with the second symbol random number. Step S61
When comparing the second symbol random number and the prior determination table, the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed and the variable random number, as in the case of comparing the first symbol random number and the prior determination table described above. By comparing the above, it is determined which of the plurality of types of reach effects is executed and which is a big hit. For this reason, in step S61, by comparing the second symbol random number and the advance determination table, and by comparing the variable random number and the advance determination table, the type of the big hit is specified accurately, It can be classified into any one of “1” to “12 jackpots”.

In the prior determination table shown in FIG. 202 (A), when it is specified that a loss occurs,
When the high probability flag indicating that the control in the high probability state is executed is set, the reach is displayed by comparing the reach determination value at the time of probability change indicating that the reach is displayed with the reach random number. The reach determination value and reach random number indicating that the reach is displayed when the time-short flag indicating that the control of the time-short state (low-probability time-short state) is executed is set. Indicates whether or not to display reach, and indicates that reach is displayed when the high-probability flag or short-time flag is not set and indicates that normal state control is being executed. It is specified whether or not the reach is displayed by comparing the reach determination value in the normal state and the reach random number. The reach determination value (0) at the time of probability change is set to a reach determination table at the time of probability change (see FIG. 206B), which will be described later, and is the same random value as the reach determination value to be compared with the reach random number. The reach reach determination value (0-5) at the time is set to a reach determination table (see FIG. 206B) to be described later and is set to the same random number as the reach determination value compared with the reach random number. The reach determination value (0-6) at the time is set to a random number value that is the same as the reach determination value that is set in a normal reach determination table (see FIG. 206B) described later and is compared with the reach random number. . For this reason, by comparing the reach random number and the pre-determination table in step S61, it is accurately determined whether or not the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed in the liquid crystal display device 1900 when the big hit is not made. "Lose" that does not display reach (execute reach) as information, and display reach (execute reach)
It can be classified as any one of “Reach 1-4”.

Note that the reach determination value (0-5) at the time reduction and the reach determination value (0-6) at the normal time include the same determination value (0) as the reach determination value (0) at the time of probability change. When the same reach determination value and the reach random number match, it is classified whether the reach is displayed (reach effect is executed) in any of the game states at the time of probability change, time reduction, or normal time. Therefore, by comparing the reach random number and the prior determination table in step S61, it is specified whether the reach effect is executed as the game effect in the liquid crystal display device 1900 in any game state at the time of probability change, time reduction, or normal time. can do.

202A, when a reach effect is executed as a game effect executed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, a determination value indicating which reach effect is executed is compared with a variable random number. The mode classification of the game effect to be executed is specified. Specifically, the determination value (0 to 163) indicating that the normal reach effect is executed is set in a change pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach described later, and the normal reach effect among the determination values compared with the variable random number. The determination value (164-222) indicating the execution of the super reach effect with a low jackpot expectation degree is a random value that is the same as the determination value indicating execution of the reach, and a reach variation pattern table (not shown) described later ) Is set to the same random value as the determination value indicating that the super-reach effect with a low jackpot expectation level is to be executed among the determination values to be compared with the variable random numbers, and the super-reach effect with a high jackpot expectation level is specified. The determination value (223-235) indicating that the other than the super reach effect is executed is a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach described later. ) Is set to the same random number as the determination value indicating that a super-reaching effect having a high jackpot expectation level other than a specific super-reach effect is performed, and the jackpot expectation degree A determination value (236-240) indicating that a specific super reach effect is to be executed among the super reach effects having a high value is set in a change pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach, which will be described later, and compared with a variable random number. Among the values, the same random number as the determination value indicating that a specific super reach effect is executed. For this reason, the aspect type of the game effect to be executed is accurately specified by comparing the variable random number and the advance determination table in step S61, and the normal reach effect is executed as the advance determination information.
“Reach 1”, “Reach 2” for performing a super reach production with a low expectation level for jackpots, “Reach 3” for performing a super reach production with a high level of expectation for jackpots (other than a specific super reach production)
"Perform a super-reach production (a specific super-reach production) with a high expectation of jackpot"
It can be classified as “reach 4”. Then, by comparing the reach random number with the advance determination table in step S61, the advance determination information can be classified into any one of “reach 1” to “reach 4”.

As described above, as a result of the comparison between the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 202A and the acquired random number (special random number, design random number, reach random number, variable random number), whether or not the big hit or the small hit, In the case of the big hit type, if not big hit or small hit, the liquid crystal display device 1900
Execute the reach effect as the game effect executed in the game or specify the advance determination information such as the type of game effect to be executed, and as shown in FIG.
, “Big hit 1” to “Big hit 12” and “Reach 1” to “Reach 4”.

Then, in the production prior determination process (steps S45 and S55), the specified prior determination information (whether it is a big hit or a small hit, if it is a big hit, if it is not a big hit or a big hit or a small hit) The reach effect is executed as the game effect executed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, or the type of the game effect to be executed), and the acquired special random number type (either the first special random number or the second special random number) Then, a hold number (value of the hold number counter) stored in correspondence with the acquired special random number and a hold number command corresponding to the set number are set. For example, in the production pre-determination process related to the first special symbol executed in step S45 of the first start port passage process, the specified pre-determination information and the first special random number are acquired, and the number of first special symbols held (The value of the first special reservation number counter) and a first special symbol reservation number command corresponding to the value (step S62)
). Note that the fourth digit of the number-of-holds command (for example, the prior determination information related to the first special symbol is “
620XH at the time of “losing”, X = 2 when the holding number = 1, X = 3 when the holding number = 2, and X = 4 when the holding number = 3. X = 5 when = 4
Is substituted. For this reason, when the hold number command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4010, the start opening (one of the first start opening 2101 and the second start opening 2102) where the start winning is generated, the start In addition to the number of holds stored corresponding to the mouth, whether or not the display result of the change display of the special symbol based on the generated start winning is a big hit or a small hit, When it is not a small hit, a reach effect is executed as a game effect executed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, or prior determination information such as a type type of a game effect to be executed is started to be displayed in accordance with the start winning. Previously peripheral control board 4010
Can be grasped by the peripheral control MPU 4140a.

In this example, the same random number as the jackpot determination value in the prior determination table and the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table described later is used, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot determination value of the pre-judgment table includes only a part of the jackpot determination value of the jackpot determination table, or a part or all of the jackpot determination value of the jackpot determination table is different from the jackpot determination value of the jackpot determination table. It may be configured to include a random number of numbers, and the degree of possibility of being a big hit in the effect pre-determination process may be determined.

Specifically, a part of the big hit judgment value and the outlier judgment value (which may include the small hit judgment value) different from the big hit judgment value can be distinguished as a high probability random number group, and the high probability random number group A high probability random number determining means having a ratio of the jackpot determination value that can be discriminated as to the outlier determination value set higher than a ratio of the jackpot determination table in which the winning probability of the jackpot is determined, and random number acquisition Of the random numbers acquired by the means, the winning random number (first special random number, second special random number) is classified into either the above-mentioned loss determination value or the above jackpot determination value, and this is not executed. A value that belongs to the high probability random number group in which the winning random numbers used for the determination are mixed with the jackpot determination value and the outlier determination value while maintaining the state of It is provided with pseudo-probability advance determination means that makes it possible to execute an advance determination on the degree of expectation (pseudo-winning probability) related to the jackpot winning for each determination process that is put on hold by determining whether or not there is The above-described pseudo-probability advance determination means may determine in advance the degree of expectation related to the big win.

In this way, by including a high probability random number determining means in which the jackpot judgment value and the loss judgment value are mixed, there is a risk that confidential information about the winning result of the jackpot judgment that is still on hold can be leaked While maintaining the conventional production structure that eliminates the above, regarding the degree of expectation (pseudo-winning probability) related to the winning of the jackpot according to the mixture ratio of the jackpot judgment value and the loss judgment value in the means with high probability random number determination The preceding determination can be executed. For example, prior to the execution of the jackpot determination (digestion of the determination process), the preceding determination that the winning random number used for the jackpot determination is a value belonging to the high probability random number group (special hit determination value) was not made. When the decision process based on the random number value (a value belonging to the low-probability random number group that is paired with the high-probability random number group) that is not the pre-determined special hit determination value is expected, It is determined that the degree (pseudo-winning probability) is lower than the expected degree of jackpot (winning probability) (pseudo-lowered winning probability).

According to the preceding determination method for such a high probability random number group, when the specific determination process is put on hold, the jackpot determination is maintained in an unexecuted state (pending state). In addition, the expected degree (pseudo-winning probability) can be notified in advance, for example, at a predetermined timing such as at the time of new output of the hold display or at the time of shift display corresponding to the hold-up. Will come to be.

FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S38). The first special symbol process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process and the second special symbol process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process are the same program modules, and are random numbers used for the determination. Since only the table is different, only the first special symbol process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process will be described here. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed in accordance with the first special symbol process flag.

1. A first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is read, and a lottery process for a display mode at the time of stopping the variable control of the first special symbol is performed based on the read first special random number. Symbol normal processing (step S80)
2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) in which the determination process of the first special symbol variation control stop mode is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the first special symbol variable control stop )
3. A lottery process for the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 based on the variable random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 corresponding to the special symbol. First variation pattern setting process (step S82)
4). First special symbol variation process that waits until the first special symbol variation display on the first special symbol indicator 1185 is stopped (step S83).
5. The first special symbol indicator 1185 displays the first special symbol variation control stop mode determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the first special symbol variable control stop. First special symbol stop process for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol (step S84)

The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal processing (step S80) should be performed in the processing of step S1 (see FIG. 197).

FIG. 204 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S80).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 204, the main control MPU 410 of the main control board 4100
For 0a, first, as the processing of step S101, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol that is in the hold state, then in step S102, it is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a. The random number stored in the first storage area among the random numbers (for example, the first special random number, the first design random number, the reach random number, and the variable random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol being read is read from the RAM. . Then, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the first special hold number counter is counted down and the main control MPU 41
Random numbers (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, etc.) related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol stored in each storage area of the first special symbol holding storage area of the RAM of 00a is stopped A variable random number is shifted in a first-in first-out manner.

Specifically, the first special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4 and stores the random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of the start winning prize in order from the first (first) area. And nth (
When random numbers are stored in the storage area of n = 1 to 3), when a start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area and stored in the first storage area When the variable display start condition based on the random number is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and various random numbers stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area are read as N−. Move to the first (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs can be stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). become.

And after that, as a process of step S105, based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol, a big hit determination process which is a lottery process for the big win is performed.
Thereafter, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing (step S81) (step S106), the processing is terminated.

FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S105).

In the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, the current gaming state is a high probability state (
If it is a high-probability short-time state or a high-probability non-short-time state (step S111), the high-probability jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 206 (A) is selected (step S112), If there is (Step S111), the jackpot determination table at the low probability shown in FIG. 206A is selected (Step S113), and the selected special jackpot determination table and the first special symbol read out in Step S102 of the first special symbol normal process. The random number is compared (step S114).

The jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 206A is the ROM 4 of the main control MPU 4100a.
100d, the jackpot determination table at low probability used when the gaming state is low probability (normal state (low probability non-short time state) and short time state (low probability short time state)), and gaming state is high probability A jackpot determination table for a high probability used in the case of time (high probability non-short state, high probability short state). Then, in the jackpot determination table at the low probability, similarly to the above-described pre-determination table, the ten types of first special random numbers coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot is won, and the nineteen types of first special random numbers are small. It matches the small hit judgment value that shows that you won the hit,
The first special random numbers are associated with each other so that 3890 types of first special random numbers coincide with a loss determination value indicating that the first special random numbers are out of place. In the second special symbol process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process, a small hit determination value is set in the low probability big hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number. It is not done and you won't win a small hit. In the jackpot determination table at the low probability, similarly to the above-described pre-determination table, 10 types of second special random numbers coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot is won, and 3909 types of second special random numbers are out of the above. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match one special random number with the loss judgment value indicating that the

In addition, in the jackpot determination table at the high probability, 100 types of first special random numbers including the same first special random number as the first special random number set in the jackpot determination table at the low probability, as in the prior determination table. Match the big hit determination value, match the small hit determination value indicating that 19 types of first special random numbers have been won for the small hit, and 3800 types of first special random numbers match the loss determination value. One special random number is associated with each. As described above, in this embodiment, in the high probability state (high probability short-time state, high probability non-short time state), the big hit determination value indicating that the big hit is won is a low probability (normal state (low probability non-short time state) ) And time-short state (low probability time-short state)). In the second special symbol process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process, a small hit determination value is set in the high probability big hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number. It is not done and you won't win a small hit. The jackpot determination table at the time of high probability includes the same second special random number as the second special random number set in the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability, similarly to the above-described prior determination table.
The second special random number matches the jackpot determination value indicating that the second special random number of 0 types is won and the match determination value indicates that the 3909 second special random numbers are out of place. Are associated with each other.

When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 compares the selected jackpot determination table with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process and determines that it is a jackpot (step S115). ), The big hit flag indicating that the fluctuation is won by the big win is set and the process is terminated (step S116), and the first special read out in step S102 of the selected big hit determination table and the first special symbol normal process As a result of the comparison with the random number, when it is determined that a small hit is made (step S117), a small hit flag indicating that the change is won for the small hit is set, and the processing is ended (step S118).
) If the result of comparison between the selected jackpot determination table and the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process is that it is out of place, the reach determination table shown in FIG. The reach random number read in step S102 is compared (step S119).

The reach determination table shown in FIG. 206 (B) is the ROM 4 of the main control MPU 4100a.
100d, reach determination table at the time of probability change used when the game state is probabilistic (high probability state (high probability non-short state, high probability short state)), and the game state is short (low probability short state) ) And the time reach determination table used in the case of), and the game state is normal (normal state)
And a normal reach determination table used in this case. Then, in the reach determination table at the time of probability change, the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach random number is reached and 238 types of reach random numbers are not reached, as in the prior determination table. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match.

Further, in the reach determination table at the time reduction, similarly to the above-described determination table, reach determination indicating that six types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number set in the reach determination table at the time of probability change reach. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the reach determination value indicating that the reach and the 233 types of reach random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating the reach is increased in the short time (low probability short time state) than in the probability change (high probability state).

Furthermore, in the normal reach determination table, as in the above-described pre-determination table, seven types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number set in the reach determination table at the time of probability change and short-time operation are reached. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so that the reach determination values coincide with the reach determination values indicating that the 232 types of reach random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, in the normal time (normal state), the reach determination value indicating reach is higher than in the time of probability change (high probability state) and in the short time (low probability short time state).

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119). A reach flag indicating that becomes reach is set, and the process ends (step S120b).

FIG. 207 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 207, the main control MP of the main control board 4100
The U4100a first determines the result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S105). The lottery processing result is determined by checking whether the big hit flag or the small hit flag is set (step S121).
, S124).

If the big hit flag is set in step S121, the main control MPU 4100a
By comparing the first symbol random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process with the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 206 (C) (step S122), the type of jackpot is determined, and the determined jackpot The mode at the time of stopping the variable control of the first special symbol corresponding to the type (stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined (step S123).

As shown in FIG. 206 (C), in the symbol determination table, similar to the prior determination table, each determination result (specific 1 15R (right) probability variation big hit, specific 2 10R (right) probability variation big hit, specific 3 15R (right) rank up probability variation big hit, specific 4 10R (left) probability variation big hit, specific 5
15R (left) rank-up probability variation jackpot, specific 6 10R (left) latent probability variation jackpot, non-specific 10R (left) normal jackpot)) are associated with symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) It is remembered in the form. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines the type of jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the jackpot type determination probability determined based on the first symbol random number is set different from the jackpot type determination probability determined based on the second symbol random number. ing.

In particular,
1. The 15R big hit gaming state using the second opening / closing member 2553 of the second attacker unit 2550 is controlled (the opening / closing pattern for opening and closing the second opening / closing member 2553 is repeated 15 times (15 rounds)), and after the 15R big hit gaming state ends. 1. Specific 1 15R (right) probability variable big hit that is controlled to the high probability time-short state until it becomes big hit again. The 10R big hit gaming state using the second opening / closing member 2553 of the second attacker unit 2550 is controlled (the opening / closing pattern for opening and closing the second opening / closing member 2553 is repeated 10 times (10 rounds)), and after the 10R big hit gaming state is finished. 2. Specific 2 10R (right) probability variable big hit that controls to the high probability short-time state until it becomes big hit again. The big hit gaming state is controlled as if the game is finished in the 10R big hit gaming state using the second opening / closing member 2553 of the second attacker unit 2550. However, by continuing the big hit gaming state thereafter, a total of 15R big hit gaming state is obtained. Control (rank up) to
3. 3R 15R (right) rank-up probability change big hit that controls to the high probability short-time state until the big hit is reached again after the 15R big hit gaming state. 10R big hit gaming state using the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 (the opening / closing pattern for opening / closing the opening / closing member 2106 is repeated 10 times (10 rounds)),
4. 10R (left) probability variable big hit that controls to the high probability time-short state until the big hit is reached again after the 10R big hit gaming state ends. The big hit gaming state is controlled as if the game was ended in the 10R big hit gaming state using the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100, but the big hit gaming state is continued thereafter, so that the total 15R big hit gaming state is controlled. (Rank up) and the 15R
5. Specific 5 15R (left) rank-up probability change big hit that controls to the high probability short-time state until the big hit hits again after the big hit gaming state ends. Controlling the 10R big hit game state using the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 in such a manner that it is difficult for the game ball to enter, and controlling the high probability non-short state until the big hit again after the 10R big hit game state ends 6. A specific 6 10R (left) latent probability variation big hit that executes a game effect in which it is difficult to determine whether or not the liquid crystal display device 1400 is in a high probability state. Control is made to a 10R big hit gaming state using the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100, and after the 10R big hit gaming state is finished, a predetermined number of times (50 times) of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) are displayed. It is determined to be one of the seven types of big hits of non-specific 10R (left) normal big hits that are controlled to the low probability short state until execution.

In this example, a symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and a symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol are provided. And in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol,
The determination value allocation is set to be different from that of the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, and the determination ratio of each jackpot is different. Specifically, FIG. 206 (C
) In the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol,
Right) Probability big hit, Specific 2 10R (Right) probable big hit, Specific 3 15R (Right) Rank up probable big hit, Specific 4 10R (Left) probable big hit, Specific 6 10R (Left) latent probable big hit,
In the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, the specific 1 15R (right) probability variation big hit, the specific 4 Determination value distribution is set for 10R (left) probability big hit, specific 5 15R (left) rank up probability big hit, and non-specific 10R (left) normal big hit.

Further, in this example, when the specific 1 15R (right) probability variation big hit, the specific 2 10R (right) probability variation big hit, and the specific 3 15R (right) ranked up probability variation big hit, the second attacker unit 2550 The big hit gaming state is controlled so as to open and close the two opening / closing members 2553, while the specific 4 10R (left) probability change big hit, the specific 5 15R (left) rank up positive change big hit, and the specific 6 10R (left) latent probability change The big hit gaming state is controlled so as to open and close the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 when the big hit is a non-specific 10R (left) normal big hit. Therefore, during the control of the big hit game state in which the second opening / closing member 2553 of the second attacker unit 2550 is opened / closed, the center accessory 2500 is arranged so that a large number of game balls win the second big prize opening 2552. Launch a game ball aiming at the right side of the ball (so-called “right-handed”)
Must. On the other hand, during the control of the big hit game state in which the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened and closed, the game ball is aimed at the left side of the center accessory 2500 so that many game balls are won in the big prize opening 2103. Must be fired (so-called “left-handed”).

As described above, during the control of the big hit game state in which the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened and closed, a game ball is launched aiming at the left side of the center accessory 2500. In the game area 1100 on the left side, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1200 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at an appropriate position, and the game balls come into contact with the obstacle nails so that the game balls Various movements are given and it flows down. For this reason, even when a game ball is driven into the left side of the center accessory 2500 with the aim of the big prize opening 2103 when the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened, Not only the game balls that have not won the big winning opening 2103 are out holes 1232 (11) provided at the lower left center of the gaming area 1100.
51) to the outside.

On the other hand, during the control of the big hit game state for opening and closing the second opening / closing member 2553 of the second attacker unit 2550, a game ball is launched aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500. In the second game area 2551 on the right side of 2500, no obstacle nail is implanted on the front surface of the game panel 1200. Further, due to the structure of the game board 4, when the second opening / closing member 2553 of the second attacker unit 2550 is opened, the second big prize opening 2552 is used.
When a game ball is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the second prize winning opening 25
52 is sure to win. For this reason, in the big hit gaming state in which the second opening / closing member 2553 of the second attacker unit 2550 is opened / closed, the game ball that has been shot into the second gaming area 2551 is wasted (discharged to the outside through the out port 1232 (1151)). ), And the game ball is more efficiently won in the second big prize opening 2552, compared to the big prize opening 2103 in the big hit gaming state in which the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened and closed. You can digest the big hit gaming state.

In this example, the opening time of the big winning opening 2103 per round in the big hit gaming state with specific 1 to 5 and non-specific and specific 6 (time to open / close the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100) or The opening time of the second big prize opening 2552 (the time for controlling the opening of the second opening / closing member 2553 of the second attacker unit 2550) is varied.
Specifically, in the case of specific 1-5 and non-specific big wins, a long open state in which the open time of the big prize opening 2103 or the second big prize opening 2552 per round is 30 seconds is set. In contrast to the control, when the specified 6R (left) latent probability variation big hit is made, the opening time of the big winning opening 2103 per round is set to 0.05 seconds which is extremely shorter than the long open state. Controlled to short open state. Even in the case of a small hit, the short winning state is controlled to a short open state in which the open time of the big winning opening 2103 per round in the small hit game state is 0.05 seconds. In this way, when the specific 6R (left) latent probability variation big hit or small hit is reached, the opening time of the large winning opening 2103 per round is too short, so the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 Even if the opening control is recognized, it is difficult to win a game ball in the big winning opening 2103. That is, during the control of the short hit state in the big hit game state and the small hit game state, the game ball rarely wins the big winning opening 2103, and unlike in the control of the long open state, many game balls Can not be expected.

Also, in this example, multiple types of effect modes are prepared according to the gaming state, and when the gaming state is switched with a big hit (including when the gaming state is not switched with a small hit) The production mode is also shifted. In this effect mode, dedicated game effects (reach effects, effects during a big hit game, etc.) are set for each effect mode, and when the effect mode shifts, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs liquid crystal display corresponding to each effect mode. The effect display by the background color of the device 1900 and the characters (including the decoration pattern) is executed, and the impression of the game changes in each effect mode. Specifically, when the low probability non-short-time state (normal state) is controlled, the normal mode (in this example, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is controlled to a blue background color) is set, and the high-probability short-time state (probability change). The mode is set to the probability changing middle mode (in this example, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is controlled to the red background color) while being controlled to the low-probability time-short state (time-short state). (In this example, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is controlled to have a yellow background color), and the probability variation latency mode (when the high probability non-time-short state (probability variation state) or the low probability non-time-short state (normal state) is controlled) In this example, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is set to a light blue background color. In this way, the player can determine which production mode is controlled by visually recognizing the background color of the liquid crystal display device 1900. It should be noted that the liquid crystal display device 1900 has a predetermined mode (characters or characters corresponding to each effect mode may be used) so that the player can determine which effect mode is controlled. May be displayed.

Then, in the normal mode corresponding to the low probability non-time-short state, the specific 1 15R (right) probability variable big hit, the specific 2 10R (right) positive probability big hit, the specific 3 15R (right) rank up positive variable big hit, the specific 4 In the case of 10R (left) probability variation big hit, the mode shifts from normal mode to probability changing mode with the control to the high probability short-time state after the big hit gaming state ends, and the non-specific 10
When R (left) is a normal big hit, the mode shifts from the normal mode to the short-time middle mode with the control to the low-probability short-time state after the big hit gaming state ends, and the specific 6 10R (left) latency probability change In the case of big hit or small hit, the probability change latency from the normal mode is controlled with the control to the high probability non-time short state after the big hit gaming state or the low probability non-time short state after the small hit gaming state is finished. The mode is changed. Further, in the probability changing mode corresponding to the high probability short-time state, the specific 1 15R (right) probability variation big hit, the specific 4 10R (left) probability variation big hit, the specific 5
If the 15R (left) rank-up probability change big hit becomes, after the big hit gaming state, the probability changing mode is continued with the control to the high probability short-time state again, and the unspecified 10R (left) normal big hit In this case, after the big hit gaming state is finished, the mode is changed from the probability changing mode to the time-short / medium mode as the low-probability time-short state is controlled.

In the probability change mode described above, specific 4 10R (left) probability change big hit, specific 5 15R (left)
When the rank-up probability variation big hit and non-specific 10R (left) normal big hit, it is determined whether or not to control to a high probability time-short state (probability variation state) after the big hit gaming state ends by the start of the big hit gaming state It is difficult to start the big hit gaming state using the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100, but the big hit gaming state is ended as a game effect in the big hit gaming state executed until the big hit gaming state is finished. A probability variation bonus effect of whether to control to a high probability short-time state later is executed. In this probability variation bonus effect, for example, the pressing operation unit 4
When the player operates 05, the effect whether or not the main character displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 succeeds in judging the villain character is sequentially executed a plurality of times (four times), and a specific 4 10R ( (Left) If the probability change big hit is a specific 5 15R (left) rank up probability change big hit, the protagonist character succeeds in judging the villain character before the performance is executed multiple times, so that the big hit gaming state In the case of non-specific 10R (left) normal big hit, while controlling to a high probability short-time state after the end, the main character will fail to judge the bad character in all of the multiple performances, and the big hit After the game state ends, the low probability time-short state is controlled. In this way, in the probability variation bonus production, since the production of whether or not the hero character succeeds in judging the villain character is executed a plurality of times (four times), there is an opportunity for the hero character to succeed in judging the villain character. It is possible to increase the expectation that the high probability time-short state will be controlled after the end of the big hit gaming state.

Further, in the normal mode described above, specific 2 10R (right) probability variation big hit and specific 3 15
When the R (right) rank-up probability variable big hit is reached, it is difficult to determine whether it is controlled to 10R big hit gaming state or 15R big hit gaming state by the start of the big hit gaming state, and the second attacker unit 2550 The jackpot gaming state using the two opening / closing members 2553 is started, but as a game effect in the jackpot gaming state executed until the 10R jackpot gaming state is finished, the 15R jackpot gaming after the end of the 10R jackpot gaming state is performed. A rank-up effect is determined as to whether or not to continue control until the state. In this rank-up effect, for example, an effect of whether or not the object detection unit 2530 succeeds in destroying a predetermined number of enemy characters displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 by detecting the movement of the player's hand. Execute and specify 3
In the case of 15R (right) rank-up probability variable big hit, by successfully destroying a predetermined number of enemy characters, the big hit gaming state is continuously controlled to the 15R big hit gaming state, while the specific 2 10R (Right) In the case of a promising big hit, control is made to end the big hit gaming state in the 10R big hit gaming state by failing to destroy a predetermined number of enemy characters.

In the normal mode described above, the specific 4 10R (left) probability variation big hit and the non-specific 10
When R (left) is a normal big hit, it is difficult to determine whether or not to control to a high probability short-time state (probability change state) after the end of the 10R big hit gaming state until the start of the 10R big hit gaming state. 10R jackpot gaming state using 2100 opening / closing member 2106 is started, but as a game effect in the jackpot gaming state that is executed until the 10R jackpot gaming state ends, a high probability after the 10R jackpot gaming state ends Probability challenge effect of whether to control to the short time state is executed. In this probability change challenge production, for example, the liquid crystal display device 1
If the door operation is successfully opened by rotating the dial operation unit 401 according to the instruction displayed on the screen 900, and if it is a specific 4 10R (left) probability variation big hit, By successfully opening the door, it is controlled to a high-probability short-time state after the end of the 10R jackpot gaming state, whereas when it is a non-specific 10R (left) normal jackpot, the door opening fails. After the end of the 10R big hit gaming state, the low probability time short state is controlled.

Further, in the above-described normal time mode, when a specific 6R (left) latent probability variation big hit is achieved, the high probability non-time-short state is controlled until the big hit is reached again after the 10R big hit gaming state. In addition, in the case of a small hit, since the gaming state at the time of the small hit is continuously controlled after the end of the small hit gaming state, In this case, after the small hit gaming state set equal to the 10R big hit gaming state, the low probability non-time-short state is controlled. In this way, when the 10R (left) latency probability change big hit or small hit of the specific 6 is reached, the control is controlled to the non-time-short state both after the end of the 10R big hit gaming state or after the end of the small hit gaming state. However, as the effect mode that is executed after the end of the 10R big hit gaming state or after the end of the small hit gaming state, the probability variation latent mode in which it is difficult to determine whether the state is a high probability state is executed. In addition, the probability variation latency mode is set with two types of production modes, the probability variation latency A mode and the probability variation latency B mode, and is higher when entering the probability variation latency A mode than when entering the probability variation latency B mode. The degree of expectation that is a probability state is set to be high. That is, when the low probability non-time-short state is controlled,
In the case of 0R (left) latent probability variation big hit, the probability of determining the probability variation latent A mode out of the probability variation latent A mode and the probability variation latent B mode is higher than in the case of small hit.

In the probability variation latent A mode described above, for example, the object detection means 2530 detects the movement of the player's hand, and by moving away the enemy characters displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 one after another, the ally character If it is a big hit, it will control the big hit gaming state according to the type of the big hit by succeeding in saving the ally's character. On the other hand, when it comes off, control is made so that the enemy characters are only rejected one after another, or the ally characters fail to be rescued. Further, in the probability variation latent B mode described above, for example, the liquid crystal display device 1900 performs an effect as to whether or not the ally character succeeds in capturing the enemy character,
In the case of a big hit, the teammate's character succeeds in capturing the enemy character, so that the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state according to the type of the big hit. Control is performed so that the character cannot find an enemy character, or even if an ally character finds an enemy character, it fails to be captured.

Further, when the type of jackpot is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of jackpot is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, when a specific 1 15R (right) probability variation jackpot is determined, the first special symbol 15R (right) probability variation jackpot symbol is determined, and when a specific 2 10R (right) probability variation jackpot is determined. Is determined to be the 1R special symbol 10R (Right) probability variation jackpot design, and if it is determined to be a specific 3 15R (Right) rank increase probability variation jackpot, it is determined to be the first special symbol 15R (Right) rank increase probability variation jackpot symbol. If the 10R (left) probability variation jackpot of the specific 4 is determined, the 10R (left) probability variation jackpot of the first special symbol is determined, and if the 10R (left) probability variation jackpot of the specific 6 is determined, the second The 10R (left) latent probability variation jackpot symbol of one special symbol is determined, and if it is determined to be a non-specific 10R (left) normal jackpot, it is determined to be a 15R normal jackpot symbol of the first special symbol. On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S121, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S124). If the small hit flag is set, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped. Is determined as a small hit design (step S
125) If the small hit flag is not set, it is determined that the first special symbol is not used as a variation stop mode (step S126).

After the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, as the processing of step S127, these lottery results (indicating either the type of big hit, the small hit, the reach out of the reach, or the outage (stop symbol of the first special symbol) The determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that the above-mentioned control method is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010. Thereafter, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82) as the process of step S128, the process is terminated. The peripheral control MPU 4140a controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the received determination result notification command and variation pattern command.

Specifically, the peripheral control MPU 4140a sets a specific 1R 15R (right) probability change from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) at which the decoration symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is stopped. When a big hit is specified, 15R (right) probability variation big hit symbol (
The combination of the same decorative design of “gold” is determined, and when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is used as the liquid crystal display device 19.
The display is controlled to 00. As described above, the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is “
When the combination of the same decorative design of "gold" stops variably, it is specified from the stop design of the decorative design 1
15R (right) is a promising big hit with the largest number of rounds and a big prize opening 2103
15R using the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 that makes it easy to win a game ball
It is possible to determine that the acquisition of the big hit gaming state is confirmed.

In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a identifies a specific 10R (right) probable big hit out of the big hits from the received judgment result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) when the decoration symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 are stopped. 10R (right) probability variation big hit symbol ("1")
, “3”, “5”, “7” odd number of the same decorative design), and if 3R 15R (right) rank up probability variation big hit is specified among the big wins, 15R (right) Rank up probability variation big hit symbol ("1", "3", "5", "7" odd number of the same decorative symbols combination.
10R (right) common with the probable big hit symbol), and the stop symbol determined when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1.
The display is controlled to 900. As described above, when the combination of the same odd number of “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” as the decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 stops changing, the decorative symbols are stopped. However, it is not possible to determine either the specific 2 10R (right) probability variation big hit or the specific 3 15R (right) rank up probability variation big hit.
It can be determined that the control is made to the high probability state after the 15R big hit gaming state or the 10R big hit gaming state using the zero opening / closing member 2106.

In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a identifies a specific 10R (left) probable big hit out of the big hits from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) when the decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 are stopped. In the case of 10R (left) probability variation big hit symbol ("2"
, “4”, “6”, the same combination of decorative designs)
When 5R (left) rank-up probability variation jackpot is specified, 15R (left) rank-up probability variation jackpot symbol ("2", "4", "6" combination of the same decorative symbols. 10R (left) probability variation If the non-specific 10R (left) normal big hit is specified among the big hits, the 10R (left) normal big hit symbols ("2", "4", "6") are the same 10R (left) common with the probable big hit symbol), and the stop symbol determined when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device. The display is controlled to 1900. As described above, when the combination of the same decorative symbols of even numbers “2”, “4”, and “6” as the decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is stopped variably, the specified symbols are selected from the stopped symbols of the decorative symbols. 10R (Left) Probability big hit, specific 5R 15R (Left)
Either the rank-up probability variation big hit or the non-specific 10R (left) normal big hit cannot be determined, and the 10R big hit gaming state (or 15R big hit gaming state) using the second opening / closing member 2553 of the second attacker unit 2550 It is not possible to determine whether or not to control to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state until the effect result in is derived.

Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines the 10R (left) latent probability variation big hit of the specific 6 out of the big hits from the received judgment result notification command as a mode (stopped symbol) when the decoration symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 are stopped. When specified, the 10R (left) latency probability variation jackpot symbol (a combination (decoration) of predetermined decorative symbols out of the missing symbols. Specifically, “357”.
"Decoration symbol combination" and when a small hit is specified, a small hit symbol (a combination of predetermined decorative symbols out of the missing symbols (split eyes). 10R (left) latency probability variation big hit symbol and When the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect), the liquid crystal display device 1900 controls display of the determined stop symbol. As described above, when the combination of the decorative symbol “357” as the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 stops variably, any one of the 10R (left) latent probability variation big hit or the small hit from the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is selected. 10R big hit gaming state using the second opening / closing member 2553 of the second attacker unit 2550 (10 in a mode in which a game ball is difficult to enter)
Whether or not the liquid crystal display device 1400 controls the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state in order to execute a game effect in which it is difficult to determine whether or not the high probability state is reached in the liquid crystal display device 1400. Cannot be determined.

In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a, as an aspect at the time of stopping the variation of the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 (stop symbol), if the reach error is specified from the received determination result notification command, the symbol with loss is included. (The combination of decorative designs that are not the same. However, the left and right decorative designs are the same.) If the outlier is specified, it is a detachable design that does not involve reach (a combination of decorative designs that are not the same. However, the left and right decorative designs. Are not identical)
When the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

FIG. 208 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S82).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 208, the main control MPU 4 of the main control board 4100
100a, if the big hit flag is set (step S141), the type of big hit determined in step S123 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process, and the variation pattern table at the time of the big hit according to the current gaming state (illustration) (No) (step S142) If the small hit flag is set (step S143), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the small hit according to the current gaming state is selected (step S144), If the reach flag is set (step S145), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach according to the current gaming state is selected (step S146), and any of the big hit flag, the small hit flag, and the reach flag is selected. Is also not set, that is, a normal deviation (out of reach execution) That in the case selects the off time of the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) (step S147).

Then, a variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S).
148), a variation pattern command for notifying the peripheral control board 4010 to start the determined variation pattern is set, and variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 is started (step S149). ). Further, the main control MPU 4100a sets a variation time set corresponding to the variation pattern determined to determine the variation pattern in the variation timer (step S150). As a result, the effect control is performed in the first special symbol display 1185 and the liquid crystal display device 1900 for the variation time thus determined.

  A plurality of types of variation pattern tables are provided for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). The variation patterns set in each variation pattern table include a plurality of variation time information indicating predetermined times (variation times) required for variation display control of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). Each variable random number is stored in association with each other. Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a selects the variation pattern table selected from the plurality of types of variation pattern tables corresponding to the determination result based on the special random number and the design random number, and the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process. And the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number is obtained from this table, thereby determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The variation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 4100a.

In addition, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach in this example, similarly to the above-described prior determination table,
It is set to determine the type of reach effect to be executed by comparing a determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with a variable random number. Specifically, 164 types of variable random numbers coincide with a determination value (0-163) indicating that any one of the normal reach effects is executed, and 59 types of variable random numbers are any of the super reach effects with a low expectation degree of jackpot. Match with a determination value (164-222) indicating execution of, and match with a determination value (223-240) indicating that one of the 18 kinds of variable random numbers executes one of the super-reaching effects having a high expectation degree of jackpot As described above, the above random numbers are associated with each other. The super reach production has a higher degree of expectation of jackpot than the normal reach production, and when the super reach production is executed, the player's degree of expectation for the big hit gaming state is increased.

When the variable display control of the first special symbol is started, it is next determined in step S151 whether or not the counter value of the short time counter in which the short time state continuation number is set is “0”. To do. If the counter value is not “0”, the time counter is counted down (step S152), and it is further determined whether the counter value of the simultaneous short counter is “0” (step S153). . As a result, the counter value is "
If it is “0”, a time reduction end flag indicating that the control of the time reduction state is ended is set (
Step S154).

If it is determined in the process of step S151 that the counter value of the time reduction counter is “0”, or if it is determined in the process of step S153 that the time reduction counter is not “0”, At the time, the process proceeds to step S155. Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol variation processing (step S83) (step S155), the processing is terminated.

FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S83).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 209, the main control MPU 410 of the main control board 4100.
First, as a process in step S171, 0a is a lottery process (
1 is a variation timer in which the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in step S82) is set.
Subtract. If it is determined that the variation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery variation time has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, in the process of step S173, the first special symbol stop process (step S84).
When the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to (), the process is terminated.

FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 211, the main control MPU 410 of the main control board 4100
First, as a process of step S181, 0a performs display control for causing the first special symbol display 641 to display the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process, and the liquid crystal display. A stop display command that instructs the apparatus 1900 to derive and display the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first special symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 4010 (step S182).

Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 resets the time reduction end flag when the time reduction end flag is set (step S183) (
Step S184), the time reduction flag is reset (Step S185). As a result, the control in the low-probability short-time state is terminated and the control in the low-probability non-short-time state (normal state) is started.

Further, when the big hit flag is set (step S186), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets a big hit start command indicating that the big hit gaming state is started (step S187). Wait time to start state (
Set the interval timer to the time when the big hit gaming state is displayed)
Step S188). Then, the big hit running flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is being executed is set and the time-short flag is reset (step S189), and the first special symbol process flag is set to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value. When the process is updated so as to be transferred (step S190), this process is terminated. The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010. The jackpot type (15R (right) per high probability short-time, 10R (right) per high-probability short-time, 15R (right) rank-up high-probability short-time Hit,
10R (left) per high probability short time, 15R (left) rank up per high probability short time 10R (left)
High probability non-short-time per 10R (left) low probability short-time per) is prepared individually. In step S187, the type of jackpot (15R (right) per high probability short-time, 10R (right) per high-probability short-time, 15R (right) rank-up per high-probability short-time, 10R (left) per high-probability short-time, 15
R (Left) Rank Up High Probability Short / Short, 10R (Left) High Probability Non-Short Per Short, 10R (Left) Low Probability Short / Short) Right) High probability short-time start command, 15R (right) Rank up high-probability short-time start command, 10R (left) High-probability short-time start command, 15R (left) Rank-up high-probability short-time start command, 10R (left) High probability non-short-time start command, 10R (left)
Set low probability short time start command). Thereby, the effect of the big hit gaming state according to the type of the big hit instructed by the big hit start command is executed by the liquid crystal display device 1900, the lamp / LED and the speakers 130, 222, 262 and the like.

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is set (step S191), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets a small hit start command indicating that the small hit gaming state is started (step S192). , The waiting time until the start of the small hit gaming state (
Set the interval timer to the time when the small hit game state is displayed)
Step S193). Then, a small hitting execution flag indicating that the small hitting gaming state is being executed is set (step S194), and the first special symbol process flag is shifted to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value. When updated to (step S190), this process is terminated. The small hitting start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010. In step S195, the small hitting start command is set, so that the effect of the small hitting gaming state instructed by the small hitting start command is liquid crystal. It is executed by the display device 1900, lamps / LEDs, speakers 130, 222, 262, and the like.

[6. Peripheral control board control processing]
Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 will be described. FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for control performed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

As shown in FIG. 211, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU 4
140a performs an initial setting process (step S501). In the initial setting process, a process of clearing the RAM of the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S501) ends, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set is started (step S502).

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4140a generates an interrupt every 2 ms,
2 ms steady processing is executed. In the 2 ms steady process, a process of counting up the 16 ms progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 ms progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms progress monitoring counter reaches 8, that is, 16 ms elapses While the flag T is set, a 16 ms progress monitoring counter is reset (set to 0). Thus, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set to “1” every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady process.
"Is set (set), and is normally set (reset) to" 0 ". Step S50
When the 16 ms elapsed flag is set at 2 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “1”), the 16 ms elapsed flag is reset (step S503), and then the 16 ms steady process is performed (step S504).

In the 16 ms steady process, a process for controlling the liquid crystal display device 1900, the lamp / LED, the speakers 130, 222, 262, and the like based on a command received from the main control board 4100 is executed. When the 16 ms steady process ends, the process returns to step S502 again,
Every time the s progress flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms, the above-described steps S503 to S504 are repeated. On the other hand, if the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set in step S502 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “0”), the loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

FIG. 212 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a 16 ms steady process executed every 16 ms in the sub main process. In the 16 ms steady process, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes the processes of step S601 to step S606. In the command analysis process in step S601, the command received from the main control board 4100 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S602, the variation pattern setting process (step S147 of the first variation pattern setting process).
The liquid crystal display device 1900 is based on the fact that the variation pattern command transmitted by being set in the process corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process (second variation pattern setting process) of the second special symbol process is received. The control process related to is executed.

In the sound control process in step S603, a control process related to the speakers 130, 222, and 262 is executed. In the lamp control process of step S604, a control process related to lamps / LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process in step S605,
A process of transmitting a lamp / LED lighting signal to the lamp driving substrate 3013 is executed. In the random number update process in step S606, a process of updating random numbers (for example, pre-read random numbers) used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) is executed.

In addition, the process of step S601-step S606 in 16ms regular process is 16m
Finish within s. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady process to the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process is immediately executed from the beginning when the 16 ms has elapsed since the start of the 16 ms steady process (command of step S601). Do not execute (from analysis process). That is, when 16 ms elapses during execution of the 16 ms steady process,
Only the ms elapse flag is set, and after the 16 ms steady process ends, step S502 is performed.
When it is determined that the 16 ms elapsed flag is set, the 16 ms steady process is started.

Further, in this embodiment, random number update processing (step S606) in 16 ms steady processing.
However, the timing (timing) for updating the various random numbers is not limited to this. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop process in the sub-main process and the 16 ms steady process.

[7. Melody reach]
Next, the winning type notification executed during the variable display will be described. In this example, the game state (effect mode) executed after the jackpot gaming state is executed based on the fact that the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed in the variation display during execution is output from the speakers 130, 222, 262, etc. during the variation display. It is suggested by the voice mode. This will be described in detail below.

As described above, during the high-probability time-short state, the shift control to the probability changing mode is performed. Then, when controlled in this probability changing mode, the peripheral control MPU 4140a controls the background color of the liquid crystal display device 1900 to be red, and continuously outputs a predetermined special voice mode. Therefore, the player can grasp that the high-probability time-short state is controlled by determining whether or not the special voice mode is output.

In this example, the variation pattern for executing “Melody Reach” (for example, “Melody Reach Probability Big Hit”, which executes “Melody Reach”, and “Melody Reach” executes “Melody Reach”, and “Melody Reach” executes “Melody Reach” as a latent probability change big hit. `` Reach latency probability change big hit '', `` Melody reach ''
Voice mode that is output during the variable display that is executed when the “melody reach normal big hit”, which is a normal big hit by executing “,” and the “melody reach out”, which is a wrong after executing “melody reach” is received As a special voice mode that is intermittently output during the high-probability short-time state (probability changing mode) control (for example, a part of the special voice mode (for example, the first half or number 1)) And may be completely the same as the special voice mode), and if the result of the fluctuation display is a big hit, the fluctuation display based on the fluctuation pattern other than “melody reach” is executed and the big hit Compared to the case, after the big hit gaming state is finished, the transition control to a high probability time-short state (probability changing mode) is performed at a high rate, and when the “melody reach” is executed, the big hit gaming state ends. Ratio to be controlled with a high probability time reduction state (probability variation in mode) notifying that higher than the ratio that is controlled in other gaming state (directed mode other than the probability variation in mode).

Specifically, it is determined to be a big hit in the jackpot determination process (step S81), and the special symbol stop symbol setting process (first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81), second special symbol stop symbol setting process) After the big hit game state is finished, the probability change big hit that controls to the high probability short-time state (for example, 15R (right) positive change big hit, 10R (right) positive change big hit, 15R (right) rank up positive change big hit, 10R (left) positive change big hit, 15R (left ) If the rank-up probability variation big hit is determined, it will be a big hit (for example, 10R (left) latency probability variable big hit, 10R (left) normal big hit) which is controlled to a gaming state other than the high probability short-time state after the big hit gaming state ends. Compared to the case, execute “melody reach” in the above variation pattern setting processing (first variation pattern setting processing, second variation pattern setting processing). Ratio the change pattern setting process to be higher for determining the dynamic pattern (first shift pattern setting process (step S82), the second change pattern setting process) constitutes a variation pattern table used in. In this way, high probability short-time state (
By outputting a voice mode similar to the special voice mode that is output in (probably changing mode) when a specific fluctuation display is executed, the player can easily arouse a high probability time-short state (probably changing mode) Expectations for short-term probability (probability mode) are improved.

The special voice mode is composed of “intro”, “A melody”, and “rust”. When a variation pattern for executing “melody reach” is received, the variation display of the decorative symbol is displayed as shown in FIG. The above-mentioned “intro” is output at the time of starting, and the right decorative symbol that is variably displayed at the timing when the “intro” is terminated is stopped and displayed at the same symbol as the left decorative symbol to generate reach. Then, the above “A melody” is output when the “melody reach” reach production is started, and usually the medium decoration symbol that is variably displayed at the timing of ending the “A melody” is stopped and displayed, and the display result is derived and displayed. .

On the other hand, when executing a reach development effect that has a higher percentage of jackpots than the executed reach effect, that is, executing a “melody development reach” that has a higher percentage of jackpots than the variation pattern that executes “melody reach”. When the variation pattern to be received is received, “A melody” is terminated at the timing of ending the reach effect as shown in FIG. 213, and “rust” is output when the reach development effect is started. Then, the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed at the timing when the “rust” is finished, and the display result is derived and displayed. When a variation pattern for executing “Melody Development Reach” is received, the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped (slowly changes up and down and is not completely stopped) in synchronization with the end of “A melody”. Thus, the medium decorative symbol may be re-variably displayed at the timing of starting the output of “rust”.

As described above, in this example, the larger the number of the configuration modes output in the variable display among the special audio modes including the plurality of configuration modes of “Intro”, “A melody”, and “Crust”, the ratio of the big hit ("Melody reach" has a higher percentage of big hits (expectation for big hits) than "Melody reach"). More specifically, the melody development expectation of “Melody Reach” jackpot expectation {(appearance rate of “per melody reach”) / (appearance rate of “out of melody reach” + appearance rate of “per melody reach”)} The above fluctuation so that the expectation of big hit of “reach” {(appearance rate of “per melody development reach”) / (appearance rate of “out of melody development reach” + appearance rate of “per melody development reach”)} is higher A variation pattern table used in pattern setting processing (first variation pattern setting processing (step S82), second variation pattern setting processing) is configured. Therefore, the expectation for the big hit and the expectation for the high probability short-time state can be improved as the configuration of the special display mode is switched.

Further, in this example, when a big hit is made in the variable display in which “melody reach” is executed, the transition control to the high probability short-time state is always performed after the big hit gaming state is finished. Specifically, it is determined to be a big hit in the jackpot determination process (step S81), and the special symbol stop symbol setting process (first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81), second special symbol stop symbol setting process)
The melody reach is executed by the above variation pattern setting process (first variation pattern setting process, second variation pattern setting process) only when the probability variation big hit that controls to the high probability short-time state after the big hit gaming state is determined. In the case of a big hit that is controlled to a gaming state other than the high-probability short-time state after the big hit gaming state ends, the fluctuation pattern for executing “melody reach” is not decided. Therefore, when “melody reach” is executed, the expectation for the high-probability time-short state can be improved and attention can be paid to the variable display during execution.

In addition, even when the big display is a big hit in the variability display in which “melody reach” is performed, after the big hit gaming state, the transition control to a gaming state other than the high probability short-time state may be performed. In this case, the “melody reach” It is configured so that the rate of transition control to the high probability short-time state after the big hit gaming state is higher than when the big hit in the variable display executed by other reach when the big display is a big hit. May be. Specifically, it is determined to be a big hit in the jackpot determination process (step S81), and the special symbol stop symbol setting process (first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81), second special symbol stop symbol setting process) `` Melody Reach '' not only when the probability is changed to a high probability short-time control after the big hit gaming state, but also when the big hit is controlled to a gaming state other than the high probability short-time state after the big hit gaming state. `` Melody reach reach '' at a higher rate than `` Melody reach ''. In the variation pattern setting process (first variation pattern setting process (step S82), second variation pattern setting process) to be selected It may constitute a variation pattern table use.

Further, in this case, the larger the number of configuration modes output in the variable display among the special audio modes consisting of a plurality of configuration modes of “Intro”, “A melody”, and “Crust”, the bigger the hit. In some cases, the ratio of controlling to the high probability short time state after the big hit gaming state may be increased. Specifically, when controlling to a high probability time-short state after the big hit gaming state ends, the above variation pattern setting process (first variation pattern setting) is performed so that “melody development reach” is selected at a higher rate than “melody reach”. Process (step S82), second variation pattern setting process)
The variation pattern table used in the above may be configured. Thereby, the expectation for the high-probability short-time state can be improved as the special display mode is switched.

Furthermore, in this example, “melody reach” that outputs the same voice mode as the special voice mode that is output in the high-probability time-short state is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the low-probability non-time-short state (normal mode) A voice mode that is output in a low-probability non-short-time state (normal mode) when the “normal melody reach” is executed during the variable display and a big hit is made by executing the same voice mode as that output in Low probability after the big hit gaming state at a higher rate (including those controlled to the low probability non-time-short state (normal mode)) at a higher rate than when the other hits that do not output during the fluctuation display is executed A voice mode similar to a voice mode output in a non-time-short state (normal mode) or a low-probability time-short state (time-short mode) is output during the fluctuation display.
Low probability time-short state (time-short-medium mode)
The jackpot game at a higher rate (including those controlled to a low probability short-time state (time-short-medium mode)) than when a big hit was made by executing another reach that does not output during the fluctuation display Control to a low probability short-time state after completion of the state, high probability non-short-time state (probability latent mode)
A voice mode that is output in a high-probability non-short-time state (probability variation latency mode) when the “latent melody reach” that outputs a voice mode similar to the voice mode that is output at the time of the fluctuation display is executed High probability non-short-time state (probability change) after the big hit gaming state at a higher rate (including those that are controlled to high probability non-time-short state) at a higher rate (including those controlled to high probability non-time-short state) by executing other reach that does not output during fluctuation display It may be possible to execute what is controlled in the (latent mode).

In the high-probability non-time-short state and the low-probability non-time-short state, control is made to the probability-variation latent mode in a mode (so-called latent probability change) in which it is difficult to determine whether the control is in the high-probability non-time-short state or the low-probability non-time-short state. There is a case. In this case, a higher rate than when a big hit is made by executing another reach that does not output during the variable display of the voice mode output in the probability variation latent mode when “latent melody reach” is executed and a big hit is achieved ( It is output in the normal mode when it is controlled to the high probability non-time-short state after the big hit gaming state is finished or the “normal melody reach” is executed and the big hit is achieved. High probability non-short time after the big hit gaming state at a higher rate (including those controlled to low probability non-time short state) at a higher rate (including those controlled to low probability non-time short state) (For example, when the latent probability variation big hit is controlled to a high probability non-time-short state after the big hit gaming state ends, the normal big hit is controlled to the low probability non-time short state after the big hit gaming state ends. Execute `` latent melody reach '' at a higher rate than usual, or control to low probability non-time-short state after big hit gaming state, when normal big hit, control latent probability variable big hit to control to high probability non-time-short state after big hit gaming state The “normal melody reach” may be carried out at a higher rate than when As a result, when a big hit is made with "Hidden Melody Reach", it is controlled to a probabilistic latent mode where it is difficult to determine whether it is controlled to a high probability non-time short state or a low probability non-time short state after the big hit gaming state. However, it is possible to recognize that the state is a high probability non-time-short state or a high probability of being controlled to the high probability non-time-short state, and the expectation for the big hit gaming state can be improved. In addition, when “Hidden Melody Reach” is executed, it is highly likely that the player is in a high probability non-time-short state after the jackpot gaming state ends or is controlled to a high probability non-time-short state. Hopefully, the game entertainment will improve.

Further, in this case, the larger the number of configuration modes output in the variable display among the special audio modes consisting of a plurality of configuration modes of “Intro”, “A melody”, and “Crust”, the bigger the hit. In some cases, the ratio of controlling to the high probability non-short-time state after the big hit gaming state may be increased. Specifically, in the case of controlling to the high probability non-short-time state after the big hit gaming state, the variation pattern setting process (first variation pattern) is selected so that “melody development reach” is selected at a higher rate than “melody reach”. You may comprise the fluctuation pattern table used by a setting process (step S82) and a 2nd fluctuation pattern setting process. Special display mode that is switched during variable display that is a big hit even if it is controlled to the probability variation latent mode where it is difficult to determine whether it is controlled to high probability non-time short state or low probability non-time short state by this It can be recognized that there is a high possibility of being controlled to a high probability non-time-short state, and the expectation for the big hit gaming state can be improved.

Also, in this example, the configuration mode switching time and the production switching time (the occurrence of reach, the end of the reach production (stop display of the medium decoration symbol when the reach development production is not executed), the end of the reach development production (medium decoration design) The display of the special voice mode can be easily recognized by the player, such as switching of effects, occurrence of reach, and derivation display of display results. Since the mode and the content of the production are made to correspond one-to-one, the player can grasp the content of the production from the configuration mode of the special voice mode that is output without viewing the content displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is possible (for example, when “A melody” is output, it is possible to grasp that the reach effect is being executed).

In this way, in this example, even if the display content of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is not visually recognized, it is suggested that the mode is controlled to the probability changing mode after the big hit gaming state by naturally changing the sound mode that comes in from the ear. Therefore, not only the player who is visually recognizing the liquid crystal display device 1900 but also the player who has diverted his / her line of sight from the liquid crystal display device 1900 can surely recognize that the “melody reach” variable display is being executed. For example, it is possible to prevent a problem of oversight that occurs when some information is suggested by display contents such as displaying a character or the like on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Further, by recognizing that a player who has diverted his / her line of sight from the liquid crystal display device 1900 is executing “melody reach”, attention is paid to the display contents of the liquid crystal display device 1900 with expectation for the big hit gaming state. Can do.

In this example, the special voice mode composed of the plurality of configuration modes is used, but a special voice mode consisting of one configuration mode may be used. In this case, it may be configured such that the longer the output period of the special sound mode is, the higher the percentage of jackpots is, and the output of the special sound mode is terminated and restarted in synchronization with the changeover timing of the effect. May be.

In the above-described example, the game state after the big hit gaming state is suggested by the voice type that is output during the variable display, but the period for outputting the voice mode that suggests the gaming state after the big hit gaming state ends. The time period and time are not limited to those described above. A part of the variable display (for example, from the start of the variable display to the generation of reach, any one of the reach production, the reach development production, or any A plurality of combinations) may be executed.

Also, if the result of this variable display is a big hit, it is not limited to suggesting the gaming state after the big hit gaming state, but if the result of the variable display executed after the next is a big hit, You may make it suggest the game state to which transfer control is carried out after the state ends. More specifically, when it is determined that the probable big hit that is controlled to a high-probability time-short state after the big hit gaming state is finished in the effect pre-determination process (steps S45 and S55) executed when the start win is generated, the change display based on the start win is displayed. Start winning prize that was determined to be a promising big hit in the production pre-determination process after executing the melody reach for a single variability display before the start or multiple varieties of variability display. In the variable display based on the above, a variable display that is a big hit may be executed in a mode other than “melody reach” or “melody reach”. In addition, when it is determined that a big hit other than a probable big hit that is controlled to a high-probability time-short state after the big hit gaming state is finished in the effect pre-determination process (steps S45 and S55), the start is also performed at a predetermined rate. You may make it perform the fluctuation | variation display which performs "melody reach" in the fluctuation | variation display before starting the fluctuation | variation display based on a prize, and runs off. Also, in this case, the rate at which “melody reach” is executed in the variable display based on the start prize is lower than the rate at which “melody reach” is executed in the variable display based on the start prize determined to be a probable big hit. By configuring, when a big hit is made when “Melody Reach” is executed, the rate of shifting control to the probability changing mode after the big hit gaming state can be made higher than the rate of shifting control to another effect mode .

Further, in the above example, an object indicating the game state (effect mode) after the end of the big hit game state is shown by the sound mode output from the speakers 130, 222, 262, etc. during the variable display, but a specific effect mode ( For example, at least one of means for performing effects other than the liquid crystal display device 1900 (for example, a speaker, a movable body, a lamp / LED, etc.) during the probability changing mode)
May be a part of the mode executed during the specific production mode (for example, the first half, etc.) or completely the mode executed during the specific production mode. May be executed during variable display. When the game state (effect mode) after the big hit game state is suggested by the light emission mode of the lamp / LED (for example, light emission color or blinking pattern; special light emission mode) Even when the game state (effect mode) after the big hit game state is suggested by a movable body that moves only during the mode (special movable mode), the variable display related to the specific effect mode is executed. Can be easily recognized by the player.

As described above, in this example, during the probability changing mode (high probability time-short state), the probability changing mode (
An effect that emphasizes that the state is a high-probability short-time state (in this example, a special voice mode is output intermittently (repetitively)) is executed. In this way, the effect executed during the probability changing mode (high probability short-time state) is imprinted on the player's mind, and this effect and the probability changing mode (high probability time-short state) are strongly associated with each other and stored. When an effect executed during (high probability short-time state) is executed, it is possible to immediately recall the probability changing mode (high probability short-time state). In addition, in this example, the special voice mode is output intermittently (repeatedly) as an effect emphasizing that it is in the probability changing mode (high probability short-time state). Anything that performs an effect emphasizing that it is in a short time state, for example, lamp LE
Any one of D light emission mode (for example, emission color and blinking pattern), movable mode of movable body (for example, movable body that can move only during high-probability short-time state), speaker voice mode (special voice mode), etc.
One or any combination (all may be executed) may be executed.

In addition, in the case of suggesting by the planar display mode of the liquid crystal display device 1900, it is difficult for the player to notice that it is suggested that the display content is not watched, but the player naturally enters the ear as in this example. Liquid crystal display depending on the mode of movement of the movable body that is easy to notice the movement if it is in the field of view by physically operating the three-dimensional shaped object that comes in, the light emission mode of the lamp and LED that naturally enters the eye Even if the display content of the device 1900 is not closely watched, the player feels uncomfortable and is controlled to be different from the normal mode. As a result, it is controlled to the same mode as that executed during a specific performance mode. You can easily notice that you are.

In other words, even for a player who plays a game on the gaming machine for the first time or a player who does not know the contents of the rendering of the gaming machine, the transition control to the high probability state is performed and the probability changing mode is controlled. The voice mode output in an advantageous state can be informed by listening to the voice mode output from the gaming machine that has output a lot of prize balls by outputting a different voice mode. And if the same voice mode as that output in the above-mentioned advantageous state is also output from the gaming machine in which the player is playing, will the gaming machine be in an advantageous state? Can be expected. In addition, since the player does not always keep watching the liquid crystal display device 1900, the player may miss the display on the liquid crystal display device 1900, paying attention to whether or not the game ball wins the start opening 2101 and 2102. Even so, by making the voice mode the same as the voice mode executed during the specific production mode, it is possible to notice that a chance has come to the gaming machine that the player is playing. The display content of the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be noted.

Further, the same effect can be obtained when the light emission mode of the lamp / LED is set to the same light emission mode as that executed during the specific effect mode. In other words, because the transition control to the high probability state is controlled and the mode is changed to the probability changing mode, the light emission of the gaming machine that has acquired a lot of prize balls by controlling the light emission of the lamp / LED in a manner different from other game machines. The lamp L which is executed in an advantageous manner in view of the embodiment
If you know the light emission mode of ED, I want to be in that state as a player psychology. In this state, when a gaming machine that is suddenly playing is controlled to emit light in the same manner as the lighting mode that is executed during a specific production mode, it is expected that the gaming machine that you are playing will have a chance. To do. For example, during an effect mode other than the specific effect mode, the lamps / LEDs provided mainly on the game board 4 are controlled to emit light, and during the specific effect mode, the lamps / LEDs provided on the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are controlled. Control light emission over a wide range of lamps and LEDs provided, increase the brightness of the lamps and LEDs during a specific production mode than during a production mode other than a specific production mode,
During certain production modes, lamps are
LED flashes, or during a specific production mode, the flash color is more flashy than during a production mode other than the specific production mode (for example, a red emission color during a specific production mode and a blue or other color in other production modes) And so on, it is possible to make a player who has not seen the liquid crystal display device 1900 aware of it and to pay attention to the display content of the liquid crystal display device 1900 again. It is possible to appeal that the three parties are controlled in a specific production mode.

Further, the same effect can be obtained when the movable mode of the movable body is the same as the movable mode executed during the specific effect mode. That is, the movable mode of the gaming machine in which the movable body is controlled to move in a manner different from other gaming machines by shifting to the high probability state and controlled in the probability changing mode, and thereby acquiring a large amount of prize balls If you know the movable mode of the movable body that is executed in an advantageous state, you will have the desire to be in the same state and suddenly the gaming machine you are playing will be executed during a specific production mode When the movable body is controlled to move in a movable manner similar to the movable manner described above, it is expected that a chance has come to the gaming machine that the player is playing. For example, game area 1100
The movable body that is provided and is moved at a predetermined interval during the rendering mode other than the specific rendering mode, or the movable body that does not move during the rendering mode other than the specific rendering mode overlaps the liquid crystal display device 1900. The player who has not seen the liquid crystal display device 1900 by appearing forward or operating the movable body at a shorter interval during the specific effect mode than during the effect modes other than the specific effect mode. In addition, it is possible to notice that something is happening and to pay attention to the display content of the liquid crystal display device 1900 again, and to appeal to a third party that the display mode is controlled to a specific performance mode.

Further, unlike the display content of the flat liquid crystal display device 1900, it is suggested by the sound mode, the operation mode of the movable body, and the light emission mode, so that the control mode of these effect means in other game machines can be easily visually confirmed. Can grasp the control mode of the production means by visually recognizing the control state of other gaming machines in the specific production mode, and suddenly the production means is in the specific production mode in a state other than the specific production mode When it is controlled in the same manner as the control mode, it can be expected that it will be controlled to a specific production mode, and the game entertainment will be improved.

In this way, by controlling the production means that makes it easy for a third party to recognize the drive state to a mode similar to the mode executed during the specific production mode, the special production mode is entered when a big hit is achieved. In order to suggest that the rate of transition is high (or to transition to a specific performance mode), it is possible to receive a look of envy by executing the performance and give the player a sense of superiority.

Also, it is said that such an effect is desired to be executed on one's own gaming machine by visually recognizing that the effect means is controlled in the same manner as that executed in a specific effect mode in another game machine. Along with giving a strong desire, you can give yourself a desire to immerse yourself in a sense of superiority.

In addition, the above-mentioned performance is further improved by suggesting that after the end of the big hit gaming state, it is controlled to a more advantageous state (a state in which the expected value of winning a prize ball is high) among a plurality of types of gaming states. It is also possible to plan. For example, when controlling to the probability changing mode (high probability short-time state) after the big hit gaming state is finished, the big hit gaming state (the number of rounds in which the winning ball can be obtained is larger) Control to a large number of big hit gaming states (for example, a big hit gaming state in which the total number of prize balls paid out in the big hit gaming state is higher, such as 15R big hit gaming state when controlling to 5R big hit gaming state and 15R big hit gaming state) When a big hit is made, the same mode as the probability change mode is executed during the fluctuation display (the big hit with a large number of winning balls is higher than the small winning jack with a small number of winning balls in the big hit gaming state) (It may be executed at a rate), and after the jackpot gaming state is finished, the number of times is cut off (when a predetermined number of variable displays are executed, the control in the high probability state is finished) The so-called ST machine, when controlling to the probability changing mode (high probability short-time state), a big hit (for example, 50 times in the probability changing mode) that can display more fluctuations in the probability changing mode (high probability time-short state). When one of the 100 fluctuation displays can be executed, the same mode as that during the probability change mode is executed during the change display when the 100 fluctuation display can be executed (in the probability change mode). A big hit with a large number of variable displays that can be executed may be executed at a higher rate than a big hit with a small number of variable displays that can be executed).

Specifically, if the 15R (right) probability variation is determined in step S123 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process or the corresponding process of the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, the first variation pattern setting process and In the second variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern table is selected by selecting the variation pattern table at the time of 15R (right) probability variation big hit, and “melody reach” is determined in the variation pattern table at the time of 15R (right) probability variation big hit. It is selected when the ratio is determined for another probability variable big hit that is controlled to a big hit gaming state in which the number of winning balls that can be acquired is less than the big hit gaming state executed when the 15R (right) probability variable big hit is reached. Set higher than the fluctuation pattern table (the fluctuation pattern table to be selected when other probable big hits are determined is set to “melody reach”. May also be) as configured not be. 1
5R (Right) In the jackpot gaming state executed when the odd hit is a big hit, the player can acquire a larger number of prize balls than in the jackpot gaming state executed when the other jackpot is hit. The game entertainment can be improved by executing “reach”.

Similarly, in step S123 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process and the corresponding process of the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, the probability variation big hit that can be displayed 100 times in the probability variation mode (high probability short-time state). If determined, the first variation pattern setting process and the second variation pattern setting process are configured to select the variation pattern table at ST100 times big hit and determine the variation pattern. The ratio to be determined as “melody reach” is higher than the variation pattern table selected when the probability variation is determined to be able to display the variation display less than 100 times in the probability variation mode (high probability short-time state). Set (determined to be a probable big hit that can display fluctuation display less than 100 times in the probability changing mode (high probability short-time state) It may also be) as configured not determined variation pattern table is selected in the "melody reach" when it is. In the probability variation big hit (probable short time state) in the probability variation mode, the probability variation big hit that can be executed 100 times of variation display is more likely than the probability variation big hit (for example, 50 times) that can execute the variation display less than 100 times. Since it is highly likely to be performed and is more advantageous to the player, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by executing “Melody Reach”.

In addition, when control is performed in the probability changing middle mode (high-probability short-time state) and a variable display of a predetermined number of times is executed (for example, 50 times), the transition control from the high-probability state to the low-probability state is performed. At this time, the control in the short-time state may be terminated at the same time, and the transition control to the low-probability non-short-time state may be performed. It is also possible to continue to control the transition to the low probability short-time state (until the display of 100 fluctuations is executed later) or until the big hit gaming state is reached again. In this case, the first ST jackpot that controls the shift to the low-probability non-short-time state by simultaneously ending the control of the short-time state when the predetermined number of times of the variable display is executed as the probability-changing mode of frequency cut in this case is determined in advance. If it is configured to control either the second ST jackpot that controls the transition to the low-probability short-time state without ending the control of the short-time state when the variable display is executed for a certain number of times, the first special If the second ST jackpot is determined in step S123 of the symbol stop symbol setting process or the corresponding process of the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, the first ST fluctuation pattern setting process and the second fluctuation pattern setting process change in the second ST jackpot time A variation table is determined by selecting a pattern table, and “melody reach” is determined in the second ST jackpot variation pattern table. The ratio is set to be higher than the variation pattern table selected when other jackpots including the first ST jackpot are determined (the variation pattern table selected when other jackpots including the first ST jackpot are determined). May be configured not to be determined as “melody reach”). In the second ST jackpot, since the variable display of the predetermined number of times is finished and the transition control from the high probability state to the low probability state is continued, the control in the short time state is continued without being finished. As the number of winnings in 2101 and 2102 increases, the chances of winning a lottery increase, and the player is in a more advantageous state. Therefore, the “melody reach” is executed, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the above-described example, at least one of the means for performing effects such as a speaker, a movable body, a lamp / LED, etc. in the same manner as in the specific effect mode during the variable display.
Means for controlling a specific effect mode after the big hit gaming state is finished and performing an effect such as a speaker, a movable body, a lamp / LED, etc. (At least one of the above) shows that the drive control is started in the specific production mode. However, when “Melody Reach” is executed and it is a big hit, the big hit and the big hit gaming state are shown. A mode similar to the mode during the specific performance mode is performed before the transition to the specific mode is performed before the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, and the performance that is difficult for the player to realize that It is also possible to drive control the rendering means. Hereinafter, a description will be given with reference to FIGS. 214 and 215.

The peripheral control MPU 4140a executes “Melody Reach” to control to the 2R big hit gaming state that is open for a short time (about 0.5 seconds), and then shifts to the high probability time-short state Melody Reach 2
When the variation pattern for the R probability variation big hit is received, the variation display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is started, and the output of the voice mode similar to the special voice mode is started from the speakers 130, 222, 262, etc. (FIG. 214 ( A)), a predetermined timing during the variation display of the left, middle and right decorative symbols (in the example shown in FIG. 214 (B), the left and right decorative symbols are stopped at the same symbol and the middle decorative symbols are still stopped. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is suddenly blacked out (the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned off and the display disappears) at the timing when there is no reach (FIG. 214 (FIG. 214)).
C)).

Then, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is blacked out for a predetermined period (for example, 2 to 3 seconds), and then gradually whitened out from the vicinity of the center of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (the liquid crystal display device 190).
The backlight of 0 is turned off (white display is performed) (FIGS. 214D and 214E). Based on the fact that the liquid crystal display device 1900 is completely white-out, “probability change mode entry!” Is displayed. In this way, the player is notified of the transition control to the probability changing mode (high probability short time state) (FIG. 214 (F)), and control of the probability changing mode (high probability time short state) is started (FIG. 2).
14 (G)).

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 215, the prize winning opening is set to 2 during the period from when the liquid crystal display device 1900 is blacked out to gradually whitening out and displaying “probably entering the mode of change in probability!”.
A 2R big hit gaming state that is opened for a short time is executed. In other words, a predetermined effect (in this example, an effect of gradually whitening out the liquid crystal display device 1900 after blacking out) is executed without deriving and displaying the display result of the decorative symbols and without notifying that the big win has occurred. However, by executing the 2R jackpot gaming state during the performance, it is difficult for the player to realize that the 2R jackpot gaming state has been reached. Then, the display result of the decorative symbol is not derived and displayed, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed as “probable change mode entry!”, So that the player can be surprised.

In addition, the voice mode may be the same as the special voice mode (for example, a part of the special voice mode (for example, the first half or No. 1) before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, or is completely the same as the special voice mode. May be output), and then the output of the special voice mode is continued (repeatedly executed) until the control in the probability changing mode ends. Therefore, it is possible to remind the player that the mode of probability variation is being controlled and to recognize that it has been controlled to the mode of probability variation for some time by outputting the special voice mode during the variation display, and it gives unexpectedness and improves the game interest be able to.

In the above example, as shown in FIG. 215, the output of the special voice mode is started when the fluctuation display based on the fluctuation pattern of the melody reach 2R probability variation big hit is started, but during the fluctuation display, that is, the special symbol What is necessary is just to start the output of a special audio | voice form within the period after starting the display of a fluctuation | variation to deriving and displaying the display result of a special symbol.

Further, it may be executed in combination with the execution of the “melody reach” for outputting the special sound mode during the variable display to stop the display of the big hit symbol of the decorative symbol. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the mode is suddenly shifted to the probability changing mode or whether the big hit gaming state occurs, and the variation in performance increases, so that the player is not bored.

In the above example, the high probability non-short-time state is always controlled to the probability variation latency mode, but the high probability non-short-time state is controlled to either the probability variation latency mode or the probability variation non-short-time mode. When the probability variation latency mode is controlled in the high probability non-short-time state, the production means (for example, the speaker, the movable body, the lamp / LED, etc.) are continued in the same manner as the probability variation non-time-short mode from the time when the fluctuation is displayed. At least one of the executing means may be drive-controlled to shift control (promotion) from the probability variation latent mode to the probability variation non-short-time mode.

Specifically, the peripheral control MPU 4140a is “probability latent mode” in the high probability non-time-short state.
When the promoted melody reach variation pattern is received by executing “elevated melody reach”, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are started to be varied and the speakers 130, 222,
262 or the like starts outputting an audio mode similar to the specific audio mode that is output during the probability variation non-short-time mode, and suddenly the liquid crystal display device 190 is suddenly displayed at a predetermined timing during the variation display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols.
0 is blacked out (the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned off and the display disappears).

Then, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is blacked out for a predetermined period (for example, 2 to 3 seconds), and then gradually whitened out from the vicinity of the center of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (the liquid crystal display device 190).
The backlight of 0 is turned off and white display is performed). Based on the fact that the liquid crystal display device 1900 is completely whitened out, “probable non-short-time mode entry!” Is displayed, so that the probable non-short-time mode (high probability) In addition to notifying the player of the transition control (promotion) to the (non-time-short state), the control of the probability variation non-time-short mode is started.

In this way, when the high probability non-short-time state is controlled and the production mode is controlled to the probability variation latent mode, the same voice mode as the specific voice mode during the variable display (for example, one of the specific voice modes) Part (for example, the first half or number 1 may be completely the same as the specific voice mode), and then the specific voice mode is controlled until the control of the probabilistic non-short-time mode ends. Continue output (repeated execution). Therefore, it is possible to remind the player that the certain variation non-short-time mode has been controlled by the fact that the specific voice mode is output during the fluctuation display, and to recognize that the certain variation non-short-time mode has been controlled to the certain time, and to give unexpected surprises Can be improved.

In the above-described example, the change display in which the specific voice mode is output is not displayed, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 is notified to shift to the certain change non-short-time mode after blacking out without displaying the symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the normal variation display may be executed without blacking out the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the transition to the certain variation non-short-time mode may be notified after deviating and displaying the symbols. Thus, even if the display result is out of place, the game entertainment can be improved by promoting the player from the probability variation latent mode to the probability variation non-short-time mode to a state advantageous to the player. Further, in this case, a predetermined combination of out-of-order symbols (for example, a combination of symbols including all “1”, “3”, and “5”).
May be displayed.

In addition, even when the transition control (promotion) is not performed from the probability variation latency mode to the probability variation non-short-time mode, the specific voice mode may be output during the variation display at a predetermined rate (so-called gas). In this case, the output period of the specific voice mode during the variation display may be shorter when the probability variation latent mode is continued than when the transition control (promotion) is performed to the probability variation non-short mode. For example, when the transition control to the probability variation non-short-time mode is performed, the output of the specific voice mode is started at a predetermined timing after the start of the variation display (may be simultaneously with the start of the variation display), and then the probability variation is not performed. While the specific voice mode is continuously output until the time reduction mode is ended, when the probability variation latent mode is continued without performing the transition control to the probability variation non-time reduction mode, a predetermined timing (after the start of the variable display) The output of the specific voice mode may be started at the same time as the start of the variable display), and the output of the specific voice mode is stopped before the symbols are stopped and displayed, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 is not blacked out. The symbols may be stopped and displayed. As a result, even when the transition control (promotion) is not performed to the probability variation non-time reduction mode, the expectation for the probability variation non-time reduction mode can be improved.

[8. Arm accessory production]
Next, an arm accessory effect executed during variable display will be described. In this example, when the arm unit 3250 is displayed in front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 during the variable display, the display shifts to a reach effect (reach development effect) with a high expectation level for jackpots. This will be described in detail below.

As described above, the back-up / back-movable effect unit 3 is directly behind the back-up / down-front movable effect unit 3400.
200, and a rear upper front decorative body 3406 of the rear upper front movable effect unit 3400, an upper arm unit 3300 (upper arm decorative body 3304), and a forearm unit 3350 (forearm decorative body 3352) of the rear upper rear movable effect unit 3200. Since the back and front movable production unit 3400 and the back and rear movable production unit 3200 are in the normal state (the back front front decoration body 3406 and the upper arm decoration body 3304 are in the retracted position, the forearm decoration body is formed in substantially the same size. 3352 is in the storage position)
Then, the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 are almost hidden behind the back upper front decorative body 3406 (see FIG. 174).

In the variation pattern setting process (first variation pattern setting process, second variation pattern setting process) executed by the main control MPU 4100a, an arm accessory reach variation pattern that causes the arm unit 3250 to be displayed in front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is selected. The peripheral control MPU 4140a starts the fluctuation display based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern command instructing the fluctuation pattern. After the predetermined period, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed with the same symbol, and the decorative symbol reach (in this case, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are stopped with the same symbol and the middle decorative symbol is still displayed. In the state where the display is not stopped), a character in a manner of swinging the arm is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 without executing the reach effect. Standing position rotated about 90 degrees counterclockwise from the storage position of FIG. 174 (a) by passing the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 with the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 hidden on the side (FIG. 174 (c)). Further, a display in which the upper front decorative body 3406 is focused on the liquid crystal display device 1900 in synchronization with the passage of the upper front decorative body 3406 in front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (in this example, light is emitted from the upper front decorative body 3406). Display). As described above, the upper arm decorative body 3304 is provided on the rear side of the back upper front decorative body 3406.
And the forearm decoration body 3352 are hidden, and the front upper decoration body 3406, the upper arm decoration body 3304, and the forearm decoration body 3352 are played in order to cross the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and move it from the storage position to the standby position. Can attract attention.

In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a uses the received front and back decorative body 34 based on the received variation pattern.
06, after moving the upper arm decoration body 3304 and the forearm decoration body 3352 from the storage position to the standby position, immediately, the entire forearm decoration body 3352 is brought into an appearance position where it can be seen from the player side (FIG. 1).
75 (e)) or the liquid crystal display device 1900 held in the standby position for a predetermined period.
In relation to the display, the entire forearm decoration 3352 is brought into a state of appearance where it can be seen from the player side at a predetermined timing.

Specifically, the peripheral control MPU 4140a passes the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in a state where the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 are hidden behind the back upper front decorative body 3406, and then temporarily stands by (see FIG. 174 (c)), immediately, only the upper arm decoration body 3304 and the forearm decoration body 3352 are rotated clockwise in front view, so that the base end side of the upper arm decoration body 3304 is directed leftward from the back upper front decoration body 3406. The forearm decorative body 3352 moves away from the upper arm decorative body 3304.
Rotate so that the tip side moves away from the upper arm decorative body 3304 from the overlapped state, and the upper arm decorative body 3304 and a part of the forearm decorative body 3352 appear from the rear side of the back upper front decorative body 3406 (FIG. 175 ( d)), and further moving the arm unit 3250 leftward in a front view to bring the entire forearm decoration 3352 into an appearance position where it can be seen from the player side (FIG. 175 (FIG. 175)).
see e)). In addition, a display that causes the liquid crystal display device 1900 to pay attention to the forearm decoration body 3352 in synchronization with the forward movement of the forearm decoration body 3352 (a display in which light is emitted from the forearm decoration body 3352 in this example). Execute. Then, peripheral control MPU 4140
a rotates the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front and rotates the upper upper decorative body 3406 clockwise when viewed from the front.
52 and the back front decorative body 340 are returned to the accommodated position, and the reach development effect is started on the liquid crystal display device 1900. The reach development effect is higher than the normal reach effect in the reach development effect, so that the forearm decoration 3352 as a whole moves to the appearance position and becomes visible, thereby improving the player's expectation for the game condition. Can do.

In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a causes the upper arm decoration body 3304 and the forearm decoration body 3352 to be hidden behind the back upper front decoration body 3406 when the entire forearm decoration body 3352 is not in the appearance position where it can be seen from the player side. After passing the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the state and temporarily moving to the standby position (FIG. 174 (c)), the upper arm decoration body 3304 and the forearm decoration body 3352 are held at the standby position and a normal reach effect is executed. To do.

In this standby position, a part of the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 are exposed to the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and can be visually recognized by the player. The peripheral control MPU 414
Reference numeral 0a denotes an upper arm decorative body 3304 and a forearm decorative body 3 while controlling a plurality of LEDs mounted on the forearm decorative board 3353 and the upper arm decorative board 3305 in a predetermined light emission mode (in this example, blinking red).
352 and the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 33.
A flame is displayed in the vicinity of the right end of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on which a part of 52 is superimposed to highlight the upper arm ornament 3304 and the forearm ornament 3352 (acting effect). In this way, the expectation for the expression of the upper arm decoration 3304 and the forearm decoration 3352 of the player at the standby position is further improved.

Then, the peripheral control MPU 4140a rotates only the upper arm decoration body 3304 and the forearm decoration body 3352 clockwise in front view at the timing of ending the normal reach effect in relation to the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the upper arm decoration body 3304 The base end side is moved away from the back upper front decorative body 3406 in the left direction and the front arm decorative body 3352 is rotated so that the front end side is moved away from the upper arm decorative body 3304 from the state where it overlaps with the upper arm decorative body 3304. The upper arm decoration body 3304 and a part of the forearm decoration body 3352 appear from the rear side (see FIG. 175 (d)), and the arm unit 3250 is further moved leftward in a front view, so that the entire forearm decoration body 3352 is moved. Is in a state of appearance that can be seen from the player side (see FIG. 175 (e)). In addition, a display that causes the liquid crystal display device 1900 to pay attention to the forearm decoration body 3352 in synchronization with the forward movement of the forearm decoration body 3352 (a display in which light is emitted from the forearm decoration body 3352 in this example). Execute.

Then, the peripheral control MPU 4140a rotates the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 clockwise in front view and rotates the back upper fore decorative body 3406 in the clockwise direction in front view to rotate the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352. The back front decorative body 340 is returned to the accommodation position, and the reach development effect is started on the liquid crystal display device 1900. In the reach development effect, the expectation level for the big hit is higher than the normal reach effect that has been executed. Therefore, the player's expectation for the big hit game state is achieved by moving the entire forearm decoration 3352 to the appearance position and making it visible. Can be improved.

The peripheral control MPU 4140a displays the reach of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern, and immediately waits for the back upper front decorative body 3406, the upper arm decorative body 3304, and the forearm decorative body 3352 without executing the reach effect. Without moving to the position (FIG. 174 (c)), it may be a normal reach effect (a reach effect in the same effect mode or a reach effect in a different effect mode). One special design, second special design that performs reach production multiple times (one that develops reach production multiple times, one that develops reach production multiple times, one that performs pseudo-continuous variation and multiple reach effects) Or a reach effect over a plurality of fluctuating displays)) after a predetermined number of times (may be once or multiple times). Upper front decorative body 3406, there is a case of moving the upper arm decorative body 3304, and a forearm ornamental body 3352 to the standby position (FIG. 174 (c)).

In addition, after performing a normal reach production a predetermined number of times, the back upper front decorative body 3406, the upper arm decorative body 3
304 and the peripheral control MPU 414 also when the forearm decoration 3352 is moved to the standby position.
0a is an appearance position where the entire forearm ornament 3352 can be seen from the player side immediately after the back upper forebody 3406, the upper arm ornament 3304, and the forearm ornament 3352 are moved to the standby position based on the received variation pattern. (See FIG. 175 (e)), or the entire forearm decoration 3352 is moved to the player side at a predetermined timing in relation to the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 by being held at the standby position for a predetermined period. Make the appearance position visible from.

Specifically, the peripheral control MPU 4140a moves the back upper front decorative body 3406, the upper arm decorative body 3304, and the forearm decorative body 3352 to the standby position after executing the normal reach effect a predetermined number of times, and immediately thereafter, moves the forearm decorative body. The entire position 3352 can be seen from the player side.
175 (e)), and a display for causing the liquid crystal display device 1900 to pay attention to the forearm decoration body 3352 in synchronization with the movement of the forearm decoration body 3352 forward of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (in this example, light is emitted from the forearm decoration body 3352). ) Is displayed. Then, peripheral control M
The PU 4140a returns the upper arm decorative body 3304, the forearm decorative body 3352, and the back upper front decorative body 340 to the accommodated positions, and starts the reach development effect on the liquid crystal display device 1900. The reach development effect is higher than the normal reach effect in the reach development effect, so that the forearm decoration 3352 as a whole moves to the appearance position and becomes visible, thereby improving the player's expectation for the game condition. Can do.

Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a moves the back upper forebody 3406, the upper arm ornament 3304, and the forearm ornament 3352 to the standby position after executing the normal reach effect a predetermined number of times, and immediately thereafter, the entire forearm ornament 3352 If the appearance position is not visible from the player side, the back upper forebody 3406, the upper arm ornament 3304, and the forearm ornament 3352 are temporarily placed in the standby position (
174 (c)), the upper arm decoration body 3304 and the forearm decoration body 3352 are held at the standby position for a predetermined period, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 again performs a normal reach effect (which was performed last time). A reach effect with a higher degree of jackpot expectation than the reach effect may be executed, or a reach effect with a jackpot expectation degree equivalent to the reach effect that was executed last time may be executed) . In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes the above-mentioned accessory effect production to further improve the expectation for the expression of the upper arm decoration body 3304 and the forearm decoration body 3352.

Then, the peripheral control MPU 4140a moves to the appearance position where the entire forearm decoration 3352 can be seen from the player side at the timing of ending the normal reach effect in relation to the display on the liquid crystal display device 1900 (see FIG. 175 (e)). ) And a display for causing the liquid crystal display device 1900 to pay attention to the forearm decorative body 3352 in synchronization with the forward movement of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (in this example, a display in which light is emitted from the forearm decorative body 3352) ).

Thus, the back upper front decorative body 3 that is hardly visible (difficult to see) from the player side.
Although the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 are hidden behind the rear upper front decorative body 3406 and the forearm decorative body 3352, they are hardly visible from the player side even though they are once visible to the player. (Difficult to visually recognize) In order to move to the standby position and wait, the player who thinks that the upper arm decoration 3304 is exposed is beaten and discouraged. Thereafter, by displaying the upper arm decoration 3304, the player can be surprised and more delighted, and the gaming interest is improved.

Note that if the peripheral control MPU 4140a is determined not to move the entire forearm decoration 3352 to the appearance position by the main control MPU 4100a not selecting the arm accessory reach variation pattern (in other words, the entire forearm decoration 3352 is set to the appearance position). Even if it is not determined to be moved), the back-upper front movable effect unit 3400 and the back-upper rear movable effect unit 3200 are moved at a predetermined rate. Specifically, even if the arm accessory reach variation pattern is not selected in the variation pattern setting processing (first variation pattern setting processing, second variation pattern setting processing) executed by the main control MPU 4140a, When a variation pattern is selected, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs variation display based on the reception of the variation pattern command instructing the variation pattern, displays the reach of the decorative symbol, and then executes the reach effect. Immediately or after a normal reach effect has been executed a predetermined number of times, the back upper front decorative body 3406, the upper arm decorative body 3304, and the forearm decorative body 3352 are moved from the storage position to the standby position.

However, in this case, after the peripheral control MPU 4140a derives and displays the stop symbol of the decorative symbol at the timing of ending the normal reach effect executed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 without moving the entire forearm ornament 3352 to the appearance position. The upper arm decorative body 3304, the forearm decorative body 3352, and the back upper front decorative body 3406 are rotated clockwise in front view with the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 hidden behind the back upper front decorative body 3406. Move the forearm decoration 33
The upper arm decorative body 3304, the forearm decorative body 3352, and the back upper front decorative body 340 are returned to the accommodated position without making the entire 52 visible. In addition, when the symbol which is not a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is blacked out for a predetermined period (the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned off and the display disappears). The lamps / LEDs arranged in the vicinity of the liquid crystal display device 1900 are turned off, and the upper arm decorative body 3304, the forearm decorative body 3352, and the back upper front decorative body 3406 are rotated clockwise in front view and moved to the accommodation position. To do. Accordingly, the upper arm decorative body 3304, the forearm decorative body 3352,
In addition, the front upper decorative body 3406 is made inconspicuous. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a decorative symbol stop symbol, the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is white-out for a predetermined period (in this case, the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is lit with the maximum brightness of white). ) And a lamp / LED arranged in the vicinity of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on, and the upper arm decorative body 3304, the forearm decorative body 3352, and the back upper front decorative body 3406 are rotated in the clockwise direction when housed. Move to position. Accordingly, the rotating upper arm decorative body 3304, the forearm decorative body 3352, and the back upper front decorative body 3406 are made inconspicuous.

Thus, even when the entire forearm decorative body 3352 is not visible, the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 are hidden behind the back upper front decorative body 3406 and the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be viewed. Crossing the front and moving the player from the storage position to the standby position to attract the player's attention, and performing the reach effect while conscious of the upper arm decoration body 3304 and the forearm decoration body 3352 held at the standby position to perform upper arm decoration The expectation for the expression of the body 3304 and the forearm decoration 3352 can be improved.

In addition, since the plurality of timings for moving the back upper forebody 3406, the upper arm ornament 3304, and the forearm ornament 3352 to the standby position and the timing for moving the forearm ornament 3352 to the appearance position are set, the variation display is terminated. Until then, front upper decorative body 3406, upper arm decorative body 33
04 and the movement of the forearm decoration body 3352 to the standby position can be expected, and the back upper front decoration body 3406, the upper arm decoration body 3304, and the forearm decoration body 3352 are moved to the standby position. It can be expected to move the forearm decoration 3352 to the appearance position until the change display is finished in the state. In addition, the forearm decorative body 3 after starting the variable display
The longer the period until moving to the appearance position 352 (the slower the timing at which the forearm decoration 3352 moves to the appearance position), the higher the big hit expectation degree may be. In this case, the variable display is started. Thus, when the forearm decoration 3352 moves to the appearance position at an early stage, the reach development effect is executed, so that the expectation for the big hit can be improved, and the forearm decoration 3352 moves to the appearance position at an early stage. Even if the forearm decorative body 3352 is moved to the appearance position even if it is not, the expectation degree of the big hit is further increased, and the player is not discouraged to the subsequent appearance position of the forearm decorative body 3352. It is possible to have expectations for the movement and to improve the expectation for the big hit.

In addition, the arm accessory reach variation pattern may be determined only when it is a win in the variation pattern setting processing (first variation pattern setting processing, second variation pattern setting processing) executed by the main control MPU 4100a. However, the arm accessory reach fluctuation pattern may be determined at a predetermined rate lower than that in the case of winning. Also, the arm accessory gusset reach variation pattern may be determined only when the variation pattern setting processing (first variation pattern setting processing, second variation pattern setting processing) executed by the main control MPU 4100a is out of place. Also in the case of winning, the arm accessory gusset reach variation pattern may be determined at a predetermined ratio lower than that in the case of winning. As a result, when the entire forearm decorative body 3352 moves to the appearance position and becomes visible, the ratio of jackpot, that is, the jackpot expectation is increased.

It may be determined by lottery whether or not the upper arm decoration body 3304 and the forearm decoration body 3352 are rotated to the left and right at the standby position. In this case, The upper arm ornament 3304 and the forearm ornament 3352 are moved to the left and right at the standby position at a higher rate than when the arm accessory reach variation pattern and the arm accessory gasase variation variation pattern are received when receiving the arm accessory gas variation variation pattern. By determining that the upper arm decoration body 3304 and the forearm decoration body 3352 are rotated to the left and right at the standby position, the big hit expectation degree may be increased, or the forearm decoration body 3352 may be increased.
Instructs an arm accessory gusset reach variation pattern that does not move the entire forearm decoration 3352 to the appearance position when a variation pattern command is received that indicates an arm accessory reach variation pattern that moves the entire device to the appearance position and is visible. The upper arm decoration body 3304 and the forearm decoration body 3352 are on standby by deciding to rotate the upper arm decoration body 3304 and the forearm decoration body 3352 in small increments to the left and right at the standby position at a higher rate than when the change pattern command is received. When the position is rotated to the left and right in small increments, the degree of expectation that the entire forearm decoration 3352 moves to the appearance position, in other words, the degree of execution expectation of the reach development effect increases, and thus the degree of jackpot expectation increases.

Further, the light emission modes of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the forearm decorative board 3353 and the upper arm decorative board 3305 may be made different according to the big hit expectation. For example, forearm decorative board 335
3 and whether or not to control the light emission of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper arm decoration board 3305 and / or the light emission mode are determined by lottery, and the arm accessory reach variation pattern and the arm accessory gas variation variation pattern which are big hits are received. It is decided to control the light emission of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the forearm decorative board 3353 and the upper arm decorative board 3305 at a higher rate than when the arm accessory reach fluctuation pattern and the arm accessory gasse reach fluctuation pattern which are sometimes shifted are received. Thus, when a plurality of LEDs mounted on the forearm decorative board 3353 and the upper arm decorative board 3305 are controlled to emit light, the big hit expectation degree may be increased. The arm accessory reach fluctuation pattern and the arm accessory gasase reach variation that are out of sync when receiving the gusset reach variation pattern The arm combination that is determined to be a specific light emission mode (flashing red) at a higher rate than when the pattern is received, and that is a big hit when receiving the arm combination reach variation pattern and the arm combination variation variation pattern It is mounted on the forearm decorative board 3353 and the upper arm decorative board 3305 in a specific light emission mode by determining the normal light emission mode (blue blinking) at a higher rate than when the reach variation pattern and the arm accessory gas certain variation pattern are received. In addition, when the plurality of LEDs are controlled to emit light, the big hit expectation degree may be increased.

Further, the light emission modes of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the forearm decorative board 3353 and the upper arm decorative board 3305 are made different according to the degree of expectation for moving the entire forearm decoration body 3352 to the appearance position, in other words, the execution expectation degree of reach development effect. You may do it. For example, whether or not to control light emission of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the forearm decoration board 3353 and the upper arm decoration board 3305 and / or the light emission mode is determined by lottery, and the entire forearm decoration body 3352 is moved to the appearance position and can be visually recognized. When the arm accessory reach variation pattern to be in the state is received, the forearm decoration board 3353 and the upper arm decoration board 3305 are more likely to be received at a higher rate than when the arm accessory gasase reach variation pattern that does not move the entire forearm decoration body 3352 to the appearance position is received. Expected to move the entire forearm decorative body 3352 to the appearance position when the plurality of LEDs mounted on the forearm decorative board 3353 and the upper arm decorative board 3305 are controlled to emit light by deciding to control the light emission of the plurality of mounted LEDs. The forearm decoration body 3352 may be moved to the appearance position so that it can be visually recognized. When the arm accessory reach variation pattern is received, the entire forearm decoration 3352 is not moved to the appearance position, and the specific light emission mode (flashing red) is determined at a higher rate than when the arm accessory gas variation variation pattern is received. When receiving an arm accessory reach variation pattern that moves the entire forearm ornament 3352 to the appearance position and makes it visible when the entire arm combination 3352 does not move to the appearance position. The forearm decoration board 3353 and the upper arm decoration board 3 are determined in a specific light emission mode by determining the normal light emission mode (blue blinking) at a higher rate.
When a plurality of LEDs mounted on 305 are controlled to emit light, the degree of expectation to move the entire forearm decoration 3352 to the appearance position may be increased.

Further, in the above example, the symbol is stopped as a decorative symbol stop symbol at the timing of ending the normal reach effect executed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 without moving the entire forearm ornament 3352 from the standby position to the appearance position. When displayed, (special symbol (first special symbol,
After the final display of the second special symbol), the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is blacked out for a predetermined period of time (the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned off and the display disappears) and the vicinity of the liquid crystal display device 1900 The lamp / LED arranged on the head is turned off, and the upper arm decorative body 3304, the forearm decorative body 3352, and the back upper front decorative body 3406 are rotated clockwise in front view and moved to the accommodation position. , Before the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) is confirmed and displayed (it may be after the symbol is stopped and displayed as the decorative symbol stop symbol at the timing of ending the normal reach production) The upper arm decorative body 3304, the forearm decorative body 3352, and the back upper front decorative body 3406 may be rotated clockwise when viewed in front. May be configured to move the containers position, in this case,
The upper arm decoration body 3304, the forearm decoration body 3352, and the back upper front decoration body 3406 are all rotated clockwise in front view within a period during which the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is blacked out. When only the forearm decorative body 3352 is rotated clockwise in front view and the entire forearm decorative body 3352 is moved to the appearance position, the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on and is disposed in the vicinity of the liquid crystal display device 1900. After the lamp / LED is turned on, an effect that is a big hit (so-called revival effect), a reach development effect, or the like may be executed. As a result, even after the player recognizes that the variable display has ended, a big hit can be given, which can give unexpectedness and surprise, and in the variable display executed after that, the expectation for the big hit is also given after the end of the variable display. Can improve the game entertainment.

Further, in the above-described example, when the normal reach effect being executed in the liquid crystal display device 1900 is finished without moving the entire forearm decoration 3352 from the standby position to the appearance position, the liquid crystal display device 1900 over a predetermined period. Is blacked out (the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned off and the display disappears), and the lamps and LEDs arranged in the vicinity of the liquid crystal display device 1900 are turned off. Although the body 3352 and the back upper front decorative body 3406 are configured to rotate clockwise when viewed from the front and move to the storage position, the upper arm decorative body 3304 that moves from the standby position to the storage position, the forearm decorative body 3352, and The above-described example is not limited as long as it makes the back front decorative body 3406 inconspicuous (makes the player's visual recognition difficult). For example, the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is white-out for a predetermined period (in this case, the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on with the maximum brightness of white) and the lamp disposed in the vicinity of the liquid crystal display device 1900 The LED may be turned on, and the upper arm decorative body 3304, the forearm decorative body 3352, and the back upper front decorative body 3406 may be rotated clockwise when viewed from the front and moved to the accommodation position.

Further, even when the entire forearm decoration 3352 is moved from the standby position to the appearance position, the upper arm decoration 3304, the forearm decoration 3352, and the back upper front decoration 3 that move from the appearance position to the storage position.
406 may be made inconspicuous (make it difficult for the player to visually recognize). For example, after the entire forearm decoration 3352 is moved from the standby position to the appearance position, the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is blacked out for a predetermined period (the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned off and the display disappears). In addition, the lamp LE arranged near the liquid crystal display device 1900
D is turned off, and the upper arm decorative body 3304, the forearm decorative body 3352, and the back upper front decorative body 34
The liquid crystal display device 1900 may be white-outed (in this case, the liquid crystal display device 190) over a predetermined period.
And a lamp / LED disposed in the vicinity of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and during that time, the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 33 are turned on.
52 and the front upper decorative body 3406 may be rotated clockwise when viewed from the front and moved to the accommodation position.

In the above example, the reach development is executed based on the movement of the entire forearm decoration body 3352 to the appearance position, but at least the forearm decoration than before the entire forearm decoration body 3352 is moved to the appearance position. The present invention is not limited to the above as long as the effect display with a high degree of big hit expectation is executed after the entire body 3352 is moved to the appearance position.

[9. Projector production]
Next, projector effects executed during variable display will be described. In this example, by executing the 15R big hit gaming state using the second opening / closing member 2553 as the big hit gaming state, the number of winning balls is the largest among the multiple types of big hit gaming states, and for the player after the big hit gaming state ends By controlling to the most advantageous high-speed short-time state, the most advantageous state for the player is given. When the 15R (right) probability variable big hit is won, the projector unit 2150 is made to emit light from the variable display until the big hit gaming state ends. A predetermined image is projected on the player. This will be described in detail below.

Peripheral control MPU 4140a starts a variation display based on receiving a variation pattern command indicating a variation pattern indicating a 15R (right) probability variation big hit, derives and displays a big hit symbol, and then displays a character. The character undresses and performs an effect that shows the cherry blossoms depicted on the character's shoulder. In addition, the projector unit 2150 emits light in synchronism with the action of taking off the clothes of the character to project an image similar to the cherry blossom snow drawn on the character's shoulder on both shoulders of the player.

In addition, when the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a big hit start command instructing the start of the big hit gaming state from the main control MPU 4100a, the projector unit 2150 continuously emits light and projects an image similar to cherry blossom snow on both shoulders of the player. The effect during the big hit gaming state is executed. The projector unit 2150 is turned off based on the reception of the jackpot end command for instructing the end of the jackpot gaming state from the main control MPU 4100a.

In this way, when a big hit that is the most advantageous for the player (in this example, 15R (right) probable big hit), the same image as the cherry blossom snow is projected on both shoulders of the player during the fluctuation display, and during the big hit gaming state Because it continuously projects, it is possible to improve the gaming interest for the players with cherry blossoms projected, and to become the most advantageous big hit against third parties who are not playing with the gaming machine Can appeal and give a sense of superiority. In addition, it is possible to make a third party who is not playing with the gaming machine recognize that a cherry blossom snow is projected when it is the most advantageous big hit, and expect the projector unit 2150 to project a cherry blossom snow. You can let them play. In addition, since an image similar to the cherry blossom snow drawn on the shoulder of the character displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is projected on both shoulders of the player, it is possible to give an impression that the player himself has become a character, A player can be entertained by playing as a character. In addition, since the player's body is used to replicate the character displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the player himself / herself is questioned by attracting attention from a third party and receiving attention. It becomes possible to notice that it has changed to a state imitating the character displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and further has changed to a state imitating the character displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is possible to guess that there is something good and to improve the expectation for the game, and to suppress the decline of the game interest.

In the above-described example, the projector unit 2150 is made to emit light and an image similar to the cherry blossom snow drawn on the shoulder of the character is projected on both shoulders of the player, but at least a predetermined character is used using the player's body. What is necessary is just to have a means for changing to the imitated state, for example, by blowing ink that can be lost to the player to draw an image similar to that of a predetermined character to change it to an imitated state, or a fan For example, it may be changed to a state in which a predetermined character is imitated by blowing air to a player by blowing the hair or clothes.

In addition, when the player's body is used to change (project, blow, or blow) the player's body using a means for changing to a state imitating a predetermined character, the action (projection,
A means for making it possible to change the operating position so that the air can be blown or blown) may be provided separately. For example, a driving unit that can change the projection position so that the projector unit 2150 can project the image onto an arbitrary place may be provided separately. Thereby, even a player with a different body shape can project a desired image at an appropriate position on the body, and the player can be reliably changed to a state imitating a predetermined character. In addition, a plurality of types of characters may be provided to change the player. In this case, an appropriate position for each character (for example, a character projecting cherry blossoms on the shoulder, a character (for example, “power”) on the forehead). A desired image can be projected on a character to be displayed and a character (for example, a character displaying “Q” or the like) in the center of the chest.

In addition, when the player's body is used to change to a state imitating a predetermined character, it is not necessarily a big hit, but at a predetermined rate, it will be a big hit other than the big hit that is the most advantageous for the player or the shift. In this case, at least the change display to the state imitated until the end of the change display (before starting the next change display or before starting the big hit gaming state) may be ended. .

Further, a plurality of types of characters for changing the player may be provided. In this case, the expectation level for jackpots may be varied depending on the changed character. For example, when changing to a state imitating the main character (the main character), the ratio (expectation) that is the most advantageous jackpot for the player is higher than when changing to a state imitating other characters. Thus, when the sub-character (supporting role) is changed to a state imitating the main character and the hostile character, the ratio (expectation) is different from the case of changing to a state imitating other characters. ) May be increased. Moreover, you may make it imitate also the friend (ally) of the main character among sub characters (supporting role), and when it changes to the state which imitated the friend (ally) of the main character, the main character The ratio (expectation) that is the most advantageous jackpot than when imitating is lowered, and the ratio (expectation) that is the most advantageous jackpot is higher than when imitating the main character and the hostile character It may be made to become.

[10. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game balls that are thrown into the game area 1100 by the operation of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 are arranged below the center bonus 2500. When a predetermined lottery result is selected by the first start port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100, the lottery result is selected, and a predetermined region including two projection regions TR arranged in the vicinity where the player is seated. The projector unit 2150 corresponding to the projection area TR provided on each of the left and right sides of the big prize opening 2103 in the attacker unit 2100 in response to the detection of the object from the object detection means 2530 for detecting the player in the player. Right side decoration unit 200 for illuminating and decorating the outer periphery of the glass plate 594 that partitions the front end of the gaming area 1100 at the same time. Left side decorated unit 240, and the upper decoration unit 2
Light-off decorations such as 80 are turned off or turned off. The light of the image projected from the projector unit 2150 onto the projection area TR is the game area 110 in the projection area TR (a part of the player's body).
After being reflected to 0, it is further reflected to the player side by a transparent plate-like glass plate 594.
At this time, the light emitting decorations of the decoration units 200, 240, and 280 are turned off or reduced, so that the amount of light directly irradiated to the player is reduced and the game area 1100 is relatively emitted.
Since the inside becomes dark, the light (image) that is projected from the projector unit 2150 to the projection area TR, reflected by the projection area TR, and further reflected by the glass plate 594 of the door frame 5 toward the player side is relatively The image (light) reflected by the glass plate 594 from the player side becomes conspicuous. As described above, the image reflected by the glass plate 594 to the player side is an image reflected by the light projection region TR and further reflected by the glass plate 594. Therefore, when viewed from the player side, the light source (Projector unit 2150) is not visible, but projector unit 2
The image projected in the projection area TR by 150 and a part of the player's body in the projection area TR illuminated by the projection of the image are reflected on the glass plate 594. Therefore,
When the projector unit 2150 emits light according to the gaming state, an image projected on the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and a part of the player's body are displayed, so a liquid crystal display like a conventional pachinko machine is displayed. It is possible to show the player an effect completely different from the effect using the device 1900 or the movable decorative body, to give a strong impact to the player, and to give the player a highly unexpected effect. It is possible to suppress the interest in the game from decreasing by attracting the interest of the game.

Further, as described above, when the projector unit 2150 emits light according to the gaming state, a part of the player's body located in the projection region TR is reflected on the glass plate 594 and projected from the projector unit 2150 onto the body part. Since the image is shown, the player
By viewing what is shown in FIG. 4, it becomes “what is it?” And attention is paid in the projection region TR (a part of the body on which the image is projected). It is possible to recognize the light emission of the projector unit 2150, and it can be thought that there is something good, and it is expected that the expectation for the game is raised and the interest is reduced. be able to.

Further, since the image is projected from the projector unit 2150 onto a part of the player's body located in the projection area TR, the image of the image shown to the player is moved by the movement of the player on which the image is projected. Since the range changes or the part where the image is projected is not a flat shape but a three-dimensional shape, when the player moves, the projected image changes and the image can be expanded and contracted, Even a single image can be changed in various ways, and it is possible to entertain the appearance of the image projected on the player, so that it is difficult to get bored and to reduce the interest.

Furthermore, an image is projected from the projector unit 2150 onto the projection region TR, and a person other than a player who plays a game on the pachinko machine 1 (another player or pachinko machine) by projecting a relatively pinpoint image. It is possible to make it difficult to notice the light emission of the projector unit 2150 for the employees of the game hall where 1 is installed. That is, only the player who plays with the pachinko machine 1 can notice the effect using the projector unit 2150, and the effect using the projector unit 2150 can be enjoyed without being noticed by other players. Since it is possible, a chance after the presentation by the projector unit 2150 that emits light according to the lottery result lottered by accepting a game ball to the first starting port 2101 or the like (for example, a state where the big prize opening 2103 can be accepted) Even if the game has not arrived (in the case of losing production), other players, etc. are not aware of the production, and the player can pretend to be calm, and even in the case of losing production, It can be enjoyed without hesitation, and it can be suppressed that the interest of the player in the game is reduced.

In addition, the projection area TR is located below the center in the vertical direction of the game area 1100, and when a player with a normal height sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, it is below the head of the player. Therefore, the light of the image projected from the projector unit 2150 can be prevented from reaching the player's eyes as much as possible, and the player emits light from the projector unit 2150. It can be prevented from feeling dazzling, and it can be suppressed that the dazzling feels uncomfortable and lowers interest.

Further, since the projector unit 2150 is provided in the attacker unit 2100 disposed below the center of the game area 1100, even if the projector unit 2150 emits light at a position lower than the height of the player's eyes, Projector unit 215
It is possible to reduce the light from 0 directly reaching the player's eyes as much as possible, and make it difficult for the player to notice. Therefore, the projector unit 215 can be viewed by viewing the image projected on the projection region TR, the image reflected on the glass plate 594, and the like.
Because you can notice the lighting effect by 0, you can strengthen the impact at the start of the production,
It is possible to enhance the unexpectedness of the light emission effect and attract the player's interest strongly, and to suppress the interest in the game from decreasing.

Further, since the projector unit 2150 that projects an image onto the projection area TR corresponding to the position of the player detected by the object detection means 2530 is caused to emit light, the image (light) from the projector unit 2150 can be reliably transmitted to the specific area. The projector unit 2150 can project an image from the projector unit 2150 corresponding to the optimal position (projection region TR) according to the player's posture. It is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing by further enhancing the effect.

Further, since the projector unit 2150 is arranged on both the left and right sides of the big prize opening 2103 in the attacker unit 2100, the projector unit 2150 can be made inconspicuous, and the light of the projector unit 2150 can reach the player's eyes directly. While the projector unit 2150 emits light, even if the light of the projector unit 2150 is directly visible to the player, the attacker unit 21
The projector unit 215 can be illusioned to be part of the 00 luminous decoration.
It is possible to suppress the direct recognition of the light emission effect by 0 so that the above-described operational effects can be reliably achieved.

Further, since the object detecting means 2530 is provided in the center combination 2500 arranged in the approximate center in the game area 1100, it is arranged in front of the glass plate 594 (glass unit 590) including the projection area TR. The player (object) in the predetermined area (detection area) can be easily detected, and the pachinko machine 1 that reliably detects the object in the predetermined area and reliably exhibits the above-described effects can be obtained. Further, the object detecting means 253 is added to the center accessory 2500.
Since the object detecting means 2530 can be attached to a desired position simply by attaching the center accessory 2500 to the game panel 1200, the labor involved in assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified and the cost can be reduced. The increase can be suppressed.

Further, after inserting the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 into the opening 1215 formed in the panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1200, the rear of the game panel 1200 is visible from the player side through the frame of the center accessory 2500. Since the liquid crystal display device 1900 is arranged on the side,
It is possible to make it fully visible from the player side through the opening 1215 of the game panel 1200 and the frame of the center accessory 2500, and in addition to the effect using the projector unit 2150, the effect using the liquid crystal display device 1900 is also performed. It is possible to present a variety of effects to the player so that it is hard to get bored, and a variety of effects can entertain the player,
It can suppress that the interest with respect to a player's game falls. Further, in a normal state, the projector unit 215 is provided by performing an effect using an effect image of the liquid crystal display device 1900.
The premium feeling for the performance by 0 can be enhanced, and the projector unit 2150
It is possible to further increase the impact of the performance by the player, to increase the sense of expectation for the game, and to suppress the player's interest from decreasing.

In addition, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1200, and thus,
In the effect by the effect image of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the player's viewpoint is positioned on the rear side of the game panel 1200, and in the effect by the light emission of the projector unit 2150, the player's viewpoint is positioned on the front side of the game panel 1200 (glass unit 590). Therefore, the player's viewpoint can be changed according to the device used for the production (projector unit 2150, liquid crystal display device 1900, etc.), and the pachinko machine 1 is hard to get bored by preventing the production from becoming monotonous. It can be.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the arm unit base 3251 that rotatably supports (axially supports) the base end side of the upper arm unit 3300 is disposed above the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the upper arm unit 3300 is When the 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 are in the storage position and the storage position, the upper arm unit 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 are positioned above the liquid crystal display device 1900 and are not visible from the player side. In this state, when the upper arm unit 3300 is rotated from the storage position to the appearance position by the upper arm drive motor 3254 according to the gaming state, the front end side of the upper arm unit 3300 is lowered to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3300 together with the forearm unit 3350. When the forearm unit 3350 is rotated from the storage position to the deployed position by the forearm drive motor 3307, the forearm unit 335 is displayed.
Since the leading end side of 0 is turned away from the upper arm unit 3300, the player can be shown a movable effect in which the arm unit 3250 extends on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Further, the forearm unit 3 is driven by the forearm drive motor 3307 according to the gaming state.
When the 350 is rotated from the storage position to the unfolded position, the front end side of the forearm unit 3350 descends to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and further the upper arm drive motor 32.
When the upper arm unit 3300 is pivotally moved from the storage position to the appearance position by 54, the upper arm unit 3300 appears to descend to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 so as to push out the forearm unit 3350. It is possible to show the player a movable effect that the entire 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 greatly change the form (shape) on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Therefore, the two upper arm units 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 appearing on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the gaming state can show the player a moving effect that has changed in an unprecedented manner. Can surprise the player and make the player think there ’s something good,
It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by increasing the sense of expectation for the game.

In addition, the upper arm unit 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 are respectively connected to the upper arm drive motor 3 independently.
254 and the forearm drive motor 3307 can be separately driven to rotate, so that the overall form of the arm unit 3250 can be changed in various ways, attracting the player's attention strongly, and various movements Arm unit 325 provided with possible arm unit 3250
It is possible to make the movement of 0 (movable effect) difficult to get tired and to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating.

Furthermore, a forearm unit 3350 that rotates about the distal end side of the upper arm unit 3300 is further provided on the distal end side of the upper arm unit 3300 that rotates about the proximal end side. In other words, since the arm unit 3250 having the two internodes is provided, the entire arm unit 3250 can express the part of the arm of a human being (such as a predetermined character) such as a human being or an animal. Can be realized, and the movement of the arm unit 3250 can be enjoyed.

In addition, the upper arm unit 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 are rotated and moved to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the gaming state, and the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is blocked by the arm unit 3250. Therefore, the appearance (rotation) of the arm unit 3250 can be made conspicuous from the player, and it becomes possible to make the player pay attention to the decoration unit, so that the player can enjoy the movable effect by the arm unit 3250. Can be suppressed, and the arm unit 3250 can make the pachinko machine 1 stand out, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to play.

Further, the upper arm unit 3300 and the forearm unit 335 are disposed above the liquid crystal display device 1900.
0 is arranged, and when the appearance drive (movable effect) is performed to position the upper arm unit 3300 or the like on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the upper arm unit 3300 or the like is rotationally driven to move downward. The load applied to the upper arm driving motor 3254, the forearm driving motor 3307 and the like can be reduced by being supported by gravity acting on the upper arm unit 3300 and the forearm unit 3350, and the arm unit 3250 can be speeded up by increasing the rotation speed.
Can be made to appear, and the impact at the time of appearance can be increased to prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

Further, a forearm drive motor 3307 for rotationally driving the forearm unit 3350 is disposed on the proximal end side of the upper arm unit 3300, and rotation from the forearm drive motor 3307 is performed by the transmission rotating body 3311, the link member 3312, and the like. The forearm unit 3350 that is pivotally supported on the distal end side of the upper arm unit 3300 is transmitted to the upper arm unit 3300, so that the forearm drive motor 3307 having a relatively heavy weight is disposed on the distal end side of the upper arm unit 3300. A rotational moment applied to (acting on) the dynamic shaft can be reduced as much as possible, and an increase in load on the upper arm drive motor 3254 can be suppressed. Therefore, since it is not necessary to enlarge the upper arm drive motor 3254 in order to make the upper arm drive motor 3254 strong, the space for arranging the upper arm unit 3300 is relatively easily secured, and the upper arm unit 3300 is made possible. The arm unit 3250 that is conspicuous in the pachinko machine 1 can be provided. Further, since it is not necessary to use a component having high strength and rigidity as a component to make the upper arm drive motor 3254 and the like more durable, the cost for the upper arm drive motor 3254 and the like (pachinko machine 1) increases. Can be suppressed.

Further, the transmission pin 33 eccentric to the forearm unit 3350 from the axis of the second shaft portion 3301b.
51b and crank pin 3311b revolved by forearm drive motor 3307
And a hook-like link member 3312 that supports and connects the crank pin 3311b and the transmission pin 3351b at both ends. Therefore, the forearm drive motor 3307 transmits the rotation according to the gaming state. When the body 3311 is rotated, a bowl-shaped link member 331 is formed.
The crank pin 311b whose base end side is supported by the connecting shaft revolves and the crank pin 33
The transmission pin 3351b is pushed or pulled by the link member 3312 according to the revolving direction of 11b, so that the transmission pin 3351b revolves, and the forearm unit 3350
Can be reliably rotated.

Further, the rotation of the transmission rotating body 3311 disposed on the proximal end side of the upper arm unit 3300 is transmitted to the second shaft portion 3301b (the forearm unit 3350) on the distal end side of the upper arm unit 3300 by the hook-shaped link member 3312. Since the elongated link member 3312 is arranged in the upper arm unit 3300, the rotation from the forearm drive motor 3254 is second compared with the case where the rotation is transmitted by a plurality of gears. The weight of the rotation transmission mechanism for transmitting to the shaft portion 3301b (second rotation shaft 3351a) can be reduced,
It is possible to prevent the load applied to the upper arm drive motor 3254 and the like from increasing. Therefore,
There is no need to increase the size or durability of the upper frame cigarage motor 3254 or the like, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

Further, in the upper arm unit 3300, the crank pin 3311b of the transmission rotating body 3311 has a link axis connecting the center of the crank pin 3311b and the center of the transmission pin 3351b on one side (upper side) with respect to the rotation center of the transmission rotating body 3311. ) And a position where the link axis revolves to the other side (downward) with respect to the rotation center of the transmission rotator 3311, and the crank pin 3311b is connected to the transmission rotator 3311. Since the forearm unit 3350 is in the storage position when it is slightly revolved to one side with respect to the center of rotation, the forearm unit 3350 is in the storage position, that is, the crank pin 3311b is on one side (upper side).
In the state of slightly revolving to the right, the direction of the force acting on the crankpin 3311b via the link member 3312 due to the rotational moment applied to the forearm unit 3350 is such that the crankpin 3311b is more on the one side (upper, counterclockwise in front view). The crankpin 3311b (transmission rotator 3311) has its revolution range restricted by the slit 3311c so as not to revolve to one side any more, so the crankpin 3311b Will continue to stop at a position slightly revolved to one side without revolving. Therefore, when the forearm unit 3350 is in the retracted position, even if a rotational moment applied to the forearm unit 3350 acts on the crankpin 3311b via the link member 3312, the crankpin 3311b does not revolve and the transmission rotating body 3311 does not rotate. In other words, since the rotation of the transmission rotating body 3311 can be locked (blocked), the rotational driving force due to the rotational moment acts on the rotation shaft of the forearm drive motor 3307 via the transmission rotating body 3311. Can be avoided. Therefore, in order to maintain the forearm unit 3250 in the retracted position, it is not necessary to continue to drive the forearm drive motor 3307, and the load on the forearm drive motor 3307 is reduced and the forearm drive motor 3307 and the like are damaged early. It is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to breakage of the forearm drive motor 3307 and the like, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from being lowered due to the interruption of the game. .

Further, as described above, since the forearm unit 3350 can be maintained in the storage position without applying a load to the forearm drive motor 3307, it is necessary to use an expensive one provided with a brake mechanism as the forearm drive motor 3307. In addition, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the forearm drive motor 3307 (pachinko machine 1).

Further, the upper arm unit 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 are provided with a plurality of LEDs (upper arm decoration board 3305 and forearm decoration board 3353) that can emit light according to the game state. The upper arm unit 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 can be decorated by emitting light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs when the apparatus 1900 is rotated to the front side, so that the arm unit 32 can be given to the player.
50 is an arm unit 32 that can stand out and attract the player's attention.
50, and by making the player pay attention to the arm unit 3250, it is possible to surely enjoy the movable effects and the light-emitting effects by the arm unit 3250, and to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating. Can do.

Further, the upper arm unit 3300 is made of a translucent upper arm decorative body 3 with a three-dimensional decoration.
304, a translucent upper arm base 3301 attached to the rear side of the upper arm decoration body 3304 and supporting the transmission rotating body 3311, the link member 3312 and the like on the front side, and a plurality of LEDs attached to the rear side of the upper arm base 3301 The upper arm decoration board 3305 is provided, and the player side is irradiated with light from the LED through the upper arm decoration body 3304. Therefore, the entire upper arm unit 3300 is brightly decorated to emit light. The shape, decoration, and the like of the body 3304 can be made easier to see, the decoration effect by the upper arm unit 3300 can be further enhanced, and the upper arm unit 3300 can be made conspicuous to attract the player's interest.

Further, the upper arm decoration board 3305 having a plurality of LEDs is attached to the rear side of the upper arm base 3301 that supports the upper arm decoration body 3304 from the rear side, and the upper arm decoration board 3305 (L
ED) is as far away as possible from the upper arm decoration body 3304, so that the light irradiated from the LED toward the back side of the upper arm decoration body 3304 is diffused as much as possible.
4 can be illuminated, and the upper arm decoration 3304 can be illuminated uniformly without spots. That is, the upper arm unit 3300 can be beautifully decorated with light emission, so that the appearance of the upper arm unit 3300 can be improved, the decoration effect of the upper arm unit 3300 can be enhanced, and the player's interest is strongly attracted. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

Further, since the link member 3312 and the like disposed on the front side of the upper arm decorative board 3305 have translucency, the upper arm decorative board 3305 (LE
D) can irradiate the upper arm decorative body 3304 well with the light from the upper arm decorative body 3304.
Can be decorated beautifully.

  In addition, the game area 1100 includes a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 and a liquid crystal display device 1900 that displays an effect image that can be viewed from the player side through the frame of the center accessory 2500. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with an atmosphere similar to that of the machine, and it is possible to suppress giving a sense of incongruity to a player accustomed to the conventional pachinko machine, and this pachinko machine as a pachinko machine to play. The machine 1 can be easily selected.

[11. Production function according to the player's situation]
An effect function according to the situation of the player, which is the most characteristic function of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, will be described. FIG. 216 is a block diagram illustrating a functional configuration of the pachinko machine 1 for realizing the effect function.

  As shown in FIG. 216, the pachinko machine 1 performs a lottery related to a special symbol when a game ball is won at the first start port 2101 or the second start port 2102 to control a game (main board). A control unit) 4000 and a peripheral control board (sub-control unit) 4010 that controls various effects including changes in special symbols based on commands from the main board (main control unit) 4000.

  The main board 4000 implements various controls related to the entire pachinko machine 1 by executing a predetermined program stored in the ROM 4100d (FIG. 195) by the main control MPU 4100a (FIG. 195). In the peripheral control board 4010, various game controls, effect control, and the like are realized by executing a predetermined program stored in the peripheral control ROM 4140b (FIG. 195) by the peripheral control MPU 4140a (FIG. 195). .

  The main board (main control unit) 4000 includes a lottery information acquisition unit 4001, a lottery unit 4002, a game state transition unit 4003, and a holding unit 4007.

  The lottery information acquisition unit 4001 acquires lottery information (special random number, symbol random number) every time the start condition is satisfied, that is, every time a game ball wins the first start port 2101 or the second start port 2102. It is.

  The lottery means 4002 is a functional block that executes a big hit determination process that is a lottery process for a big hit based on lottery information.

  The gaming state transition means 4003 changes the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 in various states according to the lottery result by the lottery means 4002 (big hit gaming state, high probability short time state, low probability short time state, high probability short state, low It is a functional block that is changed to a non-probability state, etc. The high-probability short-time state includes a high-probability state (hereinafter referred to as “surprise state”) that makes a transition from a low-probability non-time-short state via a jackpot gaming state in which almost no balls are obtained.

  The holding means 4007 is a functional block that stores (holds) up to a predetermined number of lottery information (special random numbers) that have not been drawn by the lottery means 4002. The holding means 4007 includes a first special symbol holding storage means 4214 capable of storing up to a predetermined number (4 in this example) of lottery information (first special random number) associated with winning in the first starting port 2101, and a second starting A second special symbol hold storage unit 4224 capable of storing up to a predetermined number (4 in this example) of lottery information (second special random number) accompanying winning in the mouth 2102 is included (see FIG. 196). When both the first special random number and the second special random number are reserved, the priority special digest means 4231 (see FIG. 196) executes the second special random number in the order in which the special special random numbers are reserved. Random numbers are stored in the order in which they are held.

  The peripheral control board 4010 includes a command receiving unit 4560, a game end determining unit (situation determining unit) 4570, an operation detecting unit 4590, a first operation determining unit 4591, a second operation determining unit 4592, and a storage unit. 2593 and production control means 5000 are provided.

  The command receiving unit 4560 is a functional block that receives a command transmitted from the main board (main control unit) 4000. The command receiving means 4560 passes the control command from the main board 4000 to the effect control means 5000.

  The game end determination unit 4570 is a functional block that determines whether or not the player's situation is a situation where the game is about to be ended based on the detection result of the motion detection unit 4590.

  The motion detection unit 4590 is an upper object detection sensor (non-contact sensor) 2531, left object detection sensor (non-contact sensor) 2532, right object detection sensor (non-contact sensor) 2533, and lower under the control of the production control unit 5000. This is a functional block that detects the player's movement based on the output signal of the object detection sensor (non-contact sensor) 2534. These four sensors 2531, 2532, 2533 and 2534 are respectively fixed to the center accessory 2500. A region indicated by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 220 illustrates an object detectable region by these sensors 2531, 2532, 2533, and 2534.

  The upper object detection sensor 2531 has an object detectable region that extends from the center of the upper end of the liquid crystal display device 1900 diagonally forward and downward of the pachinko machine 1. The left object detection sensor 2532 has an object detectable region that extends diagonally forward from the center of the left end of the liquid crystal display device 1900. The right object detection sensor 2533 has an object detectable region that extends from the center of the right end of the liquid crystal display device 1900 diagonally forward to the lower left side. The lower object detection sensor 2534 has an object detectable region extending from the lower right end of the liquid crystal display device 1900 to the front diagonally upper left side. The object detectable region of the upper object detection sensor 2531 reaches the vicinity of the return button 362 disposed on the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5. The object detectable area of the right object detection sensor 2533 extends in the vicinity of a card slot (card slot) of a so-called CR unit device installed adjacent to the left of the pachinko machine 1.

  These four sensors 2531, 2532, 2533, and 2534 are all distance measuring sensors using PSD (Position Sensitive light Detector), and receive the light that is emitted from the light emitting unit and reflected by the detection target and returned. The light is received by the unit, and the distance to the object is detected by the position of the light receiving spot at that time. The distance measuring sensor using PSD can set the reflectance that can be detected, so by setting this to the reflectance of the skin of a person (human), clothes and hair are mistakenly detected as a player's hand. Therefore, only the presence / absence of the player's hand can be detected with high accuracy. Furthermore, since a detection area (range of distance from the sensor) that enables detection of the detection target can be set, the detection areas R1, R2, R3, and R4 of the sensors 2531, 2532, 2533, and 2534 (FIG. 220). By setting a reference) in an area through which the player's hand passes, it is possible to prevent an object that is not necessary for the game from being erroneously detected as the player's hand. Among the detection areas R1, R2, R3, and R4 of these four sensors 2531, 2532, 2533, and 2534, the detection area R1 of the upper object detection sensor 2531 is the first detection area R1-1 and the second detection area R1. It consists of -2. The detection area R3 of the right object detection sensor 2533 is composed of a first detection area R3-1 and a second detection area R3-2. All the detection regions R1-1, R1-2, R2, R3-1, R3-2, and R4 are set so as not to overlap each other.

  Light emitted from the sensors 2531, 2532, 2533, and 2534 is transmitted obliquely through the glass portion of the glass unit 590 and is emitted to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. The detection regions R1, R2, R3, and R4 are set outside the glass unit 590. The first detection region R1-1 of the upper object detection sensor 2531 is near the outside of the glass unit 590, and the second detection region R1-2 is on the near side (player side) than the first detection region R1-1. (See FIG. 221). The front-rear positional relationship between the first detection region R3-1 and the second detection region R3-2 in the right object detection sensor 2533 is substantially the same.

  The second detection region R1-2 of the upper object detection sensor 2531 is set to a region where the player's hand is likely to pass when performing an operation of pressing the return button 362 by the player. On the other hand, in the second detection region R3-2 of the right object detection sensor 2533, there is a possibility that the player's hand passes when the player performs an operation of removing the card from the card slot (not shown) of the CR unit device. It is set to a large area.

  When the player's hand is present on the optical path of the emitted light from each of the sensors 2531, 2532, 2533, and 2534, the emitted light collides with the player's hand, and a part thereof is reflected. The reflected light passes through the glass unit 590 and returns to the inside of the pachinko machine 1, and is received by the light receiving unit of the sensor from which the emitted light is emitted. The sensor outputs a detection signal corresponding to the position of the received light spot. The detection signal is input to the operation detection unit 4590. The motion detection means 4590 detects the player's motion based on the presence and order of the detection signals Sig1-1, Sig1-2, Sig2, Sig3-1, Sig3-2 and Sig4 of the sensors 2531, 2532, 2533 and 2534. Then, an operation detection signal indicating the detection result is output. The detection signals Sig1-1 and Sig1-2 are detection signals in the first detection region R1-1 and the second detection region R1-2 of the upper object detection sensor 2531, respectively. The detection signals Sig3-1 and Sig3-2 Are detection signals in the first detection region R3-1 and the second detection region R3-2 of the right object detection sensor 2533, respectively.

  For example, when the combination of input detection signals is Sig1-1, Sig2, Sig3-1, and Sig4, and the order is Sig1-1, Sig3-1, Sig4, Sig2, The motion detection signal M1 indicating that the hand has rotated clockwise is a combination of input detection signals Sig1-1, Sig2, Sig3-1 and Sig4, and the order is Sig1-1, Sig2, Sig4, In the case of Sig3-1, the motion detection signal M2 indicating that the player's hand has rotated counterclockwise, and the combination of input detection signals is other than Sig1-1, Sig2, Sig3-1, and Sig4, When Sig1-2 or Sig3-2 is not included, an operation detection signal P indicating that is included, and Sig1-2 or Sig3-2 is included in the input detection signal, When the order is Sig1-2 or Sig3-2, an operation detection signal Q indicating that is output. The fact that Sig1-2 is included means that an operation accompanying the operation of pressing the return button 362 is detected. The fact that Sig3-2 is included means that an operation associated with an operation in which the player pulls out the card from the CR unit device is detected. And, the generation order of the detection signals is Sig1-2, Sig3-2, which means that the player has pressed the return button 362 and has detected an operation associated with a series of operations of removing the card from the CR unit device. means. The operation detection signals M1, M2, P, and Q are input to the first operation determination unit 4591 and the second operation determination unit.

  The storage means 2593 stores the identification information D1, D2 corresponding to the action (hereinafter referred to as “first action”) urged by the effect executed by the effect control means 5000 and the action detection signal. 1 operation determination table 2593A and the determination information D3 and the operation corresponding to the player's operation (hereinafter referred to as “second operation”) which is an operation unrelated to the first operation and associated with the game end operation. A second operation determination table 2593B associated with the detection signal is stored. FIG. 222 shows a very simple example of the both operation determination tables 2593A and 2593B. In this example, the player moves his hand to the liquid crystal display device 1900 and moves it in a clockwise or counterclockwise manner near the glass unit 590 as a first operation, and the player presses the return button 362. Pushing and removing the card from the CR unit device, that is, a player's hand passes through the second detection region R1-2 of the upper object detection sensor 2531, and then the second object detection sensor 2533 The operation that passes through the second detection region R3-2 is a second operation.

  The first operation determination unit 4591 determines the first operation by reading the determination information corresponding to the operation detection signal M1, M2, P, or Q input from the operation detection unit 4590 from the first operation determination table 2593A. Function block. In the example of FIG. 222, when the motion detection signal is M1 or M2, D1 or D2 is output as the discrimination information, and when the motion detection signal is P or Q, the discrimination information is not output.

  The second operation determination unit 4592 determines the second operation by reading the determination information corresponding to the operation detection signal M1, M2, P, or Q input from the operation detection unit 4590 from the second operation determination table 2593B. Function block. In the example of FIG. 222, when the motion detection signal is Q, D3 is output as discrimination information, and when the motion detection signal is M1, M2 or P, discrimination information is not output.

  The operation end determination unit 4570 includes a second operation determination unit 4592 and a second operation determination table 2593B. That is, if the motion detection signal is Q, the motion end determination means 4570 determines that the player's situation is a situation where the game is about to be terminated, and outputs discrimination information D3 indicating the result.

  The effect control unit 5000 is a functional block that controls the effect based on the determination result (situation determination result) of the first operation determination unit 4591 and the second operation determination unit 4592 and the command received by the command reception unit 4560. . The effect control means 5000 includes an action promotion effect means 5001, an effect determination means 5002, a holding presence / absence determination means 5003, and an effect execution means 5004.

  The motion promotion effect means 5001 prompts the player to perform a predetermined motion, that is, a motion to draw a circular orbit in the clockwise or counterclockwise direction near the glass unit 590 while holding the hand over the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is a functional block for executing a production.

  The effect determining unit 5002 is a functional block that determines the effect based on the determination information from the first motion determining unit 4591 and the second motion determining unit 4592.

  The holding presence / absence determining unit 5003 is a functional block that determines whether lottery information (special random number) is held in the holding unit 4007 based on the command received by the command receiving unit 4560.

  The effect execution means 5004 is a functional block that executes the effect determined by the motion promotion effect means 5001 or the effect determination means 5002, and includes a high expectation effect effect means 5004A and a high expectation effect effect execution means 5004B.

  Based on the result of the lottery performed by the lottery means 4002 or the result of the lottery information (special random number) prefetched in the holding means 4007, the high expectation degree effecting means 5004A produces a high expectation degree effect, that is, an expectation for occurrence of a big hit. It is a functional block that executes production control that increases the number of times. The high expectation effect includes a so-called reach effect and a surprise effect that suggests that the game state shifts to an abrupt state by a symbol variation process. The high expectation degree effect means 5004A can execute the effect control of the stunning effect in the same time as the time required for the symbol variation process when the result of the lottery by the lottery means 4002 is not normal. The loss of normal means a disengagement that does not involve reach production or pseudo-continuous production. FIG. 223 exemplifies symbol stop timings in the case of a normal shift and a shift with reach (reach shift). In both cases, the symbols stop in the order of left symbol, right symbol, middle symbol, but A: In the case of normal deviation, after the left symbol (first symbol) stops, the right symbol (second symbol) While the symbol) and the middle symbol (third symbol) stop at the same time interval t1, in the case of B: reach lag, the time t2 longer than t1 after the right symbol (second symbol) stops After that, the middle symbol (third symbol) stops. The symbol change time, that is, the required time from the start of symbol change to the stop of all the symbols on the left, right, and center is usually shorter than the reach loss (T <TR). Of course, the symbol variation time is usually shorter in the case of deviation than the pseudo-continuous production in which a plurality of symbol variations are made per start winning prize. FIG. 224 exemplifies variations (I, II, III) of the symbol stop timing in the stunning effect. In the accompaniment effect (I), the accompaniment effect is performed by stopping the symbols in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol at the same stop timing as the symbol stop timing in the case of the normal deviation. In the astonishing effect (II), the right and left symbols are stopped at the same time immediately after the start of the symbol variation, and then the middle symbol is stopped after a time t3 (t3> t1). In the astonishing effect (III), after the start of the symbol variation, the dramatic effect is achieved by simultaneously stopping all the symbols on the left, right, and center at the timing just before the time required for the symbol variation processing that is out of sync. It is desirable that at least one of the stop symbols in the accompaniment effect is a symbol that can clearly notify the player that the accusation state has been reached (see FIG. 225 (e2)).

  The high expectation effect forcible execution means 5004B is determined by the game end determination means 4590 that the player's situation is about to end the game, and the hold presence / absence determination means 5003 provides the lottery information (special) When it is determined that the (random number) is held, it is a functional block that executes a high expectation degree effect in the special symbol variation process based on any lottery information that is held. The high expectation effect executed by the high expectation effect compulsory execution means 5004B is a pseudo effect having the same content as the high expectation effect executed by the high expectation effect means 5004A. In the example of this embodiment, a case will be described in which a pseudo-surprise effect that is apparently the same content as a surprise effect is executed as a pseudo-effect. The pseudo-accuracy effect is realized by using the time of symbol variation processing when the result of the lottery performed by the lottery means 4002 is normally off.

[Operation]
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 1 having the configuration of FIG. 216 will be described according to the flowchart of FIG.

FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process for realizing the effect according to the situation of the player.
The effect control unit 5000 executes various effects based on the control command received by the command receiving unit 4560. At this time, if the received control command is a control command for controlling the execution of the player participatory effect according to the movement of the player's hand (Yes in S3001), the execution of the player participatory effect is started. .

  In the player participation type effect, the effect control means 5000 executes the effect by the motion promotion control means 5001 and moves the hand in a predetermined direction (clockwise or counterclockwise) in front of the liquid crystal display device 1900. The effect image prompting the user is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 (S3002). Then, operation detection processing (S3003) and operation determination processing (S3004) are started.

  In the motion detection process (S3003), a process of detecting a player's motion based on the output signals of the sensors 2531, 2532, 2533 and 2534 and outputting a motion detection signal M1, M2, P or Q according to the result. Is executed.

  In the operation determination process (S3004), a process of determining whether the operation detected by the operation detection process (S3003) is the first operation or the second operation is executed.

FIG. 218 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation determination process (S3004).
In the operation determination processing (S3004), first, determination processing by the first operation determination unit 4591, that is, determination information corresponding to the operation detection signals M1, M2, P, or Q from the operation detection unit 4590 is used as the first operation determination. Processing to read from the table 2593A is performed (S3004A). The first operation determining unit 4591 outputs the determination information D1 or D2 as a determination result (S3004C) when the corresponding determination information, that is, D1 or D2 is successfully read (Yes in S3004B). If the corresponding discriminating information D1 or D2 is not in the first motion discriminating table 2593A (No in S3004B), the discriminating process by the second motion discriminating unit 4592, that is, the motion detection signals M1, M2, P from the motion detecting unit 4590 Or the process which reads the discrimination | determination information corresponding to Q from the 2nd operation | movement discrimination | determination table 2593B is performed (S3004D). If the second operation determination unit 4592 succeeds in reading the corresponding determination information D3 (Yes in S3004E), the second operation determination unit 4592 outputs the determination information D3 as a determination result (S3004F).

  The effect control unit 5000 determines an effect to be executed as a player participation type effect (S3005) based on the determination result (discrimination information) by the operation determination process (S3004), and executes the determined effect (S3006). .

FIG. 219 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect determination process (S3005).
In the effect determination process (S3005), first, it is determined whether the determination result (discrimination information) by the operation determination process (S3004) is D1 or D2 (S3005A). If the discrimination result (discrimination information) is D1 or D2 (Yes in S3005A), the pachinko machine 1 is determined to be an effect that performs an effect corresponding to the action urged by the player (S3005B).

  On the other hand, if the discrimination result (discrimination information) is neither D1 nor D2 (No in S3005A), it is determined whether or not the discrimination result (discrimination information) is D3 (S3005C). When the determination result (discrimination information) is D3, that is, the determined operation is an operation (second operation) associated with a series of operations in which the player presses the return button 362 and removes the card from the CR unit device. If it is determined that the lottery information (special random number) is held in the holding unit 4007 based on the command received by the command receiving unit 4560 (S3005D). If it is determined that the lottery information (special random number) is on hold (Yes in S3005D), it is determined that the pseudo-accuracy effect is executed (S3005E).

  The pseudo-accuracy effect is executed during the special symbol variation process based on any lottery information held in the holding unit 4007 (S3006). FIG. 225 is an explanatory diagram showing an example.

  In FIG. 225, (a1), (b1), (c1), (d1), and (e1) exemplify the display state of the hold image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. (A2), (b2), (c2), (d2) and (e2) are liquid crystal display devices at times corresponding to (a1), (b1), (c1), (d1) and (e1), respectively. The mode of the stop symbol displayed in 1900 (stop symbol) is illustrated. (A1) illustrates the display state of the hold image when the game state of the pachinko machine 1 returns to the normal state (low probability non-short state). In this example, four hold images H (1) to H (4) are displayed, whereby a total of four lottery information corresponding to each hold image H (1) to H (4) is held in the holding means 4007. It is expressed that. These four lottery information are all lottery information in which the lottery result by the lottery means 4002 is usually out of order. The numbers in parentheses H (1) to H (4) indicate the order in which the lottery information is suspended. Since the lottery information held in the holding means 4007 is digested in the order of holding earlier, the lottery information corresponding to the hold image H (1) to the lottery information corresponding to the hold image H (4) are sequentially held. Digestion, that is, lottery is executed. The reserved image H corresponding to the lottery information that has been reserved is lost, and the reserved image H corresponding to the lottery information that has not been reserved, that is, the lottery has not been executed, is sequentially shifted to the side of the reserved symbol H that has disappeared (left side in this example). ((B1), (c1), (d1)). (E1) is a state after the lottery of the last held information is executed, and all the held images are lost unless new lottery information is put on hold. The reserved images H (1) to H (4) are all images that initially show a normal expectation (in this example, a round image “◯”), but the lottery information that is held third is randomly selected. As shown in (d1), an image indicating that the reserved image H (4) corresponding to the fourth (last) lottery information is highly expected (in this example, Star image "☆"). Then, during the special symbol variation process based on the fourth (last) lottery information, a pseudo-accurate effect that is the same appearance as the real accurate effect is executed. (E2) is a stop symbol by pseudo-accuracy production. This stop symbol is a stop symbol that is also displayed in the case of a true surprise effect.

[Function and effect]
The pachinko machine 1 configured as described above has no relation to the presence or absence of an operation signal caused by the operation of the pachinko machine 1 by detecting the player's movement using the non-contact sensors 2531, 2532, 2533 and 2534. Then, the player's action is externally detected, and based on the detection result, it is determined whether or not the player's situation is a situation where the game is about to be ended. And the production according to the judgment result (discrimination information) is executed. When the player is about to finish the game, the player can be encouraged to continue the game by performing an effect that increases the expectation for the big hit.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment prompts the player to perform a predetermined operation (first operation) to the player, and the player responds to the predetermined operation (first operation). In addition to the player-participation-type production similar to the conventional one that executes the production according to the result, the player's operation accompanying the player's game end operation (second operation) A player-participation-type production according to the game can be executed.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has a stunning effect (true effect) that is suggested when the gaming state shifts to the abrupt state, and the gaming state does not actually shift to the abrupt state. Regardless, it is possible to execute a pseudo-accurate effect (a fake effect) that makes it appear as if the gaming state has shifted to the acquisitive state. Both the time required for the accompaniment effect and the time required for the pseudo-accuracy effect are the same as the time required for the symbol variation process when the result of the lottery is not normal. The time required for the symbol variation process when the lottery result is normally out of order is shorter than the time required for the symbol variation process when the lottery result is lost or a big hit due to other variations. By making the sudden performance effect in a short time, it is possible to give the player a feeling (sudden sensation) that “the player suddenly entered the high probability state from the low probability state”. And, by making a pseudo-accurate effect with the same content as the accuracies effect in the same duration as the accuracies effect, suddenly it became a high probability state even though the gaming state actually remained in a low probability state Thus, the player can be made to recognize. By effectively using such a pseudo-accuracy effect, it is possible to expect an effect of prompting the player who has reduced willingness to continue the game to continue the game. For example, a player who tries to decide whether or not to continue the game after seeing the result of the symbol variation based on the pending lottery information will suddenly appear to be a stunning effect, thinking that it will usually be off anyway. By showing the pseudo-accurate performance of the same content, it is possible to encourage the player to continue the game with a sense of expectation that a big hit may come if the game is continued a little more. In particular, as in the above example, the reserved image H (4) corresponding to the last lottery information that is held is changed from a certain point of time to an image with high expectation, and pseudo-accuracy is performed in the symbol variation process based on the lottery information. By executing the production, the player's expectation can be increased before the execution of the pseudo-accuracy production, and the player's expectation can be further enhanced by executing the pseudo-accuracy production. It is possible to effectively urge the player who is going to end the game after confirming the information lottery result to continue the game.

  In addition, the player who has continued the game in anticipation of the pseudo-accuracy effect will result in a decrease in the number of acquired game balls, but when the pseudo-accuracy effect is executed, the player is already in a number that can be satisfied. Since a game ball has been acquired and only a part of the acquired game ball is consumed, the loss due to the decrease in the acquired game ball is negligible. On the other hand, for the game hall, a player who is trying to finish a game with a satisfactory number of game balls will continue to play the game and consume the game balls he has gained. There is a merit that it leads to.

[Other examples]
The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements and modifications can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention, as described below. Design changes are possible.

  In the above example, the card return instruction operation is detected, but instead of this, a ball removal operation may be detected. That is, when the ball removal operation and the card removal operation are sequentially detected, it is possible to determine that the player's situation is a situation where the game is about to be ended.

  In the above example, when the game end determination means 4590 determines that the player's situation is a situation where the player is about to end the game, the pseudo-accuracy effect is executed. When it is determined that the game is about to end the game and the game state of the pachinko machine 1 is in the normal state (low probability non-short state), it is desirable to execute the pseudo-accuracy effect. Even when it is externally determined that the player's situation is a situation where the player is about to finish the game, the game state of the pachinko machine 1 is more advantageous to the player than the normal state (high probability state, short time state, etc.) This is because the possibility that the player will end the game is low.

  Further, in the above example, the case where the pseudo-accuracy effect is executed as the high expectation effect when it is determined that the player's situation is a situation where the game is about to be ended has been described. Other pseudo effects may be executed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, a lottery result prefetching unit that discriminates the lottery result based on the lottery information held in the holding unit 4007 is further provided. It is desirable that the degree effect forced execution means 5004b is configured to execute the pseudo-accuracy effect. If the result of the lottery based on the lottery information that is put on hold is not normal, for example, if it is a big win, or if it is an offense with a relatively high expectation such as a reach production or a pseudo-continuous production, a pseudo production will be given. It is because it is not necessary to execute.

  Moreover, although the thing applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a game machine of this invention was shown in the said embodiment, this invention is not limited to this, Pachislot machine or a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are united. It can also be effectively applied to gaming machines. In the case of a pachislot machine, when a card return instruction operation or medal payout operation and a card removal operation are sequentially detected, it is possible to determine that the player's situation is a situation in which the game is about to be ended.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 1900 Liquid crystal display device 2101 1st starting opening 2102 2nd starting opening 2530 Object detection means 2531 Upper object detection sensor 2532 Left object detection sensor 2533 Right object detection sensor 2534 Lower object detection sensor 2593 Storage means 2593A 1st operation | movement determination Table 2593B Second operation determination table 4000 Main board (main control unit)
4001 Lottery information acquisition means 4002 Lottery means 4003 Game state transition means 4007 Reservation means 4010 Peripheral control board (sub-control unit)
4100a Main control MPU
4111 payout control unit 4111a payout control MPU
4140a Peripheral control MPU
4560 Command receiving means 4570 Game end judging means 5000 Production control means 5003 Holding presence / absence judging means 5004A High expectation degree producing means (probable effect means)
5004B High expectation effect forced execution means (pseudo-accuracy effect means)

Claims (1)

Lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information every time the start condition is satisfied;
Lottery means for performing lottery based on the lottery information;
A symbol variation means for executing a symbol variation process for changing a plurality of symbols each time a lottery is performed by the lottery means and displaying a combination of symbols for which the result of the lottery is stopped;
Gaming state transition means for shifting the gaming state to various gaming states according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means;
A non-contact sensor for externally detecting a player's movement;
Motion detection means for externally detecting a player's motion based on the detection signal of the non-contact sensor and outputting a motion detection signal corresponding to the detection result;
Based on the motion detection signal, a game end determination means for determining whether or not the player's situation is a situation where a game is about to be ended,
Production control means for controlling the production according to the judgment result of the game end judgment means,
The gaming state transition means includes
It is possible to suddenly shift the gaming state from a low probability state to a probable change state via a big hit gaming state where little play is obtained,
The production control means includes
When the game state suddenly changes to the probable change state, the effect control of the stunning effect is executed in the same time as the time required for the symbol variation process in the case where the lottery result by the lottery means is usually off. With a directing means,
When it is determined by the game end determination means that the player's situation is a situation where the game is about to be ended, the time of the symbol variation processing when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is normally off is used. And a pseudo-accuracy production means for executing a pseudo-production having the same contents as the accompaniment production.

Images